Rechner s10 268 553 01 Heidenhain Manual

Technical Manual
TNC 407
TNC 415
TNC 425
Valid for the NC software types

259 96 (TNC 415 A)
259 97 (TNC 415 E)
243 02 (TNC 407)
up to version 09
and
259 93 (TNC 415 B/TNC 425)
259 94 (TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E)
243 03 (TNC 407)
up to version 12
and
280 54 (TNC 415 B/TNC 425)
280 56 (TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E)
280 58 (TNC 407)
up to version 06
January 98 208 732 21 6.5 1/98 S Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice
(208 732 E2)
Preface
This Technical Manual is intended for manufacturers and distributors of machine tools.
It contains all the necessary information for the assembly, electrical installation, start-up and
PLC-programming for the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls.
When hardware or software is improved in these HEIDENHAIN contouring controls you will
receive a free delivery of updated information. Please arrange and insert this updated information
in your manual without delay. This will ensure that your manual always remains at the current
revision level.
You can use extracts from this manual for your machine documentation. An enlargement of the
manual format (17 cm x 24 cm) by a factor of 1.225 will produce pages in DIN A4 format.
No documentation can be perfect. Like all living things it must grow and change. Among other
things, it lives from your impulses and suggestions for improvement. Please help us by letting
us know your ideas.
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

Department PE
PO Box 1260
D-83292 Traunreut
Germany
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425

Contents Technical Manual TNC 407, TNC 415 B, TNC 425
Update Information 1
Introduction 2
Mounting and Electrical Installation
3
Machine Integration
4
Machine Parameters
5
Markers and Words
6
PLC Programming
7
Data interfaces
8
Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM) Cycles 9
Positioning Module 10
TNC 425 11
Appendix 12
Update Information No. 20
New NC software
In May 1996 the following new NC software versions were released:
TNC 407 280 58x 06

280 590 06
TNC 415B / TNC 425 280 54x 06
280 550 06
TNC 415F / TNC 425E 280 56x 06
280 570 06
Hardware
New Design for TNC 407
A new hardware design was introduced with the new TNC 410, TNC 426 and TNC 430 controls.
This changed design can also be used for the TNC 407. The visual display unit and keyboard unit
with the new design are gray in color and require a larger front-panel cutout.
The new BC 120 visual display unit is connected to the TNC 407 with a new cable
(Id. Nr. 312 878 ..) and adapter (Id. Nr. 313 434 02). The matching TE 400 B keyboard unit has the
Id Nr. 313 038 02. A matching gray MB 420 machine operating panel (Id. Nr. 293 757 12) is also
available.
Documentation
No replacement pages will be issued for this Technical Manual. You will find the updated
documentation on the CD-ROM entitled TNCguide OEM (Id. Nr. 208 935 92), available from
January 1998. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you have not yet received this CD-ROM.
01/98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 Update Information No. 20 1-1

Introduction Contents 2
1 Hardware concept 2-2
2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 2-3
3 Software 2-7
3.1 NC-Software 2-7
3.1.1 NC-Software number 2-7
3.1.2 Software types 2-7
3.1.3 Software option 2-8
3.1.4 Software/Hardware 2-9
3.2 PLC-Software 2-11
3.3 EPROM sockets 2-11
3.3.1 TNC 415 A/TNC 415 E 2-11
3.3.2 TNC 415 B/TNC 415 F and TNC 425 A/TNC 425 E 2-12
3.3.3 TNC 407 2-13
3.4 Software replacement 2-13
3.5 Releases 2-14
3.5.1 Software types 243 05, 259 91 and 243 07 2-14
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2-1

1 Hardware concept
The HEIDENHAIN-contouring controls TNC 407 and TNC 415 are designed for use with drilling and
milling machines.
The HEIDENHAIN-TNCs consist of several units. The principal subassembly is the logic unit. The logic
unit is joined to the other units and the TNC accessories by connecting cables.
Noml. value outputs

Encoders PLC I/0 unit
Visual display unit

TNC keyboard unit Machine operating panel
Common

Touch probe NC PLC PLC inputs
data area
Electronic handwheel

PLC outputs
Data interfaces
The logic unit contains the electronics for both the NC and the PLC sections of the control.
The common data area contains the machine parameters and the PLC markers and words. The
machine parameters define the hardware configuration of the machine (ranges of travel, acceleration,
number of axes etc.). The PLC markers and words are used for the exchange of information between
the NC and the PLC.
2-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Hardware concept 01.98

2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425
TNC 407 TNC 415B/TNC 425

Axes 3, 4 or 5 plus spindle S1)
(NC axes and PLC axes can be defined as desired)
Program input In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language and to DIN/ISO
Memory for 6000 blocks approx. 12 000 blocks approx.

part program
Positions Nominal positions in Cartesian or polar coordinates,

dimensions absolute and incremental
Input and display to 1 m to 0.1 m

resolution
Interpolation
Linear interpolation 3 of 5 axes 5 of 5 axes
Circular interpolation 2 of 5 axes 3 of 5 axes 1)
Helix Yes
Rigid Tapping Yes1)
Block processing time2) 25 ms 4 ms
Look Ahead Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions (e.g. 3D surfaces)

Collision viewing with the SL cycle for "open" contours
Advance calculation of geometry for feed-rate adjustment
Free contour In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language with graphic support

programming FK
Coordinate Shift and/or rotate coordinate system, mirroring, reduce and enlarge -
transformations also axis-specific
Tilting the Yes1)

working plane
Subprogram Program section repeats, subprograms, program calls

functions
Fixed cycles Pecking, tapping, slot cutting, rectangular and circular pockets,
SL cycles (milling cycles whose contour descriptions are stored in
subprograms); the machine tool manufacturer can also integrate
customized macros1)
1) These functions must be implemented by the OEM.

2) 3D-straight line without radius compensation
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 2-3
TNC 407 TNC 415 B/TNC 425
Q-Parameters Mathematical functions (=, +, -, x, , sin , cos , angle from sin
and cos , a, a2 + b2, tan , arcsin, arctan, arccos, an, en, ln,
log, absolute value of a number, the constant , negation, truncate places
before or after the decimal point)
logical comparisons (=,, >, <),
Parenthetical calculations
Program test By graphic simulation of the part program

Parallel operation Yes, no graphics Yes, with graphics
File management up to 100 files: programs in HEIDENHAIN and DIN/ISO format, also tool 1),
PLC datum shift, pallet tables1) and text files
Tool compensation Tool length, tool radius in machining plane

Three-dimensional tool
compensation with surface
normal vectors
Central tool file Various tool tables for 254 tools max. each, with flexible pocket coding,
tool life monitoring and sister tool organization1)
Data interfaces V.24/RS 232 C and V.11/RS 422

"Blockwise transfer": programs that exceed the control capacity can be
downloaded block by block and simultaneously executed.
Extended data interface with LSV/2 protocol for external TNC operation
across the data interface
Baud rate 38 400; 19 200; 9 600; 4 800; 2 400; 1 200; 600; 300; 150; 110
Keyboard TE 400 with integral QWERTY keyboard
Screen BC 110 14" colour monitor 640 x 490 pixels
Logic unit LE 407 LE 415 B / LE 425
Axis control Feed pre-control or operation with servo lag

TNC 425: additional digital speed control
Cycle times
Contour interpolation 6 ms 3 ms
Fine interpolation TNC 415 B: 0.6 ms (contour)
TNC 425: 0.6 ms (speed)
Position control 0.1 m

resolution
1) These functions must be implemented by the OEM.
2-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 01.98
Integral PLC
PLC inputs 56 + 1 "Control is ready" input; (Option: + 64*) per PL)

PLC outputs 31 + 1 "Control is ready" output "; (Option: + 31*) per PL)
.Two PL 410 max. can be connected
Option: analog inputs

10 V 4 per PL 4101) or PA
Option: Inputs for
thermistors
4 per PL 4101) or PA
PLC program memory Approx. 8 000 logic commands

PLC cycle time 24 ms 20 ms
Error compensation linear axis error compensation

non-linear axis error compensation
compensation of reversal spikes in circular movements
compensation of thermal expansion
backlash compensation
stiction compensation
offset compensation
Position encoders HEIDENHAIN incremental linear and angle encoders (preferably with
distance-coded reference marks)
also HEIDENHAIN incremental rotary encoders
Reference mark Following a power interruption, automatic reference value input if

evaluation reference marks are traversed
Max. traverse 100 000 mm
Max. traversing 300 m/min

speed
Feed-rate and 0 to 150% with two potentiometers at the control panel

spindle override
Accessories
Electronic handwheel 1 x HR 330 Portable handwheel
or 1 x HR 130 Integral handwheel
or up to 3 x HR 150 Integral handwheel with adapter HRA 110
Diskette unit FE 401
Touch trigger 3D probe TS 120/TS 511
Measuring 3D probe TM 110
Touch probe for tool TT 110
inspection
*) PL 410 B: Active analog inputs reduce the number of PLC inputs by 8 and the number of PLC outputs by 2.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 2-5
Digitizing With TS 120 touch trigger 3D probe
with optional software With TM 110 measuring touch probe
module in TNC
Export versions TNC 415 F / TNC 425 E:

Linear interpolation 4 of 5 axes,
input/display resolution 1 m
Power consumption
NC 24 W approx. 36 W approx.
PLC 6 W approx.
PL 410 B 25 W approx.
BC 110 B 70 W max.
Ambient
temperature
Operation 0 to 45C
Storage 30 to 70C
Weights
Logic unit 8.0 kg 10.0 kg
TE 400 2.4 kg
BC 110 B 11.0 kg
PL 410 B 3.1 kg
2-6 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 01.98
3 Software
The logic unit contains separate software for the NC section and the PLC section. The software is
identified by an 8-figure number.
After switching on the control, the NC, PLC and Software-Options software numbers are displayed on
the screen. The software number can also be directly requested with the aid of the MOD function.
3.1 NC-Software
3.1.1 NC-Software number

The 8-figure NC software number identifies the type of control, the dialog language (language of the
country) and the version of the software.
259 96 0 01
Software type
National language
0 = German
1 = Czech
2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish
6 = Swedish
7 = Danish
8 = Finnish
9 = Dutch
Software version
In addition to the above-listed languages, the TNC can always use English, which may be selected via
the machine parameter MP7230.
3.1.2 Software types

Due to restrictions on the export of the TNC 415 B, HEIDENHAIN can also deliver a special export
version. This export version is differentiated from the standard control through the installed software
type. With this software type, the control offers different features in respect of linear interpolation and
the entry/display resolutions.
Linear interpolation Entry/Display

Resolution
TNC 415 B (Standard) 5 of 5 axes up to 0.1 m
TNC 415 F (Export) 4 of 5 axes up to 1 m
The TNC 407 does not fall under the export restrictions, therefore no export version is necessary.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 2-7

New functions will be introduced only in the following software types:
TNC 415B / TNC 425: 280 54

TNC 415F / TNC 425 E: 280 56
TNC 407: 280 58
These software types are therefore supplied as standard.
3.1.3 Software option

HEIDENHAIN offers the "Digitising with TS 120" function as a software option (see chapter "Machine
integration"). An additional software protection module is installed in controls supplied with this
software option. The Id.-Nr. of the logic unit indicates another version. If the software module is
installed, the option is indicated on the screen under the NC and PLC software numbers.
Logic units that have already been delivered can be retrofitted with the software protection module.
Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you wish to buy this option for your existing control. The proper
component model must be ordered for a specific hardware model.
Digitizing with TS 120:
Id.-Nr. of the installation kit Id.-Nr. of software module NC software

TNC 407 265 313 01 243 02, 243 03, 280 58
TNC 415A 265 314 01 246 051 01 259 96
TNC 415B 286 405 01 280 54
TNC 425
Digitizing with TM 110:
Id.-Nr. of the installation kit Id.-Nr. of software module NC software

TNC 415B 286 405 02 246 051 03 280 54
TNC 425
2-8 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 01.98

3.1.4 Software/Hardware
Various hardware versions of the logic units LE 407 and LE 415 have until now been delivered (please
refer to the chapter 3 Mounting and electrical installation section 1). The new software types are not
compatible with all hardware versions. The valid combinations are shown in the following tables.
TNC 415A / TNC 415E:
Software Type
Id.-Nr. LE 243 05 259 91 259 96 259 97
251 481 78 415 E - - - X
251 481 79 415 A - - X -
251 481 88 415 E - X - X
251 481 89 415 A X - X -
251 481 98 415 E - X - -
251 481 99 415 A X - - -
258 993 78 415 E - - - X
258 993 79 415 A - - X -
258 993 88 415 E - X - X
258 993 89 415 A X - X -
258 993 98 415 E - X - X
258 993 99 415 A X - X -
264 429 78 415 E - - - X
264 429 79 415 A - - X -
264 429 98 415 E - X - X
264 429 99 415 A X - X -
TNC 415B / TNC 415F: TNC 425 / TNC 425E:
Id.-Nr.: 267 223 xy Id.-Nr.: 267 214 xy
x= Identifier for hardware change

y= Version
3 = Export version with software module "Digitizing with TS 120"
4 = Standard version with software module "Digitizing with TS 120"
7 = Standard version with software module "Digitizing with TS 120"
8 = Export version without option
9 = Standard version without option

TNC 407:
Software Type
Id.-Nr. of the LE 243 07 243 02 243 03 280 58
256 113 99 X - - -
255 444 79 - X X X
255 444 89 X X X X
255 444 99 X X X X
261 092 79 - X X X
261 092 89 X X X X
261 092 99 X X X X
264 430 24 X X X X
264 430 29 X X X X
264 430 79 - X X X
264 430 99 X X X X

3.2 PLC-Software
The PLC software is produced by the manufacturer of the machine. Either HEIDENHAIN or the
manufacturer of the machine can store this software in EPROMs. HEIDENHAIN assigns PLC software
numbers to the machine manufacturers on request. HEIDENHAIN can archive the specific PLC
programs in a data bank, so that the installation of the correct PLC program is assured if a control has
to be exchanged.
The PLC EPROM must be written in the format of the corresponding software type!
Beginning with software types 280 54, 280 56 and 280 58, either a 1 MB or a 2 MB
EPROM can be used for the PLC.
3.3 EPROM sockets
3.3.1 TNC 415 A/TNC 415 E
Sockets on processor board: IC 8

PLC 1 MB
IC 7
Language 1 MB
IC 3 IC 4
NC 1 MB NC 1 MB
IC 1 IC 2 IC 5 IC 6
NC 1 MB NC 1 MB NC 1 MB NC 1 MB
IC S
SW-Module
Sockets on CLP board:
IC 9
Boot

3.3.2 TNC 415 B/TNC 415 F and TNC 425 A/TNC 425 E
Sockets on processor board: IC 8

PLC 1 MB
IC 7
Language 1 MB
IC 3 IC 4
NC 1 MB NC 1 MB
IC 1 IC 2 IC 5 IC 6
Set jumper to 2M
or
Sockets on processor board:

IC 8
PLC 1 MB
IC 7
Language 1 MB
IC 1 IC 2 IC 5 IC 6
Set jumper to 4M
Sockets on CLP board:
IC 9
Boot
IC S
SW-Modul

3.3.3 TNC 407
Sockets on processor board:
IC 5
PLC 1MB
IC 4
IC 3 Language 1MB
Language 1MB
IC 2
IC 1 NC 2MB
2MB
IC S
SW-Module
3.4 Software replacement

Before replacing the software on a TNC the data of all file types, the machine parameter list, the non-
linear axis error compensation table and the PLC program (if in the RAM) must be backed up.
You can use the TNC BACKUP routine to do this. In the "Machine Parameter Editor" mode (code
number 95 148) press the MOD key to display the menu for configuring the data interface. The
"BACKUP DATA" and "RESTORE DATA" soft keys will be offered.
Use "BACKUP DATA" to transmit all operating parameters and the data of all file types across the data
interface and store them in the $BACKUP.ANC file. When software replacement is complete, use
"RESTORE DATA" to download the data to the TNC again.

3.5 Releases
New NC software versions are released by HEIDENHAIN at irregular intervals.
3.5.1 Software types 243 05, 259 91 and 243 07

Standard version TNC 415 A Export version TNC 415 E
NC-Software-Version Release NC-Software-Version Release
243 05x 02 2/90 259 91x 08 11/90
243 05x 03 4/90 259 91x 10 2/91
243 05x 04 5/90 259 91x 11 4/91
243 05x 05 8/90 259 91x 12 5/91
243 05x 08 9/90 259 91x 13 6/91
243 05x 10 2/91 259 91x 14 11/91
243 05x 11 4/91 259 91x 15 3/92
243 05x 12 5/91 259 91x 16 7/93
243 05x 13 6/91
243 05x 14 11/91
243 05x 15 3/92
243 05x 16 7/93
TNC 407
243 07x 03 7/90
243 07x 05 10/90
243 07x 07 2/91
243 07x 08 4/91 New releases of these software types will be
243 07x 09 5/91 made only to correct errors.
243 07x 10 6/91
243 07x 11 11/91
243 07x 12 3/92
243 07x 13 7/93

TNC 415 A: 259 96x 01
TNC 415 E: 259 97x 01
TNC 407: 243 02x 01 Release 8/91
New functions:
Digitising with TS 120

Rigid tapping
Input resolution and display step 0.0001 mm for TNC 415 A
Re-approaching the contour
Compensation of reversal spikes in circular movements
New format for PLC-EPROM
Machine parameter editor
FN15: PRINT
New machine parameter for setting screen colours

Thermal expansion compensation
Machine datum
"Free rotation"
Changing the gear range through the PLC
RPM upper limit per gear range
Change in the organisation of PLC error messages
Marker for special tool
Interruption of PLC positioning
Fast PLC input
Arc end-point tolerance
Locking of file types
D596 rapid traverse from PLC
D276 code number
Axis-specific monitoring functions
Compensation of tool length in the position display
PLC: module 7031, module 9032, module 9083, module 9093, module 9094
TNC 415 A: 259 96x 02

TNC 415 E: 259 97x 02
TNC 407: 243 02x 02 Release 1/92
New functions:
If MP7490 = 0, the datum is effective for all traverse ranges

Non-linear characteristic curve for override potentiometer
New process for traversing reference marks (MP1350.x = 3)
TNC 415 A: 259 96x 03

TNC 415 E: 259 97x 03
TNC 407: 243 02x 03 Release 3/92
New functions:
ROT display in the status window

PLC error messages if more than one of the markers M2485 to M2487 is set
MP4070 has been added
Handwheel symbol on screen for selected axis
MP7640 (machine with handwheel) has new input values
MP340 has been added (only for TNC 407)
Module 9041 has been introduced (only for TNC 415 A)
Dialog texts in Czech

TNC 415 A: 259 96x 04
TNC 415 E: 259 97x 04
TNC 407: 243 02x 04 Release 5/92
New functions:
Multipoint axis error compensation: the maximum distance between compensation points was
increased to 223 .
The maximum input range for position values was increased to 99 999.9999 mm to
+99 999,9999 mm.
The override adjustment in 2 % steps was dropped.
The minimum input value for MP6130 was changed to 1 mm and for MP6140 to 0.001 mm.
MP440 was dropped.
Mid-program startup (block scan) now works for ISO programs during blockwise transfer with
simultaneous execution.
New Module 9035
TNC 415 A: 259 96x 05

TNC 415 E: 259 97x 05
TNC 407: 243 02x 05 Release 5/92
New functions:
The input value 4 was added to MP7480.

The distance D to an auxiliary point with the coordinates PDX and PDY is now entered without
algebraic sign.
TNC 415 A: 259 96x 06

TNC 415 E: 259 97x 06
TNC 407: 243 02x 06 Release 9/92
New functions:
Electronic Handwheel mode

A new marker 2826 has been introduced. Setting this marker disables the evaluation of the
counting pulses received by the handwheel. The handwheel cannot be used to position when the
marker is set.
Transfer values to PLC

Numerical values can be entered in the new machine parameters MP4230.00 to MP4230.31 and
MP4231.0 to MP4231.31 which the PLC can read with module 9032.
MP4230.0 to MP4230.31 Transfer value to PLC with module 9032

MP4231.0 to MP4231.31
Entry: 99999.9999 to +99999.9999
DIN/ISO Programming
The maximum permitted length of an NC block in DIN/ISO has been increased from 130 to 150
characters.

TNC 415 A: 259 96x 07
TNC 415 E: 259 97x 07
TNC 407: 243 02x 07 Release 11/92
New functions:
Because it is run from standstill, the spindle orientation at the beginning of the "Rigid Tapping"
cycle is always executed in the direction of rotation that reaches the target by the shortest route.
Previously the direction of rotation with each spindle orientation was selected by marker M2656.
TNC 415 A: 259 96X 08

TNC 415 E: 259 97X 08
TNC 407: 243 02X 08 Release 1/93
New functions:
If the PLC simultaneously issues two commands from memory areas PLC positioning (M2704 to
M2708), confirm Q parameter (M2713) and PLC datum shift (M2716), then the NC flashes the
message "Error in PLC program 1R" as these commands use the same memory areas for data
transfer.
PLC positioning in more than one axis counts as a single command. If marker M2719 (switch-over
from word processing to TNC 355 mode) has the value 0, the same checks will be run with the
corresponding TNC 355 strobes.
TNC 415 A: 259 96X 09

TNC 415 E: 259 97X 09
TNC 407: 243 02X 09 Release 10/93
New functions:
Machine parameters MP951.x and MP7450 were introduced for calculating PLC positionings
during block scan.

TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 04
TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 04 Release 11/92
New functions:
New functions for programmed contour approach and withdraw

"Working Plane" cycle for machines with swivel head
"Contour Train" cycle
"Scaling factor axis-specific" cycle
Three-dimensional tool compensation in DNC mode
Extended tool management
Extended additional status displays for file information, positions, tool data and coordinate
transformation
Stiction compensation
PLC axes
Extended PLC command set
Length of filenames increased to 16 characters
Automatic correction of centre offset for probe system
Oscilloscope function
New organization for PLC files
Additional machine parameters for data transfer to PLC
BACKUP and RESTORE functions
Q parameter for tool length (Q114)
Axis positions after programmed probe cycle in Q parameters Q115 to Q119
New input format for machine parameters
TNC 415 B/TNC 415: 259 93x 05

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 05 Release 11/93
New functions:
Status information can now be read with module 9035. See "TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425
Description of the Differences from TNC 415".
The minimum input range of machine parameters MP6120, MP6350, MP6360 has been changed
from 80 mm/min to 10 mm/min.
MP7300 has been extended as follows:
MP7300 Delete status display, Q parameter and tool data

Entry: 0 to 7
0 = delete status display, Q parameter and tool data when selecting a program
1 = delete status display, Q parameter and tool data with M02, M30, END PGM
and selecting a program
2 = delete status display and tool data when selecting a program
3 = delete status display and tool data with M02, M30, END PGM and selecting a
program
4 = delete status display and Q parameter when selecting a program
5 = delete status display and Q parameter with M02, M30, END PGM and
selecting a program
6 = delete status display when selecting a program
7 = delete status display with M02, M30, END PGM and selecting a program

TNC 407: 243 03x 05 Release 11/92
New functions:
All functions as for TNC 415 B except "Working Plane" cycle and three-dimensional tool compensation.
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 06

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 06
TNC 407: 243 03x 06 Release 12/92
New functions:
MP7411 is used to select whether to use the tool data (length, radius, axis) from the last TOOL
CALL block or from the calibrated data of the probe system in a touch probe block.
MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block

Entry: 0 or 1
0 =In the touch probe block the current tool data are overwritten with the
calibrated data of the probe system.
1 =Current tool data are retained even with a touch probe block.
The displayable area for FK graphics has been restricted to -30,000 mm to + 30,000 mm. The
maximum edge length is 30,000 mm.
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93X 07

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94X 07
TNC 407 243 03X 07 Release 3/93
New functions:
PLC module 9033 has been introduced. This module allows the user to select a particular machine
parameter file in a SUBMIT job and then execute a Reset so the control system boots up with this
MP file.
If the PLC simultaneously issues two commands from memory areas PLC positioning (M2704 to
M2708), confirm Q parameter (M2713) and PLC datum shift (M2716), then the NC flashes the
message "Error in PLC program 1R" as these commands use the same memory areas for data
transfer.
PLC positioning in more than one axis counts as a single command. If marker M2719 (switch-over
from word processing to TNC 355 mode) has the value 0, the same checks will be run with the
corresponding TNC 355 strobes.
The offset for a variable-speed spindle is now adjusted with a new algorithm. A single offset
adjustment is made two seconds after the nominal value has reached target position. Every
second thereafter the offset voltage is increased by 0.152 mV or decreased by 0.152 mV when
servo lag is greater or less than zero respectively, and if the voltage computed from the product of
servo lag and Kv factor is greater than 0.152 mV. This means that the offset voltage changes by 1
mV in 7 seconds approx.

TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 08
TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 08 This versions was supplied from 6/93 only when
TNC 407: 243 03x 08 expressly requested by the customer.
New functions:
LSV2 protocol
PLC axes
Help files
Synchronized axes
New compensation value table (simultaneous compensation of sag and ballscrew pitch error)
Cycle 3 "Slot Milling" modified
Cycle 27 "Cylinder Surface" new
"Working Plane": Displays are referenced to the tilted coordinate system; Touch probe functions in
the tilted coordinate system: Datum setting in the tilted system
M94 new (modulo 360)
M103 new (reduced feed rate during plunge cutting)
M105/M106 new (second set of kv factors)
M112 new (Tolerance field for "Look ahead")
M116 new (feed rate for rotary axes in mm/min)
M118 new (Handwheel overlapping)
Min. and max. memory for DNC operation
Calculation with parentheses and expanded parameter functions
MP7470 was eliminated
Graphic depiction of the workpiece blank in the working space
M114 new (automatic compensation of machine geometry during machining with tilted axes)
Module 9150 new
Input/Output of tool and pocket tables
Module 9035 was expanded
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 09

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 09 This version was supplied from 8/93 only
TNC 407: 243 03x 09 when expressly requested by the customer.
New functions:
The export versions TNC 415F and TNC 425E were improved with linear interpolation in 4 of 5
axes (previously 3 of 5 axes).
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 10

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 10
TNC 407: 243 03x 10 Release 9/93

TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 11
TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 11 This version was supplied from 4/94 only
TNC 407: 243 03x 11 when expressly requested by the customer.
New functions:
The PLC module 9036 was expanded. The handwheel assignment can now be switched through
the PLC to any desired axis; the assignment is indicated in the status window by the position of
the handwheel symbol.
After activation of Cycle 19 "Working plane" the offset is corrected only in the axis that is moved.
Previously the offset was corrected simultaneously in all axes during execution of the first block.
With M112 it is now possible to enter a limit angle A in addition to the tolerance T.
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 259 93x 12

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 259 94x 12
TNC 407: 243 03x 12 Release 5/94


TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 01

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 01
TNC 407: 280 58x 01 Release 6/94
New functions:
Digitizing with TM 110

Program structuring
Tool measuring with TT 110
Complete NC block with Actual Position Capture key
M124 new
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 02

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 02
TNC 407: 280 58x 02 Release 11/94
New functions:
A PLC column was added to the tool table. As in the pocket table, relevant PLC data can be
entered here. This column is activated with machine parameter MP7266.17.
A datum, tool, or pocket table can be searched for to certain values using Module 9092.
The PLC can activate the geometry data of the tool from W264 with the new marker M2717.
The elements Number of cutting edges, Tolerance for tool length, Tolerance for tool
radius, Cutting direction of the tool and PLC status were added to Modules 9093 and 9094.
During feed pre-control, the positioning window is not evaluated until the current velocity is less
than MP1525. In the previous software versions, the positioning window was not evaluated until
the velocity fell below 0.5 mm/min. Increasing the input value in MP1525 increases the block
processing time.
Feed pre-control can be activated for all modes of operation with machine parameter MP1391.
This becomes necessary when stiction compensation is to be active in the manual modes of
operation.
The maximum permissible positional difference between the two gantry axes is defined in
MP855. When this value is exceeded, the blinking error message GROSS POSITIONING ERROR
<AXIS> # A appears. The current positional deviation appears in the LAG display of the slave
axis.
Module 9171 makes it possible to orient the spindle at a rotational speed defined by the PLC.
Modules 9040 and 9041 make it possible to read coordinates referenced to a shifted coordinate
system.
The jog increment can now be limited with Module 9036.
With the new marker M2827 an EMERGENCY STOP (control-is-ready PLC input signal) can be
suppressed and, instead, all control loops opened and an NC stop executed.
The new marker M2830 opens all control loops and stops the NC.
In a digitized data file that has been produced with the TM 110 touch probe, the BLK FORM is
enlarged in the working plane by double the value of the deflection depth (MP6310).
The radius compensation in the working plane is now also effective in NC blocks with 5-axis
interpolation. The NC block can contain, besides the three non-parallel linear axes, also two rotary
axes.
Tool measurement with the TT 110 is possible only on machines with controlled spindle
(Spindle orientation).

TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 03
TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 03
TNC 407: 280 58x 03 This version was never released.
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 04

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 04
TNC 407: 280 58x 04 Release 3/95
New functions:
To make changes to the tool table it is no longer necessary to transfer the entire tool table. It now
suffices to transfer only those tool data that have changed. These partial data can be transferred in
the Program Run mode of operation
For a rotary table display that is set to modulo 360, the M function M 126 positions the table by
the shortest path. M 127 positions the table, as before, by the path that does not cross over the 0
position.
The function for automatic tool measurement was expanded with the TT 110. The new fields
L-OFFS, R-OFFS, LBREAK and RBREAK were introduced to the tool table (MP7266.19 to MP7266.21).
In addition, in Cycle 31 the radius is no longer entered and the fields L-OFFS, R-OFFS, LBREAK and
RBREAK were added to the modules 9092, 9093 and 9094. The new marker M2393 is set whenever
the break tolerance is exceeded.

TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 05
TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 05
TNC 407: 280 58x 05 Release 3/96
Improvements:
The Polish dialog language was added, Id. Nr. 280 590 xx, 280 550 xx and 280 570 xx.
Contour Pocket cycle (cycle 6, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, 24)
MP7420
Bit 4 = 0: After the contour pocket is machined, the TNC moves to the position that was
last approached before the cycle was called.
Bit 4 = 1: After the contour pocket is machined, the TNC moves the tool to clearance height.
Module 9036 Limiting jog increment
Transferred value:
0 to 50 mm = Limiting jog increment
1; <2 or >50 = Jog increment limit is canceled and the last increment entered is
activated.
2 = Jog increment limit is canceled and the minimum from the last
increment entered and the last limiting value is activated.
TNC 415 B/TNC 425: 280 54x 06

TNC 415 F/TNC 425 E: 280 56x 06
TNC 407: 280 58x 06 Release 5/96
Improvements:
MP1925 Limit for integral factor of the speed controller new.

Mounting and electrical installation Contents 3
1 Hardware components 3-4

1.1 Changes in the ID-number 3-6
2 Assembly hints 3-9

2.1 Electrical noise immunity 3-9
2.2 Heat generation and cooling 3-9
2.3 Humidity 3-10
2.4 Mechanical vibration 3-10
2.5 Mounting position 3-10
2.5.1 Logic unit 3-11
2.5.2 Visual display unit (VDU) 3-13
2.6 Degree of protection 3-13
3 Summary of connections 3-14

3.1 TNC 415 3-14
3.2 TNC 407 3-15
4 Power supply 3-16

4.1 Logic unit and PLC I/O-board 3-16
4.1.1 NC power supply 3-16
4.1.2 PLC power supply 3-17
4.1.3 Buffer battery 3-18
4.2 Visual display unit (VDU) 3-19
4.3 Earthing plan 3-20
5 Measuring systems 3-24

5.1 Linear measuring systems 3-24
5.2 Angular measuring systems 3-24
5.3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals (7 to 16 App) 3-25
5.3.1 Connector assignments 3-25
5.3.2 Connecting cable 3-25
5.4 Measuring system inputs for square-wave signals 3-26
5.4.1 Connector assignments 3-26
5.4.2 Connecting cable 3-26
5.5 Measuring system connections 3-28
6 Nominal value output 3-32

6.1 Connector assignment 3-32
6.2 Connecting cable 3-32
7 Reference pulse inhibit input 3-35

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3-1

8 Touch probe system input 3-36
8.1 Connector assignment X12 3-36
8.2 Connection of the touch probe system 3-37
8.2.1 TS 120 3-37
8.2.2 TS 511 3-38
8.2.3 TM 110 3-39
9 Data interface 3-40

9.1 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface 3-40
9.2 RS-422/V.11 data interface 3-41
10 Handwheel input 3-43

10.1 Pin assignment 3-43
10.2 Portable handwheel HR 330 3-43
10.3 Integral handwheel HR 130 3-44
10.4 Portable handwheels with permissive buttons 3-45
10.5 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 3-49
11 PLC inputs/outputs 3-51

11.1 Technical data 3-52
11.1.1 PLC inputs 3-52
11.1.2 PLC outputs 3-52
11.1.3 Analog inputs 3-53
11.1.4 Inputs for Pt 100 thermistors 3-53
11.2.1 PLC inputs 3-54
11.2.2 PLC outputs 3-55
11.2.3 PL connection 3-55
11.3 Connector assignment on the PL 3-56
11.3.1 Connection to LE or PL #1 3-56
11.3.2 Connection of PL #2 3-56
11.3.3 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400 3-57
11.3.4 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 410 / PL 410 B 3-59
11.3.5 Analog inputs on the PL 410 / PL 410 B 3-60
11.3.6 Inputs for thermistors on the PL 410 / PL 410 B 3-60
11.4 Connector assignment on the PA 110 3-61
11.5.1 Connection of PLC inputs/outputs on the LE 3-61
11.5.2 PL 400 connection 3-62
11.5.3 PL 410 / PL 410 B connection 3-62
11.5.4 PA 110 connection 3-62
11.5.5 Connection to analog inputs 3-63
11.5.6 Connection to inputs for thermistors 3-63
3-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 01.98

12 Machine control panel 3-65
12.1 Pin connections 3-66
13 TNC keyboard 3-68

14 VDU 3-70
14.3 Connecting the BC 120 3-71
15 Cable overview 3-72
16 Dimensions 3-74
16.1 LE 407 3-74
16.2 LE 415 3-75
16.3 TE 400 3-76
16.4 BC 110 B 3-77
16.5 PLC expansion boards 3-78
16.6 Cable adapters 3-81
16.7 Handwheels 3-84
16.7.1 HR 130 integral handwheel 3-84
16.7.2 HR 150 3-87
16.7.3 Portable handwheel HR 330 3-88
16.7.6 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 (for HR 150) 3-91
16.8 TT 110 for tool calibration 3-92
16.9 MB 410 3-93
16.10 MB 420 3-94
16.11 TE 400 B 3-95
16.12 BC 120 3-96
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3-3

1 Hardware components
The TNC 415B consists of the following hardware components:
. LE 415B (Logic unit),
. TE 400 (TNC keyboard),
. BC 110 B (Visual display unit),
. PL 410 B (max. 2 PLC-I/O boards, optional).
The export version which is offered is the TNC 415 F. In the TNC 415 F, an LE 415F is delivered in
place of the LE 415B. The export software is built into the LE 415 F.
The TNC 407 consists of the following hardware components:

. LE 407 A (Logic unit),
. TE 400 (TNC keyboard),
. BC 110 B (Visual display unit),
. PL 410 B (max. 2 PLC I/O boards, optional).
The TNC 407 is not subject to export restrictions. An export version is not required.
. Logic unit
LE 415 B (Id.-Nr. 267 223 ..) LE 407 A (Id.-Nr. 264 430 ..)
. TNC keyboard . VDU
TE 400 (Id.-Nr. 250 517 03) BC 110 B (Id.-Nr. 260 520 01)
Joined to the logic unit via 14 inch colour VDU with soft keys.
connecting cable. Joined to the logic unit and the TNC keyboard
via connecting cable.
3-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Hardware components 01.98

. PLC I/O unit (Option)
PL 410 B without analog inputs PL 410 B with analog inputs

(Id.-Nr. 263 371 12) (Id.-Nr. 263 371 02)
64 PLC inputs 56 PLC inputs

31 PLC outputs 29 PLC outputs
1 Control is operational output 4 analog inputs 10V
4 inputs for Pt 100 thermistors
1 Control is operational output
Connected with the logic unit by cable. No more than two PL 410 B can be connected to the LE.
. PLC analog board (Option)
PA 110 (Id.-Nr. 262 651 01)

Connected with the logic unit via cable or with
the first PLC I/O unit.
4 analog inputs for 10 V DC
4 analog inputs for Pt100 thermistors
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Hardware components 3-5

1.1 Changes in the ID-number
If development or manufacturing requirements make it necessary to alter any of the hardware
components, HEIDENHAIN will change the ID-numbers of the hardware components.
ID-Numbers assigned to date:
. VDU:
Id.-Nr. 254 740 01 BC 110 Separate power- until 5/91

supply for fan
Id.-Nr. 260 520 01 BC 110 B Power supply for since 11/90
fan taken from
VDU supply
. PLC-I/O board:
Id.-Nr. 252 855 01 PL 400 since 2/90

Id.-Nr. 263 371 01 PL 410 since 10/92
Id.-Nr. 263 371 02 PL 410 B with analog inputs
(5 V interface) since 10/94
Id.-Nr. 263 371 12 PL 410 B without analog inputs
(5 V interface) since 10/94
. TNC keyboard:
Id.-Nr. 250 517 01 TE 400 since 2/90

Id.-Nr. 250 517 03 TE 400 with APPR/DEP key since 9/92

. Logic unit LE 415:
Id.-Nr. Logic unit Change

251 481 99 LE 415 until 12/90
251 481 89 LE 415 Colour graphics chip; since 9/91
Expansion slot for software module since 9/91
251 481 88 LE 415 E Export version of the Id.-Nr. 251 481 89
251 481 79 LE 415 Like Id.-Nr. 251 481 89, but with since 9/91
software module
251 481 78 LE 415 E Export version of the Id.-Nr. 251 481 79 since 9/91
258 993 99 LE 415 Changed power supply and since 11/90
graphics chip
258 993 98 LE 415 E Export version of Id.-Nr. 258 993 99 since 11/90
258 993 89 LE 415 Expansion slot for software module since 9/91
software module
264 429 99 LE 415 Expansion slot for software module since 6/91
software module
267 223 29 LE 415 B New processor board since 9/92
267 223 28 LE 415 F Export version of Id.-Nr. 267 223 29 since 9/92
267 223 24 LE 415 B Like Id.-Nr. 267 223 29
but with software module since 9/92
267 223 23 LE 415 F Export version of Id.-Nr. 267 223 24
267 223 39 LE 415 B Hardware change since 2/93
267 223 34 LE 415 B Like Id.-Nr. 267 223 39
but with software module since 2/93
267 223 49 LE 415 B Uninterruptible supply to since 5/93
control panel
267 223 44 LE 415 B Like Id.-Nr. 267 223 49, but with since 5/93
software module
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Hardware components 3-7

. Logic unit LE 407:
Id.-Nr. Logic unit Change

256 113 99 LE 407 A Pilot lot 32-bit bus until 9/90
255 444 99 LE 407 A 16-bit bus; colour graphics chip 8/90 until 5/91
255 444 89 LE 407 A Expansion slot for software module since 9/91
255 444 79 LE 407 A Like Id.-Nr. 255 444 89, but with since 9/91
software module
261 092 99 LE 407 A 32-bit bus since 5/91
261 092 79 LE 407 A Like Id.-Nr. 261 092 89, but with since 9/91
software module
264 430 79 LE 407 A Like Id.-Nr. 264 430 99 but with since 9/91
software module
264 430 29 LE 407 A Uninterruptible supply to control panel since 5/93
264 430 24 LE 407 A Like Id.-Nr. 264 430 29 but with since 5/93
software module

2 Assembly hints
2.1 Electrical noise immunity

Please note that the vulnerability of electronic equipment to noise increases with faster signal
processing and higher sensitivity.
Please protect your equipment by observing the following rules and recommendations.
Noise voltages are mainly produced and transmitted by capacitive and inductive coupling. Electrical
noise can be picked up by the inputs and outputs to the equipment, and the cabling.
Likely sources of interference are:
Strong magnetic fields from transformers and electric motors,

Relays, contactors and solenoid valves,
High-frequency equipment, pulse equipment and stray magnetic fields from switch-mode
power supplies,
Mains leads and leads to the above equipment.
Electrical interference can be avoided by:
A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and interfering equipment > 20 cm.
A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and cables carrying interference
signals > 10 cm.
(Where signal cables and cables which carry interference signals are laid together in metallic
ducting, adequate decoupling can be achieved by using a grounded separation screen)
Screening according to DIN VDE 0160.
Potential compensating lines- 6 mm (see earthing plan).
Use of original HEIDENHAIN cables, connectors and couplings.
2.2 Heat generation and cooling

Please note that the reliability of electronic equipment is greatly reduced by continuous operation at
elevated temperatures. Please make the necessary arrangements to keep within the permissible
ambient temperature range.
Permissible ambient temperature in operation: 0 C to 45 C
The following means may be employed to ensure adequate heat removal:
Provide sufficient space for air circulation.

Build in a ventilator fan to circulate the air inside the control cabinet. The fan must reinforce the
natural convection. It must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the logic unit
and no pre-warmed air is blown into the unit. The warmed-up air should flow over surfaces
which have good thermal conductivity to the external surroundings (e.g. sheet metal).
For a closed steel housing without assisted cooling, the figure for heat conduction is 3 Watt/m
of surface per C air temperature difference between inside and outside.
Use of a heat exchanger with separate internal and external circulation.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 3-9

Cooling by blowing external air through the control cabinet to replace the internal air. In this
case the ventilator fan must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the control
cabinet and only filtered air can be drawn in. HEIDENHAIN advises against this method of
cooling, since the function and reliability of electronic assemblies are adversely affected by
contaminated air (fine dust, vapours etc.). In addition to these disadvantages, a filter which is
not adequately serviced leads to a loss in cooling efficiency. Regular servicing is therefore
absolutely vital.
Incorrect Correct
LE
Obstructive
elements
LE
Heat generating
elements
2.3 Humidity
Permissible humidity: < 75 % in continuous operation,
< 95 % for not more than 30 days p.a. (randomly distributed).
In tropical areas it is recommended that the TNC is not switched off, so that condensation is avoided
on the circuit boards. The heat generation prevents condensation and has no further disadvantages.
2.4 Mechanical vibration

Permissible vibration: < 0.5 g
2.5 Mounting position

Note the following fundamental points on mounting:
- mechanical accessibility,
- permissible environmental conditions,
- electrical noise immunity,
- the electrical regulations which are in force in your country.
3-10 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 01.98

2.5.1 Logic unit
HEIDENHAIN recommends the following mounting position:
LE 407
>577
>110
Minimum clearance 80 80
for servicing!
recommended: = 40 40
approx. 250 mm
C Air outlet C
100
* *
30
Maintain clearance
for screwdriver C
*
160
Connecting cables
must not hinder
swivel movement C
of the control *
100
*
C
30
Air inlet
246
160
30 C Measuring point for

* ambient temperature
83 60
Free space for air circulation
Free space for servicing
C
*
40
PL
C
5
* 32 Illustration of
R max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
swivel for exchange
of subassembly should
be at least 90.
40
145
270
40
40

LE 415
>577
>110
Minimum clearance 80 80
for servicing!
recommended: = 40 40
approx. 250 mm
C Air outlet C
100
* *
30
Maintain clearance
for screwdriver C
*
160
Connecting cables
must not hinder
swivel movement
of the control C
* *
100
C
30
Air inlet
286.5
195
30 C Measuring point for

83 60
C Free space for servicing
*
40
PL
C
5
32 Illustration of
* R max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
swivel for exchange
of subassembly should
be at least 90.
40
145
270
40
40
3-12 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Assembly hints 01.98

2.5.2 Visual display unit (VDU)
When mounting the VDU it must be remembered that this unit is very sensitive to magnetic pick-up.
The picture position and geometry can be disturbed by stray magnetic fields. Alternating fields cause
periodic movement or distortion of the picture.
For this reason, keep a minimum distance of 0.5 m between the VDU casing and the source of any
disturbance (e.g. permanent magnets, motors, transformers etc.)
415 400
25
C C C C
25
* * * *
15
40
330
20
25
* *
*
C C C
110 75
60 60
25 25
C Measuring point for

2.6 Degree of protection
When mounted, the visual display unit and the keyboard unit provide class IP54 protection against
dust and splashwater.

3 Summary of connections
3.1 TNC 415
Control-loop board colour code

X1 = Measuring system 1 (~)
X14 X1 X44 X2 = Measuring system 2 (~)
X2 X41 X45 X5 = Measuring system 5 (~)
24V
X6 = Measuring system S ( )
X8 = Nominal value - output
X3 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, S
X31 X10 = Reference pulse inhibit
X21
X12 = Touch trigger probe
X4 X14 = Measuring touch probe
X42 X46 B = Signal ground
X8
X5
X22 PLC and graphics board
X12 X41 = PLC output
X6 X42 = PLC input
X43 = VDU-screen (BC)
X47 X44 = Power supply 24 V for PLC
X43 X45 = TNC-keyboard (TE)
X23 X46 = Machine control panel
X47 = PLC I/O board (PL)
B
Processor board
X21 = Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
X22 = Data interface RS-422/V.11
X23 = Electronic handwheel
X31 = Power supply 24 V DC for NC
3-14 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Summary of connections 01.98

3.2 TNC 407
Processor board
X1 X44 X2 = Measuring system 2 (~)
X12
X2 X41 X45 X5 = Measuring system 5 ( )
24V
X8 X6 = Measuring system S ( )
X12 = Triggering touch probe
X3 X8 = Nominal value - output
X31 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, S
X21 = Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
X4 X21 X22 = Data interface RS-422/V.11
X42 X46 X23 = Electronic handwheel
B = Signal ground
X5
X22 PLC and graphics board

X41 = PLC output
X6
X42 = PLC input
X47 X43 = VDU (BC)
X23 X44 = Power supply 24 V for PLC
X43
X45 = TNC keyboard (TE)
X46 = Machine control panel
B X47 = PLC I/O board (PL)
X31 = Power supply 24 V DC for NC
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Summary of connections 3-15

4 Power supply
4.1 Logic unit and PLC I/O-board

Supply Voltage range Max. current Power
voltage DC average consumption consumption
LE NC 24 Vdc 2) Lower limit LE 415: 1.5 A LE 415: 36 W
section 20.4 V - - - LE 407: 1.3 A LE 407: 24 W
PLC 24 Vdc 3) Lower limit 2A 48 W
section 31 V - - - 1) when half of the when half of the
inputs/outputs inputs/outputs are
are switched on switched on
simultaneously simultaneously
PL 410 B Digital 20 A 480 W
inputs/out when half of the when half of the
puts inputs/outputs inputs/outputs
are switched on are switched on
simultaneously simultaneously
Analog 24 Vdc 2) 100 mA 2.4 W
inputs
PA 110 24 Vdc 3) 100 mA 2.4 W
1) Voltage surges up to V - - - for t < 100 ms are permissible.
2) VDE 0160, 5.88 low-voltage electrical separation
3) VDE 0160, Base insulation
4.1.1 NC power supply

The NC section of the LE must not be supplied U
from the machine control voltage supply! It
requires an individual, external and separately 24 V 1.5 Vpp
generated supply voltage according to VDE
0160, 5.88 recommendations for low-voltage
separation.
Use 24 V DC with a permissible AC component

t
of 1.5 VPP (recommended filter capacitor 10 000
F/40 V DC).
X31 power supply for NC
Connection terminals
Pin Number Assignment

1 + 24 V DC
2 0V
3-16 TNC 407/TNC 415 4 Power supply 01.98

4.1.2 PLC power supply
The PLC section (PLC inputs and outputs) of the LE and PL is run from the 24 V machine control
voltage supply, generated according to VDE 0160 (base insulation). Superimposed AC components,
such as those caused by a three-phase bridge rectifier without smoothing, are permissible up to a
ripple factor of 5 % (see DIN 40110/10.75, Section 1.2).
U
32.6 V
31 V
20.4 V
18.5 V
The 0 V-line of the PLC-power supply must be grounded with an earth lead ( 6 mm2) to the main
frame ground of the machine. The earth lead at the frame of the PL 410 must be directly connected
to protective earth with an earth lead ( 6mm). To prevent ground loops, the measured voltage at
the analog inputs must not be grounded
X44 power supply for the PLC

1 + 24 V DC switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
2 + 24 V DC not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
3 0V
Power supply for the PL 400

Terminal Assignment
X13 +24 V DC switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
X12 0V
X3 Pin 12 + 24 V DC not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
Power supply for the PL 410

Terminal Assignment PL #1 or PL #2
X9 0V
X10 +24 V logic supply and for "Control ready"
X11 +24 V supply for outputs O32 - O39 or O64 - O71
The routing and connection of the thermistors and analog inputs must be shockproof to VDE 0160
(Section 5.5.1). If this cannot be guaranteed, then both the PLC and the PL 410 must be supplied
with voltage in accordance with VDE 0160, 5.88 recommendations for low-voltage electrical
separation.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415 4 Power supply 3-17

Power supply for the PL 410 B
Connections as on the PL 410, plus power supply at X23 in accordance with VDE 0160, 5.88 low-voltage
electrical separation for analog inputs (the NC power supply can be used).
X23 Power supply for analog inputs

1 + 24 V DC
2 0V
Power supply for PA 110

1 +24 V DC Not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
2 0V
The power for the PA 110 can be supplied according to VDE 0550, provided that the analog inputs
and connections for the Pt 100 are shockproof according to VDE 0160 (Section 5.5.1). If this is not
possible, the entire PLC power supply and the power for the PA 110 must be provided according to
VDE 0551.
4.1.3 Buffer battery

The buffer battery is the potential source for the RAM memory for NC-programs, PLC-programs
and machine parameters when the control is switched off.
If the
EXCHANGE BUFFER BATTERY
message appears, the batteries must be exchanged.
The 3 batteries may be found behind a screw cap in the power supply section of the logic unit.
As well as the batteries, the logic unit contains an additional energy store, mounted on the
processor board, for buffering the memory contents. This means that the mains can be switched off
when replacing the batteries. The energy store will ensure that the memory is retained while the
batteries are exchanged.
Type of batteries:
Three AA-size batteries, leak-proof,
IEC-Designation "LR6"
3-18 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Power supply 01.98

4.2 Visual display unit (VDU)
X3 = Mains supply connection
Mains supply 110 V 220 V

voltage
Supply voltage range 85 to 132 V 170 to 264 V
Fuse rating F 3.15 A F 3.15 A
Frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 70 W
Connection Assignment
L1 Live (BK)
N Neutral (BL)
Protective earth (GN/YL)
X4 = DC connections (only for BC 110, Id.-Nr. 254 740 01)

1 + 24 V
2 0V
Power supply for integral fan:

The power supply for the fan must be connected separately to the BC 110 (Id.-Nr. 254 740 01).
The connection to the +24 V machine control voltage must be according to VDE 0550.
Permissible voltage range +18 to +28 V; power consumption 5 W at +24 V DC.
The power supply for the fan is taken internally from X3 in the BC 110 B (Id.-Nr. 260 520 01). There
X4 is a DC output for test purposes (please do not connect!).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415 4 Power supply 3-19

4.3 Earthing plan
Machine Encoders
1 2 3 4 5 6
Unit LE
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
+5V
LE - Power supply
Insulated
VDE 0551 0V
1
+24V- +24V- SI
1 stab. supply
X31
0V 0V 0V voltages
2
Power supply
Measuring voltage
0V
PT 100
*)
X19 - 22
X15 - 18
Unit PL 410B
X23
2
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
Optoc.
SI
SI
X1 X47
X14
Selectable
connection X13
X44/1
X44/3
X44/2
X12
X11
X10
X2
X9 to 2nd PL
Emergency stop
controlled
+24V- +24V- 0V
Emergency Stop
X8 X7 X7 X8 X8 X3-X6
PLC - Power-
8 x 1,2A
8 x 1,2A
8 x 1,2A
7 x 1,2A
64 Inputs
supply
VDE 0550
3
+24V-
0V
2
6mm
2
6mm
2 B
6mm 1
2 0
6mm
*) In order to avoid an earth circuit, the measuring voltage should not be grounded. If it must be
grounded, ensure that the ground line is short and noise immune.

Operating panel
C X21
Triggering Measuring Adapter
touch probe touch probe V.24
X22
Adapter
RS 422
Optoc.
X12 X14
X23
Handwheel
C
X43
Display
Unit
X45 8 x24 Matrix
Keyboard 2
Unit 4mm
X46 8 x 0,1A
24 Inputs Machine
Op. Panel
Optoc.
Terminal box
1,2,3,4,5 1-Axis
X8 2-Axis
(Spindle) 3-Axis
4-Axis
Spindle 5-Axis
C (Spindle)
L C
C C
0V
Motor control with
nominal value
X41 X41 X41 X41 X42
B difference input
V Spindle
Test point 1 V
(Fault voltg. 0V/ Motor control
housing) Test Point 2
(Fault voltg. with
0V without nominal
grounded nominal value difference
value input) input
To prevent earth circuits, the measuring

voltages should not be gruonded.
Emergency Stop
If it must be grounded,
ensure that the line is short and noise
immune.
32 Inputs
16x0,1A
7x0,1A
8x0,1A
0,1A
A grounded nominal input results in an

earth circuit. Therefore ensure that the
0V and ground line are short and noise
immune.
2
6mm
2
6mm
2
6mm
2
6mm
2
6mm
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Power supply 3-21


01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Power supply 3-23

5 Measuring systems
The HEIDENHAIN-contouring controls are designed for the installation of incremental linear and
angular measuring systems.
The control controls the actual position with a measuring step of 0.0001 mm or 0.0001. Measuring
systems and encoders with a graduation period of 0.001 mm or 0,001 to 0.1 mm or 0.1 may be
used.
It does not matter whether the measuring system or encoder has one or several reference marks.
However, HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of measuring systems with distance-coded reference
marks, since the traversing distance when referencing is thereby reduced to a minimum. See
Chapter "Machine Integration".
The current requirement per measuring system input must not exceed 300 mA. The maximum
current requirement for all measuring system inputs together is limited to 1.2 A.
5.1 Linear measuring systems

Measurement of length is best performed by a linear measuring system or encoder. Insofar as it is
compatible with the accuracy requirements, linear measurement can also be made using a rotary
encoder on the ballscrew.
HEIDENHAIN recommends use of the following linear measuring systems:
LS 103 C, LS 106 C, LS 405 C, LS 406 C, LS 706 C, LB 326, ULS 300 C.
For linear measurement with the aid of a rotary encoder and a ballscrew you could use, for example,
an ROD 450.
5.2 Angular measuring systems

For direct angular measurement in the A, B or C axes the following incremental angular measuring
systems are available: ROD 250 C, ROD 700 C, RON 255 C, and RON 705 C.
In order to meet accuracy requirements, HEIDENHAIN recommends line counts of at least

18 000.
3-24 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 01.98

5.3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals (7 to 16 APP)
The LE 415 can have five measuring systems and the LE 407 four measuring systems connected
with sinusoidal inputs (7 to 16 App). Maximum input frequency is 50 kHz.
5.3.1 Connector assignments

LE 407: X1, X2, X3, X4 measuring system 1, 2, 3, 4
LE 415: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 measuring system 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Flange socket with female connector insert (9-pin)

1 I1+
2 I1
5 I2+
6 I2
7 I0+
8 I0
3 +5V
4 0V
9 Inner screen
Housing Outer screen = housing
5.3.2 Connecting cable

Please use only HEIDENHAIN measuring system cables, connectors and couplings. Standard
HEIDENHAIN extension cables enable a maximum distance of 60 m (200 ft) to be covered.
Measuring system
LE
max. 30 m
With standard extension cable (Id.-Nr. 262 006 ..)
With armoured extension cable (Id.-Nr. 262 016 ..)
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Measuring systems 3-25

5.4 Measuring system inputs for square-wave signals
One measuring system with square-wave signals can be connected to the LE 415. Two such
systems can be connected to the LE 407. Maximum input frequency is 300 kHz.
5.4.1 Connector assignments

LE 407: X5, X6 measuring system 5, S
LE 415: X6 measuring system S

5 Ua1

6 Ua1
8 Ua2

1 Ua2
3 Ua0

4 Ua0

7 UaS
2 + 5 V (UP)
12 + 5 V (UP)
11 0 V (UN)
10 0 V (UN)
9 (contact spring) screen = housing
5.4.2 Connecting cable

Please use only HEIDENHAIN-measuring system cables, connectors and couplings.
In order to be able to connect a measuring system to the square-wave signal input of the logic unit,
the sinusoidal signal from the measuring system must be converted to a square-wave signal. This
conversion is performed by the interpolation and digitizing electronics (EXE). The interpolation and
digitizing electronics is either integrated into the measuring system or made as an independent unit.
If the interpolation and digitizing electronics does not have its own power supply, it can be supplied
from the logic unit. In order to ensure a correct supply voltage, the total length of the connecting
cable between the interpolation and digitizing electronics and the logic unit must be limited (see the
following diagram).

Spindle orientation:
X6
Extension cable
ROD 426.xxx8 LE
Id.-Nr. 262 011 ..
1024 lines
max. 20 m
Angle encoders:
X5
ROD 271 C Extension cable
LE 407
RON 275 C Id.-Nr. 262 011 ..
max. 20 m
or:
Extension cable Extension cable

ROD 250 C X5
RON 255 C EXE
ROD 700 C LE 407
602 E
RON 705 C Id.-Nr. 262 006 .. Id.-Nr. 262 004 ..
5-fold
max. 30 m max. 10 m
or:
Extension cable Extension cable

ROD 250 C X5
RON 255 C EXE
LE 407
ROD 700 C 801
RON 705 C Id.-Nr. 262 006 .. Id.-Nr. 233 764..
5-fold
max. 30 m max. 50 m
If necessary, linear measuring systems can also be connected to the X5 connector on the LE 407 via
interpolation and digitizing electronics.
Spindle orientation

5.5 Measuring system connections
Please observe the directions in the assembly instructions for the particular measuring system
which is being employed.
Measuring system cables must be laid without any intermediate clamping. Please use only the
HEIDENHAIN-connectors and couplings for making connections.
Type Connector Coupling
Pin number Cable
for PUR cable for PUR cable

7-pole
6 mm 237 524 20
8 mm 237 524 24
6 mm 237 525 11
8 mm 237 524 21
9-pole
6 mm 237 524 03
8 mm 237 524 02
6 mm 237 524 15 237 525 07
8 mm 237 524 10 237 525 04
12-pole
6 mm 237 524 06 237 525 01
8 mm 237 524 07 237 525 03
6 mm 237 524 14 237 525 09
8 mm 237 524 12 237 525 06

Assembly of the connector 237 524 ..
Assembly of the coupling 237 525 ..
2.
1.
1a 1b 3.
2.
1.
2a 2b 3.
1a + 2a Do not open connector or coupling with a mating connector!
1b The special assembly tool Id.-Nr. 236 148 01 and a 22 mm spanner are absolutely
necessary to assemble the connector.
2b An adjustable pipe-wrench with plastic jaws is required to assemble the coupling.
A B C D E F G H K
C1 G1 H1
Z Y X A1
3 The diagram shows the various component parts of the connector and the coupling, and
the two different versions of the screw connections for the armoured version PG7 and
PG9. The screw connection PG9 with the Id.-Nr. 209 629 01, consisting of the parts X1, Y1,
Z1 , must be ordered separately.

3
A B C D 22
.12" E
.87"
5
.20"
4 5 6
3 G F
"
.12
1.
2.
7 8 9
H K
10
4 Push parts A D on to the cable, alternatively assemble the screw connection for the
armouring according to diagram 3. Strip back 22 mm of the outside sleeving. Unpick the
outer screen and fold back.
5 Cut off the outer screen to a length of 3 mm and slide the screen contact sleeve E
between the internal sleeving and the braided screen.
6 Cut back the internal sleeving to a length of 5 mm.
7 1. twist the inner screen together.

2. insulate the twisted inner screen with heat-shrinkable sleeving.
8 Strip off the insulation on all leads for 3 mm, tin and solder in accordance with the
connection diagram to G or G1.
9 Assemble part F.
10 Push the connector together.
The following points must be observed when assembling the measuring system:
.The inner screen (pin 9) must not make any electrical connection with the outer screen (connector
housing).
.The outer screen of the measuring system cable must have an electrical connection with the
connector housing.
.The measuring system is grounded through its mechanical fixings, the mounting block in the case
of encapsulated systems, and the housing of the scale.
.When using external pulse-forming electronics (EXE) the ground must be electrically connected
with the frame of the machine. Necessary cable cross-section 6 mm.
.Encapsulated linear measurement systems should be connected to compressed air.

Please check that the mounting block, the sensor unit and the scale housing all have a good
electrical connection with the chassis/frame of the machine. Since the connector for the measuring
system and the mounting block are connected by the outer screen of the connector cable, this test
can be carried out between the measuring system connector and the measuring system housing.
During this test the connector must not be plugged in to the logic unit, as this would cause a
grounding via the logic unit.
LS 107 C
<1
LS 403 C, LS406 C
<1
LS 704 C
<1

3
6 Nominal value output
HEIDENHAIN contouring controls control the position loop servo with a nominal value potential of
10 volts.
Maximum loading of the nominal value outputs: 2 mA

Maximum load capacitance: 2 nF
6.1 Connector assignment X8

Id.-Nr. 290 110..
max. 20 m
X8 Nominal value output
Id.-Nr. 290 109..
BN
1 1 Nominal value output 1
BN/GN
2 2 Do not use
YL
RD/BL
PK
GY/PK
6 6 0V Nominal value output 5
RD
VI
8 8 Nominal value output S axis
WH
WH/GY
10 10 Do not use
GN
12 12 Do not use
GY
BL
BK
15 15 0V Nominal value output S axis
6.2 Connecting cable

HEIDENHAIN offers a connecting cable with a connector at one end (Id.-Nr. 290 109 ..).
The connecting cable to the nominal value outputs may not have more than one intermediate
terminal. The terminal must be made in an earthed connection box. This is necessary when the
cable must branch to physically separate servo inputs. It is only possible to earth the screening of
the servo leads in this way. If required, suitable connection boxes are available from HEIDENHAIN
with the Id.-Nr. 251 249 01.
3-32 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 01.98

The casing of the connection box must be electrically connected with the frame of the machine.
The 0 V of the nominal value differential input must be joined to signal ground, (cable cross-section
6 mm, see also under "Earthing plan").
Suggested solution for connecting and wiring the screening in the connection box:
LE Insulated against housing

Leads are provided
with end sleeves.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Cable screens are led onto 0.14 mm2

insulated strands via crimp eyelets.

X Y Z IV V S
SERVO
Pin number Assignment

1 Nominal value output X axis
2 Nominal value output 0 V X axis
3 Nominal value output Y axis
4 Nominal value output 0 V Y axis
5 Nominal value output Z axis
6 Nominal value output 0 V Z axis
7 Nominal value output IV axis
8 Nominal value output 0 V IV axis
9 Nominal value output V axis
10 Nominal value output 0 V V axis
11 Nominal value output S axis
12 Nominal value output 0 V S axis
13 Screen connection
HEIDENHAIN recommends that the logic unit and the connection box be connected by
HEIDENHAIN-cable Id.-Nr. 290 109 ..
If the manufacturers want to use their own cable, HEIDENHAIN offers a 15 pin Sub-D connector
with solderable leads (Id.-Nr. 243 971 ZY).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 3-33

6 Nominal value output
3-34 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 6 Nominal value output 01.98

7 Reference pulse inhibit input
The reference pulse inhibit input can be used to suppress the evaluation of the reference pulse input
of each of the six measuring systems. This is achieved by simply applying a positive potential (13 V
to +30.3 V) to the appropriate reference pulse inhibit input. Pin 9 of the female connector X10
(reference pulse inhibit) must be connected to 0 V of the PLC-power supply.
The reference pulse inhibit inputs are only available in the LE 415 A. These inputs are
normally unused. See also Chapter "Machine Integration".

X10 Reference pulse inhibit (LE 415 A only)

1 Screen
2 Reference pulse inhibit input X1
8 Do not use
9 0 V (PLC)

Standard commercially available screened cables can be used for the connections to the reference
pulse inhibit inputs.
HEIDENHAIN can deliver a 9-pin D-subminiature connector (Id.-Nr. 244 503 ZY) for this purpose.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7 Reference pulse inhibit input 3-35
8 Touch probe system input
The following 3D touch probe systems are available from HEIDENHAIN:
TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated APE (interface electronics)

TS 511 with infrared transmission of the trigger signal and connectable via APE (interface
electronics)
TT 110 for workpiece measurement
The TNC 415 and TNC 425 can also support the measuring touch probe system TM 110
For start-up and adjustment of the 3D-touch probe systems see Chapter "Machine Integration".

X12 Touch probe system
D-subminiature female connector (15-pin)
Pin number Signal designation

1 Inner screen (0 V)
3 Ready/standby
4 Start
5 +15 V 10 % (UP)
6 + 5 V 5 % (UP)
7 Battery warning
8 0 V (UN)
9 Trigger signal
10 Trigger signal
2, 11 to 15 Do not use
2 Stylus in rest position = signal high
3-36 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 01.98
8.2 Connection of the touch probe system
Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables and adapters for the connection to the touch probe
system.
8.2.1 TS 120 or TT 110

The touch probe system TS 120 is connected directly to the logic unit via a cable adapter.
See also under the heading "Mounting dimensions".
TS 120 helical cable

(extended 1.5 m)
Cable adapter complete

X12 Touch probe inputs
Id.-Nr. 274 543..
TT 110 cable with

metal armour tubing

1 1
2 2
PK 3 3 Standby
WH
4 4
1 1 5 5 +15V 10% (U P)
BN BN 6 6 + 5V 5% (U P)
TS 120 2 2
3 3 GY 7 7 Battery warning
or GY
4 4 WH 8 8 0V (UN)
TT 110 GN
5 5 GN 9 9 Trigger signal
YL YL 10 10 Trigger signal
6 6
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
max. 50 m
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 3-37
8.2.2 TS 511
The TS 511 touch probe system can only function together with a transmitter/receiver unit (SE 510)
and interface electronics (APE 510).
3m max. 7 m max. 30 m
SE 510 Id.-Nr. 274 540 .. APE 510 Id.-Nr. 274 539 ..

X12 Touch probe input
SE 510
WH/BN

WH GY 1 1 Internal screen (0V)
0V 1 1 1 7 2 2
BN YL APE GY
UP 2 2 2 5 3 3 Standby
3 3 BN RD 3 510 3 YL 4 4 Start
GY WH BN
Flash signal 4 4 4 2 5 5 15V 10% (U P)
5 5 GN 5 6 6 6
GN BL BL
IR-signal 6 6 6 1 7 7 Battery warning
Internal 7 7 7 4 WH 8 8 0V (UN)
WH/ WH/
screen (0V) BK BK 9 9
GN 10 10 Trigger signal
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
The signals may be inverted by changing the switch positions S1 to S4 in the APE 510.
See operating instructions TS 511.
Please install the transmitter/receiver unit SE 510 either insulated from, or electrically connected to
the machine, as it must take up a definite potential, also under vibration. The earthing screw of
the APE 510 must be joined to the machine signal ground by a potential compensating lead
( 6 mm). See also under the heading "Earthing plan".
3-38 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 01.98
8.2.3 TM 110
The TM 110 measuring touch probe can be mounted to the TNC 415 B and TNC 425. A special
software module (optional) is required for digitizing with TM 110.
TM
110 Id.-Nr. 284 574 .. Id.-Nr. 285 289 ..
X14 Measuring
touch probe TM 110
WH WH
1 1 1 1 1 0V
BN BN
2 2 2 2 15 + 5V
YL YL
5 5 5 5 4 I1
GN GN Axis X
4 4 4 4 17 I1 +
RD RD
7 7 7 7 3 I2
BL BL I2 +
6 6 6 6 16
WH/BK WH/BK
3 3 3 3 5 0V
BN/BK BN/BK
17 17 17 17 19 + 5V
YL/BK YL/BK
9 9 9 9 8 I1
GN/BK GN/BK Axis Y
8 8 8 8 21 I1 +
RD/BK RD/BK
11 11 11 11 7 I2
BL/BI BL/BI
10 10 10 10 20 I2 +
WH/VI WH/VI
15 15 15 15 9 0V
BN/VI BN/VI
16 16 16 16 23 + 5V
YL/VI YL/VI
13 13 13 13 12 I1
GN/VI GN/VI Axis Z
12 12 12 12 25 I1 +
RD/VI RD/VI I2
19 19 19 19 11
BL/VI BL/VI I2 +
18 18 18 18 24
21 21 21 21 13 0V
14 14 14 14 2
20 20 20 20 6
10
14
18
22
max. 12m
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Touch probe system input 3-39
9 Data interface
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 407 and TNC 415 have two data interfaces:
one RS-232-C/V.24 data interface and

one RS-422/V.11 data interface.
Both interfaces may be utilised. The operator decides which of the two interfaces he wishes to use.
See also chapter "Data interface".
9.1 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface

HEIDENHAIN guarantees that, if properly connected, the serial data interface RS-232-C/V.24 will
transmit data correctly up to a distance of 20 m between the logic unit and the peripheral unit.
The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the
operating console or the control cabinet. See also under the heading "Mounting dimensions".
This cable adapter (Id.-Nr. 239 758 01) is connected to the logic unit with the HEIDENHAIN cable Id.-
Nr. 239 760 ..
For connection to the peripheral unit HEIDENHAIN offers a standard connecting cable
(Id.-Nr. 274 545 01) , length 3 m.
RS-232-C Adapter Block

3m max. 17 m
Peripheral
X21 Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
unit
Id.-Nr. 274 545 01 Id.-Nr. 239 758 01 Id.-Nr. 239 760..
WH/BN WH/BN
WH/BN WH/BN

GND 1 1 GN
1 1 1 1 YL 1 1 GND Chassis
TXD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RXD Receive data
YL GN
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD Transmit data
GY PK
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS Clear to send
PK GY
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS Request to send
BL BN
DSR 6 6 RD 6 6 6 6
RD
6 6 DTR Data terminal ready
GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal ground
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
BN BL
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR Data set ready
If your peripheral unit has a connector layout that differs from the above, the HEIDENHAIN
connecting cable cannot be used.
3-40 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9 Data interface 01.98

9.2 RS-422/V.11 data interface
If used correctly, the RS-422/V.11 serial data interface will ensure error-free data transmission up to
a distance of 1000 m between logic unit and peripheral unit.
The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the
operating console or the control cabinet. See also under the heading "Mounting dimensions".
The cable adapter is connected to the logic unit with a HEIDENHAIN connecting cable.
RS-422 Adapter Block

max. 1000 m
X22 Data interface
RS-422/V.11
Id.-Nr. 249 819 01 Id.-Nr. 289 208 ..

1 1 1 BL BK 1 1 GND Chassis
2 2 2 BK 2 2 RXD
GY
3 3 3 3 3 CTS
WH
4 4 4 4 4 TXD
GN
5 5 5 5 5 RTS
WH/GN
6 6 6 6 6 DSR
GY/PK
7 7 7 7 7 DTR
BK
8 8 8 8 8 GND Signal
RD
9 9 9 9 9 RXD
PK
10 10 10 10 10 CTS
BN
11 11 11 11 11 TXD
YL
12 12 12 12 12 RTS
BN/GN
13 13 13 13 13 DSR
RD/BL
14 14 14 14 14 DTR
15 15 15 15 15
The pin assignment is the same at both ends of the connecting cable.
In the RS-422 adapter the pins of the female connectors are connected one-to-one.
The pin assignment in the cable adapter is therefore the same as in the X22 connector in the logic
unit.
The following cable type must be used for the connection to the peripheral unit:
LIYCY 7 x 2 x 0.14 Cu
For the cable connection HEIDENHAIN offers a 15-pin D-subminiature connector

(Id.-Nr. 243 971 ZY).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9 Data interface 3-41

3-42 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9 Data interface 01.98

10 Handwheel input
The following handwheels can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls.
1 integral handwheel HR 130, or

3 integral handwheels HR 150 using handwheel adapter HRA 110, or
1 portable handwheel HR 330, or
1 portable handwheel HR 332
10.1 Pin assignment

X23 Handwheel input
D-subminiature female connector (9-pin)

2 0V
4 + 12 V 0.6 V (Uv)
6 DTR
7 TxD
8 RxD
9 DSR
1, 3, 5 Do not use
10.2 Portable handwheel HR 330

The HR 330 is a portable handwheel with keys for the 5 axes, rapid traverse, direction of traverse
and EMERGENCY STOP.
The HR 330 is connected to the logic unit by means of the cable adapter Id.-Nr. 249 889 ..
See also under the heading "Mounting dimensions".
The HEIDENHAIN extension cable Id.-Nr. 281 429 .. may be used to increase the connection
distance.
The HR 330 is available in 2 versions:
. HR 330 helical cable (stretched length 2.2 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 11

. HR 330.001 normal cable (max. 6 m) Id.-Nr. 251 534 12
Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id.-Nr. 271 958 02
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 3-43

HR 330.001 max. 6 m
HR 330 max. 2.2 m max. 48 m max. 49 m
HR Adapter
X23 Electronic
HR 330
handwheel
Id.-Nr. 251 534.. Id.-Nr. 249 889.. Id.-Nr. 281 429 ..
EMERGENCY OFF 2 BL
max. 24V 1 BL

1 1 1 1
WH 2 2 WH 2 2 0V
BL 1 1 3 3 3 3
BL 2 2 BN 4 4 BN 4 4 +12V 0.6V(U V)
HR 330
GN 3 3 5 5 5 5
YL 4 4 YL 6 6 YL 6 6 DTR
BN 5 5 7 7 7 7
WH 6 6 GN 8 8 GN 8 8 RXD
9 9 9 9
max. 50 m
The adapter includes a cable with a 9 pin connector from the connection to the logic unit and two
terminals for connecting the 24 V of the EMERGENCY STOP control circuit (max. load 1.2 A).
See also the Section "Mounting dimensions".
10.3 Integral handwheel HR 130

The HR 130 is the integral version of the HR 330, without the keys for the axes, rapid traverse etc.
It may be attached directly to the logic unit, or via an extension cable (Id.-Nr. 249 814 ..).
The HR 130 (Id.-Nr. 254 040 ..) is available in several versions (standard cable length 1 m):
- small knob; axial cable exit: version 01
- small knob; radial cable exit: version 02
- large knob; axial cable exit: version 03
- large knob; radial cable exit: version 04
- ergonomic knob; radial cable exit: version 05
You will find dimension drawings for the knobs at the end of this chapter.
3-44 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 10 Handwheel input 01.98

max. 6 m max. 49 m
Adapter
HR 130 X23 Electronic
handwheel
Id.-Nr. 254 040.. Id.-Nr. 281 429 ..

1 1 1 1
WH WH
2 2 2 2 0V
HR 130 3 3 3 3
BN BN
4 4 4 4 +12V 0.6V (U V)
5 5 5 5
YL YL
6 6 6 6 DTR
7 7 7 7
GN GN
8 8 8 8 RXD
9 9 9 9
max. 50 m
10.4 Portable handwheels with permissive buttons

HR 332
Handwheel HR 332 has two enable buttons and a keypad that can be evaluated by the PLC (see
"Handwheel" section in the chapter entitled "Machine Integration"). There are different models of the
handwheel with different key labelling - please contact HEIDENHAIN for further details.
HR 332 is connected to a cable adapter on the panel by means of a 5 m plug-in connecting cable.
The connecting cable is available with or without metal armouring.
Maximum cable length between HR and LE is 50 m.
Connecting cable to HR 332 Id.-Nr. 272 291 ..

Connecting cable to HR 332, with metal armouring Id.-Nr. 272 292 ..
Cable adapter HR 332/LE Id.-Nr. 274 556 ..
Extension cable for cable adapter Id.-Nr. 281 429 ..
Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id.-Nr. 271 958 01
Handwheel holder Id.-Nr. 268 268 03
HR 332 Id.-Nr. 266 064 21

Adapter
HR 332 HR 332 X23
Id.-Nr. 272 292 .. Id.-Nr. 274 556 .. Id.-Nr. 281 429 ..

Id.-Nr. 272 291 ..
3 black
2 violet
1 red
2 white
1 white
HR 332
blue
EM. STOP 1 1 1 LE
EM. STOP 2 pink 2 2 X23
Permiss. 3 red 3 3
Perm. com. 4 violet 4 4 bl 1 1 bl 1 1 1
Permiss. 5 black 5 white white
5 2 2 2 2 0V
6 6 x 6 rt rt
6 3 3 3 3 3
TXD 7 green 7 brown brown
7 4 4 4 4 +12V0.6V(Uv)
RXD 8 grey 8 x x
8 5 5 5 5 5
Screen 9 x 9 yellow yellow
9 6 6 6 6 DTR
DSR 10 yellow 10 10 grey grey
7 7 7 7 TXD
0V 11 white 11 11 green green
8 8 8 8 RXD
+12V 12 brown 12 12 9 9 9 9
max. 50 m
The adapter has a cable with a 9-pin plug for connection to the logic unit, two terminals for the 24 V
of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit of the control (max. load 1.2 A) and 3 terminals for the enable
circuit. The enable buttons are N/O contacts (24 V/1.2 A).
HR 410
The HR 410 is a portable electronic handwheel with:
Five axis-selection keys
Traverse direction keys
Three keys with predefined traverse speeds (slow, medium, fast)
Actual-position-capture key
Three keys for machine functions to be determined by the machine tool builder
Two permissive buttons
EMERGENCY STOP button
Holding magnets
Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit Id. Nr. 271 958 03
In order to be able to mount the HR 410, you will need a TNC with at least software version
280 540 03, 280 560 03 0r 280 580 03.
The adapter includes plug-in terminal strips for the contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button and
permissive button (maximum load 1.2 A).

Extension Cable Adapter Cable Connecting Cable HR 410
Id. Nr. 281 429.. Id. Nr. 296 466.. Id. Nr. 296 467 05 Id. Nr. 296 469 01
D-sub D-sub D-sub Coupling Connector Connector Connec-

connec- connec- connec- on mount- (male) (female) tor
tor (male) tor tor ing base 18-pin 18-pin (male)
9-pin (female) (male) (female) 18-pin
9-pin 9-pin 18-pin
Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield Housing Housing Shield
2 White 2 2 White E E White E E
4 Brown 4 4 Brown D D Brown D D
6 Yellow 6 6 Yellow B B Yellow B B
7 Gray 7 7 Gray A A Gray A A
8 Green 8 8 Green C C Green C C
6 6 WH/BK 6 6
7 7 YL/BK 7 7
5 5 WH/RD 5 5
4 4 WH/BL 4 4
2 2 WH/GN 2 2
3 3 WH/YL 3 3
1 1 WH/BN 1 1
WH/BN 3 Contact 1 + 2
WH/YL 2 Contact 2 (left) Permissive button
WH/GN 1 Contact 1 (right)
WH/BL 1 Contact 1
WH/RD 2 Contact 1 EMERGENCY STOP
YL/BK 3 Contact 2
WH/BK 4 Contact 2

Internal wiring of the permissive button and EMERGENCY STOP contacts of the HR 410:
Permissive button 1 Permissive button 2 EMERGENCY STOP
Contact 2
1 2
Contact 1
1 2
Right Left
Cable adapter
4
Contact 2
2
Contact 1 X2
1 Contact 1
3
Contact 2
3
Contact 1+2
2 X1
Contact 2
1
Contact 1

10.5 Handwheel adapter HRA 110
The HRA 110 can be used to connect 2 or 3 handwheels HR 150 to one LE.
The first two handwheels are dedicated to axes X and Y. The third handwheel can be assigned to
axes X, Y, Z, IV or V using a step switch (optional) or machine parameters. (See "Handwheel" section
in chapter "Machine integration").
HR 150 HRA 110
X31 24 V
X1 S2 Achswahl (Option)
AXIS SELECTION (OPTIONAL)
S1 Unterteilungsfaktorwahl (Option)
X2
INTERPOLATION FACTOR (OPTIONAL)
X3 X23 X23 (LE)
Id.-Nr. 270 909..
max. 20 m max. 50 m
A second step switch (optional) can be used to select the interpolation factor for the handwheels.
The interpolation factor of the step switch must be evaluated in the PLC - it is displayed on screen
but cannot be altered with the keyboard.
However the interpolation factor can be set for specific axes without a step switch by using the
keyboard as before.
Pin assignments
Handwheel inputs X1, X2, X3

1 I1+
2 I1
3 I2+
4 I2
5 I0+
6 I0
7 +5V
8 0V
9 Inner screen
Housing Outer screen

Handwheel adapter output X23
Pin assignment

1 RTS
2 0V
3 CTS
4 +12V + 0,6 V (Uv)
5 Do not use
6 DSR
7 RxD
8 TxD
9 DTR
Housing Outer screen
NC supply connection X31

Pin assignment

1 + 24 V
2 0V
The 24 V power supply of the PLC must not be connected in the handwheel adapter, since that
would bridge the electrical separation of PLC inputs and outputs. The handwheel adapter must be
powered with the 24 V supply from the NC block of the LE (VDE 0551). See chapter "Power supply".
10 Handwheel input

11 PLC inputs/outputs
The following configurations of PLC inputs/outputs are possible with the HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls.
PLC PLC Analogue Thermistors Components

Inputs Outputs Inputs
56 31 -- -- LE
119 62 -- -- LE + 1 PL 400
182 93 -- -- LE + 2 PL 400
119 62 4 4 LE + 1 PL 400 + PA 110
120 62 -- -- LE + 1 PL 410 / PL 410 B
112 60 4 4 LE + 1 PL 410 / PL 410 B
184 93 -- -- LE + 2 PL 410 / PL 410 B
176 91 4 4 LE + 2 PL 410 / PL 410 B
168 89 8 8 LE + 2 PL 410 / PL 410 B
120 62 4 4 LE + 1 PL 410 + PA 110
112 60 8 8 LE + 1 PL 410 + PA 110
56 31 4 4 LE + PA 110
PL 410 PL 410
PL 410 B PL 410 B
(Id.-Nr. 263 371 12) (Id.-Nr. 263 371 02) PA 110 PL 400
PLC inputs 64 56 -- 63
PLC outputs 31 29 -- 31
Analogue inputs -- 4 4 --
Inputs for thermistors -- 4 4 --
Control is operational 1 1 -- 1
output
The analogue inputs of the PL 410 / PL 410 B they must be activated by a DIL switch on the PL and
a machine parameter in the TNC. When the analogue inputs are active, two outputs (O61/O62 or
O93/O94 on PL #2) and eight inputs (I120 to I127 or I248 to I255 on PL #2) of the PLC cannot be
used.
One PLC extension can be mounted on the logic unit. The second PLC extension must be
installed next to the logic unit in the switch cabinet. It is not possible to combine the
PL 410 B with the PL 410 or PA 110.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11 PLC inputs/outputs 3-51

11.1 Technical data
11.1.1 PLC Inputs

Logic Unit / PL 410 PL 410 B PL 400
Voltage ranges:
"1" signal: Ui 13 V to 30.2 V 16.5 V to 30 V
"0" signal: Ui 20 V to 3.2 V 20 V to 4 V
Current ranges:
"1" signal: Ii 3.8 mA to 8.9 mA 2.5 mA to 6 mA 6.2 mA to 12.6 mA
"0" signal: Ii 1.0 mA at Ui=3.2 V 0,65 mA at Ui=3.2 V 1.6 mA at Ui=4 V
11.1.2 PLC Outputs
Transistor outputs with current limiter
Logic Unit PL 400 / PL 410 / PL 410 B

Min. output voltage
for "1" signal 3 V under supply voltage
Nominal operating
current per output 0.1 A 1.2 A
Permitted load: resistive load; inductive load only with quenching diode parallel to inductance.
Not more than one output may be shorted on the logic unit at any one time.
One shorted output causes no overload.
No more than half of the PLC outputs may be driven at once (usage factor 0.5).
3-52 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11 PLC inputs/outputs 01.98

11.1.3 Analogue inputs
The PA 110, the PL 410 and the PL 410 B (Id.-Nr 263 371 02) have 4 analogue inputs ( 10 V) and 4
inputs for Pt 100 thermistors. These inputs must be activated by a DIL switch on the PL 410 /
PL 410 B and a machine parameter in the TNC. When the analogue inputs are active, two outputs
(O61/O62 or O93/O94 on PL #2) and eight inputs (I120 to I127 or I248 to I255 on PL #2) of the PLC
cannot be used. (See chapter "Machine integration", section "Analogue inputs").
Voltage range -10 V to +10 V

Input resistance > 250 k
Resolution 100 mV
Internal value range -100 to +100
11.1.4 Inputs for Pt 100 Thermistors

See chapter "Machine integration", section "Analogue inputs".
Constant current 5 mA
Temperature range 0C to 100C
Resolution 0.5C
Internal value range 0 to 200

11.2 Connector assignment
Power supply see section "PLC power supply"
11.2.1 PLC inputs

The PLC inputs I0 to I31 are on connector X42 (PLC input).
The PLC inputs I128 to I152 are on the connector for the machine control panel (X46).
See also the heading "Machine control panel".
X42 PLC input D-sub 37-pin female connection
Pin number Assignment Pin number Assignment

1 I0 19 I18
2 I1 20 I19
3 I2 21 I20
4 I3 Acknowledgment for 22 I21
"Control is operational" test
5 I4 23 I22
6 I5 24 I23
7 I6 25 I24
8 I7 26 I25
9 I8 27 I26
10 I9 28 I27
11 I10 29 I28
12 I11 30 I29
13 I12 31 I30
14 I13 32 I31
15 I14 33, 34 Do not use
16 I15 35, 36, 37 0 V (PLC) test output; Do not
use
17 I16 Housing Outer screen
18 I17

11.2.2 PLC output
The PLC outputs O0 to O30 and the "Control operational" output are on connector X41 (PLC output).
The PLC outputs O0 to O7 are also to be found on the connector for the machine control panel
(X46). See also under heading "Machine control panel".
X41 PLC output

D-sub 37-pin female connection

1 O0 19 O18
2 O1 20 O19
3 O2 21 O20
4 O3 22 O21
5 O4 23 O22
6 O5 24 O23
7 O6 25 O241)
8 O7 26 O251)
9 O8 27 O261)
10 O9 28 O271)
11 O10 29 O281)
12 O11 30 O291)
13 O12 31 O301)
14 O13 32 Do not use
15 O14 33 0 V (PLC) test output;
do not use
16 O15 34 Control is operational1)
17 O16 35, 36, 37 24 V (PLC) test output;
do not use
18 O17 Housing Outer screen
1) Not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
11.2.3 PL connection
X47 PLC I/O Board
D-sub 37-pin male connection

1, 2, 3 0V 13 Screen
4 Serial IN 2 14, 15, 16 + 12 V (from PL)
5, 6, 17, 18 Do not use 19 Serial IN 1
7 RESET 20 EMERGENCY STOP
8 WRITE EXTERN 21 Serial OUT
10 A5 23 A4
11 A3 24 A2
12 A1 25 A0

11.3 Connector assignment on the PL
11.3.1 Connection to LE or PL #1
X1 to PL 410 / PL 410 B
X10 to PL 400
D-sub 25-pin female connector

1, 2, 3 0V 13 Screen
4 Serial IN 2 14, 15 + 12 V (from PL)
5, 6, 17, 18 Do not use 16 PL identification
7 RESET 19 Serial IN 1
8 WRITE EXTERN 20 EMERGENCY STOP
10 A5 22 Serial OUT
11 A3 23 A4
12 A1 24 A2
25 A0
Housing External shield
11.3.2 Connection of PL #2
X2 at the PL 410 / PL 410 B D-sub 25-pin male connector
X11 at the PL 400 D-sub 25-pin female connector

1, 2, 3 0V 13 Screen
4-6, 14-18 Do not use 19 Serial IN 1
7 RESET 20 EMERGENCY STOP
10 A5 23 A4
11 A3 24 A2
12 A1 25 A0

11.3.3 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400
The PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 400 are spread over nine connectors assigned as follows:
Cables with a core cross-section dia. 0.14 mm Cu must be used to connect the PLC inputs and
outputs. Maximum cable length 20 m.
X1 X2
Pin number Assignment Assignment Pin number Assignment Assignment
PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2 PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2
1 O32 O64 1 O43 O75
2 O33 O65 2 O44 O76
3 O34 O66 3 O45 O77
4 O35 O67 4 O46 O78
5 O36 O68 5 O47 O79
6 O37 O69 6 O48 O80
7 O38 O70 7 O49 O81
8 O39 O71 8 O50 O82
9 O40 O72 9 O51 O83
10 O41 O73 10 O52 O84
11 O42 O74 11 O53 O85
12 Do not use 12 Do not use
X3 X4
PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2 PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2
1 O54 O86 1 I126 I254
2 O55 O87 2 I74 I202
3 O562) O882) 3 I73 I201
2)
4 O57 O892) 4 I72 I200
2)
5 O58 O902) 5 I71 I199
2)
6 O59 O912) 6 I70 I198
2)
7 O60 O922) 7 I69 I197
2)
8 O61 O932) 8 I68 I196
2)
9 O62 O942) 9 I67 I195
10 Control ready 10 I66 I194
11 Do not use 11 I65 I193
12 +24 V not interruptible by 12 I64 I192
ext. EMERGENCY STOP1)
1)
+24V must always be connected even if the non-interruptible outputs are not used.
2)
Outputs not interruptible by ext. EMERGENCY STOP

X5 X6
PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2 PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2
1 I86 I214 1 I98 I226
2 I85 I213 2 I97 I225
3 I84 I212 3 I96 I224
4 I83 I211 4 I95 I223
5 I82 I210 5 I94 I222
6 I81 I209 6 I93 I221
7 I80 I208 7 I92 I220
8 I79 I207 8 I91 I219
9 I78 I206 9 I90 I218
10 I77 I205 10 I89 I217
11 I76 I204 11 I88 I216
12 I75 I203 12 I87 I215
X7 X8
PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2 PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2
1 I110 I238 1 I122 I250
2 I109 I237 2 I121 I249
3 I108 I236 3 I120 I248
4 I107 I235 4 I119 I247
5 I106 I234 5 I118 I246
6 I105 I233 6 I117 I245
7 I104 I232 7 I116 I244
8 I103 I231 8 I115 I243
9 I102 I230 9 I114 I242
10 I101 I229 10 I113 I241
11 I100 I228 11 I112 I240
12 I99 I227 12 I111 I239
X9
Pin number Assignment Assignment
PL 400 #1 PL 400 #2
1 Do not use
2 Do not use
3 Do not use
4 I125 I253
5 I124 I252
6 I123 I251

11.3.4 PLC inputs/outputs on the PL 410 / PL 410 B
X3 Assignment X4 Assignment
Pin number PL 410 B #1 PL 410 B #2 Pin number PL 410 B #1 PL 410 B #2
PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2 PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2
1 I64 I192 1 I80 I208
2 I65 I193 2 I81 I209
3 I66 I194 3 I82 I210
4 I67 I195 4 I83 I211
5 I68 I196 5 I84 I212
6 I69 I197 6 I85 I213
7 I70 I198 7 I86 I214
8 I71 I199 8 I87 I215
9 I72 I200 9 I88 I216
10 I73 I201 10 I89 I217
11 I74 I202 11 I90 I218
12 I75 I203 12 I91 I219
13 I76 I204 13 I92 I220
14 I77 I205 14 I93 I221
15 I78 I206 15 I94 I222
16 I79 I207 16 I95 I223
PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2 PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2
1 I96 I224 1 I112 I240
2 I97 I225 2 I113 I241
3 I98 I226 3 I114 I242
4 I99 I227 4 I115 I243
5 I100 I228 5 I116 I244
6 I101 I229 6 I117 I245
7 I102 I230 7 I118 I246
8 I103 I231 8 I119 I247
9 I104 I232 9 I1201) I2481)
10 I105 I233 10 I1211) I2491)
1)
11 I106 I234 11 I122 I2501)
1)
12 I107 I235 12 I123 I2511)
1)
13 I108 I236 13 I124 I2521)
1)
14 I109 I237 14 I125 I2531)
1)
15 I110 I238 15 I126 I2541)
1)
16 I111 I239 16 I127 I2551)
1)
These PLC inputs are not available when analogue inputs are active.

PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2 PL 410 #1 PL 410 #2
1 O32 O64 1 O48 O80
2 O33 O65 2 O49 O81
3 O34 O66 3 O50 O82
4 O35 O67 4 O51 O83
5 O36 O68 5 O52 O84
6 O37 O69 6 O53 O85
7 O38 O70 7 O54 O86
8 O39 O71 8 O55 O87
9 O40 O72 9 O56 O88
10 O41 O73 10 O57 O89
11 O42 O74 11 O58 O90
12 O43 O75 12 O59 O91
13 O44 O76 13 O60 O92
14 O45 O77 14 O611) O931)
15 O46 O78 15 O621) O941)
16 O47 O79 16 Control ready
1)
These PLC outputs are not available when analogue inputs are active.
11.3.5 Analogue inputs on the PL 410 / PL 410 B

X15,X16,X17,X18 analogue input

1 10 V to +10 V
2 0 V (reference potential)
3 Screen
11.3.6 Inputs for thermistors on the PL 410 / PL 410 B

X19,X20,X21,X22 connection for Pt 100

1 I + constant current for Pt 100 (5 mA)
2 U + measuring input for Pt 100
3 U - measuring input for Pt 100
4 I - constant current for Pt 100
5 Screen

11.4 Connector assignment on the PA 110
X2,X3,X4,X5 analogue inputs

Assignment as X15,X16,X17,X18 on PL 410
X7,X8,X9,X10 connection for Pt 100

Assignment as X19,X20,X21,X22 on PL 410

Please use only HEIDENHAIN connecting cables.
11.5.1 Connection of PLC inputs/outputs on the LE

HEIDENHAIN recommends the installation of a transfer unit with a terminal strip in the switch
cabinet.
max. 40 m
Id.-Nr. 263 954 ..
If a transfer unit is not required, use HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id.-Nr. 244 005 ..
Assignment:
1 = green/red 14 = green/blue 27 = yellow/black

2 = brown/black 15 = yellow 28 = white/yellow
3 = white/black 16 = red 29 = grey/blue
4 = green/black 17 = grey 30 = pink/blue
5 = brown/red 18 = blue 31 = pink/red
6 = white/red 19 = pink 32 = brown/blue max. 25 m
7 = white/green 20 = white/grey 33 = pink/green
8 = red/blue 21 = yellow/grey 34 = brown
9 = yellow/red 22 = green/red 35 = yellow/pink
10 = grey/pink 23 = white/pink 36 = violet Id.-Nr. 244 005..
11 = black 24 = grey/green 37 = white
12 = pink/brown 25 = yellow/brown
13 = yellow/blue 26 = grey/brown
If the connector is to be mounted at the customer's facility, HEIDENHAIN can provide a 37-pin
solderable connector (Id.-Nr. 243 937 ZY).

11.5.2 PL 400 connection
max. 3 m max. 20 m
X10 X11 X10
PL 400 PL 400
LE
X47
Id.-Nr. 222 661.. Id.-Nr. 250 481..
max. 20 m
11.5.3 PL 410 / PL 410 B connection
max. 20 m
X1 X2 X1
PL 410 PL 410 LE
Id.-Nr. 289 111 .. Id.-Nr. 289 111 ..
max. 20 m
11.5.4 PA 110 connection

max. 20 m
X1 X 47
PA 110
LE
Id.-Nr. 289 111 ..
max. 3 m max. 20 m
X1 X11 X10 X 47
PA 110 PL 400
LE
Id.-Nr. 275 478 .. Id.-Nr. 250 481 ..
max. 20 m

11.5.5 Connection to analogue inputs
Connecting cable 2 x 0.14 mm screened, 50 m max.
11.5.6 Connection to inputs for thermistors

The Pt 100 thermistors must be connected in four-wire mode.
I+
1
Measuring input U+
2
Measuring input U
3
I 4
5
Pt100 Customers cable

4 x 0.14 mm2 screened, max 50 m

3
12 Machine operating panel
A separate 37-pin female connector (X46) is mounted on the logic unit for the connection to the
machine operating panel. This connector includes the PLC inputs I128 to I152, the PLC outputs
O0 to O7, as well as the 0 V and +24 V of the PLC power supply. The PLC inputs I128 to I152 may
be connected only with the power supply from pins 36 and 37, since this power supply is internally
secured as required.
HEIDENHAIN now offers a machine operating panel. It is installed beneath the TNC keyboard. The
dimension drawings show the standard set of keys. Four additional black keys are supplied with the
panel. The machine tool builder to use them replace unneeded axis keys, for example. Keys with
other symbols are also available upon request.
MB 410 Id.-Nr. 293 757 02 (suited to BC 110 and TE 400 black)

MB 420 Id.-Nr. 293 757 12 (suited to BC 120 and TE 400 B gray)
Assignment of PLC inputs to the keys of the MB:
I
I I I I I I I 146
136 135 134 137 138 143 145
I I I I I I I
128 148 133 149 139 144 150
I I I I I I I I
129 130 131 132 140 141 142 147
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 3-65

12.1 Pin connections
X46 Machine operating panel
Pin number Assignment Key on MB 410

1 I128 X
2 I129 Y
3 I130 Z
4 I131 IV
5 I132 V
6 I133 X+
7 I134 Y+
8 I135 Z+
9 I136 IV+
10 I137 V+
11 I138 FN1
12 I139 FN2
13 I140 FN3
14 I141 FN4
15 I142 FN5
16 I143 Spindle on
17 I144 Spindle off
18 I145 Coolant on/off
19 I146 NC start
20 I147 NC stop
21 I148 Rapid traverse
22 I149 Black
23 I150 Black
24 I151
25 I152
26 O0
27 O1
28 O2
29 O3
30 O4
31 O5
32 O6
33 O7
34, 35 0 V (PLC)1)
36, 37 + 24 V (PLC)2)
The PLC inputs I128 to I152 must be supplied with power only from pins 36 and 37, since this
power supply is properly safeguarded.
1) Externally available PLC reference potential for the outputs O0-O7

2) Externally available (via fuse) PLC supply voltage for the inputs.
3-66 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 01.98

HEIDENHAIN recommends that a 37-pin D-subminiature connector should be mounted on the

machine operating panel. The machine operating panel can be connected to the logic unit with the
standard HEIDENHAIN connecting cable Id.-Nr. 263 954 ..
max. 40 m
Id.-Nr. 263 954 ..
If the machine operating panel does not have a 37-pin D-subminiature connector, the HEIDENHAIN
connecting cable Id.-Nr. 244 005 .. may be used.
max. 40 m
Id.-Nr. 244 005 ..
For the assignments of the multi-core conductors see "PLC inputs/outputs".
If for any reason the manufacturers of the machine have to produce their own cable, a 37-pin
connector is available from HEIDENHAIN (Id.-Nr. 243 937 ZY).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12 Machine operating panel 3-67

13 TNC keyboard
The TNC keyboard TE 400 is connected to the logic unit by a connecting cable. Additionally, the Soft
keys for the VDU (BC 110) are connected to the TNC keyboard by a flat cable. The flat cable is one
of the items supplied with the VDU.

On the logic unit
X45 TNC keyboard (TE 400)
D-sub female connector (37-pin)
1 RL0
2 RL1
3 RL2
4 RL3
5 RL4
6 RL5
7 RL6
8 RL7
9 RL8
10 RL9
11 RL10
12 RL11
13 RL12
14 RL13
15 RL14
16 RL15
17 RL16
18 RL17
19 RL18
20 SL0
21 SL1
22 SL2
23 SL3
24 SL4
25 SL5
26 SL6
27 SL7
28 RL19
29 RL20
30 Do not use
31 RL21
32 RL22
33 RL23
34 Spindle override (wiper)
35 Feed override (wiper)
36 + 5 V override-potentiometer
37 0 V override-potentiometer
Housing External screen
3-68 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 13 TNC keyboard 01.98

On the TNC keyboard
X2 for the connection to the logic unit
Pin connections as for X45 on the logic unit
X1 for the connection to the soft keys on the Visual Display Unit (BC)
1 SL0
2 SL1
3 SL2
4 SL3
5 Do not use
6 RL15
7 RL14
8 RL13
9 RL12

Standardkabel Verlngerungskabel
Id.-Nr. 263 954 .. Id.-Nr. 263 955 ..
TE 400 LE
max. 40 m
The flat cable between the TNC keyboard and the VDU is included in the
package delivered with the VDU.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 13 TNC keyboard 3-69

14 VDU
The power supply for the VDU-BC 110 B is described under the heading "Power supply". The video
signals are transmitted via a connecting cable from the logic unit to the display unit. The soft keys
for the VDU are connected to the TNC keyboard by a flat cable. This flat cable is one of the items
supplied with the VDU.

X43 VDU (BC 110)
D-sub female connector (15-pin)

1, 8, 11 GND
2 to 6, 12, 13 Do not use
7 R
9 V SYNC
10 H SYNC
14 G
15 B

Standardkabel Verlngerungskabel
Id.-Nr. 250 477.. Id.-Nr. 254 640
BC 110 LE
max. 40 m
The flat connecting cable between the VDU and the TNC keyboard is one of the items supplied with
the VDU.
3-70 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 14 VDU 01.98

14.3 Connecting the BC 120
X43 Visual Display Unit (BC 120)
Logic unit Adapter Extension cable BC 120

I 313 434 02 Id. Nr. 312 878 ..
D-sub connector Assignment 2-row / 3-row D-sub D-sub connector D-sub connector
(female) 15-pin connector (female) 15-pin (male) 15-pin
2-row (male) 15-pin 3-row 3-row
3-row
1 GND 1 Coax I Red 1 1
2 Do not assign 2 Coax I Green 2 2
3 Do not assign 3 Coax I Blue 3 3
4 Do not assign 4 4 4
6 Do not assign 6 Coax S Red 6 6
7 R 7 Coax S Green 7 7
8 GND 8 Coax S Blue 8 8
9 VSYNC 9 9 9
10 HSYNC 10 Gray 10 10
11 GND 11 Green 11 11
13 Do not assign 13 Pink 13 13
14 G 14 Yellow 14 14
15 B 15 15 15
Housing External shield Housing Housing External shield Housing Housing
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 14 VDU 3-71

BC 110 B
260 520 01 TE 400
250 517 02 15 Cable overview
TNC 415 B PL 410 B
263 371 x2
PL 410 B
263 371 x2
PA 110
262 651 01
TNC 407 MB 410

293 757 01
20m
VL: Extension cable

40m for separation points with connecting cable
for extending existing connecting cable
VB: Connecting cable between two components
that do not have their own cable.
KA: Cable adapter
30.03.95
VB VB VB VB
250 477 .. Connecting cable 263 954 .. 263 954 .. 289 111 ..
included with BC 110B
Encoders Accessories
KA
60m VL VL 274 556 .. VB 50m
263 955 .. 263 955 .. 272 291 .. HR 332
VB 266 064 ..
VL VB
289 111 ..
254 640 .. 244 005 ..
HR 130
Cable assembly VB 254 040 ..
289 111 ..
HR 330
251 534 ..
VL KA
262 006 .. 50m 249 889 ..
VL
281 429.. VB max. 20 m HR 150
270 909 ..
HR 150
HRA 110
261 097 01
HR 150
257 061 ..
max. 20 m
RS-422-C Adapter block
TNC 407: 4 inputs 249 819 01 Step switch
TNC 415: 5 inputs
LE 415 B/ VB
289 208 ..
270 908 ..
TNC 415: 1 input

LE 407 VB
TNC 407: 2 inputs 20m
239 760 .. Included with FE
274 545 01
FE 401 B
VL 251 029 01
262 006 .. RS-232-C Adapter block
KA 239 758 01
VB
285 289 .. 284 574 .. TM 110
Connection box
251 249 01 284 212 ..
( LE 415B orly)
50m
VB 12m
TT 110
20m 262 004 .. 288 949 ..
KA
VB VB 274 543 ..
50m
290 109 .. 244 005 ..
VL TS 120
VB VB 265 348 ..
262 011 ..
290 110 .. 263 954 ..
VB APE 510 227 590 01 SE 510
274 539 .. APE 511 275 759 01 230 473 01
20m 40m max. 30 m
max. 7m 3m
15-pin male connector 37-pin male connector
243 971 ZY 243 937 ZY TS 511
VB VL
262 009 .. 274 540 .. 265 349 ..
Nominal value PLC I / 0 40m
output
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 15 Cable overview 3-72

New ID numbers for connecting cables
Connecting cable Old Id. Nr. New Id. Nr.

LE - BC 110B 250 477 .. 311 531 ..
LE - BC 110 B (extension) 254 640 .. 311 532 ..
LE - encoder 262 006 .. 309 774 ..
LE - encoder 262 004 .. 309 773 ..
LE - encoder 262 009 .. 298 399 ..
LE - encoder 262 011 .. 298 400 ..
Connector male 15-pin 243 971 ZY 315 650 03
Connector male 37-pin 243 937 ZY 315 650 07

3-74
16.1 LE 407
16 Dimensions
476+5
135.5+2
18.7"+.2" 456+2
0 5.3"+.08"
17.95"+.08" 132.5+2
M3 (Einschraublnge max.3)
.51"
TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425
10
13
5.2"+.08"
.4" M3 (LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT .12")
.79"
20
15
.6"
.28"
7
Befestigungsmglichkeit
PL 400
MOUNTING POSSIBILITY
11.024".012"
12.83.02"
PL 400
3260.5
2800.3
12.9"
328
10.5".008"
2670.2
16 Dimensions
392
15.43" 83.5
3.29"
12.5
10,5
.5"
.41"
9
.35"
25 427
01.98
1" 16.8"
01.98
16.2 LE 415
476+5
18.7"+.2" 456+2
10 17.95"+.08" 165+2
M3 (Einschraublnge max.3)
.51"
13
.4"
TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425
6.5"+.08"
M3 (LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT .12")
15
.6"
.28"
.79"
20
7
Befestigungsmglichkeit
PL 400
MOUNTING POSSIBILITY
11.024".012"
10.5".008"
PL 400
12.83".02"
2670,2
2800,3
3260,5
12.9"
328
16 Dimensions
412 391,5

1.6" .08" 15.41" 83,5
0
3.29"
12,5
10,5
.5"
.41"
9
.35"
26 424
3-75
1.02" 16.7"
3-76
16.3 TE 400
.236".008"
400
60.2
60.2 15.75" 3880.2 371 18
18
.7"
.236".008" 15.276".008" 14.6" .7"
TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425
105
4.1"
196
7.7"
10.315".008"
2620.2
10.8"
274
232
9.1"
16 Dimensions
5.5 47
.217" 1.8"
M5
.37"
9.5
1.4"+.2"
36+5
8+1
DIA.3+.04"
.08"
Frontplattenausschnitt
2
FRONT PANEL OPENING
9.53"+.02"
10.315"0.2"
242+0.5
25
2620.2
1"
10
DIA.4"
Montageflche 380+0.5
0.5
MOUNTING SURFACE 14.96"+.02" 388+0.2
01.98
.02"
15.276"+.008"
01.98
16.4 BC 110 B
400 375 14 1
0 15.75" 14.76" .55" .04"
60.2 1120.2 2760.2 3880.2 105 2
.236".008" 4.41".008" 10.866".008" 15.275".008" 4.13" .08"
TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425
2-0.5
.08"-.02"
.236".008"
.59"
15
60.2
Z
DIA.34"
DIA.4"
10
MAX. 10.83"
8.6
12.6"
320
max.275
A
12.162".008"
7.99"
3080.2
203
Z
16 Dimensions
.79"
20
365 FRONT PANEL OPENING
14.37" 8-1
16 19 Ansicht A .31"-.04"
.63" .75" VIEW A 372+2
.31"-.04"
14.65"+.08"
8-1
M5
11.50"+.08"
292+2
X4 X1
X3 X2
3-77
16.5 PLC expansion boards
PL 400
2.42"
2.30"
61.5
58.5
1.48"
37.5
14.5 31
.57" 1.22"
360+1
14.2"+.04"
M4 20.5
.8"
.2"
5
3.11"
79
9.252".008"
2.64"
67
9.65"+.04"
2350.2
8.86"+.04"
245+1
225+1
14.5 363+1
.57" 14.3"+.04"
391+1
15.4"+.04"
4.5
DIA.177"
10 800.2 2100.2 3400.2
.4" 3.15".008" 8.268".008" 13.386".008"
0
3-78 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 16 Dimensions 01.98

PL 410
282
11.1"
23.5 2350.2
.93" 9.252.008"
180.5 52.5
.7.02" 2.07"
PL-Eingnge
.35"
3.6 10.5 47.5

9
.14" PL INPUTS .04+.02" 1.87"
9.3
DIA.37"
8.268.008"
2100.2
8.98"
228
180.5 PL-Ausgnge
.7.02" PL OUTPUTS
Masseanschlu M5
GROUND CONNECTION M5
PL 410 B
282 8
11.1" .315"
23.5 2350.2
.93" 9.252.008"
180.5 52.5
.7.02" 2.07"
PL-Eingnge
.35"
3.6 10.5 47.5

9
.14" PL INPUTS .04+.02" 1.87"
9.3
DIA.37"
8.268.008"
2100.2
8.98"
228
180.5 PL-Ausgnge
.7.02" PL OUTPUTS
Masseanschlu M5
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 16 Dimensions 3-79

PA 110
1.5+0.5
.06+.02"
Masseanschlu M5
GROUND CONNECTION 42+1
1.65+.04"
205+1 30
.12"
8.07+.04" 1.18"
3
3.62+.04"
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
24V
92+1
X1
X10
X7
X8
X9
1400.2
5.512.008" Montageschiene nach DIN 50022
2.362.008"
32.5 MOUNTING SPAR AS PER DIN 50022

600.2
1.28"
16.5
.65"
5.5
.217"

16.6 Cable adapters
Cable adapter for TS 120
Id.-Nr. 244 891..
8 80
.315" 3.150"
3
DIA.315"
.118"
8
DIA2.165"
1.575"
55
40
DIA1.858".012"
47.20.3
max. 7 52
MAX.276" 2.047"
Cable adapter for HR 330

Id.-Nr. 249 889..
M5 38 14 54 23
1.469" .551" 2.126" .906"
1.26"x.59"
2.165"
32x15
55
DIA1.417"
36
4
.158"
Mounting opening for wall thickness S<4 Mounting opening for wall thickness S>4
23
.906"
1.732"
1.339"
1.457"
1.732"
.787"
44
34
37
44
20
5.5 S M4 S
.217"

Cable adapter for TM 110 Id.-Nr. 285 289 ..
1
.039"
DIA 1.181"
DIA 1.104"
29
28
29.4
1.155"
1.155"
29.4
1.5"
38
38
M3 1.5"
93 0
0
R 1
7"
R
5
3.
.2"
5 8
.2" DIA .315"

Adapter Block RS-232-C/V.24
7 780.2
.275" 3.071".008" M4
1.5"
38
92 31.5
3.62" 1.24"
Adapter Block RS-422/V.11
7 780.2
.275" 3.071".008"
M4
1.5"
38
1.24"
31.5
15
.6"
92
3.62"
Opening for mounting the adapter

780.2
3.071*.008"
9 60+1
.83"+.02"
21+0.5
.35" 2.36"+.04" 5
10.5
.41"
.2"

16.7 Handwheels
16.7.1 HR 130 integral handwheel
0.2 Befestigungsgewinde M3 x 5
DIA .008" FIXING HOLE M3 x .197"
361.5 3x
1.417.06"
DIA .3937.0004"
DIA .3937.0008"
14
.551"
100.01
100.02
DIA 2.283"
3 x 120
120
58
48
12.5 1.890"
DIA 1.4173.0025"
DIA 1.4173.0010"
.492"
.630"
16
36 f8
30
4.4
DIA .173
19.5+1
.768+.04"
10
.394"

Knob, small
18
.709"
SW 5.5
M3
M3
3x
max. 10
7 6
MAX .394" .276" .236"
1
.0394" HR ...
DIA 2.402"
10
61
DIA .394"
SW 14
18
.709" (18)
(.709")
Frontplatte (2)
FRONT PANEL (.079")
Knob large
12
.472"
SW 5.5
M3
M3
3x
7 6
.276" .236"
max. 15.5
MAX .610"
HR ...
SW 1.5
27
1.063" (12)
48 (.472") 90
1.89" 3.543"
Frontplatte (2) 10 F7
FRONT PANEL (.079") DIA .3937 +.0011"
DIA .3937 +.0005"

Knob, ergonomic
12
.472"
SW 5.5
17.7
M3
M3
.697"
3x
10
.394" 7 6
.276" .236"
4
.158"
HR ...
SW 2
(12)
(.472")
6 70
.236" 2.756"
22
.866"
10 H7
Frontplatte (2) DIA .3937 +.0006"
FRONT PANEL (.079")

16.7.2 HR 150
0.2 A
.008" A
0.1 A M3 0.3 C
.004" A 361.5
SW 5.5 DIA .012" C
1.417.06"
HEX FLATS
DIA .3937.0004"
DIA .3937.0008"
C 14
.551"
100.01
100.02
A
DIA 2.283"
3 x 120
120
58
48
12.5 1.890"
DIA 1.4173.0010"
DIA 1.4173.0025"
.492"
.630"
16
B
36 f8
30
6
DIA .236
19.5+1
0.2 B
DIA .008" B .768+.04"
10
DIA 1.102
.394"
28
52
2.047

3-88
16.7.3 Portable handwheel HR 330

95.5
3.76"
62 28
2.44" 1.10"
TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425
2.83"
72
2.87"
73
45
16 Dimensions
190
7.48"
Kabellnge gestreckt 2195

172
87"
6.77"
FULLY EXTENDED
CABLE LENGTH

HEIDENHAIN
HR 330.001
Kabel ungewendelt, Kabellnge = 6m
IV
+
CABLE NONHELIX, CABLE LENGTH = 17.2 FT

01.98
93
3.66"
500.2
1.969".008"
.315"
.197"
.87"
22
8
4.17"
106
2.677".00 8"
680.2
Halter
HOLDER
96
3.78"
87 68.5
3.42" 2.7"
26
8.66"
220
1.02"
237.5
9.37"
X IV
Y V
Z
2.36"
60
Kabellnge nach Kundenwunsch

CABLE LENGTH AS REQUESTED


16.7.6 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 (for HR 150)
2.28 .04"
58 1
HR 150
2.08"
53
.04 .02"
1 0.5
248
9.76"
1.8 .04"
45 1
DIA .24"
6
X
.55"
4.567 .008"
4.567 .008"
14
8.15 + .08"
116 0.2
116 0.2
207 + 2
9
.35"
230 0.2
9.055 .008"
X
Datenausgang HRA
DATA INTERFACE HRA
S1 S2 X31 24V
X23 +
Masseanschlu M5

16.8 TT 110 for tool calibration
40
0.01 0.03
// A A
.0004" .00012"
20
.275"
7
.157"
4
2.598"
66
3.701"
94
15
1.811"
46
9
.338"
8.6
1.102"
28
.020"
0.5
30
A DIA.1.181"
34
DIA.1.338"
76.5
3.011"
Lnge 3m
LENGTH 9.8ft
R
20
1.575"
40
41.5
1.634"

16.9 MB 410
.236.008"
400
60.2
15.75"
2.047"
60.2 3880.2 20
.354"
52
9
.236.008" 15.276.008" .787"
IV+ Z+ FN
Y+ V+ 1
3.386"
1
4.33"
110
86
FN
X X+ 2 0
FN FN FN
Y Z IV V 3 4 5 0
3.858.008"
5.5 234 75
980.2
.217" 9.213" 2.953"
0.5 Montageflche
2.36"
60
9 .02" MOUNTING SURFACE
DIA .35" M5
.2.02"
50.5
3880.2
1.26"
15.276+.008"
32
.16"
4
3.858.008"
3.465+.04"
980.2
88+1
.08"
2
FRONT PANEL OPENING

10
DIA .4"
40
1.57"
356.5 50.5 378+1
14.03" .2.02" 14.88+.04"

16.10 MB 420
.315.008"
400
80.2
15.75"
2.05"
120.2 3760.2 20
52
.35"
9
.472.008" 14.803.008" .8"
IV+ Z+ FN
Y+ V+ 1
1
4.33"
3.39"
110
86
FN
X X+ 2 0
FN FN FN
Y Z IV V 3 4 5 0
3.7.008"
940.2
5.5 234 75
.217" 9.21" 2.95"
0.5
M
.02"
2.36"
60
9 3760.2 M5
DIA .35" 14.803.008"
1.26"
32
.16"
4
.47"x45 (4x)
12x45 (4x)
F
.08"
2
10
3.7.008"
DIA .4" 4
940.2
40
.16"
1.57" F 384+0.5
356.5
14.04" 15.118+.02"

16.11 TE 400 B

16.12 BC 120
400 25 378.5+1
.98"
15.75" .98" 14.9+.04"
25
.39"
12
10
.47"
40 13
13.07.012"
1.57"
3320.3
9.92"
252
12.34+.04"
313.5+1
13.78"
350
5.6 980.3 2780.3 3760.3
.98"
25
0
DIA .22" 3.86.012" 10.94.012" 14.8.012"
25 365 25 980.2 2780.2 3760.2

M5 0
.98" 14.37" .98" 3.86.008" 10.94.008" 14.8.008"
13.07.008"
12.56+.04"
3320.2
F 319+1
0.5
.31"
M
8
.02" F 372+1
2
.08" 14.65+.04"

4
Machine integration Contents
1 Machine axes 4-6

1.1 Measuring systems 4-6
1.1.1 Signal period 4-6
1.1.2 Direction of traverse 4-8
1.1.3 Measuring system monitoring 4-9
1.2 Axis designation 4-12
1.2.1 Assignment 4-13
1.2.2 Current tool axis 4-14
1.3 VDU display 4-14
1.4 Traverse ranges 4-16
1.5 Lubrication pulse 4-19
1.6 Axis-error compensation 4-23
1.6.1 Backlash compensation 4-23
1.6.2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion 4-24
1.6.3 Linear axis-error compensation 4-26
1.6.4 Non-linear axis error compensation 4-27
1.6.5 Temperature compensation 4-32
1.6.6 Stiction 4-33
1.7 PLC positioning 4-35
1.8 PLC axes 4-38
1.9 Swivel axes 4-41
1.9.1 "Tilt working plane" function 4-41
1.9.2 Five-axis NC programs with swivel axes 4-48
1.10 Synchronized axes 4-49
1.10.1 Synchronization control 4-50
1.10.2 Conventions 4-51
2 Reference marks 4-52

2.1 Passing over the reference marks 4-53
2.1.1 Measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks 4-54
2.1.2 Measuring systems with one reference mark 4-58
2.1.3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder 4-60
2.2 Machine datum 4-63
3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes 4-65

3.1 The position control loop of an NC-machine 4-65
3.2 Servo positioning in TNC controls 4-66
3.2.1 Control with servo lag 4-66
3.2.2 Control with feed precontrol 4-74
3.3 Offset adjustment 4-77
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number 4-77
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment 4-77
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Machine axes 4-1

3.3.3 Offset adjustment with integral factor 4-78
3.4 Contour behaviour 4-80
3.4.1 Radial acceleration 4-80
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners 4-80
3.4.3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90 4-81
3.4.4 Contour speed related to tool cutting edge 4-81
3.4.5 Preset tolerance at corners 4-82
3.5 Monitoring functions 4-83
3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag 4-84
3.5.2 Position monitoring for operation with feed precontrol 4-85
3.5.3 Monitoring the analogue voltage 4-86
3.5.4 Movement-monitoring 4-86
3.5.5 Standstill monitoring 4-87
3.5.6 Positioning window 4-87
3.6 Controlled axes 4-89
3.6.1 Axis-enable, feed rate enable 4-89
3.6.2 Axes in position 4-90
3.6.3 Axes in motion 4-91
3.6.4 Open control loop 4-92
3.6.5 Actual - nominal value transfer 4-92
4 Main Spindle 4-94

4.1 Analogue output of the spindle speed 4-95
4.1.1 Direction of spindle rotation 4-95
4.1.2 Gear range 4-96
4.1.3 S-Override 4-99
4.1.4 Gear change 4-100
4.1.5 Offset adjustment 4-104
4.2 BCD-coded output of spindle speed 4-104
4.3 Spindle-orientation 4-106
4.4 Tapping 4-112
4.4.1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analogue spindle-speed output 4-113
4.4.2 Tapping with floating tap holder and BCD-coded spindle-speed output 4-116
4.4.3 Rigid Tapping 4-117
5 EMERGENCY STOP-routine 4-120

5.1 Connection diagram 4-121
5.2 Flow-diagram 4-122
5.2.1 TNC 415 4-122
5.2.2 TNC 407 4-124
6 Display and operation 4-126

6.1 Machine datum 4-126
6.2 Colour adjustment 4-130
4-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Machine axes 01.98

6.3 Graphics window 4-132
6.3.1 View in three planes 4-132
6.3.2 Rotating the coordinate system 4-132
6.3.3 BLK form and datum shift 4-132
6.4 Status-window 4-134
6.4.1 Position display 4-134
6.4.2 Position display with rotary axes 4-135
6.4.3 Feed rate display 4-138
6.4.4 Display of the M-functions 4-139
6.4.5 Control is in operation 4-140
6.4.6 Cancel status-display 4-140
6.5 PLC-Window 4-141
6.6 Error messages 4-142
6.7 Cycles 4-144
6.7.1 Cycle inhibit 4-144
6.7.2 Pocket milling 4-145
6.7.3 Milling-cycles for pockets with free-programmed contours 4-146
6.7.4 Scaling factor 4-147
6.7.5 Cylinder interpolation 4-147
6.8 Return to the contour 4-148
6.9 Files 4-150
6.9.1 File types disable and protect 4-150
6.9.2 Block numbers - step size for ISO programs 4-151
6.9.3 Table size 4-151
6.9.4 Datum point for values in datum table 4-151
6.10 User-parameters 4-152
6.11 Code-numbers 4-152
6.12 Programming station 4-153
6.13 Dialogue language 4-153
6.13.1 Decimal sign 4-154
6.14 Memory test 4-154
6.15 End of program 4-154
6.16 Overwrite Q-parameters 4-154
6.17 Arc end-point tolerance 4-155
6.18 Radius compensation R+, R- 4-155
6.19 "POWER INTERRUPTED" Message 4-155
6.20 Help files 4-156

7 M-functions 4-158
7.1 Program-halt on M-functions 4-161
7.2 Program-halt on M06 4-161
7.3 Modal cycle call M89 4-161
7.4 Reduced feed-rate of tool axis with M103 4-161
7.5 Selecting Kv factors with M105/M106 4-162
8 Key-simulation 4-164
8.1 TNC-keyboard (TE 400) 4-164
8.2 Machine-control panel 4-174
9 Touch probe 4-176

9.1 Standard touch probe cycles 4-176
9.2 Digitizing with TS 120 4-180
9.2.1 Scanning cycles 4-182
9.2.2 Response of the digitizing sequence at corners 4-183
9.2.3 Optimizing the digitizing sequence 4-185
9.3 Digitising with the TM 110 4-189
9.3.1 Interfacing the TM 110 4-189
9.4 Tool calibration with the TT 110 4-192
9.4.1 Interfacing the TT 110 4-192
10 Electronic handwheel 4-196

10.1 Integral handwheel HR 130 4-198
10.3.1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs 4-199
10.3.2 PLC program example 4-200
10.4 HR 410 portable handwheel 4-201
10.5 Integral handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter HRA 110 4-202
10.5.1 Assignment of switch positions to the PLC inputs 4-203
10.5.2 PLC program example 4-204
11 Analogue inputs and outputs 4-206

11.1 Analogue inputs 4-206
11.2 Analogue outputs 4-207
12 Increment positioning 4-209
13 Hirth coupling 4-212

13.1 Positioning in Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode 4-212
13.2 Positioning in controlled mode 4-212
13.3 Program example 4-213
14 Datum correction 4-221

15 Tool changer 4-223
15.1 Tool table, Pocket table 4-223
15.1.1 Special Tools 4-226
15.1.2 Tool life, replacement tool 4-227
15.2 Controlling the tool changer 4-228
15.2.1 Output of tool number (fixed pocket coding) 4-230
15.2.2 Output of pocket number (variable pocket coding) 4-231
15.3 PLC program example 4-246
15.3.1 Program module TOOL DEF 4-248
15.3.2 Program module TOOL CALL 4-249
15.3.3 Program module STANDBY 4-250
15.3.4 Program module STANDBY BACK 4-250
15.3.5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN 4-251
15.3.6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT 4-252
15.3.7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN/OUT 4-253
15.3.8 Program module CHANGE 4-254
15.3.9 Program module COMPARE P-CODE WITH ISTREG 4-255
15.3.10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG 4-256
15.3.11 Program module COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH 4-257
16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 4-258

16.1 Code numbers for commissioning 4-258
16.2 Preparation of the machine 4-258
16.3 Commissioning the control 4-262
16.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters 4-262
16.3.2 Entry of the PLC-program 4-262
16.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine 4-262
16.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse 4-263
16.3.5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges 4-264
16.3.6 Optimizing the control with lag (MP1390 = 1) 4-264
16.3.7 Optimizing the control with feed pre-control (MP1390 = 0) 4-268
16.3.8 Optimize the integral factor 4-272
16.3.9 Adjust the offset 4-273
16.3.10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions 4-273
17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4-275

17.1 Analogue voltage output 4-275
17.1.1 Voltage proportional to feed rate (MP3011 = 1) 4-275
17.1.2 Voltage from the PLC (MP3011 = 2) 4-275
17.1.3 Definition of the voltage via M function (MP3011 = 3) 4-275
17.2 Graphic simulation without TOOL CALL 4-278
17.3 Program stop with M functions 4-278

1 Machine axes
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC 407/TNC 415 permit the control of up to five machine
axes and the main spindle (see also under "Servo positioning").
The machine parameter MP10 can be set to determine which axes should be operational on the
machine. If necessary, MP10 can be used to select all the axes functions (control, display, pass over
reference marks etc.)
MP10 Active axes

Entry range: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0 = not active

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = active
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
1.1 Measuring systems

Incremental measuring systems can be attached to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls.
See also chapter "Mounting and electrical installation ".
1.1.1 Signal period

1
The signal period of the attached measuring system in m or is entered in the machine
1000
parameter MP330.x .
Linear measurement
For linear measurement systems with sinusoidal output signals the signal period is the same as
the graduation period:
Signal period (~) = grating period
The standard-linear measurement systems from HEIDENHAIN have a graduation period of 20 m

(LS models; except for LS 101 and LS 405: 10 m) and 100 m (LB model) .
If linear measurement is performed by rotary encoder and ballscrew, the line count of the rotary
encoder (see encoder technical data) as well as the ballscrew pitch must be considered when
calculating the signal period:
ballscrew pitch [mm] 1000 [mm / mm]
Signal period (~) =
line count
Up to 3 decimal places can be entered in MP330.x.

For linear measurement systems in combination with the interpolation and digitising electronics EXE
for the square-wave signal inputs X5 (TNC 407) and X6 (TNC 407/TNC 415) the interpolation factor of
the EXE must be taken into account:
Signal period ( grating period

) = interpolation factor
For linear measurement by rotary encoder and ballscrew:
Signal period ( 1
) = ballscrew pitch [mm] 1000 [mm / mm] line count interpolation factor
The TNC always does a 4-fold evaluation of the signals at the square-wave inputs.
1
If a counting step < 1 m or is desired, the signal period ( ) must not be greater than
1000
4
4 m or .
1000
Only on the TNC 407 is it possible in MP340 to enter the interpolation factor of the external
electronics (EXE) at the encoder input X5 or X6. The TNC needs this information in order to be able
to determine the absolute position when encoders with distance-coded reference marks are used.
The interpolation factor is entered individually for each axis.
Angular measurement: For angular measurement systems the signal period is calculated as
follows:
signal period (~) = line360
count
1000
or
signal period ( ) = line360 1
count interpolation factor
1000
If the angular measurement is made by gearing up or down this must be taken into account when
calculating the signal period.
MP330 Signal period
Entry range 0.1 to 100 in [m] or [ 1000

1
]
MP330.0 X axis
MP330.1 Y axis
MP330.2 Z axis
MP330.3 4th axis
MP330.4 5th axis

MP340 Interpolation factor of the EXE at X5, X6 (only TNC 407)
Input: 0, 1, 5
0 = No encoder at X5, X6
or EXE without interpolation
1 = EXE without Interpolation
5 = EXE with 5-fold interpolation
MP340.0 X axis
MP340.1 Y axis
MP340.2 Z axis
MP340.3 4th axis
MP340.4 5th axis
1.1.2 Direction of traverse

The machine parameters MP210 and MP1040 determine the direction of traverse for the axes. The
direction of traverse for the axes of numerically controlled machine tools are defined by DIN (see
also under Sections "Axis designation" and "Commissioning and start-up procedure").
MP210 defines the counting direction for the measuring system signals. The counting direction
depends on the mounting orientation of the measuring systems.
MP210 Counting direction of the measuring system signals

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0 = positive

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = negative
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Machine parameter MP1040 determines the polarity of the nominal value voltage during the positive
direction of traverse.
MP1040 Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the positive direction of traverse
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

The NC uses markers to tell the PLC in which direction the axes are travelling.
Marker Function Set Reset
M2160 Direction of NC NC
to M2164 traverse
0 = positive
1 = negative
M2160 X axis
M2161 Y axis
M2162 Z axis
M2163 4th axis
M2164 5th axis
1.1.3 Measuring system monitoring

HEIDENHAIN contouring controls can monitor the signal transmissions of the measuring system.
This measuring system monitoring must be activated by a machine parameter.
Three different conditions can be checked:
Error message
The absolute position of distance-coded reference marks C
The amplitude of the measuring system signals A
The edge separation of the measuring system signals B
If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the error message "Measuring system <axis> defective
A/B/C" will appear.
For sinusoidal signals the LE monitors the amplitude of the measuring system signals, for square-
wave signals the LE evaluates the fault detection signal (UaS) of the external electronics (EXE).
MP30 Checking the absolute position of the distance-coded reference marks

Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring system signals
Entry: %xxxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 5 Axis S
MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring system signals

Entry: %xxxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 5 S-axis


1.2 Axis designation
The coordinate axes and their directions of travel are standardized in ISO 841.
The directions of traverse may be simply determined by using the "Right-hand rule".
+Z
+X
+Y
In the direction of the spindle axis the convention is:

The movement of the tool towards the workpiece is the negative direction of traverse. When
creating an NC-program one proceeds as if the tool is moving and the workpiece is always
stationary.
If the machine moves the workpiece, then the direction of movement and the direction of the axis
are opposite to one another. The positive relative directions of movement are then designated +X',
+Y' etc.
+X
+X
The fourth or fifth axis can be used either as an axis of rotation or alternatively as an extra linear axis.
While the three principal axes have the standard designations X, Y and Z, the designations of the
fourth and fifth axes can be selected by a machine parameter.
An axis of rotation is designated by the letter A, B or C. The correlation with the principal axes and
determination of the direction of rotation is standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+Y
+C
+B
+X
+A

A secondary linear axis is designated by the letter U, V or W. The correlation with the principal
axes and the direction of travel are also standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+W +Y
+V
+X
+U
MP410 Axis designation
Entry: 0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
MP410.3 4th axis

MP410.4 5th axis
1.2.1 Assignment
The measuring system inputs X1 to X6 and the analogue outputs, Output 1 to Output S (on the
connector X8 ) can be assigned to the individual axes. The assignment is determined by the machine
parameters MP110 and MP120.
The assignment of measuring system input X6 and the nominal value output S to one of the five
axes is only possible when the function Spindle-Orientation is not utilised.
MP110 Assignment of the measuring system inputs to the axes
Entry: 0 = measuring system input X1

1 = measuring system, encoder input X2
MP110.0 X axis
MP110.1 Y axis
MP110.2 Z axis
MP110.3 4th axis
MP110.4 5th axis

MP120 Assignment of the analogue outputs
Entry: 0 = output 1
1 = output 2
2 = output 3
3 = output 4
4 = output 5
5 = output S
MP120.0 X axis
MP120.1 Y axis
MP120.2 Z axis
MP120.3 4th axis
MP120.4 5th axis
1.2.2 Current tool axis

In the NC-block "TOOL CALL" it is determined whether the tool moves parallel to one of the principal
axes X, Y, Z or parallel to the fourth axis. The fifth axis may not be defined as a tool axis. The
markers M2100 to M2103 are used to show which of the four axes is currently defined as the tool
axis. The appropriate marker is then set.
M2100 X-axis is tool axis NC NC

M2101 Y-axis is tool axis
M2102 Z-axis is tool axis
M2103 4th axis is tool axis
1.3 VDU display

Machine parameters can be used to select which of the active axes (MP10) should be displayed in
the status window.
The spindle position is displayed only when neither M03 nor M04 is active (see under "Main
spindle").
MP40 VDU display

Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 5 Axis S


1.4 Traverse ranges
For all five axes, three different software traverse ranges can be defined by machine parameters
(e.g. for pendulum machining). The traverse ranges are defined by so-called software limit switches.
The input values for the software limit switches are related to the machine datum (MP960.x). The
momentary software limit switch range is selected by the markers (M2817, M2816) and activated
by the strobe-marker (M2824).
The software limit switches for axes of rotation are not active unless a value of 0 is entered in
machine parameter MP810 (see section "Display and operation").
The MOD-function "Axis-limit" can be used to enter an additional limitation for each traverse range.
MP910 Traverse ranges

MP920 Entry range
MP911 Linear axis: - 99 999.9999 to + 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP921 Axis of rotation: - 99 999.9999 to + 99 999.9999 []
MP912 (Values relative to the machine datum)
MP922
Traverse range 1
Initial values after Power-On;
Activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 0
MP910.0 Software limit switch X+

MP910.1 Software limit switch Y+
MP910.2 Software limit switch Z+
MP910.3 Software limit switch 4+
MP920.0 Software limit switch X

MP920.1 Software limit switch Y
MP920.2 Software limit switch Z
MP920.3 Software limit switch 4
Traverse range 2
Activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 1


Traverse range 3
Activated by PLC: M2817 = 1, M2816 = 0


MP7490 is used to select whether one or three traverse ranges can be defined with the MOD
function. MP7490 is also used to select whether the datum applies for all traverse ranges or
whether a separate datum can be set for each traverse range (see table below).
MP7490 Number of traverse ranges and datum points

Entry: 0 to 3
Entry Number of Number of

traverse ranges datum points
0 1 3
1 3 3
2 1 1
3 3 1
Markers M2816 and M2817 are used to define the traverse range and/or datum point.
M2816 M2817 Traverse range/datum

0 0 Range 1
1 0 Range 2
0 1 Range 3
The change-over to the selected traverse range must be activated by the strobe-marker M2824 by
the PLC. This strobe-marker is reset by the NC after the change-over has been carried out.

M2824 Activation of the selected traverse range PLC NC

(M2816/M2817)
If one of the software limit switches is reached, the error message "LIMIT SWITCH ..." appears and
the appropriate marker (M2624 to M2633) is set.
M2624 Limit switch X+ NC NC

M2625 Limit switch X
M2626 Limit switch Y+
M2627 Limit switch Y
M2628 Limit switch Z+
M2629 Limit switch Z
M2630 Limit switch 4+
M2631 Limit switch 4
M2632 Limit switch 5+
M2633 Limit switch 5
Example:
PLC-program example of changing the traverse ranges. The PLC-input I10 is used as a condition for
change.
I10 = 0 Traverse range 1

I10 = 1 Traverse range 2
.
127 LN I10 ;Traverse range 1
128 AN M555 ;already done?
129 R M2816 ;select traverse range 1
130 R M2817 ;select traverse range 1
131 S M2824 ;activate change
132 S M555 ;edge recognition traverse range1
133 R M556 ;reset edge recognition traverse range2
134 L I10 ;traverse range2
135 AN M556 ;already done?
136 S M2816 ;select traverse range2
137 R M2817 ;select traverse range2
138 S M2824 ;activate change
139 S M556 ;edge recognition traverse range2
140 R M555 ;reset edge recognition traverse range1
.

I10
M2816
M2817
M2824
M555
M556
1.5 Lubrication pulse

The PLC can control the lubrication of the guideway according to the distance travelled on each axis.
In the machine parameter MP4060.X the distance after which lubrication should be performed is
registered for each axis. The entry is in units of 65 536 m.
Example:
Desired traversing distance: 100 m
Value entered = 10065000 000 m

536 m = 1 526
If the stored path limit for an axis is exceeded, the NC sets a marker (M2012 to M2015, M2029) to
"1".
After carrying out the lubrication the PLC must reset the accumulated traverse distance (M2548 to
M2551, M2613).
MP4060 Path dependent lubrication

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 (units of 65 536 m)
MP4060.0 X axis
MP4060.1 Y axis
MP4060.2 Z axis
MP4060.3 4th axis
MP4060.4 5th axis

M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis, since value of MP4060.0 NC NC

was exceeded
M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis, since value of MP4060.1
was exceeded
M2014 Lubrication pulse Z axis, since value of MP4060.2
was exceeded
M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis, since value of MP4060.3
was exceeded
M2029 Lubrication pulse 5th axis, since value of MP4060.4
was exceeded
M2548 Reset of accumulated distance for PLC PLC
lubrication X axis
M2549 Reset of accumulated distance for
lubrication Y axis
lubrication Z axis
lubrication 4th axis
lubrication 5th axis

Example:
PLC-program example of activating the lubrication for the X-axis.
In the machine parameter MP4060.0 the traverse distance after which the X-axis should be
lubricated is entered. The duration of the lubrication is defined by the timer T0 (MP4110.0).
The PLC-output O24 is to be set for the duration of the X-axis lubrication.
In our example the lubrication is activated as soon as the marker M2012 is set. If , for some reason,
the lubrication should only be activated when the axis is at rest, then this must be taken into
account in the PLC-program.
MP4060.0 = 1 000 (approx. 65 m)

MP4110.0 = 100 (approx. 2 sec.).
.
.
45 L M2012 ;lubrication pulse X axis

46 = T0 ;start timer for duration of lubrication
47 = M2548 ;reset accumulated distance
48 L T48 ;duration of lubrication for X axis
49 = O24 ;set output for lubrication
.
.
.
M2012
M2548
T0
T48
024


1.6 Axis-error compensation
The HEIDENHAIN contouring control can compensate for mechanical defects in the machine.
The following axis-error compensation is possible:
backlash compensation,
compensation of reversal errors in circular motion,
linear axis-error compensation,
non-linear axis-error compensation,
compensation of thermal expansion.
Either the linear or the non-linear axis-error compensation can be activated. The other types of
compensation can always be activated in parallel.
1.6.1 Backlash compensation

If linear traverse is measured by ballscrew and rotary encoder, a small amount of play between the
movement of the table and that of the rotary encoder can result during reversals in traverse
direction.
Depending on the design, the movement of the rotary encoder may be advanced or retarded relative
to the table. The professional jargon describes this as positive or negative backlash. Backlash
occurring outside the control loop can be automatically compensated by the TNC.
Positive backlash: rotary encoder advanced relative to the table (traverse movement of the table is
too short).
Negative backlash: rotary encoder retarded relative to the table (traverse movement of the table is
too long).
For every direction reversal the TNC subtracts or adds the value from machine parameter MP710.x
to the value resulting from the measuring system signals.
MP710 Backlash compensation

Entry: 1.0000 to + 1.0000 [mm] or []
MP710.0 X axis
MP710.1 Y axis
MP710.2 Z axis
MP710.3 4th axis
MP710.4 5th axis

1.6.2 Compensation for reversal errors in circular motion
The stiction in the axis bearings can lead to reversal errors at the quadrant transitions during circular
movements.
Commercially available devices such as the HEIDENHAIN Double Ball Bar system can diagnose
these errors and determine the size and duration of their peaks.
m
12
9
6
MP711
3
0
3 Spitzenweite
6 Peak width
9
12
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
The TNC can then compensate for these errors. The size of the reversal error which is to be
compensated is entered in machine parameter MP711, and the portion of the peaks to be
compensated per closed loop cycle time is entered in MP712.
The diagram from the DBB system shows the size and duration of a reversal peak.
The entry value for MP712 can be calculated as follows:
Duration of the reversal peak

Peak width [ ] 2 Radius [mm] 60
tPr [s] =
360 [ ] Feed rate [mm / min]
the peak width is [] indicated in the diagram;
feed rate [mm/min] is the programmed contouring feed rate.
Compensation per control loop cycle time (3 ms with TNC 415, 6 ms with TNC 407)
Reversal peaks [mm] Control loop cycle time [s]
Compensation [mm] = 10-3
0.5 tPr [s]
The compensation value is entered in MP712.
If the computed values have no effect this is because the machine dynamics are too weak.
MP711 Size of the reversal peaks in circular motion

Entry: -1.0000 to +1.0000 [mm]
MP711.0 X axis
MP711.1 Y axis
MP711.2 Z axis
MP711.3 4th axis
MP711.4 5th axis

MP712 Compensation value per cycle time
Entry: 0.000000 to 99.999999 (mm)
MP712.0 X axis
MP712.1 Y axis
MP712.2 Z axis
MP712.3 4th axis
MP712.4 5th axis
A second block of Kv factors can be activated with M function M105 (M106 deactivates).
A second block of machine parameters for reversal peak compensation is also activated.
MP715 (as MP711) and MP716 (as MP712)
MP715 Height of reversal peaks in circular movements (M105)

Entry: 1.0000 to +1.0000 (mm)
MP715.0 X axis
MP715.1 Y axis
MP715.2 Z axis
MP715.3 4th axis
MP715.4 5th axis
MP716 Compensation value per control loop cycle time (M105)

Entry: 0.000000 to 99.999999 [mm]
MP716.0 X axis
MP716.1 Y axis
MP716.2 Z axis
MP716.3 4th axis
MP716.4 5th axis

1.6.3 Linear axis-error compensation
One linear axis-error can be compensated per axis. The axis-error is entered, with the correct sign, in
machine parameter MP720. The error is positive if the table travel is too long, and negative if the
travel is too short.
MP730 set the axis error compensation to linear or non-linear. Linear axis error compensation is not
active for rotary axes.
Error
[mm]
0.02
0.01
0
-0.01 Ref. mark 500 1000 Encoder
[mm]
-0.02
MP720 Linear axis-error compensation

Entry: 1.000 to + 1.000 [mm/m] or [1/1000]
MP720.0 X axis
MP720.1 Y axis
MP720.2 Z axis
MP720.3 4th axis
MP720.4 5th axis
MP730 Selection of linear or non-linear axis-error compensation

Input: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0= Linear axis error compensation

Bit 1 Axis Y 1= Non-linear axis error compensation
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

1.6.4 Non-linear axis error compensation
Depending on the design of the machine or external factors (e.g. temperature) a non-linear axis-error
can occur.
Such an axis-error is usually determined by a comparator measuring instrument (e.g. HEIDENHAIN

VM 101).
For example, the lead-screw pitch error for the Z axis (Z=F(Z)) or the sag as a function of the Y axis
(Z=F(Y)) could be determined.
The TNC can compensate ballscrew pitch error and sag at the same time. A correction table (file
extension .COM) is created for each axis in the "PLC Programming" mode (code number 80 76 67).
A number of dependencies can be entered in a correction table. The number of possible
compensations is limited to ten dependencies and a total of 640 points (256 points per dependency).
The following items must be defined in the table headline.
Filename Dimensions Datum Compensation Dependencies

in mm point distance
The datum is the distance from the machine datum (MP960.X). The distance of the compensation
points is entered as an exponent to the base 2 (e.g. enter 16 = 216 = 6.5536 mm). Maximum input
value is 223.
The datum and the selected distance of the compensation points must be allowed for when plotting
the error curve. Only enter the kinks on the error curve. The controller performs automatic linear
interpolation between the kinks.

Each axis is assigned a correction table (.COM) in the .CMA file. A number of lines with different
assignments can be entered in this file. Only one line can be active at any one time. The active line
is selected by soft key or with PLC module 9095.
Non-linear axis error compensation is not active until the function is activated by MP730 and there is
a valid file of the .CMA type.
Example:
Machine with leadscrew pitch error in Z (Z = F(Z)) and Y (Y = F(Y)).

Also sag as a function of Y (Z = F(Y)). There is no compensation on the X axis.
Traverse range Z = 800 mm
Traverse range Y = 500 mm
required distance of compensation points = 7 mm
possible power of two = 216 = 6.5536 mm
500 mm
Number of compensation points in Y = 77
6.5536 mm
800 mm
Number of compensation points in Z = 123
6.5536 mm
Datum in Y = 90
Datum in Z = 200
Error in Z
[mm]
0.05
0.04
0.03
Machine
0.02 datum
Datum
0
0.01 Y
[mm]
90 76.8928 63.7856 50.6784 37.5712 24.464 11.3568 1.7504

0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05

The sag error (Z = F(Y)) and the leadscrew pitch error (Y = F(Y)) are both entered in file AXIS-Y.COM.
The ballscrew pitch error in Z (Z = F(Z)) is entered in file AXIS-Z.COM.

Then the files AXIS-Y.COM and AXIS-Z.COM are assigned to the Y and Z axis respectively in a file of
the .CMA type (e.g. CONFIG.CMA).
A number of different assignments can be entered in the CONFIG.CMA file if required. Only one line
can be active at any one time. The active line is selected by soft key. In our example this must be
line 0.

Input and output of the correction tables via the data interface
The .CMA and .COM files can be uploaded and downloaded via the data interface in the "PLC
Programming" mode. The .CMA file is assigned the extension .S and the .COM file the extension .V.
An axis of rotation is a special case
With an axis of rotation, the system only recognizes corrections of entries from 0 to 360.
Correction table with code number 105 296
In the interest of compatibility we have retained the entry of correction tables with code number 105
296. This was the only possible way of entering the correction tables up to software issue 250 94X
07 (243 03X 07).
The following constraints apply:
Only one dependency per axis can be programmed

Comp. point spacing
Max. correction difference =
64
Always 64 compensation points per axis
If no .CMA file has been defined and non-linear axis error compensation is selected with MP730,
then the correction tables from code number 105 296 apply.
MP730 Selection of linear or non-linear axis error compensation

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0 = Linear axis error compensation

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = Non-linear axis error compensation
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

1.6.5 Temperature compensation
Exact measurements of machine thermal behaviour (centre of expansion in the axes, amount of
expansion as a function of temperature) are necessary to compensate the effects of thermal
expansion.
The temperature measured through the PA 110 and Pt 100 is filed in PLC words W504 to W510 or
W472 to W478 (see Section "Analog inputs"). The thermal expansion is largely proportional to the
temperature value: you can directly determine the amount of expansion by multiplying the
temperature value by a certain factor. This calculated expansion value must be transferred through
the PLC program to the PLC word W576 to W584. As soon as the words W576 to W584 receive a
value, the "lag tracking" becomes active.
"Lag tracking" means that the actual machine position changes by a certain value per PLC cycle until
it has changed by the full value from the words W576 to W584. This does not change the value in
the actual position display. The increment of change per PLC cycle must be defined in MP4070.
W576 to W584 Lag tracking error compensation

(Compensation speed from MP4070)
Input range: +32 767 to 32 768 [Error! m]
W576 Axis X
W578 Axis Y
W580 Axis Z
W582 4th axis
W584 5th axis
MP4070 Compensation per PLC cycle for lag tracking error compensation
Entry: 0.000 1 to 0.005 [mm]
Example:
The temperature value transmitted through the PA110 to the word W506 is multiplied by a
compensation factor (linear expansion is assumed) and is sent to the word W578 (Y axis) for "lag
tracking". The correction factor, which can only be determined through exact measurements of the
machine, is entered, for example, in MP4210.44.
.
.
.
L D944 ;correction factor from MP4210.44
X W506 ;correction factor temperature value from PA 110 (X8) = current thermal
expansion
= W578 ;value for lag tracking of the Y axis
.
.
.

1.6.6 Stiction
Guideways with a relatively high level of stiction can cause servo lag at low feed-rates, even when
using feed precontrol. A servo lag can be detected using, for example the TNC's integral
oscilloscope, and the TNC can also compensate the error. This is done by entering an axis-specific
factor to compensate the stiction in machine parameter 1511 (guideline factor: 5 000 to 10 000). A
higher nominal value based on this factor is then output while traversing.
sa m
Fadd = kv MP1511 Fadd = Additional feed rate [ ]
tC min
sa = Servo lag difference after one control loop cycle [mm]
tC = Control loop cycle time [s]
m/min
kv = Position loop gain [ ]
mm
MP1511 = Factor for stiction compensation [s]
MP1050 Vadd = Additional analog voltage [V]

Vadd = Fadd
MP1010 MP1050 = Analog voltage for rapid traverse [V]
m
MP1010 = Rapid traverse [ ]
min
This increase in nominal value is limited by MP1512. If this limit is set too high then the machine will
oscillate at standstill (guideline: < 50). MP 1512 limits the value sa in the above formula.
sa limit 256 MP1512 = Limit to the amount of stiction compensation

MP1512 = [counting steps]
GP
salimit = Limit value for sa [m]
GP = Grating period of the measuring system [m]
Compensation may only be active at low feed rates as the increased nominal value would cause
oscillation at high speed. The feed-rate limit for stiction compensation is defined in MP1513.
Stiction compensation is effective only during operation with feed precontrol. If stiction
compensation is to be in effect in the manual operating modes as well, feed precontrol (MP1391)
must be activated for manual operation in each axis.
MP1511 Factor for stiction compensation

Entry: 0 to 16 777 215 [s]
MP1511.0 X axis
MP1511.1 Y axis
MP1511.2 Z axis
MP1511.3 4th axis
MP1511.4 5th axis

MP1512 Limit of extent of stiction compensation
Entry: 0 to 16 777 215 (counting steps)
MP1512.0 X axis
MP1512.1 Y axis
MP1512.2 Z axis
MP1512.3 4th axis
MP1512.4 5th axis
MP1513 Feed-rate limit for stiction compensation

Entry: 0 to 300 000 (mm/min)
MP1513.0 X axis
MP1513.1 Y axis
MP1513.2 Z axis
MP1513.3 4th axis
MP1513.4 5th axis
MP1391 Feed precontrol in all operating modes

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0= Feed precontrol in the Positioning with MDI,

Bit 1 Y axis Program run, single block, and Program run, full
Bit 2 Z axis sequence operating modes
Bit 3 4th axis 1= Feed precontrol in all operating modes
Bit 4 5th axis

1.7 PLC positioning
The five axes of the control can also be positioned by the PLC. The spindle too can be positioned
with the aid of the PLC (see under "Main spindle"). The positions of the individual axes must be
stored as Doublewords (D528 to D544) before activating the positioning.
The feed for positioning the individual axes is stored in W560 to W568. The transfer of the
positions and the feed to the PLC is carried out, for example, by Q-parameters or machine
parameters (MP4210.X, MP4220.X).
Five of 5 axes (3 of 5 axes on TNC 407) can be traversed simultaneously [simultaneous activation of
all the strobe-markers (M2704 to M2708)].
The PLC positioning can be interrupted by resetting the strobe-marker (M2704 to M2708).
The NC resets the strobe-markers (M2704 to 2708) if:
the axes have reached the given position
there is an NC STOP in the manual or handwheel mode
NC STOP and internal stop in the automatic operating modes
EMERGENCY STOP is output
an error message is released that results in a stop
Strobe markers M2704 to M2708 may only be set when no program has started or when an M/S/T
strobe is present. In "Manual" mode the strobe markers may only be set when no axis direction key
has been pressed.
The Doublewords D528 to D544 have a multiple usage. They have the following meaning for the
PLC positioning:
Address Function
D528 Position X axis [1/ 10 000 mm]

D532 Position Y axis
D536 Position Z axis
D540 Position 4th axis
D544 Position 5th axis
Feed for PLC-positioning
W560 Feed X axis [mm/min]

W562 Feed Y axis
W564 Feed Z axis
W566 Feed 4th axis
W568 Feed 5th axis
M2704 Activate PLC-positioning X axis PLC NC; PLC

M2705 Activate PLC-positioning Y axis
M2706 Activate PLC-positioning Z axis
M2707 Activate PLC-positioning 4th axis
M2708 Activate PLC-positioning 5th axis

Note:
The positions which are given are relative to the machine datum (MP960.x).
Software limit switches are not considered.
Tool compensations are not calculated.
The path compensation must be terminated before a PLC positioning.
PLC positioning is not displayed in the test graphics.
Example: PLC positioning of the Z-axis
A PLC positioning in the Z-axis is to be initiated with the M-function M70. The target position is
stored in the machine parameter MP4210.2. The feed for the PLC positioning is defined in machine
parameter MP4220.2
.
.
.
67 L M0
68 ON M0
69 S M2496 ;decoded M-code output (M1900 to M1999)
70 S M2719 ;Word processing (incompatible with TNC 155/355)
71 L M1970 ;M-function M70?
72 A M2045 ;change signal M-function?
73 AN M4 ;edge marker
74 CMT 110 ;load position and feed
75 S M2706 ;activate PLC positioning Z axis
76 S M4 ;edge marker
77 L M1970 ;M-function M70?
78 A M2045 ;change signal M-function?
79 AN M2706 ;PLC positioning Z axis done
80 S M2482 ;acknowledgement M-function done
81 LN M2045 ;no M-function?
82 R M2482 ;acknowledgement reset
83 R M4 ;edge marker reset
.
.
.
1210 EM ;main program end
1211 LBL 110 ;load Z position and feed rate
1212 L D776 ;load target position from MP4210.2
1213 = D536 ;target position PLC positioning Z axis
1214 L W964 ;load feed from MP4220.2
1215 = W564 ;feed PLC positioning Z axis
1216 EM

M1970
M2045
M4
M2706
M2482

1.8 PLC axes
The controlled axes can be assigned to the PLC individually. On a machine with four NC axes for
example, the 5th axis could be used to position the tool changer independently of the four NC axes.
Machine parameter MP60 defines the axes to be controlled by the PLC.
In the PLC program the positioning of the PLC axes is controlled by modules:
Module 9120: Start positioning a PLC axis

Module 9121: Stop positioning a PLC axis
Module 9122: Interrogate status of a PLC axis
Module 9123: Traverse the reference marks of a PLC axis
These modules are described in the chapter "PLC Programming".

PLC axes are always traversed in the servo lag mode.
Several PLC axes can be started simultaneously. They are not interpolated together however.
A modulo value for the counting mode of the axes can be entered in MP810 (see section "Display
and operation").
MP60 PLC auxiliary axes

Input: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = NC axis

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = PLC axis
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Example:
A tool sequence is to be pre-positioned with TOOL DEF. The tool sequence is driven by a controlled
axis. The acknowledgement for the TOOL DEF block is given when positioning starts.
The feed-rate for positioning with TOOL DEF is filed in MP 4210.0 and the feed-rate for reference
traversing the tool sequence is filed in MP 4210.1.
Machine parameters:
MP 10 :%1XXXX ;activate 5th axis
MP 60 :%1XXXX ;declare 5th axis
MP 410.4 : 2 ;declare 5th axis as axis of rotation C
MP 810.4 : 360 ;modulo value of tool sequence
MP 960.4 : XX ;datum shift
MP 7261 : XX ;number of tools with pocket number
MP 7480.1 : 1 to 3 ;output tool and pocket no. with TOOL DEF
MP 4210.0 : XX ;(D768) feedrate of PLC axis with TOOL DEF
MP 4210.1 : XX ;(D772) feedrate of PLC axis with
reference traverse
Auxiliary addresses:
D 168 ;desired position
W 230 ;number of tools in sequence (=MP 7261)
D 232 ;length of sequence (=MP 810)
B 236 ;status of PLC axis
B 238 ;Identifier Submit job
M 544 ;reference traverse
M 599 ;logic one

; Main program
L M2185 ;1ST PLC SCAN AFTER
PLC INTERRUPT
O M2180 ;1ST PLC SCAN AFTER POWER ON
S M544 ;ACTIVATE REF TRAVERSE
L M544
O M2047 ;TOOL DEF
CMT 40
LBL 11 ;END OF MODULE
EM ;END OF MODULE
LBL 40
L M544 ;REF TRAVERSE ?
CMT 41 ;READ MP
L M544 ;REF TRAVERSE ?
CMT 42
L M2047 ;STROBE TOOL DEF
JPF 11 ;END OF MODULE
PS K+4 ;5TH AXIS
CM 9122 ;POLL STATUS
PL B236 ;STATUS
L B236
BT K+2 ;POSITIONING RUNNING
JPT 11 ;END OF MODULE
LBL 43 ;POSITION CALCULATION

L D232 ;LENGTH OF SEQUENCE
/[
L W230 ;NUMBER OF TOOLS IN SEQUENCE
- K+1
]
X[
L W262 ;POCKET NUMBER
- K+1
]
= D168 ;POSITION
; POSITION SEQUENCE
PS K+4 ;AXIS
PS D168 ;POSITION
PS D768 ;FEED-RATE
PS K+0 ;ABSOLUTE
CM 9120 ;START POSITIONING
L M599 ;LOG ONE
S M2484 ;TOOL DEF ACKNOWLEDGE
EM

; READ MACHINE PARAMETERS
LBL 41
RPLY B238
== K+0 ;POLL ALREADY RUNNING
JPF 11 ;END OF MODULE
SUBM 45 ;READ MP
= B238 ;STORE IDENTIFIER
EM
LBL 45
PS K+810 ;MP NUMBER (MODULO VALUE)
PS K+4 ;MP INDEX
CM 9032 ;CALL MODULE
PL D232 ;STORE (SEQUENCE LENGTH)
PS K+7261 ;MP NUMBER (NUMBER OF TOOLS E
WITH POCKET NUMBER
PS K+0 ;INDEX
CM 9032 ;CALL MODULE
PL W230 ;STORE (NUMBER OF
TOOLS WITH POCKET NUMBER)F
EM
; APPROACH REFERENCE MARKS FOR PLC AXIS

LBL 42 ;
PS K+4 ;PLC AXIS
PS D772 ;FEED-RATE
PS K+0 ;POSITIVE TRAVERSE DIRECTION
CM 9123 ;START REF TRAVERSE
L M599 ;LOG ONE
R M544 ;REF TRAVERSE OF PLC AXIS
EM

1.9 Swivel axes
This function is not available in TNC 407.
Swivelling heads and/or swivelling tables are used for multi-faced machining on milling machines.
The NC programs are either generated by a CAD system or are created direct on the TNC using the
"Tilt working plane" function.
1.9.1 "Tilt working plane" function

The swivel axes are moved either manually or NC controlled.
The position of the swivel axis is defined in Cycle 19 "Tilt working plane" (e.g. A-45, B-45). When
Cycle 19 is activated the TNC performs a coordinate transformation. The Z axis stays parallel to the
tool axis while the X/Y plane is perpendicular to the direction vector of the tool axis. The swivel axes
must first be positioned manually or with an appropriate NC block.
The status window displays the swivelled coordinate system. The machining plane can be
transformed spatially at random with this procedure. However the NC program is still programmed
in the normal way in the X/Y plane. The NC automatically interpolates the affected axes as it runs
the program. All path functions and cycles such as "Set datum" and "Probe" can also be used in the
transformed machining plane. The combination of coordinate transformation cycles must match the
activate and deactivate sequence.
Tool radius compensation in the machining plane and tool length compensation parallel to the tool
axis is active. The "3D ROT" soft key can be used to activate the swivelled machining plane for
"Manual" and "Program Run" separately. The position of the swivel axes can be edited for manual
operation.
The mechanical offset between the swivel axes is entered in machine parameters. The machine
parameters that describe the machine geometry are divided into nine blocks, each block describing
either a paraxial shift or a rotation.
With swivel heads the starting point is the tool datum of the machine (usually the spindle head). The
shift or rotation to the next nearest swivel axis is then entered one at a time. This operation is
repeated until a point is reached that is not separated from the machine by a free axis of rotation.
The swivel head must be in its datum position when the shifts are being calculated (e.g. A = 0, B =
0).
For tilting tables, the machine geometry is described starting from the centre of rotation of the first
swivel axis (as seen from the workpiece) and not from tool datum. First the centre of rotation is
defined in absolute coordinates in relation to the machine datum then the shifts and rotations
are entered one at a time until a point is reached that is not separated from the machine by a free
axis of rotation.
When machining with tilting tables, the coordinate system stays parallel to the machine coordinate
system. The "Tilt working plane" function is enabled with MP7500. The descriptions in MP7510 to
MP7592 are also used for other functions (e.g. "Cylinder interpolation").

PLC positioning with M91 or M92 is not possible when Cycle 19 "Tilt working plane" is
active
The "Basic rotation" feature can be executed only when the tilt axes are at their 0
positions
PLC positioning commands are always executed paraxially to the machine coordinate
system. Cycle 19 therefore has no influence on PLC positioning commands.
Datum compensation via PLC is effective also with the "Tilt working plane" function.
MP7500 "Tilt working plane" function

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = inactive
1 = active
MP75x0 Transformed axis

Entry: %xxxxxx
Entry 0 means end of transformation sequence
Bit 0 X axis
Bit 1 Y axis
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 A axis
Bit 4 B axis
Bit 5 C axis
MP75x1 Supplementary identifier for transformation

Entry: %xx
Bit 0 Swivel axis 0 = swivel head

1 = tilting table
Bit 1 Dimension in MP75x2 0 = incremental step (for swivel head)
1 = absolute
related to machine datum
(for tilting table)
MP75x2 Dimension for transformation

Entry: 99,999.9999 to +99,999.9999
Entry 0 means free rotating axis

Example 1: Double swivel head, right-angled
+Z
+B
+A
+Y
+X
4 B Z
A
Z2
Z1
X
1
Spindle centre
Y
A
2 Y1
X
X1
3
B
Z1 = 200.4 mm
Z2 = 3.1 mm
X1 = 201.5 mm
Y1 = 1.9 mm

MP 7500 : +1 ;activate function
MP 7510 : %000100 ;shift in Z axis

MP 7511 : %00 ;swivel head
MP 7512 : +200.4 ;dimension Z1
MP 7520 : %000010 ;shift in Y axis

MP 7522 : 1.9 ;dimension Y1
MP 7530 : %001000 ;free swivel axis A

MP 7532 : +0 ;variable dimension
MP 7540 : %000001 ;shift in X axis

MP 7542 : +201.5 ;dimension X1

MP 7560 : %010000 ;free swivel axis B

MP 7570 : %000000 ;end of transformation sequence

Example 2: Double swivel head, 45
Z Z
4 Z 3
Y
B
Y A1
Y
Z
Z
Y 2
Y
Z Z1
1
Z2 Y
Z1 = 150.5 mm
Z2 = 251.5 mm
A1 = 45
MP 7500 : +1 ;activate function

MP 7520 : %001000 ;rotate coordinate system about A axis

MP 7522 : 45 ;dimension A1
MP 7540 : %100000 ;free swivel axis C
MP 7550 : %001000 ;rotate coordinate system about A axis
MP 7552 : +45 ;dimension A1
MP 7560 : %010000 ;free swivel axis B
MP 7570 : %000000 ;end of transformation sequence

Example 3: Universal table (swivel, tilt, rotate)
+Z
+C
+B
+A
+Y +X
C
Z
Z1 B
X
Z2 A
B
Y
C
A X
Y1

X1 = 1.6 mm
Y1 = 2.7 mm
Z1 = 331.3 mm
Z2 = 125.9 mm
Coordinates (related to machine datum) of the centre of rotation of rotary table C with all swivel axes
in datum position:
XR = 420.0 mm
YR = 151.2 mm
ZR = 395.4 mm
MP 7500: +1 ;activate function
MP 7510: %000001 ;X coordinates of centre of rotation of C axis

MP 7511: %11 ;tilting table, absolute value
MP 7512: +420 ;dimension XR
MP 7520: %000010 ;Y coordinates of centre of rotation of C axis

MP 7522: +151.2 ;dimension YR
MP 7530: %000100 ;Z coordinates of centre of rotation of C axis

MP 7532: 395.4 ;dimension ZR
MP 7540: %100000 ;free swivel axis C
MP 7541: %01 ;tilting table
MP 7542: +0 ;variable dimension
MP 7550: %000010 ;shift in Y axis

MP 7552: 2.7 ;dimension Y1
MP 7560: %000100 ;shift in Z axis

MP 7562: 331.3 ;dimension Z1
MP 7570: %001000 ;free swivel axis A
MP 7580: %000100 ;shift in Z axis
MP 7582: +125.9 ;dimension Z2
MP 7590: %010000 ;free swivel axis B

1.9.2 Five-axis NC programs with swivel axes
The miscellaneous function M114 activates a function that automatically compensates tool lengths
when running five-axis NC programs, incorporating the machine geometry values from MP7510 ff.
This means that the TNC automatically compensates the offset that results from positioning swivel
axes.
The tool tip is always on the programmed nominal coordinates, so the postprocessor can disregard
the machine geometry. The tool radius must still be corrected by the CAD system or postprocessor
however.
Unlike the "Tilt working plane" function, the coordinate system does not swivel. For machines with
rotary tables therefore, remember that rotating the table also rotates the coordinate system in
relation to the machine coordinate system. This is not affected by the M114 function.
The programmed feed-rate relates to the tool tip but this is only achieved when tool length
compensation is provided by the TNC. If tool length is already compensated by the CAD system, the
programmed feed-rate will be the feed-rate of the tool datum. Finally, function M114 is deactivated
by M115 or END PGM.

1.10 Synchronized axes
With the HEIDENHAIN TNC, two controlled axes can be coupled in such a way that they can only be
moved simultaneously. This facility is required, for example, for gantry axes and tandem tables, and
can be activated both for operation with servo lag and in the feed precontrol mode.
In the following description the main axis and tracked axis are referred to as master and slave,
respectively.
The Synchronize function is activated with MP850 which defines the master axis to which the
specified slave axis must be tracked.
Example: 4th axis is the slave of the X axis
MP850.0 0
MP850.1 0
MP850.2 0
MP850.3 1
MP850.4 0
Of the five controlled axes, two pairs can be synchronized.
MP850 Synchronized axes

Entry: 0 to 5
0 = Main axis
1 = axis tracked to X axis
2 = axis tracked to Y axis
3 = axis tracked to Z axis
4 = axis tracked to 4th axis
5 = axis tracked to 5th axis
MP850.0 X axis
MP850.1 Y axis
MP850.2 Z axis
MP850.3 4th axis
MP850.4 5th axis

1.10.1 Synchronization control
The TNC monitors the synchronization of the master and slave axes. If the positions of the master
and slave axes differ by a distance greater than that entered in MP855.x, the error message GROSS
POSITIONING ERROR <AXIS> #A appears indicating the slave axis. The positional difference is
shown in the LAG display for the slave axis. Synchronization monitoring is entered in MP855.x of the
slave axis. Machine parameter MP860.x defines the datum for synchronization control.
MP860.x = 0: Datum at position upon switch-on

When the machine is switched on it is assumed that the master and slave axes are synchronized
with one another. Their position upon switch-on is taken as the synchronization reference. In this
mode, passing over the reference mark is only necessary for the master axis, and only if the defined
references are to be reproduced. Synchrony monitoring begins immediately upon switch-on.
MP860.x = 1: Datum at reference marks (machine datum)

Both axes position to the same reference value when they have passed over their respective
reference marks. The default setting can be modified with MP960 (machine datum).
In this mode, any offset between the two axes is compensated in the slave axis at the speed from
MP1330 after both reference marks are traversed, and synchronization does not activate until
compensation is completed. The way in which the reference marks are traversed (MP1350) must be
set the same for both axes. The master axis must be defined before the slave axis in the sequence
for approaching the reference marks (MP1340).
Where rotary encoders are used for linear measurement (MP1350 = 2), only one end position switch
should be used for both axes because the reference end position marker for the slave axis is only
used to evaluate the reference mark and not to evaluate the direction of traverse when controlling
the sequence. The direction of traverse is defined by the value of the reference end position marker
for the master axis.
Traversing the reference mark is completed when one reference mark has been evaluated for both
axes (see also section "Reference marks").
MP855 Synchronization monitoring

Entry: 0 to 100.0000 [mm]
0 = Monitoring inactive
MP855.0 X axis
MP855.1 Y axis
MP855.2 Z axis
MP855.3 4th axis
MP855.4 5th axis
MP860 Datum for synchronization control

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Datum at position upon switch-on
1 = Datum at reference marks (machine datum)
MP860.0 X axis
MP860.1 Y axis
MP860.2 Z axis
MP860.3 4th axis
MP860.4 5th axis

1.10.2 Conventions
The slave axis cannot be moved independently.
The nominal value displayed for the slave axis indicates the nominal value of the master axis.
The PLC program must ensure that the master axis does not move until the slave axis is ready
(locking, feed-rate enable).
The markers for direction of traverse (M2160 ff.) and axis in motion (M2128 ff.) for the slave
axis are not set.
An axis cannot be master and slave at the same time.
Master and slave must be linear axes.
Axis error compensation (both linear and non-linear) must be entered separately for both axes.
The values for rapid traverse, acceleration, software limit switches, feed-rate for passing over
reference marks and manual feed-rate are confirmed from the input values of the master axis.
In servo lag mode the kv factor for master and slave axis should be the same.
Both axes must be either analogue or digital (TNC 425) controlled.

4
2 Reference marks
By setting a datum point, a definite positional value (coordinate) is assigned to each axis position for
the machining of the workpiece. Since the actual-position value is established incrementally by the
measuring system, this correlation between axis positions and positional values must be re-
established after every power interruption.
The HEIDENHAIN linear measurement systems are therefore equipped with one or more reference
marks. On passing a reference mark a signal is generated which identifies the particular position as a
reference point. By passing over the reference marks after a power interruption, the relationships
between the axis positions and positional values (and, at the same time, the fixed machine
relationships) which were most recently determined by the datum point setting are re-established.
+Z REF value REF value

44.985 0
Workpiece
datum 10 20 30 40
0 +X
Workpiece
Machine table
Position encoder
Reference mark
Machine datum
Since it is often inconvenient to re-establish the reference points by traversing large distances after
switching on, HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of measuring systems with distance-coded
reference marks. With this kind of measuring system the absolute position is available after crossing
two reference marks.
Scale with distance-coded reference marks
The scale graduation consists of the line grating and a reference mark track which runs parallel to it.
The distances between any two consecutive reference marks are defined differently, so that the
absolute position of the machine slide can be determined from this distance.
Scale with one reference mark
Scale with distance-coded reference marks
4-52 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Reference marks 01.98

2.1 Passing over the reference marks
The reference marks for axes must be passed after switching on the control. This can be achieved
by
pressing the external START key. The axis sequence is determined by machine parameter
MP1340.X (automatic passing of the reference marks),
pressing the external axis direction keys. The sequence is determined by the operator.
Only after passing over the reference mark
can the software limits be activated,
can the most recently set datum point be reproduced,
is PLC positioning and positioning with the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 possible,
is the counter value set to zero for non-controlled axes.
For distance-coded measuring systems the machine datum (MP960.x) is reference to the Zero-
Reference mark. In linear measurement systems the Zero-Reference mark is the first reference
mark after the start of the measuring length; in angular measurement systems the Zero-Reference
mark is marked.
The direction of traverse and the velocity on passing the reference marks is defined by machine
parameters (MP1320, MP1330.X).
The functional sequence for passing the reference marks can be fixed specifically for the axes by
machine parameters (MP1350.X).
The operating condition "PASS OVER REFERENCE MARKS" is sent to the PLC by the NC (W272). If
the operating mode is changed before all reference marks have been passed, the Soft key "PASS
OVER REFERENCE" will appear. The markers M2136 to M2140 inform the PLC for which axes the
reference marks have not yet been crossed.
In order to avoid exceeding the traverse range when passing over the reference marks a trip dog
(reference end-position) is necessary. This trip dog must be fixed at the end of the traverse range by
the manufacturer of the machine. The trigger signal from the trip dog is connected to an available
PLC input. In the PLC program this PLC input is combined with the markers for "Reference end-
position" (M2506, M2556 to M2559).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Reference marks 4-53

2.1.1 Measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks
Machine parameter MP1350.x=3
Reference marks
"Reference end
closed postion" trip dog
open
Traverse dirction MP1320

Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (press the external START key).
MP1350.x = 3
Press the external START key
No Trip dog Yes

"Reference end position"
closed?
Machine traverse
in direction from
MP1320.x
Machine traverses in
inverted direction from
Trip dog MP1320.x
"Reference end position" is Yes
closed before reference mark
is passed over
No
Two successive reference marks

are traversed
Is the machine Yes

outside the software
limit switch range?
Machine moves to
No software limit switch
Machine stops

Reference marks
Trip dog
Closed "Reference end position"
Open
Traverse direction MP1320.x

MP1350.x = 0
Press external START key
No Trip dog Yes

closed?
Traverse direction from Invert traverse direction

MP1320.x from MP1320.x
Pass over two consecutive

reference marks
Is the machine
Yes
limit switch range?
Machine moves to
No software limit switch range
Machine stops
If during automatic pass-over the trip dog is not closed until it is in the "Reference end-position"
range, the contouring control will ignore the signal. It is therefore necessary that there be at least
two reference marks in the range of the "Reference end-position".

2.1.2 Measuring systems with one reference mark
Reference marks
Closed Trip dog

Open "Reference end position"

MP1350.X = 1
No Trip dog Yes

closed?
Machine traverse
in direction from
MP1320.x
Machine traverses in
inverted direction from
Trip dog MP1320.x
"Reference end position" is Yes
closed before reference mark
is passed over
No
Reference mark is passed over
Is the machine Yes

limit switch range?
Machine moves to
Machine stops

2.1.3 Linear measurement via rotary encoder
Machine parameter MP1350.x = 2
For linear measurement using a rotary encoder a reference pulse is produced on each revolution of
the encoder. It must be ensured that, after switching on the machine, always the same reference
pulse is evaluated. This can also be achieved by using the trip dog "Reference end-position".
Measuring length
Reference pulse
Desired reference pulse
Closed Trip dog

Open

Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (Press the external START key).
MP1350.X = 2
No Trip dog Yes

closed?
Machine traverse in direction from

MP1320.x with velocity from
MP1330.x to the trip dog
"Reference end positon"
Machine traverse in inverted direction

from MP1320.x and with reduced velocity from MP1331.x
The first reference pulse after opening of the trip dog

"Reference end position" is evaluated
Is the
machine outside Yes
the software limit
switch range?
Machine moves to
Machine stops

MP1320 Direction for traversing the reference marks
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis: 0 = positive

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = positive
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 Axis 4
Bit 4 Axis 5
MP1330 Feed rate for traversing the reference marks

Entry: 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1330.0 X axis
MP1330.1 Y axis
MP1330.2 Z axis
MP1330.3 Axis 4
MP1330.4 Axis 5
MP1331 Feed rate for leaving the reference end-position

(only for rotary encoders MP1350=2)
Entry: 80 to 500 [mm/min]
MP1331.0 X axis
MP1331.1 Y axis
MP1331.2 Z axis
MP1331.3 Axis 4
MP1331.4 Axis 5
MP1340 Sequence for traversing reference marks
Entry: 0 = no evaluation of the reference mark

1 = X axis
2 = Y axis
3 = Z axis
4 = Axis 4
5 = Axis 5
MP1340.0 1st axis

MP1340.1 2nd axis
MP1340.2 3rd axis
MP1340.3 4th axis
MP1340.4 5th axis

MP1350 Type of reference mark approach
Entry: 0 = measuring system with distance-coded reference marks

1 = measuring system with one reference mark
2 = special sequence (linear measurement via rotary encoder)
3 = measuring system with distance-coded reference marks
MP1350.0 X axis
MP1550.1 Y axis
MP1350.2 Z axis
MP1350.3 Axis 4
MP1350.4 Axis 5
M2136 Reference marks X axis not yet traversed NC NC

M2137 Reference marks Y axis not yet traversed
M2138 Reference marks Z axis not yet traversed
M2139 Reference marks axis 4 not yet traversed
M2140 Reference marks axis 5 not yet traversed
M2556 Reference end-position for X axis PLC PLC

M2557 Reference end-position for Y axis
M2558 Reference end-position for Z axis
M2559 Reference end-position for axis 4
M2506 Reference end-position for axis 5
Address Function Set Reset
W272 Operating mode NC NC
1 = Manual operation
2 = Handwheel
3 = Positioning with manual entry
4 = Program run/single block
5 = Program run/full sequence
7 = Pass over reference points
2.2 Machine datum

The reference mark defines a point on the measuring system. The reference points of all axes define
the scale datum. MP960.x contains the distance from the scale datum to the machine datum. All
REF-based displays and positioning movements refer to the machine datum (see also Section
"Display and operation").


4
3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes
This section describes all the control functions which are important for the control and monitoring of
the NC-axes .
Further parameters for the NC-axes can be found under "Machine axes".
The control of the main spindle (S-axis) is described under "Main spindle".
3.1 The position control loop of an NC-machine

In CNC machines the servo control is normally implemented as a cascade control (see following
block diagram).
The motor speed control and the current control (both in the drive amplifier) are integrated into the
servo position control (CNC-control). The servo controlled system consists of the motor and machine
slide.
CNC Control Servo amplifier Machine
Linear/
Nom. Servo Position Nom. Speed Nom. Current
Drive Tacho angle
pos. lag controller rpm controller cur. regulator
encoder
position
position
current
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
Actual
rpm
rpm
Block diagram of the position control loop, here as a cascade control
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes 4-65
3.2 Servo positioning in TNC controls
Two control methods are possible with the control. They can be used alternatively.
1. control with lag (Section 3.2.1)

2. control with feedforward control (Section 3.2.2)
The choice of control method is determined by machine parameters MP1390 and MP1391.
The machine adjustment must always be carried out for both methods of control.
MP1390 Velocity feedforward control in the operating modes "Positioning with MDI",
"Program run, single block", and "Program run, full sequence"
Input: 0 or 1
0 = operation with feedforward control
1 = operation with servo lag
MP1391 Velocity feedforward control in the operating modes "Manual" and "Handwheel"
Input: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0= operation with servo lag

Bit 1 Axis Y 1= operation with feedforward control
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 Axis 4
Bit 4 Axis 5
3.2.1 Control with servo lag

Servo lag refers to the difference (lag) between the nominal position which is defined by the NC and
the actual position of the axes. Control would not be possible without this lag.
The advantage of operation with servo lag lies in the "softer" control, which is especially suitable for
machining 3D-contours, since corners and radii are smoothed out, depending on the Kv factor
(position loop gain factor) and the machining feed rate.
Depending on how far these "contour errors" can be tolerated, the machine operator or manufacturer
must decide and choose either operation with servo lag or with feedforward control.
Operation with servo lag is depicted in a simplified form in the following block diagram for the X axis.
It shows a part of the cascade control mentioned previously.
All machine parameters which influence the control characteristic are shown here.
4-66 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes 01.98
kv factor: MP1810
Kinkpoint: MP1830
Multiplication factor: MP1820
Servo
amplifier
XNoml+ sax Vx vx Noml+ +
ax
XS
v s
- -
k
sax
=
v
vx Actl

X Actl
v U
at
s=s0+vt
v=
t t
Acceleration: Integral factor

MP1060 MP1080
YS
The control calculates a velocity value every 3 ms (TNC 415) or every 6 ms (TNC 407) from the
feed rate programmed in the NC-program and the final position, allowing for the acceleration
which has been stored (MP1060). The stored acceleration is valid for the rising as well as the
falling slope. If several axes are traversed simultaneously, then the smallest value for
acceleration is effective.
Every 3 ms (6 ms) a nominal position value is derived from the calculated velocity.
s = so + v t s = Nominal path value
so = Previous nominal path value
v = Calculated velocity
t = Cycle time 3 ms
The nominal path value is resolved into the individual axis components, depending on which
axes have been programmed.
The axis-dependent nominal path value is compared with the actual value of the positions and
the lag sa is calculated.
sax = xNoml - xActl sax = Lag for X-axis
xNoml = Nominal path value for X-axis
xAct l = Actual path value for X-axis
The lag is multiplied by the kv factor MP1810 and passed on to the drive amplifier as a nominal
velocity value (analogue voltage).
vx= kv sax vx = Nominal velocity-value for X-axis
If the axes are stopped, the integral factor MP1080 is effective as well. It causes an offset
adjustment (see the section "Offset adjustment").
The kv factor (position loop gain) determines the amplification of the control loop. The optimal kv
factor must be determined by trial and error.
If you choose a very high kv factor, the lag is very small. However, this can lead to oscillations when
moving into a new position. If the kv factor is too small, the new position will be reached too slowly.
For axes that are interpolated with each other the kv factor must be equal to prevent contour
deviations.
The following diagram shows the response for various kv factors.
U [V]
MP1810
kv correct
kv too large
kv too small
MP1060 MP1810
t [s]
The acceleration can be programmed by the machine parameter MP1060. It determines the slope of
the ramp on the rising and falling edges.
For axes which are mutually interpolated the kv factor must be the same, in order to avoid contour
distortion!
MP1060 Acceleration
Entry: 0.001 to 5.0 [m/s2]
MP1060.0 Acceleration X axis

MP1060.1 Acceleration Y axis
MP1060.2 Acceleration Z axis
MP1060.3 Acceleration 4th axis
MP1060.4 Acceleration 5th axis
The following formula shows the relationship among Kv factor, feed rate and servo lag:
ve m/min
kv = kv = position loop gain [ ]
sa mm
m
ve = rapid traverse [ ]
mm
sa = servo lag [mm]
or
ve
sa =
kv
Rapid traverse
[m/min]
kv = 2
10
8 kv = 1
6
kv = 0,5
4
2 4 6 8 10 12 sa [mm]
The maximum feed rate stored in machine parameter MP1010 can be reduced by the PLC.
If the PLC enters a feed value in Doubleword D596 which is lower than that in machine parameter
MP1010, then the value in D596 is effective. If the value which is entered is higher, then MP1010
remains effective. After switching on the control, or an interruption of the running of the PLC, the
Doubleword D596 is pre-loaded with the value 300000.
The rapid traverse (maximum traversing speed) must be adjusted by the desired analogue voltage
(e.g. 9 V) on the servo-amplifier (see section "Commissioning and start-up procedure"). For each
axis-specific rapid traverse there is an analogue voltage which is stored in the machine parameter
MP1050.
The resulting lag error sa thus depends on the analogue voltage.
U[V]
10
8
kv = 1, Rapid traverse
10 m/min
6
2 4 6 8 10 12 sa [mm]
A special feed rate for manual operation (Manual-feed) is stored in machine parameter MP1020. In
general, it is significantly lower than the rapid traverse.
MP1810 Kv factor for operation with lag
m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1810.0 kv factor X axis
MP1810.1 kv factor Y axis
MP1810.2 kv factor Z axis
MP1810.3 kv factor 4th axis
MP1810.4 kv factor 5th axis
MP1815 Kv factor for operation with lag active after M105

m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1815.0 X axis
MP1815.1 Y axis
MP1815.2 Z axis
MP1815.3 4th axis
MP1815.4 5th axis
MP1010 Rapid traverse

MP1010.0 X axis
MP1010.1 Y axis
MP1010.2 Z axis
MP1010.3 4th axis
MP1010.4 5th axis
MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid traverse

Entry: 1.000 to 9.000 [V]
MP1050.0 X axis
MP1050.1 Y axis
MP1050.2 Z axis
MP1050.3 4th axis
MP1050.4 5th axis
MP1020 Manual feed

MP1020.0 Manual feed X axis
MP1020.1 Manual feed Y axis
MP1020.2 Manual feed Z axis
MP1020.3 Manual feed 4th axis
MP1020.4 Manual feed 5th axis
Address Function
D596 Rapid traverse from PLC
Servo resolution:
The internal calculating resolution of the control is always 0.1 m. However the display step can be
set with MP7290. The rounding up or down is only in display (see section "Display and operation").
Normally a servo resolution of 1 m is sufficient, i.e. the control must be able to generate at least
one voltage step per 1 m positional deviation. For 0.1 m servo resolution at least one potential
step must be generated per 0.1 m.
Calculation of the smallest voltage step:

The controls produce an analogue voltage 0 to 10 V. This 10 V is divided by the TNC 415 with a 16
Bit A/D-converter to give 65 536 divisions. As a result, the smallest potential step is 0.15 mV.
In the TNC 407 the 10 V analogue potential is produced by a 14 Bit A/D converter, giving 16 384
divisions. The resulting smallest potential step is 0.6 mV.
Potential steps per m (0.1 m) positional deviation:

As described above, moving with the rapid traverse (MP1010) results in a certain lag distance s a.
The rapid traverse rate is reached at a definite voltage (MP1050). So one can calculate a definite
potential U per m of positional deviation (lag).
MP1050 [mV]
U =
sa [m]
If U is divided by the smallest voltage step which can be produced (0.15 mV for TNC 415 or 0.6 mV
for TNC 407), the result is the number of voltage steps which are produced per m or 0.1 m
positional deviation.
for TNC 415: for TNC 407:

U [mV] U [mV]
n= n=
0.15 [mV] 0.6 [mV]
Example:
m/min
kv = 2 rapid traverse 5 000 [mm/min], U = 9 [V]
mm
5 000 [mm / min]

sa = Ve
kv = = 2 500 [m]
m / min
2
mm
9 000 [mV]
U = = 3.6 [mV/m]
2 500 [m]
3.6 [mV / mm]

nTNC 415 = = 24 steps/m positional deviation
0.15 [mV]
3.6 [mV / mm]

nTNC 407 = = 6 steps/m positional deviation
0.6 [mV]
Kink point:
For machines with high rapid-traverse rates it is usually not possible to raise the K v factor enough to
give an optimal loop characteristic over the entire range of speeds (stop, machining feed rates, rapid
traverse). In such cases one can introduce a kink point, which gives the following advantages:
for lower rates, a high Kv, i.e. a larger voltage step per m of positional deviation,
for higher rates (above the machining rates) a lower Kv.
The position of the kink point is determined by machine parameter MP1830. In the higher range the
Kv factor is multiplied by the factor from MP1820.
U [V]
MP1810 MP1820
MP1830
MP1810 (= kv)
sa
The kink point must lie above the range of machining feeds!
Under these conditions, the lag can be calculated as follows:
sa = Ve
kv

[
MP1830 [%] + 100 [%] MP1830 [%]
100 [%] MP1820 100 [%]
]
MP1820 Multiplication factor for the Kv factor
Entry: 0.001 to 1.000
MP1820.0 X axis
MP1820.1 Y axis
MP1820.2 Z axis
MP1820.3 4th axis
MP1820.4 5th axis
MP1830 Kink point

Entry: 0.000 to 100.000 [%]
MP1830.0 Axis X
MP1830.1 Axis Y
MP1830.2 Axis Z
MP1830.3 4th axis
MP1830.4 5th axis

3.2.2 Feedforward control
Control with feedforward control means that the nominal velocity value for the machine is varied by
a machine parameter (control element of the nominal velocity). Together with the velocity element
which is calculated from the lag (servo-controlled element of the nominal velocity), this gives the
final nominal velocity value.
The lag is very small with this method. Operation with feedforward control has the advantage that
contours can be followed very accurately at a high speed. Normally, work will be carried out using
feedforward control.
MP1390 switches feedforward control on in the "Positioning with manual data input", "Program
run/single block" and "Program run/full sequence" modes. MP1391 has the same effect for the
"Manual" and "Handwheel" modes.
Operation with feedforward control for the X axis can be shown in a simplified form in the following
block diagram. All machine parameters which influence the servo characteristic are shown here.
Position approach speed

Acceleration: MP1060
Transient response: MP1520
vY
v MP1520 kv factor for
feed precontrol
at
MP1510
v=
Servo
vX amplifier

sax vx + vx nom
X nom.+ +
ax
sX +
v s
- + -
k
sax
=
+
v
vx act.
X act.
s=s0+vt
U
sY
t
Integral factor: MP1080
When operating with feedforward control the set velocity value (the analogue potential for
the drive amplifier) is formed from three components: feedforward control, servo lag,
integral component.
The feedforward control value, which is adjusted to the dynamic characteristics of the
machine by machine parameters, makes it possible to control the loop with a lag distance
which is nearly "0".
Deviations in the actual positional value are compensated as described under "Operation
with lag". The servo follows the pre-compensated curve.
The Kv factor for the feedforward control then comes into play.
If the axes are stopped, the integral factor will also be effective: it results in an offset
correction.
MP1390 Feedforward control in the "Positioning with manual data input", "Program run,
single block" and "Program run, full sequence" modes
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Operation with feedforward control
1 = Operation with servo lag
MP1391 Feedforward control in the "Manual" and "Handwheel" modes

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0= Operation with servo lag

Bit 1 Y axis 1= Operation with feedforward control
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
The feedforward control value is adjusted to the dynamics of the machine by two machine
parameters.
Precontrol
U [V]
MP1520
Input value correct
Input value too large
9 Input value too small
MP1060
t [ms]
The machine parameter MP1060 determines the acceleration (= slope of the precontrolled speed
curve).
MP1520 determines the transient response into the nominal position when accelerating and
decelerating. The greater the value which is entered, the more the system will tend to oscillate.
The fine control of the precontrolled speed set-value is influenced by the Kv factor for feedforward
control MP1510.
The transient response when accelerating is defined separately by MP1530 in software types 243
05, 259 96, 243 07 and 243 02.
U [V]
t [ms]
If the Kv factor is too large, the system will oscillate about the precontrolled speed set-value.
The size of the Kv factor is normally the same as the Kv factor for operation with lag distance.
Depending on the dynamic characteristics of the machine it may also be higher (see "Commissioning
and start-up procedure").
A second set of kv factors can be defined in machine parameter MP1515.x and selected with M
function M105 (see section "Display and operation").
MP1530 Damping factor for transient response

(Only with software types 243 05, 259 96, 243 07, 243 02)
Entry: 0.010 to 0.999
MP1520 Transient response

Entry: value 0.100 to 10.000
MP1510 Kv factor for feedforward control (M105)

m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1510.0 X axis
MP1510.1 Y axis
MP1510.2 Z axis
MP1510.3 4th axis
MP1510.4 5th axis
MP1515 Kv factor for feedforward control active after M105

m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1515.0 X axis
MP1515.1 Y axis
MP1515.2 Z axis
MP1515.3 4th axis
MP1515.4 5th axis
3.3 Offset adjustment
The TNC 407/TNC 415 controls include several possibilities for compensating for an offset voltage
which would cause the axes to drift.
The maximum permissible offset-voltage in the control is 100 mV. If this voltage is reached or
exceeded, then the error message
"GROSS POSITIONING ERROR E <AXIS> #"
will appear.
The automatic cyclical offset-adjustment and the adjustment via integral factor must not be active
simultaneously!
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number

An automatic offset adjustment can be activated with the code number 75 368. After entering the
code number the control shows the offset values for the axes X, Y, Z, 4, 5 in the dialogue line. The
values indicate the voltage in 0.15 mV units. Thus a display of 10 means 10 x 0.15 mV = 1.5 mV. The
display 0 means no offset.
On pressing the ENT key or the CONTINUE soft key the offset values are automatically
compensated. The control puts out an appropriate compensating voltage. In the TNC 407
compensation only takes place if the offset voltage is > 0.6 mV. To switch off the automatic offset
adjustment, enter the code number and press the NO ENT key or the QUIT soft key. If the code
number has been entered but no changes are desired, press the END soft key.
The offset values are stored in the control and are non-volatile. If the control is exchanged, the code
number must be entered to reactivate the offset adjustment.
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment
The machine parameter MP1220 can be used to program a time interval, after which an offset
adjustment will be performed cyclically.
An automatic adjustment will be carried out, when the predetermined time has elapsed and the
following conditions are fulfilled:
- all axes are stopped,

- the spindle is not switched on,
- the axes are not clamped.
For each adjustment cycle there will be a 1 mV correction if the offset voltage is larger than 1 mV. If
the offset voltage is smaller than 1 mV then, in the TNC 415, compensation steps of 0.15 mV will be
used (in the TNC 407 in steps of 0.6 mV).
MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment

Entry: 0 to 65 536 [s]
0 = no automatic adjustment
3.3.3 Offset adjustment with integral factor
The integral factor MP1080 also results in an automatic offset adjustment. It is only effective in the
stop condition (see block diagram of control loop).
According to the size of the factor the offset voltage will be reduced quickly or slowly.
Even a small amount of play in the drives can lead to instability in the control loop. An integral factor
of 0 is entered in this case.
Transformer MP1080 sa = 1000

steps
(TNC 415:
0,15 mV) MP1080 sa = 500
10
MP1080 sa = 150
6
1 2 3 4 t [s]
MP1080 Integral factor

Entry: 0 to 65 535
MP1080.0 Integral factor X axis

MP1080.1 Integral factor Y axis
MP1080.2 Integral factor Z axis
MP1080.3 Integral factor 4th axis
MP1080.4 Integral factor 5th axis

3.4 Contour behaviour
3.4.1 Radial acceleration
As well as the normal acceleration (MP1060) there is also a machine parameter for radial
acceleration (MP1070).
The machine parameter limits the feed for circular movements according to the following formula:
v= r [m] MP1070 [m/s2] v= feed rate for circular movements [m/s]

r= radius [m] (cutter mid-point contour)
It is recommended that a value should be entered which is between the half of and the same as that
in MP1060 (Acceleration). If the programmed feed is lower than that above, then the programmed
feed will be used. MP1070 is effective for operation with lag and with feedforward control.
MP1070 Radial acceleration

Entry: 0.001 to 5.000 [m/s2]
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners

Machine parameter MP7460 defines the angle which can still be traversed with constant surface
speed. This machine parameter is effective for corners without a radius compensation, for internal
corners it is also effective with a radius compensation.
MP7460
This machine parameter is effective for operation with feedforward control as well as for operation
with lag. The permissible size of the angle depends on the drives in the machine.
Realistic values are 5 to 15.
The resulting path is as follows:
Axis standstill
= Change of axis direction

sa = Servo lag
sa
Path when MP7460 <

Path when MP7460 >
MP7460 Constant feed rate in corners

Entry value: 0.0001 to 179.9999
3.4.3 Constant feed rate in corners with M90

The miscellaneous function M90 was introduced to enable constant surface speed to be achieved in
corners without radius compensation.
This miscellaneous function is only effective in operation with lag!
sa
without M90
with M90
3.4.4 Contour speed related to tool cutting edge

The programmed feed-rate normally relates to the path of the cutter centre.
When M function M109 is active the feed-rate at radii is increased or reduced to maintain a constant
feed-rate at the cutting edge of the tool.
When M function M110 is active the feed-rate is reduced only. There is no increase in feed-rate.
When M function M111 is active the programmed feed-rate is re-assigned to the path of the cutter
centre.
3.4.5 Preset tolerance at corners
3D forms are often described by a progression of very short linear blocks. The control reduces the
feed rate at the discontinuous transitions in order to keep the tool exactly on path.
If you are working with servo lag, depending on the feed rate the corners will be more or less
"rounded" if M90 is entered or if MP7460 is set correspondingly. Since feedforward control is
intended to virtually eliminate servo lag, working with feedforward control will result in sharp
corners. This is not desired, however, on 3D forms.
With the M function M112 you can enter a tolerance for the deviation from the programmed contour
at corners and a limit angle for activation of the tolerance.
T
r
A rounding arc is inserted at corners. The radius of the arc is a function of the entered tolerance T
and the limit angle A. Three radii are calculated:
T sin(b) 1 v
r1 = r2 = tan(b) r3 =
1sin(b) 2 a
T= The tolerance entered with M112. If no tolerance was entered, the tolerance is be
considered to be infinite.
b= Half of the angle of the adjacent line segments
= The shorter of the two adjacent line segments
v= Programmed feed rate 1.5 (Feed rate override = 150%)
a= Smaller value from the acceleration of the interpolated axes (MP1060) and the radial
acceleration (MP1070).
The smallest of the 3 radii is used. r3 is included in the calculation only if the change in direction is
greater than the given angle A. As long as the limit angle A is not exceeded, the size of the inserted
arc is independent of the feed rate; the largest possible arc is inserted.
If the feed rate during program run too large for the calculated rounding arc, the TNC automatically
reduces the feed rate. M112 is inactivated again by M113. M112 is effective in NC blocks without
radius compensation both in operation with servo lag and with feedforward control. M124 influences
the point spacing for calculating the rounding arc. Refer to your User's Manual for more information.
3.5 Monitoring functions
The NC monitors the axis positions and the dynamic behaviour of the machine. If the fixed values in
the machine parameters are exceeded, an error message is displayed and the machine is stopped.
If monitoring is not wanted, it can be deactivated for the following using M2688 to M2692:
Position monitoring
Standstill monitoring
Movement monitoring
Monitoring of the analog voltage
M2688 No monitoring X axis PLC PLC

M2689 No monitoring Y axis
M2690 No monitoring Z axis
M2691 No monitoring 4th axis
M2692 No monitoring 5th axis
The monitoring can be reactivated by resetting the markers in the PLC.
The monitoring functions can also be switched off conditionally. In the machine parameter MP4130
a PLC-input is defined, which is interrogated with the same cycle time as the control loop (TNC 415:
3 ms; TNC 407: 6 ms). The condition for activating this input is stored in MP4131. This function must
be activated from the PLC by setting Bit 0 in Word W522.
If monitoring functions are switched off, safe operation of the machine cannot be
guaranteed. Uncontrolled movements of the axes are not recognized.
MP4130 Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring functions

Entry: 0 to 255 (No. of the PLC input)
MP4131 Activation condition for fast PLC input from MP4130

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = activation for Low level

1 = activation for High level
W522 Bit 0 Monitoring functions suppressed PLC PLC

if PLC input from MP 4130 is activated
3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag
The machine parameters MP1710 and MP1720 determine the ranges for the continuous position
monitoring in the machine (lag monitoring). The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under
the control of the position control loop.
If the limits of parameter MP1710 are exceeded, the error message
"Positioning error"
will appear and the machine stops. The error message can be cancelled by the "CE" key.
If the limit of parameter MP1720 is exceeded, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error A"
appears.
This error can only be cancelled by switching off the control. An entry value of approx. 1 to 1.4 times
lag for rapid traverse is realistic. MP1720 is larger than MP1710.
MP1710 Position monitoring for operation with lag (cancellable)

Entry: 0.0000 to 300.0000 (mm)
MP1710.0 Axis X
MP1710.1 Axis Y
MP1710.2 Axis Z
MP1710.3 4th axis
MP1710.4 5th axis
MP1720 Position monitoring for operation with lag (EMERGENCY STOP)

Entry: 0.0000 to 300.0000 (mm)
MP1720.0 Axis X
MP1720.1 Axis Y
MP1720.2 Axis Z
MP1720.3 4th axis
MP1720.4 5th axis
3.5.2 Position monitoring for operation with feedforward control
In operation with feedforward control the ranges for continuous position monitoring are determined
by MP1410 and MP1420 lag monitoring. The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under the
control of the position control loop.
If the limits of MP1410 are exceeded, the error message
"Position error"
will appear, which can be cancelled with the "CE" key. If the limit of parameter MP1420 is exceeded,
the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error A"
appears. This error can only be cancelled by switching off the control.
If clamped axes cause the error message "Position error", a residual voltage can remain at the
nominal value output, since the machine axes can no longer be traversed. MP1150 can be used to
program a time after which the residual voltage becomes zero. After this period a nominal/actual
value transfer is carried out. If the error message is cancelled by "CE" before the time has elapsed
the nominal/actual value transfer is carried out and the residual voltage is switched off.
The machine parameter functions in operation with lag as well as with feedforward control.
MP1410 Position monitoring in operation with precontrol (cancellable)

Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 (mm)
MP1410.0 Axis X
MP1410.1 Axis Y
MP1410.2 Axis Z
MP1410.3 4th axis
MP1410.4 5th axis
MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with precontrol (EMERGENCY STOP)

Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 (mm)
MP1420.0 Axis X
MP1420.1 Axis Y
MP1420.2 Axis Z
MP1420.3 4th axis
MP1420.4 5th axis
MP1150 Delay time before switching off the residual voltage on error message
"Position error"
Entry: 0 to 65.535 (s)
3.5.3 Monitoring the analogue voltage
Monitoring of the analogue voltage is only possible in operation with feedforward control.
If it exceeds 10 V, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error B"
is displayed.
3.5.4 Movement-monitoring
The movement-monitoring functions in operation with feedforward control as well as with lag.
During movement monitoring, the actual path travelled is compared with a nominal path calculated
by the NC at short intervals (several servo cycles). If, during this period, the actual path travelled
differs from the calculated path, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error C"
is displayed.
In machine parameter MP1140 a voltage can be stored, below which the movement-monitoring is
out of action.
If 10 [V] is entered in this machine parameter, the movement-monitoring becomes

inactive. It is not possible to operate the machine safely without movement
monitoring.
MP1140 Movement monitoring

Entry: 0.030 to 10.000 (V)
MP1140.0 Axis X
MP1140.1 Axis Y
MP1140.2 Axis Z
MP1140.3 4th axis
MP1140.4 5th axis
3.5.5 Standstill monitoring
The Standstill monitoring operates with feedforward control and with lag. The monitoring begins
when the axes have reached the positioning window. The range in which the axes may move is
defined in MP1110.
As soon as position deviation is greater than the value which is stored in MP1110, the flashing error
message "GROSS POSITIONING ERROR D" is displayed. The message also appears if, on running-
in to a position, an overshoot occurs which is larger than the value in MP1110, or if the axis moves
in the opposite direction on beginning a positioning movement.
MP1110 Standstill monitoring

Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 (mm)
MP1110.0 X axis
MP1110.1 Y axis
MP1110.2 Z axis
MP1110.3 4th axis
MP1110.4 5th axis
3.5.6 Positioning window

The positioning window defines the limits within which the control considers that a position has
been reached. After reaching the position the control starts the execution of the next block. The size
of the positioning window is defined in machine parameter MP1030.
During feedforward control the positioning window is not evaluated until the velocity falls below the
value in MP1525*. This MP does not exist on old software versions, in which the maximum velocity
for positioning window evaluation is fixed at 0.5 mm/min.
If the value which is entered is too small, the run-in time and therefore the time between one
program block and the next will be lengthened.
If the axes have reached the positioning window after a movement, the markers M2008 to M2011
and M2017 are set (see section "Axis in position").
MP1030 Positioning window

Entry: 0.0001 to 2.0000 (mm)
MP1030.0 X axis
MP1030.1 Y axis
MP1030.2 Z axis
MP1030.3 4th axis
MP1030.4 5th axis
MP1525 Maximum velocity for checking the positioning window

Entry: 0.100 to 10.000 [mm/min]
Recommended value: 0.5 [mm/min]
*
As of software versions 280 54x 02, 280 56x 02 and 280 58x 02

3.6 Controlled axes
The machine parameter MP50 determines which of the five NC-axes should be controlled.
MP50 Controlled axes

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0 = not controlled

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = controlled
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Further parameters for the NC-axes may be found in the section "machine axes".
The PLC functions which are described in the following sections are only effective for controlled
axes.
3.6.1 Axis-enable, feed rate enable

After switching on the control voltage the "Axis-enable markers" are automatically set by the NC, so
that the machine axes can be held in closed position loops by the control .
The axis-enable markers can be reset by the NC if the control loop is opened by the PLC, see
section "Open control loop").
M2000 Axis enable X NC NC

M2001 Axis enable Y
M2002 Axis enable Z
M2003 Axis enable 4
M2016 Axis enable 5
The feed rate enable must be specified for all axes by M2451 and complement marker M2467 or
through byte B520 before the axes can be moved. If the feed rate enable is removed, the analogue
voltage is output as 0 V and the axes immediately stop moving. The letter "F" is then highlighted in
the status display.
M2451 Feed rate enable for all axes PLC PLC

M2467 Complement feed rate enable
Address Function
B520 Axis-specific feed rate enable
Bit 0 +1 Feed rate enable Axis X

+0 No Feed rate enable Axis X
Bit 1 +2 Feed rate enable Axis Y
+0 No Feed rate enable Axis Y
Bit 2 +4 Feed rate enable Axis Z
+0 No Feed rate enable Axis Z
Bit 3 +8 Feed rate enable 4th axis
+0 No Feed rate enable 4th axis
Bit 4 +16 Feed rate enable 5th axis
+0 No Feed rate enable 5th axis
3.6.2 Axes in position

If the axes have reached the defined positioning window (MP1030, see section "Positioning
window") after a movement, the "axis in position" markers are set by the NC. This also happens
after switching on the control voltage.
As soon as a positioning is started, the markers are reset by the NC. This is also valid when passing
over the reference marks. In the "Electronic handwheel" mode of operation the markers M2008 to
M2011 and M2017 are reset.
For contours which can be machined with constant feed rate the "Axis in position" markers are not
set.
M2008 X axis in position NC NC

M2009 Y axis in position
M2010 Z axis in position
M2011 4th axis in position
M2017 5th axis in position
3.6.3 Axes in motion
If the axes are in motion the appropriate "Axis in motion" markers are set by the NC.
Note: The markers are only set in the operating modes "Positioning with manual entry", "Single block"
and "Full sequence".
M2128 X axis in motion NC NC

M2129 Y axis in motion
M2130 Z axis in motion
M2131 4th axis in motion
M2132 5th axis in motion
Example for markers "Axis in position" and "Axis in motion":
P3 .
.
.
L X80 Y20 RL
L X0 RL
P2 L X80 RL
.
P1 P0 .
.
P0 P1 P2 P3
M2008
M2009
M2128
M2129
3.6.4 Open control loop
After Marker M2830 is set, the control loops of each axis and of the spindle are opened, and an NC
stop is performed. This makes it possible, for example, for the control loops to be opened at the
same time as the drives are switched off. If Marker M2827 is set, no external EMERGENCY STOP
(Input I3 Control is operational) is sent to the NC; instead, the spindle and the position controllers
are opened in all axes, and an NC stop is carried out.
If, after the execution of an NC block, the control loop for a particular axis is opened and this axis is
clamped, then it is necessary to delay this opening to give the clamp sufficient time to operate. The
markers M2492 to M2495 and M2500 serve this purpose. If one of these markers is set, and the
appropriate axis is in position, then the next NC block will only then be processed when the "Open
control loop" marker (M2544 to M2547, M2507) has been set. After the control loops are opened the
markers M2000 to M2003 and M2016 are reset by the NC. As soon as the "Axis in position" markers
are reset, the control loop must be closed again so that the axis can be moved.
M2544 Open control loop X axis PLC PLC

M2545 Open control loop Y axis PLC PLC
M2546 Open control loop Z axis PLC PLC
M2547 Open control loop 4th axis PLC PLC
M2507 Open control loop 5th axis PLC PLC
M2492 Await open control loop X axis PLC PLC

M2493 Await open control loop Y axis PLC PLC
M2494 Await open control loop Z axis PLC PLC
M2495 Await open control loop 4th axis PLC PLC
M2500 Await open control loop 5th axis PLC PLC
M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY STOP, open the PLC PLC

control loop, NC stop
M2830 NC stop and open the control loop PLC PLC
3.6.5 Actual - nominal value transfer

If the markers M2552 to M2555 and M2505 are set, then the actual positional value will be
transferred to the nominal value.
Actual value transfer is only possible in the "Manual" and Electronic handwheel" modes of operation.
M2552 Actual - nominal value transfer X axis PLC PLC

M2553 Actual - nominal value transfer Y axis PLC PLC
M2554 Actual - nominal value transfer Z axis PLC PLC
M2555 Actual - nominal value transfer 4th axis PLC PLC
M2505 Actual - nominal value transfer 5th axis PLC PLC

4
4 Main Spindle
The spindle is controlled by the PLC.
The spindle speed (S output) can be either an analogue voltage output or a coded output. The
spindle speed is programmed in rpm in the NC-program.
The machine parameter MP3010 determines whether the spindle speed is a coded output or an
analogue output, and whether the spindle orientation should be active.
Up to eight gear ranges can be defined by machine parameters.
Tapping cycles are available for tapping with and without floating tap holder.
MP3010 Spindle-speed output, Spindle orientation

Entry: 0 to 8
0 =No spindle-speed output
1 =Coded output of the spindle speed,

only if the spindle speed changes
2 =Coded output of the spindle-speed at every TOOL CALL
3 =Analogue output of the spindle speed and gear-change signal,

only when the gear range is changed
4 =Analogue output of the spindle speed and gear-change signal

at every TOOL CALL
5 =Analogue output of the spindle speed and no gear-change signal
6 =As for Entry value 3, but with controlled spindle for orientation
The functions are described in detail in the following sections.
4-94 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 01.98

4.1 Analogue output of the spindle speed
For analogue output of the spindle speed (S-analogue) spindle speeds can be programmed from 0 to
99 999.999 rpm. The programmed spindle speed is available as an analogue DC-voltage of 0 to 10 V
on connector X8 of the logic unit. In addition, gear change signals can be assigned to any PLC-
outputs by the PLC program.
For S-analogue the value 991 must be entered in the machine parameter MP3020!
If the control is operating with S-analogue, marker M2042 is set. The programmed spindle speed is
stored in D356 in 1/1 000 [rpm]. The nominal spindle speed is stored in Word W320 in rpm. The
actual spindle speed is stored in Word W322 in rpm.
M2042 Analogue output of the spindle speed NC NC

D356 Programmed spindle speed NC NC
W320 Nominal spindle speed NC NC
W322 Actual spindle speed NC NC
4.1.1 Direction of spindle rotation

The polarity of the S-analogue voltage is defined by machine parameter MP3130. The count direction
of the measuring system signals for the spindle is defined in MP3140. The direction of spindle
rotation can be reversed by setting marker M2489, i.e. polarity is inverted. This can become
necessary, for example, when shifting spindle transmission between horizontal and vertical.
The S-analogue voltage appears at the output as soon as the marker M2485 for M03 or M2486 for
M04 is set. At the same time the miscellaneous function is displayed in the status window of the
control (see section "Display and operation"). Marker M2487 turns off the analogue voltage and
displays M05.
If more than one of the markers M2485 to M2487 is set at the same time, this will release the
flashing error message
"Error in PLC-program 1Q"
Marker M2608 can be used to remove the spindle-enable, at the same time M03, M04 or M05 is
displayed inversely. The S-analogue voltage will then go to 0 V.
MP3130 Polarity of the S-analogue voltage

Entry: 0 to 3
0 =M03 positive voltage

M04 negative voltage
1 =M03 negative voltage
M04 positive voltage
2 =M03 and M04 positive voltage
3 =M03 and M04 negative voltage
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Main Spindle 4-95

MP3140 Count direction of the measuring system signals for the spindle
0 =positive count direction with M03

1 =negative count direction with M03
M2489 Change direction of spindle rotation PLC PLC
M2485 Status display and output of the analogue voltage PLC PLC
for M03
M2486 Status display and output of the analogue voltage PLC PLC
for M04
M2487 Status display M05 and spindle-stop PLC PLC
M2608 Inverse display of M03, M04, M05 and PLC PLC

S-analogue = 0 V [no spindle-enable)
4.1.2 Gear range

With the aid of the machine parameters MP3510 and MP3210 up to eight gear ranges can be
defined. The nominal speed for S-override 100 % and a matching S-analogue voltage is entered for
each gear range.
If not all gear ranges are required, then the remaining machine parameters are set to zero.
Machine parameter MP3515 can be used to define a maximum achievable spindle speed for each
gear range which cannot be exceeded by S-override.
The voltage range can be restricted by machine parameter MP3240.1.
MP3120 can determine whether zero spindle speed is permitted, in spite of a minimum producable
analogue output voltage.
If an S-analogue voltage output 0 V is produced, marker M2005 will be set. This is also the case
when the potential has been turned down to zero with the override potentiometer.
The ramp slope for the S-analogue voltage on output of M03, M04 is stored in MP3410.0.
If the spindle voltage is on a rising or falling ramp, marker M2004 will be set. This also happens
when the spindle voltage is altered with the override potentiometer, the voltage changes very
quickly, and the ramp of MP3410.0 cannot be followed.

MP3510 Spindle speed for gear ranges
Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3510.0 Spindle speed for gear range 1

MP3515 Maximum spindle speed

Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3515.0 Maximum spindle speed, gear range 1

MP3210 S-analogue voltage for gear range

Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3210.0 S-analogue voltage, gear range 1

MP3240.1 Minimum S-analogue voltage output

Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3120 Zero spindle speed permitted

Entry value 0:S = 0 permitted
Entry value 1:S = 0 not permitted
MP3410.0 Ramp slope for spindle for M03, M04, M05

Entry: 0 to 1.9999 [V/ms]
M2004 S-analogue voltage not on the ramp NC NC

M2005 S-analogue voltage = 0 V NC NC


4.1.3 S-Override
The spindle speed can be altered within certain limits by the S-override potentiometer . These limits
are fixed by machine parameter MP3310. However, the upper spindle speed-limit from MP3515
cannot be exceeded by S-override.
The %-factor which is adjusted by S-override is kept in Word W492 and W764. However, W764 be
changed by the PLC. As soon as a different value is entered here it will be adopted by the NC. In this
way the %-factor can be influenced by the PLC .
If W764 is not changed by the PLC, the normal override-function remains active.
MP7620 bit 3 determines whether the override is effective in 1% steps or according to a non-linear
characteristic curve. In the non-linear characteristic, the lower range changes in 0.01% steps, and in
the range over 2.5% the step is 0.75%. The range of override values in W492 and W764 lies
between 1 and 150 in 1% steps for the linear characteristic, and between 0 and 15 000 for the non-
linear characteristic.
MP3310.0 Limit with S-override (maximum)

Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP3310.1 Limit with S-override (minimum)

Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
Word Function Set Reset
W492 %-factor - spindle-override NC NC

(NC PLC)
W764 %-factor - spindle override NC; PLC NC; PLC

(PLC NC)
MP7620 Feed-rate and spindle override

Entry: %xx0x
Bit 3 Override in 1% steps or non-linear
0 = 1% steps
1 = non-linear

The following diagram explains the relationships:
U [V]
MP3210.1
=8V
MP3210.0
=6V
MP3240.1
=1V
0 250 750 1500 1875 3000 3375 [min1]

MP3510.0 MP3510.1 MP3515.1
I II
Gear range I: 1500 rpm at 6V (MP3510.0, MP3210.0)
Gear range II: 3000 rpm at 8V (MP3510.1, MP3210.1)
Upper S override limit: 125% (MP3310.0)
Lower S override limit: 50% (MP3310.1)
Max. output speed for gear range II: 3375 rpm (MP3515.1)
Minimum output voltage: 1V (MP3240.1)
4.1.4 Gear change

Gear change is controlled by the PLC-program. Up to eight gear ranges are available, coded in Word
W256. The NC enters the gear code for the gear ranges one to eight in Word W256 according to the
programmed spindle speeds in the NC-program (see MP3510).
After setting the gear-code, the marker M2043 is set by the NC as a change signal.
The spindle speed which is programmed in the NC-program as TOOL CALL S is stored in
Doubleword D356 and D756 in 1/1000 [rpm] by the NC.
If a different spindle speed (from the spindle speed fixed by the NC) is to be activated by the PLC,
the speed must be entered by the PLC in D756, this can then be activated by marker M2814 .
A different gear range from that which is selected by the NC can be activated by setting Word W256
and marker M2814 with the PLC. Word W256 remains unchanged until the next gear change signal.
Marker M2814 is reset by the NC after the gear change .
Check that the spindle speed selected by the PLC is within the spindle-speed limits of the selected
gear range.

The PLC-program must transfer the gear-code to the machine. The NC waits for the
acknowledgement signal "Gear change completed" (M2480) before continuing the program . As
soon as marker M2480 is set by the PLC the NC resets the strobe signal M2043. The marker M2480
may only be set in one PLC-cycle.
M2043 Gear-code change signal NC NC
M2480 Acknowledgement PLC PLC

"Gear change completed"
M2814 Activation of a gear range and spindle speed PLC NC

via PLC
D356 Programmed spindle speed NC
D756 Set spindle-speed from the PLC; NC, PLC

programmed spindle speed
W256 G-code for S-analogue NC
An alternating S-analogue voltage can be produced for changing gear. For this purpose the marker
M2490 and the marker M2491 must be alternately set and reset by the PLC. This may be achieved
by interrogating a particular timer in the PLC-program. The markers M2490 and M2491 are reset to
stop the spindle. The output voltage is defined by MP3240.2.
M2490 Spindle rotation left (for gear change) PLC PLC
M2491 Spindle rotation right (for gear change) PLC PLC
MP3240.2 Jog-voltage for gear change

Entry: 0.000 to 9.999 (V)

The direction of spindle rotation after the gear change is determined by the PLC-program with the
markers M2485 to M2487 (see "Direction of spindle rotation").
Machine parameter MP3030 can be used to determine whether an axis-halt should occur on a TOOL
CALL with only a spindle speed output.
If an axis-halt is not permitted, then no PLC-positioning, datum-correction, spindle-orientation or

change of limit switch range may be performed during the S-code output.
MP3030 Axis-halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle speed output.

1 = No axis-halt on TOOL CALL
0 = Axis-halt on TOOL CALL
If a non-permissible spindle speed is programmed, the marker M2092 will be set by the NC, and
simultaneously the error message "Wrong spindle speed" is displayed.
M2092 Prohibited spindle speed NC NC

PLC example for gear change and jog-voltage output:
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal for S-analogue
CMT 50 ;Module-call (output gear-code )
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal for S-analogue
AN M968 ;Buffer marker for T13
AN T13
AN T14
AN T61 ;Timer 13 for spindle-left, running
AN T62 ;Timer 14 for spindle-right, running
= T13 ;Set timer 13 (value from MP4110.13)
S M968 ;Set buffer marker for T13
L M2043
AN M969 ;Buffer marker for T14
AN T13
AN T14
AN T61
AN T62
= T14 ;Set timer 14 (value from MP4110.14)
S M969 ;Set buffer marker for T14
L T61 ;Timer 13 running
= M2490 ;Spindle-left for gear change
L T62 ;Timer 14 running
= M2491 ;Spindle-right for gear change
LN T13
AN T61
R M968 ;Reset buffer marker
LN T14
AN T61
R M968 ;Reset buffer marker
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M2043
A I5 ;Input for acknowledgement signal
S M2480 ;Acknowledgement - gear changed
. . .
. . .
EM ;End main program
LBL50 ;Module start

L M2043 ;Gear-code change signal
L W256 ;Gear-code for S-analogue
B= 015 ;Outputs 15, 16 and 17 for gear change are activated
EM ;Module end

4.1.5 Offset adjustment
Spindle orientation is followed by automatic offset adjustment. To give the spindle sufficient time to
recover, offset adjustment does not start until the spindle has been in position for at least two
seconds. Offset is then compensated cyclically by 0.152 mV at one second intervals.
4.2 BCD-coded output of spindle speed

For coded output of the spindle speed an S-code is entered in Word W258 by the NC. At the same
time strobe marker M2044 is set by the NC. The signals are static. The NC delays the continuation
of program run until marker M2481 gives the acknowledgement that the new spindle speed has
been activated. On acknowledgement the strobe marker M2044 is reset. The S-code is not altered
until the next S-output.
A spindle speed is entered in the TOOL CALL-block with a maximum of four figures in rpm, if
necessary, rounded off by the NC to the nearest standard value. Spindle speeds of 0 to 9 000 are
possible. The spindle speed which has been entered is put out by the control as S-Code according to
DIN 66025, as shown in the list of S-Codes.
With MP3020 the minimum and maximum spindle speeds and the desired spindle-speed steps can
be defined.
The entry value is a 5-figure number, derived as follows:
Minimum spindle speed 00 to 99 (see S-code-table)

Maximum spindle speed 00 to 99 (see S-code-table)
Spindle-speed step 1 to 9
Example:
The minimum spindle speed is to be 1 rpm (S-code 20), the maximum spindle speed is to be
1000 rpm (S-code 80). Only every second spindle speed should be programmable. This gives an
entry value of 20802 for MP3020. An entry value of 991 would mean no limit.
The S-code is stored in the PLC in Word W258. The minimum spindle speed from MP3020 is stored
in Word W1008.
M2044 S-code change signal NC NC

M2481 S-code acknowledgement PLC PLC
W258 S-code NC NC
W1008 S-code for minimum spindle speed NC
MP3020 Definition of the spindle speed range

Entry: 1 to 99,999

S-code table
S-function S-function
code rpm code rpm
S 00 0 S 50 31.5
S 01 0.112 S 51 35.5
S 02 0.125 S 52 40
S 03 0.14 S 53 45
S 04 0.16 S 54 50
S 05 0.18 S 55 56
S 06 0.2 S 56 63
S 07 0.224 S 57 71
S 08 0.25 S 58 80
S 09 0.28 S 59 90
S 10 0.315 S 60 100
S 11 0.355 S 61 112
S 12 0.4 S 62 125
S 13 0.45 S 63 140
S 14 0.5 S 64 160
S 15 0.56 S 65 180
S 16 0.63 S 66 200
S 17 0.71 S 67 224
S 18 0.8 S 68 250
S 19 0.9 S 69 280
S 20 1 S 70 315
S 21 1.12 S 71 355
S 22 1.25 S 72 400
S 23 1.4 S 73 450
S 24 1.6 S 74 500
S 25 1.8 S 75 560
S 26 2 S 76 630
S 27 2.24 S 77 710
S 28 2.5 S 78 800
S 29 2.8 S 79 900
S 30 3.15 S 80 1000
S 31 3.55 S 81 1120
S 32 4 S 82 1250
S 33 4.5 S 83 1400
S 34 5 S 84 1600
S 35 5.6 S 85 1800
S 36 6.3 S 86 2000
S 37 7.1 S 87 2240
S 38 8 S 88 2500
S 39 9 S 89 2800
S 40 10 S 90 3150
S 41 11.2 S 91 3550
S 42 12.5 S 92 4000
S 43 14 S 93 4500
S 44 16 S 94 5000
S 45 18 S 95 5600
S 46 20 S 96 6300
S 47 22.4 S 97 7100
S 48 25 S 98 8000
S 49 28 S 99 9000

4.3 Spindle-orientation
In order to use the TNC on machines with automatic tool-changers an orientation of the main spindle
(S-axis) is necessary. This requires a controllable spindle. The orientation is carried out by a
miscellaneous function M19 or another M-function, and must be initiated by the PLC-program. The
spindle orientation functions asynchronously to the NC positioning movements. The PLC must not
acknowledge the oriented stop until M2007 is set. MP3010 determines whether the control
operates with or without spindle-orientation (see Section 4, "Main spindle").
There are three ways in which the PLC can orient the spindle:
with Module 9171
with Marker M2712
through initiator with M2501
Spindle orientation with Module 9171

Module 9171 makes it possible to define the velocity, angle and the direction of rotation for spindle
orientation. Marker M2712 is set as long as the spindle is being oriented. See the description of
Module 9171 in the "PLC-Programming" chapter.
Spindle orientation with Marker M2712

If spindle orientation is activated with M2712, the nominal position is taken from D592. The nominal
position is based on the reference point and can, for example, be set in machine parameter
MP4210.x. It must be copied into the Doubleword D592. The nominal position can also be take from
the "Orientation" cycle (CYCL DEF 13). In this case, MSB of D592 = 1 and the other bits are set to 0.
This must be realized through the PLC program. Marker M2408 is set during execution of Cycle 13.
The speed of spindle orientation is taken from MP3520.1.
For the orientation of a stationary spindle, the direction is taken that has the shortest path to the
stop position, provided that at the start the distance between the nominal and actual positions is not
greater than the positioning window (MP3420). If the distance is greater than the positioning
window, the spindle will be positioned according to Marker M2656 with M03 or M04.
Sequence of spindle orientation with Marker M2712 or Module 9171

The spindle speed is reduced along the ramp from MP3410.1 to the speed for spindle orientation.
Once this speed has been reached the spindle is in the control loop and is oriented to the nominal
position along the ramp from MP3410.1.
If the spindle does not have to remain in the control loop after reaching the nominal position, marker
M2499 must be set. The spindle is not free of the control loop until this marker has been set. If
M2499 remains set, the control loop is opened after each orientation as soon as the positioning
window is reached.
The spindle can be oriented down to 0.1 degree. This value results from the line number of the
installed rotary encoder (ROD 426.xxx8 with 1024 lines) and the 4-fold evaluation in the TNC. A
positioning window is defined with MP3420. Marker M2007 is set once the spindle is in the
positioning window after orientation.
Machine parameter MP3430 was introduced to make it possible to easily compensate rotary
encoder misalignment resulting from imprecise mounting. The offset of the nominal and actual
position of the reference mark is entered here for compensation during spindle orientation.
The reference mark is immediately evaluated by the NC the first time the spindle is switched on.
The reference mark can be evaluated once again for special applications if Marker M2615 is set.

A separate kv-factor for each gear range can be entered in MP3440 for a more exact control of the
spindle orientation. A display of the spindle position is activated with MP40. The spindle position is
displayed only if neither M03 nor M04 is active. It is displayed as a value below 360 degrees.
Orientation from rotation:

S
[rpm]
Prog. rpm
MP3410.1
MP3410.1
RPM for
orientation
0 t
M19 Target
position
Distance
to target position
Orientation from standstill:
S
[rpm]
Prog. rpm
MP3410.0
Stand-
still
RPM for MP3410.1
orientation
0 t
M05 M19 Target
position

Spindle orientation through initiator with Marker M2501
The spindle can also be oriented through an initiator. This requires that Marker M2501 be set by the
PLC. This marker activates a spindle rotation at the speed defined in machine parameter MP3520.0
and in the direction of rotation defined in Marker M2656. If Marker M2501 is reset by the PLC (e.g.
through initiator), the spindle stops. The position value is shown in the status window. This method
can also be used to a enable a jog-mode spindle orientation.
MP3410.1 Spindle ramp slope for spindle orientation

Entry: 0.0000 to 1.9999 [V/ms]
MP3420 Positioning window for spindle

Entry: 0 to 65 535 [Increments]
1 Increment represents approx. 0.088 degrees
360 degrees
=
1024 lines fourfold evaluation
MP3430 Deviation of the reference mark from the desired position (spindle preset)
Entry: 0 to 360 [degrees]
MP3440 kv-Factor for spindle orientation

1000/min
Entry: 0.1 to 10 [ ]

MP3440.0 kv-Factor 1st gear range

MP3440.1 kv-Factor 2nd gear range
MP3440.2 kv-Factor 3rd gear range
MP3440.3 kv-Factor 4th gear range
MP3520.0 Spindle speed activated by Marker M2501

Entry: 0.000 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3520.1 Spindle speed for spindle orientation

Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]

M2007 Spindle in Position NC NC

M2127 Spindle in motion (controlled spindle) NC NC
M2408 Cycle 13 is being executed NC PLC
M2499 Open the spindle control loop PLC PLC
M2501 Activates spindle-speed MP3520.0 PLC PLC
and direction of rotation from Marker M2656
M2615 Re-evaluation of the reference marks PLC NC
for spindle orientation
M2656 Spindle orientation from stop PLC PLC
0 = Orientation with M03
M2712 Activate PLC positioning for NC, PLC NC
spindle orientation
D592 Nominal position for spindle orientation

(Strobe M2712)
Example of a PLC-program for spindle-orientation with M19/M20
Program description:
Using the M-Function M19 to activate a spindle-orientation to the value which is determined by the
spindle-orientation cycle.
Using the M-Function M20 to activate a spindle-orientation to the value which is stored in
MP4210.47.
;Main program
LN M1 ;Generate logic ONE
S M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
. . .
. . .
. . .
LN M2045 ;M-strobe inactive
R M12 ;Spindle-orientation cycle active
R M2482 ;Acknowledgement of M-code
Activation of the orientation to the value from the HEIDENHAIN cycle

L M1919 ;Decoded M-function 19
A M2045 ;M-code change signal
AN M12 ;Orientation-cycle active
CMT 180 ;Activation of the Orientation from the cycle
S M12 ;Orientation-cycle active

Activation of the orientation to the Value of MP4210.47
AN M12 ;Orientation-cycle active
CMT 181 ;Activation of the orientation from the MP
S M12 ;Orientation-cycle active
Acknowledgement of the orientation

O M1920 ;Decoded M-function 20
A M2007 ;Spindle in position
AN M2712 ;Strobe for spindle-orientation
S M2482 ;Acknowledgement of M-code
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM ;Main program - end
LBL 180; Transfer positional value from the spindle-orientation cycle

L K+O ;Load the constant value ZEROl
BS K+31 ;Set Bit 31 to ONE
= D592 ;Position spindle-orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
S M2712 ;Strobe for spindle-orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM
LBL 181; Transfer positional-value from the machine parameter

L D956 ;MP4210.47 PLC-positional-value
= D592 ;Position spindle-orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
L M1 ;Buffer marker which is continuously ONE
S M2712 ;Strobe for spindle-orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
EM


4.4 Tapping
There are two tapping cycles available in the control:
tapping with floating tap holder and
rigid tapping.
Tapping with floating tap holder is possible for both analogue and BCD-coded spindle-speed output.
Rigid tapping is only possible for analogue spindle-speed output.
The tapping cycle is defined in the NC-program and can be called with CYCL CALL (M03). Tapping is
adjusted to the dynamic behaviour of the machine by machine parameters.

4.4.1 Tapping with floating tap holder for analogue spindle-speed
output
The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle.
Dwell time from

CYCL DEF 2.3
MP7120.2
30 ms
S
(Software-controlled)
MP3410.0
0
MP3410.2 MP3410.0
MP7120.0
M03
M05
M04
M2482
(M03) M2485
(M04) M2486
(M05) M2487
M2048

If the tapping cycle is called, marker M2048 is set by the NC.
After switching on the spindle with M03 and successful acknowledgement (marker M2482) the set
spindle-speed should have been reached when the feed commences. Upon switch-on, the spindle
follows the ramp from MP3410.0, on switching off it follows the ramp from MP3410.2. Switch-off is
initiated by the NC with M05. The M functions that are output must be acknowledged.
However, if the feed-ramp is flatter than the spindle-ramp, then the spindle follows the flatter feed-
ramp. Switch-off can be delayed by MP7120.2.
Example:
If spindle speed s = 1000 [rpm] = 1.8 [V] and the thread ramp is 0.05 [V/ms], then:
1.8 [V]: 0.05 [V/ms] = 36 ms
The spindle is decelerated 36 ms before reaching the total hole depth. If the spindle deceleration is
delayed by the spindle slow-down time, then it is only possible to delay up to 30 ms before reaching
the total hole depth. Any greater delay will be ignored. In this example a maximum slow-down time
of 6 ms is in effect.
The restarting of the Spindle with M04 can be delayed by MP7120.0. The ramp follows MP3410.2
again. The restarting of the feed can be delayed with the dwell-time which is programmed in the
cycle. The dwell-times permit an optimal adjustment of the floating tap holder.
The switch-off of the spindle is again performed by the NC with M05. The switch-off ramp follows
MP3410.0. After this, the spindle is switched on again with M03.
The feed-override can only be effective within limits when tapping, otherwise the floating tap holder
may be damaged. MP7110 was introduced for this limit.
MP3410.2 Ramp slope of the spindle for tapping

Entry: 0.0000 to 1.9999 (V/ms)
MP7120.0 Dwell-time for change of direction of spindle rotation

Entry: 0.0000 to 65.535 (s)
MP 7120.2 Spindle run-on time after reaching total hole depth

Entry: 0.0000 to 65.535 (s)
MP7110.0 Minimum for feed-override when tapping

Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP7110.1 Maximum for feed-override when tapping

Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
M2048 Tapping cycle called NC NC


4.4.2 Tapping with floating tap holder and BCD-coded
spindle-speed output
The following diagram shows the sequence of events in the cycle:
Dwell time from

CYCL DEF 2.3
S
0
MP7120.1
M03
M05
MP7120.0
M04
Acknow-
ledgement
of M code
M2048
Cycle End of
start cycle
Since, with BCD-coded spindle speed output, the spindle- and feed ramps cannot be synchronized
by the NC, a machine parameter MP7120.1 was introduced to enable the spindle to be switched off
early.
The machine parameter MP7120.0 (dwell-time for change of direction of rotation) and the
programmable dwell-time are just as effective as for analogue spindle-speed output.
MP7120.1 Pre-cut out time for the spindle when tapping with BCD-coded output
Entry: 0.0000 to 65.535 (s)

4.4.3 Rigid Tapping
Cycle 17
During rigid tapping the spindle position control loop is open. The machine tool operator defines rigid
tapping with Cycle 17 in the NC part program "CYCL DEF 17". While Cycle 17 is being run the TNC
automatically switches to operation with velocity feedforward. You define the dynamic behavior of
the spindle and the tool axis in machine parameters. The tool axis tracks the actual position of the
spindle during tapping. Before tapping begins, the axes, for example Z and S, are synchronized by
means of an oriented spindle stop. This means the every Z position is assigned to a corresponding
spindle position. The NC carries out the oriented spindle stop. M2127 is set by the NC and in the
PLC the spindle position control loop must be closed (M2499).
Synchronization makes it possible to cut the same thread more than once. The permanently
assigned spindle position depends on the thread pitch entered in the cycle. To save machining time
you can deselect this function with MP7160. Then, however, it is no longer possible to cut the
thread more than once. M2095 and M2048 are set while the cycle is running.
0
Positioning window
reached (MP7150)
Ramp from Oriented stop

S MP3410.3
0
Oriented stop
M05
Acknowledge-
ment of
M function
M2095
Cycle End of
start cycle
M2499

The positioning window from MP7150 is effective for the tool axis while Cycle 17 is being run. The
input value must be less than or equal to MP1030.x. You define the spindle acceleration and
deceleration process in MP3410.3, MP7130 and MP7140. Spindle overshoot is to be avoided during
acceleration and approach.
MP7140
Greater
Smaller Greater
MP7130
Smaller
M2048 Cycle 2 or cycle 17 active NC NC

M2095 Cycle 17 or cycle 18 active NC NC
M2499 Open control loop S-axis PLC PLC
MP3410.3 Ramp slope of the spindle during rigid tapping

Entry: 0.0000 to 1.9999 (V/msec)
MP7130 Spindle run-in characteristic
Entry: 0.001 to 10.000 [/min](matching MP1520)
MP7140 Transient response of spindle on acceleration
Entry: 0.001 to 1.000 (matching MP1520)
MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis during rigid tapping
Entry: 0.0001 to 2.0000 [mm]
MP7160 MP7160 Spindle orientation with Cycle 17
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = spindle orientation before Cycle 17
1 = no spindle orientation with Cycle 17
Cycle 18
With Cycle 18 the tool axis tracks the actual position of the spindle. The starting position is the
current position. The target position is the total hole depth. Approaching and departing movements
must be programmed separately. During Cycle 18 marker M2095 is set. M2499 must be reset so
that the cycle is run. MP7130, MP7140 and MP7150 have the same function as for Cycle 17.


5 EMERGENCY STOP-routine
A PLC-input (X42/4) and a PLC-output (X41/34 and in the PL410 B: X8/16) with the designation
"control is ready" are available in the control for the EMERGENCY STOP-routine.
If a malfunction is recognized in the control, the TNC switches the control-is-ready output signal off,
a flashing error message appears on the VDU-screen and the PLC-program is stopped. This error
message can not be cancelled. After removing the fault the switch-on routine must be gone through
again.
If the control-is-ready signal is switched off by an event outside the control, the error message
EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP is displayed and the NC sets the marker M2190 and M2191. This
error message can only be cancelled after the control voltage is switched on again.
The external EMERGENCY STOP is evaluated by the control as an external stop. If the external
EMERGENCY STOP is triggered during an axis movement, the moving axis is stopped in a controlled
manner. If the drive amplifiers are blocked by the external EMERGENCY STOP, the nominal-value
output may exceed the position-monitoring fixed by the machine parameter. In this case, the error
message POSITIONING ERROR or GROSS POSITIONING ERROR <AXIS> will be displayed.
EMERGENCY STOP can be suppressed with Marker M2827. If Marker M2827 is set, an external
EMERGENCY STOP is not reported to the NC and, instead, all control loops are opened and the NC
stops.
M2190 Cancellable error message is displayed NC NC

M2191 Error message "External EMERGENCY STOP" is displayed NC NC
M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY STOP, open the control loop, stop NC PLC PLC
4-120 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP-routine 01.98

5.1 Connection diagram
Under fault conditions the control-is-ready output should switch off the 24-volt supply. Because of
the enormous importance of this function this output is tested by the control every time the mains
power is switched on.
Basic circuit diagram:
Logic unit
Switch opens briefly when the control voltage
of each microprocessor is switched on
X41/34 X44/2 X44/1 X42/4

"Control is 24V not 24V "Control ready"
ready" interruptible interruptible feedback
EMERGENCY
STOP k1
buttons
+ -
k1
Control 24 V
voltage PLC
on K1
This is merely a suggestion for switching. The machine manufacturer must ensure that all
necessary safety specifications are met.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 EMERGENCY STOP-routine 4-121

5.2 Flow-diagram
The external electronics must meet the specified conditions. In particular, the acknowledgement for
"Control ready" must reach the TNC 415 after a maximum of 114 ms (for the TNC 407: 146 ms) .
5.2.1 TNC 415

X41/34
X42/4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
VDU display
1. Wait for control voltage. RELAY EXT. DC VOLTAGE

MISSING
2. Recognize the control voltage on X42/4 and switch-off

of the control-is-ready signal on X41/34
by the first microprocessor (t < 66 ms).
3. Maximum time during which the acknowledgement of

Control readiness on X42/4 must go to 0 (t < 114 ms).
If exceeded EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE
4. Recognize the acknowledgement and set X41/34

(t < 20 ms).

MISSING

by the second microprocessor (t < 66 ms).

control readiness on X42/4 must go to 0. (t < 114 ms).

(t < 20 ms).

MISSING

by the third microprocessor (t < 66 ms).

control readiness on X42/4 must go to 0. (t < 114 ms).

(t < 20 ms).

MISSING
14. Normal control operation. Output and

control-is-ready acknowledgement signals are high.
15. Control voltage is switched off externally. EMERGENCY STOP
16. After switching on the control voltage again, the

error message can be cancelled, followed by
normal control operation.
17. The control switches off the control-is-ready output Flashing error-
(X41/34) after recognizing a fault. message

5.2.2 TNC 407
X21/34
X22/4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VDU-display

MISSING
2. Recognize the control voltage on X42/4 and reset the
control-is-ready output on X41/34 (t < 70 ms).
3. Maximum time during which the control-is-ready

on X42/4 must go to 0 (t < 146 ms).
4. Recognize the acknowledgement and set

output X41/34 (t < 24 ms)

MISSING
6. Normal control operation. Output and

control-is-ready acknowledgement signals are high.
7. Control voltage switched off externally. EMERGENCY STOP
8. After switching on the control voltage again, the

error message can be cancelled, followed by
normal control operation.
9. The control switches off the control-is-ready output Flashing error-

(X41/34) after recognizing a fault. message

5 EMERGENCY STOP-routine

6 Display and operation
Machine parameters and PLC-markers can be used to influence the control behaviour for certain
functions. All machine parameters and PLC-markers which influence the display and the operation of
the control, and for which there is no separate section in this manual, are described in the section
"Display and operation" .
The display is divided into several "Windows" for optimum depiction of the information on the VDU-
screen.
Background
Foreground mode mode
Graphics
window
Program Text
or additional
status display
PLC window
Status window
Soft keys
The VDU-screen displays can be changed by machine parameters and PLC-markers.
6.1 Machine datum

In the operating modes "Manual operation" and "Electronic handwheel", a workpiece datum can be
defined. NC positioning blocks normally refer to this datum. If a positioning block should be
referenced to the machine datum instead of the workpiece datum, this must be programmed in
M91. The distance of the machine datum to the scale datum is entered in machine parameter
MP960.x. All REF-referenced displays and positioning movements are referenced to the machine
datum.
If the NC positioning blocks should always be referenced to the machine datum, then the "datum
setting" can be disabled for the individual axes through MP7295.
With MP950.x you can define a further machine-referenced position. If you wish to reference to this
position in a positioning block, you must program it in with M92. MP950.x defines the distance from
this machine-referenced position to the machine datum.
M91 and M92 are non-modal.
MP7296 can be used to select whether a new datum point can be set with the "DATUM SET" soft
key or additionally with the axis keys.
4-126 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 6 Display and operation 01.98

RM
RM RM
Workpiece datum Machine datum
Scale reference point RM = Reference mark
MP950 Datum point for positioning blocks with M92

Entry: 99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or []
Values referenced to the machine datum
MP950.0 X axis
MP950.1 Y axis
MP950.2 Z axis
MP950.3 4th axis
MP950.4 5th axis
MP960 Machine datum

Entry: 99 999.999 to +99 999.999 [mm] or []
Values referenced to the measuring system datum
MP960.0 X axis
MP960.1 Y axis
MP960.2 Z axis
MP960.3 4th axis
MP960.4 5th axis
MP7295 Disable "set datum point"

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 X axis 0 = not disabled

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = disabled
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 6 Display and operation 4-127

MP7296 Set datum point with axis keys
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = datum point can be set with axis keys and soft key.
1 = datum point can only be set with soft key.


6.2 Colour adjustment
The BC 110 is a 14 inch colour-graphics screen with a resolution of 640 x 490 pixels. The colours in
the screen-display can be selected by machine parameter. For example, the colours can be adjusted
to suit the corporate image of the machine tool builder image or the design of the machine.
The following colour adjustments cannot be altered by machine parameters:
HEIDENHAIN company logo after switching on the machine (GREEN),
flashing error messages (RED),
error message for invalid machine parameter (RED),
plan view in the graphics display (BLUE),
cursor (always inverse).
The entry values for colour adjustment are byte-oriented. The preferred entry is hexadecimal.
Colour Red Green Blue
HEX Ranges 0 to 3 0 to F 0 to 3 0 to F 0 to 3 0 to F
Adjustment coarse fine coarse fine coarse fine
Entry for yellow:
$0.... 3 9 3 9 0 0
Since it is possible to make mistakes when setting the colours (e.g.. red error messages on red
background), HEIDENHAIN recommends a standard colour-adjustment. This standard colour setting
is the setting generally used by HEIDENHAIN and is prompted by the control system when creating
the MP list.
The standard colour-adjustment is given in the following list.
Machine Colour for ... Standard colour-adjustment

parameter
MP7350 Window frame $030200C
MP7351 Error messages $03F3F0F
MP 7352 Operating-mode display "Machine"

MP7352.0 Background $0000000
MP7352.1 Text for operating mode $0342008
MP7352.2 Dialogue $03F3828
MP7353 Operating-mode display "Programming"

MP7354 Program-text display "Machine"

MP7354.1 General program-text $038240C
MP7354.2 Current block $038341C
MP7354.3 Background not active window $00C0800

MP7355 Program-Text-display "Programming"
MP7355.3 Background not active window $00C0800
MP7356 Status- and PLC-window

MP7356.0 Background $00C0800
MP7356.1 Axis positions in the status-display $03F2C18
MP7356.2 Status-display, except axis positions $03F280C
MP7357 Soft key display "Machine"

MP7357.1 Symbols $03F3828
MP7358 Soft key display "Programming"

MP7360 Graphics: 3D-view

MP7360.1 Top surface $0203038
MP7360.2 Front face $00C1820
MP7360.3 Text-display in graphics window $03F3F3F
MP7360.4 Side face $0102028
MP7361 Graphics: view in three planes (and Oscilloscope)

MP7361.1 Plan (Grid) $0203038
MP7361.2 Front and side view (not selected
channel) $0203038
MP7361.3 Cross-axes and text in
graphics-display
(Cursor, data, screen window) $03F3F3F
MP7361.4 Cursor (selected channel) $03F0000
MP7362 Additional status-display in graphics window

MP7362.0 Background graphics window $0080400
MP7362.1 Background status display $00C0800
MP7362.2 Status symbols $038240C
MP7362.3 Status values $03F2C18
MP7363 Interactive graphics

MP7363.1 Resolved contour $03F3F3F
MP7363.2 Subprograms and frame for zoom $0003F00
MP7363.3 Alternative solutions $0003F00
MP7363.4 Unresolved contour $03F0000

6.3 Graphics window
The simulation-graphics (TNC 407 and TNC 415) or parallel-graphics (TNC 415 only) are depicted in
the graphics window. It is possible to choose between three different graphics display modes.
With the aid of a Soft key the operator can select an additional status-display instead of the graphics
(see User's Manual). The graphics-display on the VDU-screen can be altered by machine
parameters.
6.3.1 View in three planes

The 3-plane display mode can be produced according to either European or American convention.
German preferrred U.S. preferred
Example
:
The cursor position can be shown in the 3-plane display mode. This function must be activated with
machine parameter MP7310, bit 3.
6.3.2 Rotating the coordinate system

The coordinate system can be rotated by +90 in the machining plane
This is useful when, for instance, the Y-axis is fixed as the tool axis.
X Z
Z X
No rotation 90 rotation
6.3.3 BLK form and datum shift

A number of BLK forms can be programmed in sequence in an NC program. Machine parameters
are used to select whether, after a Cycle 7 "Datum Shift", the definition of the next BLK form is also
shifted.

MP 7310 Graphics display
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Switch-over display

in three planes 0 = German preferred
1 = U.S. preferred
Bit 1 Rotate coordinate system in

machining plane by +90 0 = no rotation
1 = coordinate system rotated through +90
Bit 2 BLK form after datum shift 0 = BLK form will not shift
1 = BLK form will shift
Bit 3 Show cursor position in 0 = not shown

3-plane display 1 = cursor position shown

6.4 Status-window
The status of the control (axis positions, tools, feed, M-functions etc.) is displayed on the VDU-screen in
the status window. A Soft key can be used to activate an additional status-display in the graphics
window instead of the graphics.
The colours for the status-window display can be altered by machine parameters.
6.4.1 Position display

The input resolutions for the TNCs are:
TNC 415 B: 0.0001 mm or 0.0001
TNC 415 F and TNC 407: 0.001 mm or 0.001
The display-step for the axis positions can be selected for specific axes by machine parameter.
Regardless of this selection the TNC always attempts to position precisely to 0.0001 mm or 0.0001
(regardless of the grating period of the measuring system and the smallest voltage increment).
The most recently selected axis is displayed inversely. The PLC is informed (by a marker) which axis
has an inverse display. This information can be evaluated, for example, in connection with hand-
control equipment.
Machine parameter MP7285 can be used to select whether, in the positional-display, the tool axis
takes account of the tool length or not.
MP7285 Calculation of the tool length in the position-display of the tool axis
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = tool length ignored

1 = tool length taken into account
MP7290 Position-display step

Entry: 0 to 6
0 = 0.1 mm or 0.1
1 = 0.05 mm or 0.05
2 = 0.01 mm or 0.01
3 = 0.005 mm or 0.005
4 = 0.001 mm or 0.001
5 = 0.0005 mm or 0.0005 TNC 415 B only
6 = 0.0001 mm or 0.0001 TNC 415 B only
The following input values apply for software types 259 96 (TNC 415 A) and 243 02 (TNC 407):
0 = 0.001 mm or 0.001
1 = 0.005 mm or 0.005
2 = 0.0001 mm or 0.0001 TNC 415 A only

MP7290.0 X axis
MP7290.1 Y axis
MP7290.2 Z axis
MP7290.3 4th axis
MP7290.4 5th axis
M2096 X Key last pressed NC NC

M2097 Y Key last pressed
M2098 Z Key last pressed
M2099 Key IV last pressed
M2148 Key V last pressed
6.4.2 Position display with rotary axes

Display mode and range of traverse
MP810 is used to set whether the range of traverse limits (software limit switches) are active for
rotary axes; it also defines the modulo value for the counting mode. An entry of 0 means that the
software limit switches are active and the display ranges from -99,999.999 to +99,999.999.
Any other entry defines the modulo value for the position, target position and non-linear axis error
correction. The software limit switches are not active for all entries other than 0.
MP810 Display mode for rotary axes and PLC axes

Entry: 0.0000 to 9,999.9999 []
0 = display 99,999.9999; software limit switches active

0 = modulo value for display; software limit switches not active
MP810.0 Axis X
MP810.1 Axis Y
MP810.2 Axis Z
MP810.3 4th axis
MP810.4 5th axis
Contrary to the above, the following applies for software types 259 36. .., 259 97. .., 243 02. .. and
243 03., 259 93., 259 94, up to version 08: MP810 is not available but MP7470 is, with the following
meaning:
MP7470 Position display and software limit switches for rotary axes
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = 0 to + 359.9999 (no software limit switches)

1 = - 30,000.0000 to +30,000.0000 (software limit switches active)

"Free rotation" :
A free rotation of the rotary axis can be activated by the PLC. "Free rotation" means that the axis of
rotation can be turned as often as required (with a display of 0 to 360) without being affected by
software limit switches.
The free rotation function is a PLC-function, i.e. the PLC-program must be created by the
manufacturer of the machine in the proper form. The function could, for example, be activated by M-
functions. The choice of axes and the direction of traverse are made by specific bytes. The feed for
free rotation is the same as the feed for PLC-positioning of the axes 4 and 5 (W566 and W568).
The max. feed is 300 000 /min. The feed is not displayed in the status-window. The feed can be
continuously varied by the PLC with an override-percentage (W754), e.g. by copying W494 (current
feed-override) to W754. The free rotation function is activated and deactivated with marker M2720.
If M2720 is set by PLC, the NC takes the information from B518 and B519 and resets M2720.

M 2720 Activate/deactivate PLC NC
"Free-rotation" of rotary axis
Address Function
B518 0 = "Free-rotation" cancelled

8 = "Free-rotation" for 4th axis
16 = "Free-rotation" for 5th axis
B519 Definition of the direction of traverse
+ Entry value
4th and 5th axes 0
4th axis 5th axis 8
5th axis 4th axis 16
4th and 5th axes 24
W754 Percentage for feed-override "free rotation"

(0 to 300 %)


6.4.3 Feed rate display
In the operating modes "Program run/single block" and "Program run/full sequence" the programmed
contour feed-rate is displayed when the feed-potentiometer is in the 100 % position. The Feed-
Potentiometer can be used to vary this programmed feed-rate from 0 to 150 %.
If rapid traverse was programmed, this is indicated in the display with FMAX and marker M2151 is
set.
With machine parameter MP7620 you can set whether the feed rate override is active in 1% steps
or according to a non-linear curve. The non-linear override curve permits fine a resolution in the
lower range of the potentiometer.
The override values are shown in the PLC in word W766 and W494. If the PLC program overwrites a
value in W766, it will become active regardless of the potentiometer setting. For 1% steps the value
range is 0 to 150, for a non linear curve it is 0 to 15 000, corresponding to 0 to 150%.
In the manual operating modes the axis feed-rate is displayed, not the contour feed-rate.
There is a choice of two display modes:
The axis-specific feed-rate from machine parameter MP1020.X is only displayed after pressing
an axis-direction key. If two axis-direction keys are pressed simultaneously no feed-rate will be
shown.
Even when none of the axis-direction keys is operated one feed-rate will be displayed, which
can also be adjusted by the feed-potentiometer. The smallest feed-rate from MP 1020.X is valid
for all axes. The axis feed-rate will also be shown if several axis-direction keys are pressed
simultaneously.
MP7270 Display of the feed-rates in manual operating modes (Manual operation,

Electronic handwheel)
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = display of the axis feed-rate only when an axis-direction key is pressed

(axis-specific feed from MP1020.X)
1 = display of the axis feed-rate before operating an axis-direction key

(smallest value from MP1020.X for all axes)
MP7620 Feed rate and spindle override

Entry: 0 to 11
Bit 3 Characteristic curve for linear or non-linear override

+0 = Override linear in 1% steps
+8 = Override non-linear
Address Function
W494 %-factor feed rate override (NC PLC)
W766 %-factor feed rate override (PLC NC)

M2151 Rapid traverse programmed (FMAX) NC NC

Feed-rate for rotary axes
The TNC interprets the programmed feed-rate for a rotary axis in degrees/min. The contour feed-rate
is therefore governed by the distance of the tool centre from the centre of rotation of the rotary axis.
When M function M116 is activated the contour feed-rate is interpreted in mm/min., i.e. the feed-
rate is now independent of the distance of the tool centre from the centre of rotation of the rotary
axis.
M116 is automatically cancelled by PGM END. M116 is only active when the centre of rotation of a
rotary axis is defined in machine parameters MP7510 ff.
6.4.4 Display of the M-functions

The miscellaneous functions for control of the spindle (M03, M04, M05) and the coolant (M08, M09) are
displayed in the status window. The display of these M-functions is controlled by the PLC, i.e. the
manufacturer of the machine must take this into account when creating the PLC-program. The markers
M2485 and M2486 also change the polarity of the analogue voltage for the spindle. M2608 switches off
the analogue output for the Spindle. The programmed spindle-speed is, however, still displayed (see
section "Main spindle").
The display of other M-functions can be achieved in the PLC-window (see chapter "PLC-description",
section "Modules")
M2485 Status display and sign of S-analogue for M03 PLC PLC
M2486 Status display and sign of S-analogue for M04
M2487 Status display for M05 and spindle stop
M2608 Status display M03, M04, M05 inverse and S-analogue output = 0V
M2508 M2657 Display
0 0 M09
0 1 M07
1 0 M08
1 1 MK
M2609 Status-display M07, M08, M09 inverse

6.4.5 Control is in operation
If the control is in operation, i.e. a positioning or M-function is performed, the status window
displays a large asterisk "*". If a current NC-program is interrupted with the external stop key, the "*"
will flash in the status-display. This information is transmitted to the PLC through the markers
M2183 and M2184. M2183 and M2184 are effective in the operating modes "Positioning with MDI",
"Program run/single block" and "Program run/full sequence".
M2183 Program interruption (display "Control operational" NC NC

flashes)
M2184 Control operational (display "Control operational" on

or flashes)
6.4.6 Cancel status-display

A machine parameter can be used to decide whether with the M-functions M02 and M30, as well as
with NC-block "END PGM" the status-display should be reset and the contents of the Q-parameters
erased. All the programmed values in the status-display, e.g. tool number, tool length, tool radius,
scaling factor, datum-shift, feed-rate etc. will then be reset. The Q-parameters will all be set to 0.
MP7300 Cancel Status-display and Q-Parameters

Entry: 0 to 7
0= Cancel status display and Q parameters and tool data when

program is selected
1= Cancel status display, Q parameters and tool data with M02, M30,
END PGM and when program is selected
2= Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected
3= Cancel status display and tool data when program is selected and
with M02, M30, END PGM
4= Cancel status display and Q parameters when program is selected
5= Cancel status display and Q parameters when program is selected
and with M02, M0, END PGM
6= Cancel status display when program is selected
7= Cancel status display when program is selected and with M02, M30,
END PGM

6.5 PLC-Window
The displays in the PLC-Window are formatted by the PLC. Any ASCII-text can be displayed in two
lines of 38 characters. In the left half of the line a bar chart can also be displayed. Text and bar chart
can be mixed.
The display in the PLC-Window is activated by PLC-modules. These modules are explained under
"PLC-description".
PLC-module 9070 String-address

PLC-module 9071 String-length
PLC-module 9080 Cancel display
PLC-module 9081 Interrogate PLC-window
PLC-module 9082 Describe PLC-window
PLC-module 9083 Display bar chart
M3171 Error message in PLC-modules NC NC

6.6 Error messages
Under certain conditions error messages from the NC or the PLC will be displayed on the screen
under the display for the operating mode. Non-flashing error messages can be cancelled with the
CE-key. In the event of a flashing error message the machine must be switched off and the fault
corrected. If a non-flashing error message is displayed on the screen, marker M2190 will be set.
The manufacturer of the machine determines the conditions under which the PLC will produce error
messages. Up to 100 different PLC error messages can be generated.
The dialogues for PLC error messages can be determined by the manufacturer of the machine.
Please contact HEIDENHAIN about this. The standard version has dialogues with the reserved
designations "PLC: ERROR 0" to "PLC: ERROR 99". These PLC error messages can be activated by
the PLC-markers M2924 to M3023.
The error messages can be cancelled either by pressing the CE-key or by resetting the appropriate
markers.
If several PLC error messages are activated simultaneously, they can be read out one after another
by pressing the CE key.
If the program run is to be stopped on output of a PLC error message, this must be explicitly
programmed in the PLC-program (NC STOP).
In order to show a PLC error message as a flashing message, the marker M2815 must also be set.
If marker M2815 is set, but none of the 100 PLC error messages is activated, then the flashing error
message "EMERGENCY STOP PLC" will be displayed.
If, for some reason, the display of the PLC error message is not wanted in the field under the
operating-mode display, the message can also be displayed in the PLC-window.
M2815 Flashing PLC error message PLC PLC
M2190 Non-flashing error message NC NC

is displayed
M2924 PLC error message 0 PLC NC; PLC
M2925 PLC error message 1
. . .
. . .
. . .


6.7 Cycles
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls permit calling HEIDENHAIN standard-cycles within the NC
program (e.g.. pecking, tapping, pocket milling etc.). In addition, the manufacturer of the machine
can program manufacturer-cycles and store them in the control (see "OEM-cycles"). The sequence of
some cycles can be altered by machine parameters and PLC-markers. The description of the
"Tapping" and "Spindle-orientation" cycles can be found in the section "Main spindle".
6.7.1 Cycle inhibit

Machine parameter MP7245 can be used to selectively inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard-cycles.
MP7245.0 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN Cycles 1 to 15

Entry: 0 to 65 535
$0 to $FFFF
Bit 1 Cycle 1 0 = do not disable

Bit 2 Cycle 2 1 = disable
Bit 3 Cycle 3
Bit 4 Cycle 4
Bit 5 Cycle 5
Bit 6 Cycle 6
Bit 7 Cycle 7
Bit 8 Cycle 8
Bit 9 Cycle 9
Bit 10 Cycle 10
Bit 11 Cycle 11
Bit 12 Cycle 12
Bit 13 Cycle 13
Bit 14 Cycle 14
Bit 15 Cycle 15

MP7245.1 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard-Cycles 16 to 30
Entry: 0 to 65 535
$0 to $FFFF
Bit 0 Cycle 16 0 = do not disable

Bit 1 Cycle 17 1 = disable
Bit 2 Cycle 18
Bit 3 Cycle 19
Bit 4 Cycle 20
Bit 5 Cycle 21
Bit 6 Cycle 22
Bit 7 Cycle 23
Bit 8 Cycle 24
Bit 9 Cycle 25
Bit 10 Cycle 26
Bit 11 Cycle 27
Bit 12 Cycle 28
Bit 13 Cycle 29
Bit 14 Cycle 30
Bit 15 Cycle 31
6.7.2 Pocket milling

The overlap-factor for clearing out a rectangular or circular pocket (Cycle 4 and Cycle 5) can be
altered by machine parameters.
Stepover
Stepover = (MP7430) x cutter radius
MP7430 Overlap-factor for pocket milling

Entry: 0.100 to 1.414

6.7.3 Milling-cycles for pockets with free-programmed contours
The sequence for milling-cycles for pockets with free-programmed contours (Cycles 6, 14, 15, 16)
can be changed by machine parameters.
The choices are:
Whether a channel should first be milled around the contour and the pocket cleared out afterwards,
or the pocket cleared out first, and then a channel milled round the contour.
Whether the channel should be milled in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction.
Under which conditions programmed pockets should be merged. The choice is between:
merging programmed pockets when the programmed contours overlap, or when the tool centre
paths intersect.
Whether the channel-milling should be performed in one operation for all stepovers, or whether
for each peck depth channel-milling and clearing out should be performed alternately.
Whether after the pocket has been machined, the tool should be moved back to the initial
position before the cycle was called or should merely be moved to setup clearance.
The programmed contours of two pockets have a small overlap.
MP7420 Bit 2 = 0 (entry +0):

The control clears out the pockets separately, since the tool centre paths do not intersect.
Material will remain in inside corners.
MP7420 Bit 2 = 1 (entry +4):

The control clears out the pockets jointly, since the programmed contours overlap. No material will
remain in inside corners.

MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free-programmed contours.
Entry: %xxxx
Bit 0 Channel-Milling direction for 0= Anti-clockwise channel-milling of the pocket

contours, clockwise for islands
1= Clockwise channel-milling of the pocket
contours, anti-clockwise for islands
Bit 1 Sequence for 0= First channel-milling, then clear out pocket
clearing out and -
1= First clear out pocket , then channel-milling
channel-milling
Bit 2 Merge programmed 0= Contours merged only if the
contours tool centre paths intersect
4= Contours merged if the
programmed contours overlap
Bit 3 Clearing out and channel- 0= Clearing out and channel-milling performed in
milling to pocket one operation for all depths
depth, or for each 1= For each peck, first perform channel-milling,
infeed depth and then clearing out (depending on Bit 1)
before next peck
Bit 4 Position after cycle has 0= Move tool to position that was approached
been executed before cycle was called
1= TNC moves tool to "clearance height"
6.7.4 Scaling factor

Machine parameters can be used to decide whether Cycle 11 "Scaling factor" only operates in the
machining plane or also parallel to the tool axis.
MP7410 "Scaling factor" cycle in two or three axes

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Cycle "Scaling factor" operates in all three principal axes

1 = Cycle "Scaling factor" only operates in the machining plane
6.7.5 Cylinder interpolation

A contour can be machined on a cylindrical surface with Cycle 27 "Cylinder surface" (see User's
Manual).
This requires the centre of rotation of a rotary axis to be defined in machine parameters MP7510 ff.
(see section "Swivel Axes"). The same reference position must apply for a description of the
machine geometry via machine parameters MP7510 ff. and for any datum shift.

6.8 Return to the contour
With the HEIDENHAIN contouring control it is possible to resume an interrupted program, or to
make a block scan up to a predetermined block number (see User's Manual).
These functions must be enabled by machine parameters and the PLC program must
be changed accordingly.
Markers inform the PLC about the individual conditions during the resumption of the program or
block scan. Depending on these markers, certain functions can be enabled in the PLC-program (e.g.
operating the axis-direction keys in "Manual operation").
M2018 is set if the "MANUAL OPERATION" soft key is pressed.
M2019 is set if the "Return to contour" function is activated with the "RESTORE POSITION" soft key.
M2059 is set if the "RESTORE AT N" soft key is pressed. M2059 is reset if the "RESTORE
POSITION" or "INTERNAL STOP" soft key is pressed.
During the block scan the PLC positioning commands are only included in the calculation if they are
also executed. The TOOL CALL block usually releases PLC positioning commands for the tool
change position. If these movements are to be offset in the block scan, the absolute position must
be entered referenced to the machine datum in MP951.x and the offset must be activated for
specific axes with MP7450.
When using random selection in the central tool memory (see section "Tool change"), an alteration of
the position numbers in the tool memory must be avoided during block scan. This is transmitted
from the PLC to the NC by marker M2612.
Machine parameter MP7680 can be used to select whether the block scan may be interrupted by a
programmed STOP or M06 and whether the programmed dwell time should be taken into account
during the block scan.
The feed for returning to the contour is specifically defined in machine parameter MP4220.X. This
machine parameter is also used to set a number in the PLC (see "PLC description.")
MP4220 Feed for "Return to the contour"

Entry: 10 to 30 000
mm
min
MP4220.0 X axis
MP4220.1 Y axis
MP4220.2 Z axis
MP4220.3 4th axis
MP4220.4 5th axis

MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function
Entry: %xxxxxxx
Bit 1 Return to the contour 0 = inactive

1 = active
Bit 2 Block scan 0 = inactive
1 = active
Bit 3 Interruption in block scan on STOP 0 = interruption
or M06 1 = no interruption
Bit4 Allow for the programmed 0 = allow for dwell time
dwell time during block scan 1 = ignore dwell time
Bit 5 Start calculation for block scan 0 = Start from cursor
1 = Start from program start
MP951 Simulated tool change position for TOOL CALL during block scan
Entry: 99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or []
MP951.0 Axis X
MP951.1 Axis Y
MP951.2 Axis Z
MP951.3 4th axis
MP951.4 5th axis
MP7450 Calculate the tool change position from MP951 in block scan
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = Calculate

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = Do not calculate
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

M2018 Soft key "Manual operation" pressed NC NC
M2019 "Restore position" is active NC NC
M2612 No change in position number PLC PLC
in central tool memory
M2059 Block scan is active NC; PLC NC; PLC

6.9 Files
With the TNC it is possible to process different types of file with the file management. The types of
file are designated by an extension after the names.
.H = HEIDENHAIN program
.I = DIN/ISO program
.T = Tool table
.D = Datum table
.P = Pallet table
.A = Text file
.HLP = Help file
.PNT = Point table
The file name can be up to 16 characters long (letters and digits). The maximum length of the file
name is defined in MP7222.
MP7222 Length of file names

Entry: 0 to 2
0 = 8 characters
1 = 12 characters
2 = 16 characters
6.9.1 File types disable and protect

The individual types of file can be selectively disabled and protected. Only file types which are not
disabled are visible to the file management in the control. If a file type is locked, all files of this type
are cleared. The individual file types can also be protected so that they cannot be edited or changed.
Protected files are displayed with the colours defined in MP7354.1 or MP7355.1 in the file directory.
MP7224.0 Disable file type

Entry: %xxx xxxxx
Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs 0 = do not disable
Bit 1 ISO programs 1 = disable
Bit 2 Tool-tables
Bit 3 Datum-tables
Bit 4 Pallet-tables
Bit 5 Text files
Bit 6 Help files
Bit 7 Point tables
MP7224.1 Protect file type

Entry: %xxxxxxx
Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs 0 = not protected
Bit 1 ISO programs 1 = protected
Bit 2 Tool-tables
Bit 3 Datum-tables
Bit 4 Pallet-tables
Bit 5 Text files
Bit 6 Help files
Bit 7 Point tables

6.9.2 Block numbers - step size for ISO programs
The block-number step size for ISO programs can be fixed by a machine parameter.
MP7220 Block-number step size for ISO programs

Entry: 0 to 150
6.9.3 Table size

The size of the pallet- and datum-tables can be fixed by machine parameters. For further information
about the tool-table see section "Tool changer", for pallet-table see "PLC description".
MP7226.0 Size of pallet-tables

Entry: 0 to 255 [lines]
MP7226.1 Size of datum-tables

Entry: 0 to 255 [lines]
6.9.4 Datum point for values in datum table

MP7475 is used to define whether the values in the datum table refer to the set workpiece datum or
the machine datum (MP960).
MP7475 Datum in datum table

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Datum point is workpiece datum
1 = Datum point is machine datum

6.10 User-parameters
With the MOD-function up to 16 different machine parameters can be made accessible to the
machine operator as User-parameters. The machine manufacturer determines in machine parameter
MP7330.x which machine parameters are to be defined as User-parameters. If, for example, you
wish to define MP5030.1 as the first user-parameter, you must enter the value 5030.01 in MP
7330.0.
If a User-parameter is selected by the operator, a dialogue appears on the screen. Machine

parameter MP7340.X determines which dialogue should be displayed. A line number from the PLC
dialogues is defined with an entry value between 0 and 4095 (see "PLC description").
MP7330 Determination of the User-Parameters

Entry range: 0 to 9999.00 (No. of the desired machine parameters).
MP7330.0 User-parameter 0
. .
. .
MP7340 Dialogues for User-parameter

Entry:0 to 4095 (line number of the PLC dialogs)
MP7340.0 Dialogue for User-parameter 0

. .
. .
6.11 Code-numbers
The MOD functions can be used to enter code-numbers for the control. These code numbers can be
used to activate certain control functions.
The following code-numbers have a fixed meaning:
Code-number Function
95 148 Select machine parameter list

807 667 Select PLC mode
105 296 Correction tables for the non-linear axis-error compensation
86 357 Remove program protection
75 368 Automatic offset adjustment
123 Select the user-available list of machine parameters
531 210 Erase markers M1000 to M2000 and byte 0 to byte 127
Special function: Switch on control and press MOD key at the same time. Enter
code number. The entire RAM memory is now erased (MPs, NC programs, PLC
program, all markers and bytes).
688 379 Oscilloscope

The value of the code-number which is entered is stored in Doubleword D276. The machine
manufacturer can evaluate this code with the aid of the PLC and define his own functions for code
numbers or disable the preset code numbers.
Address Function
D276 Value of the code-number most recently entered by MOD
6.12 Programming station

Machine parameters can be used to set the control so that it can be utilized as a programming
station, without the machine. In this setting only the operating modes "Programming and editing"
and "Program test" function. It is possible to select whether the PLC should be active or not in the
"programming station" setting.
MP7210 Programming station

Entry values: 0, 1, 2
Entry: 0 = Control and programming

1 = Programming station, "PLC active"
2 = Programming station, "PLC inactive"
6.13 Dialogue language

The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are available in ten different dialogue languages, see chapter
"Introduction". The dialogue language can be altered by a simple software exchange. English, as a
basic language, is stored in every control as a second language and can be selected by machine
parameter.
If the basic language English has been selected, then marker M2041 is set by the NC.
MP7230 Change dialogue language

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = First dialogue language

1 = Basic language - English
M 2041 Basic language - English is selected NC NC

6.13.1 Decimal sign
The decimal sign can be selected by machine parameter.
MP7280 Decimal sign

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Decimal comma
1 = Decimal point
6.14 Memory test

A machine parameter can be used to select if the RAM and the EPROM memory areas should be
tested on switching on the control.
MP7690 Memory test at switch-on

Entry: %xx
Bit 0 RAM-test 0 = memory test at switch-on

Bit 1 EPROM-test 1 = no memory test at switch-on
6.15 End of program

In the operating modes "Program run/single block" or "Program run/full sequence", if the end of the
program is reached the NC sets the marker M2061. This marker is only reset at the start of the next
program.
The information "End of program" can be evaluated by the PLC. This is necessary when operating,
for instance, with a pallet-changer.
M2061 END PGM, M02 or M30 has been executed NC NC
6.16 Overwrite Q-parameters

The values in the Q-Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. In this way
information from the PLC can be transferred to the machining program. The value which is to be
transferred is stored in Doubleword D528. The Q-parameter which is to be overwritten is defined in
Word W516. The transfer is initiated by the strobe-marker M2713 during an M/S/T strobe.
The Doubleword D528 has a multiple usage. See also the sections "PLC positioning" and "Datum
shift correction".
Address Function
W516 Number of the Q-parameter to be overwritten

(Q100 to Q107 = 0 to 7)
D528 Value to be transferred to the Q-Parameter

M2713 Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the PLC NC
Q-Parameter defined in W516
6.17 Arc end-point tolerance

The control uses the NC-data which is entered to calculate the deviation in the arc radius between
the beginning and end of the arc. If the tolerance defined in MP7431 is exceeded, the error
message "Arc end-point in correct" will appear.
MP7431 Arc end-point tolerance

Entry: 0.0001 to 0.016 [mm]
6.18 Radius compensation R+, R-

A path to be traversed can be increased or decreased by the tool radius by entering "R+" or "R-".
The input dialogue is not initiated with the "L" key but directly with the orange axis direction key. For
reasons of compatibility this function has been retained for point and straight cut controls.
Example: X + 20 R+ Dialogue programming

G07 X + 20 G49 DIN/ISO programming
Paraxially corrected positioning blocks (R+/R-) and radius-corrected positioning blocks (RR/RL) must
not be entered one after another.
To avoid erroneous entries MP7246 can be used to disable the input of paraxial positioning blocks.
MP7246 Disable paraxial positioning blocks

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = paraxial positioning blocks enabled

1 = paraxial positioning blocks disabled
6.19 "POWER INTERRUPTED" Message

When the control voltage is disconnected the TNC issues the message "POWER INTERRUPTED".
The PLC is not active until this message is reset with the CE key.
The "POWER INTERRUPTED" message does not appear if MP7212 is set to 1.
MP7212 "POWER INTERRUPTED"

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Reset "POWER INTERRUPTED" message with CE key

1 = No "POWER INTERRUPTED" message

6.20 Help files
If files of the .HLP type are stored in either the PLC EPROM or the NC memory, the HELP soft key
will appear after the MOD key is activated.
The machine tool manufacturer creates the HELP file in the "PLC Programming" mode. Help texts
(information) or machine commands can be edited in the HELP file. With machine commands a
numerical value in the format "#xxxx" is edited at the start of line.
As soon as the cursor is moved on a line with a numerical value, this value is available in W270 of
the PLC, and the corresponding command is evaluated in the PLC program. If the cursor is moved
on a line without a valid numerical value, then the value -2 is entered in word W270. If no HELP file
is selected the value in W270 is 1.
Example:
Several HELP files can be created. The user selects the desired file with the PGM NAME key after
operating the HELP soft key.
If a HELP file is selected in the foreground and background modes then the message "Background
programming not possible" will appear.
HELP files are stored externally with the identifier "J".
Address Function
W270 Help file line number

1 = No help file selected
2 = No valid numerical value
0 to 9999 = Line number


4
7 M-functions
Up to 100 miscellaneous functions (M-functions) can be programmed in HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls. The code for these M-functions is transferred to the PLC either before or after execution
of the NC-block. A number of these M-functions have a fixed meaning for the NC. These M-
functions are marked with * in the following table. The other M-functions are freely available.
M-func- Effective at: M-func- Effective at: M-func- Effective at:

tion Beginn- End of tion Beginn- End of tion Beginn- End of
ing of block ing of block ing of block
block- block block
* M 00 M 34 M 68
M 01 M 35 M 69
* M 02 M 36 M 70
* M 03 M 37 M 71
* M 04 M 38 M 72
* M 05 M 39 M 73
* M 06 M 40 M 74
M 07 M 41 M 75
* M 08 M 42 M 76
* M 09 M 43 M 77
M 10 M 44 M 78
M 11 M 45 M 79
M 12 M 46 M 80
* M 13 M 47 M 81
* M 14 M 48 M 82
M 15 M 49 M 83
M 16 M 50 M 84
M 17 M 51 M 85
M 18 M 52 M 86
M 19 M 53 M 87
M 20 M 54 M 88
1
M 21 M 55 M 89
M 22 M 56 * M 90
M 23 M 57 * M 91
M 24 M 58 * M 92
M 25 M 59 M 93
M 26 M 60 * M 94
M 27 M 61 M 95
M 28 M 62 M 96
M 29 M 63 * M 97
* M 30 M 64 * M 98
M 31 M 65 * M 99
M 32 M 66
M 33 M 67
1 Function is dependent on machine parameter M7440
4-158 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7 M-functions 01.98

The evaluation of the M-function must be programmed in the PLC. When transferring an M-Function to
the PLC the code for the M-function is stored in Word W260 and the strobe-marker M2045 is set.
The execution of the M-function must be signalled to the NC by setting the markers M2482. The
next NC-block is only processed when the signal is acknowledged and the marker M2045 (strobe
signal for M-function) is reset by the NC. The M-functions M00 to M99 can also be decoded and
transferred to the markers M1900 to M1999. This function is activated by the marker M2496. The
decoded output is retained for reasons of compatibility. However, HEIDENHAIN recommends
M-code evaluation using Word W260.
W260 Code for M-function NC
M2045 Strobe signal for M-function NC NC

M2482 Acknowledgement of M-function PLC PLC
M2496 Enable-marker for the decoded M-code- PLC PLC

transfer to markers M1900 to M1999
M1900 Miscellaneous function M00 NC NC

. .
. .
. .
All M-functions over 99 are not transferred to the PLC but have a specific significance for the NC to
activate functions (see User's Manual).
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7 M-functions 4-159

Example:
Evaluation of the miscellaneous function M03 in the PLC.
PLC-output: O10 = Spindle ON/OFF
PLC-input: I10 = Acknowledgement of M-function
199 L M2045 Change signal for M-function

200 RN M2482 Reset acknowledgement of M-function
201 CMT 77 Evaluation of M-function
.
.
.
901 EM
902 LBL 77
903 CASE W260 M-code?
904 CM0
905 CM1
906 CM2
907 CM3
.
.
.
930 ENDC
931 EM
.
.
.
1170 LBL 3 M-function M03
1171 L M1
1172 S M2485 Status-display M03, sign of S-analogue
1173 R M2486 Reset status-display M04, M05
1174 R M2487
1175 S 010 Spindle-ON
1176 L I10 Acknowledgement of M-function?
1177 S M2482 Acknowledgement of M-function
1178 EM
M2045
M2485
O10
I10
M2482

7.1 Program-run interruption with M-functions
Normally, when an M-function is produced, the program run in the operating modes "Program
run/full sequence" and "Program run/single block" is interrupted until the PLC acknowledges that the
M-function has been performed.
For some applications this can be disadvantageous (e.g. laser cutting-machines, DNC-operation). In
such applications the program should be executed continuously and not wait for the
acknowledgement of the M-function. This function can be selected by machine parameter MP7440,
Bit 2. If this function is selected then PLC-positioning, datum-correction, spindle-orientation or limit
switch range-change are all not permitted during the output of the M-Function.
This function must not be used with milling machines or boring machines.
7.2 Program-run interruption with M06

According to ISO 6983, the M-Function M06 means a tool change. Machine parameter MP7440, Bit
0 can be used to select whether on transferring M06 to the PLC the program should halt. If the
control is set so that a program-run interruption occurs on M06 then the program must be restarted
after the tool change. This can also be carried out directly by the PLC.
7.3 Modal cycle call M89

The M-Function M89 can be used for the modal cycle-call.
The possibilities for calling a cycle are:
With the NC-block "CYCL CALL".

With the miscellaneous function M99. M99 is only effective for a single block and must
be reprogrammed for each execution.
With the miscellaneous function M89 (depending on the machine parameter).
M89 as a cycle-call is modally effective, i.e. for every following positioning block
there will be a call of the last-programmed machining-cycle. M89 is cancelled by M99 or
a CYCL CALL-block.
If M89 is not defined as a modal Cycle-call by machine parameters,

then M89 will be transferred to the PLC as a normal M-function at the beginning of the block.
7.4 Reduced feed-rate of tool axis with M103

The entry M103 F... can be used to reduce the contour feed-rate for movements of the tool axis in
the negative direction. The feed-rate element of the tool axis is limited to a value that the TNC
computes from the last programmed feed-rate.
Fmax = Fprog*F%
Fmax = Maximum feed-rate in negative direction of tool axis
Fprog = Last programmed feed-rate
F% = Programmed factor after M103 in %
M103 F... is cancelled by a new entry for M103 without a factor.
The function M103 F... is enabled by MP7440, Bit 4.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7 M-functions 4-161

7.5 Selecting Kv factors with M105/M106
A second set of Kv factors is selected with M-function M105. These Kv factors are defined in
machine parameters MP1515.x (feed precontrol) and MP1815.x (lag mode). Selecting a higher Kv
factor can selectively enhance the contour accuracy. M105 influences the compensation of reversal
spikes during circular movement. M105 activates the machine parameters MP715 and MP716. The
original set of Kv factors is restored by the M-function M106. M-functions M105/M106 are enabled
by MP7440, Bit 3.
MP7440 Activating M-functions

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Program halt at M06 0 = program halt at M06

1 = no program halt at M06
Bit 1 Modal cycle call M89 0 = normal code transfer from
M89 at start of block
1 = modal cycle call M89 at end of block
Bit 2 Program run hold with 0 = program run hold until feedback of
M-functions M-function
1 = no program run hold
(no waiting for feedback)
Bit 3 Select Kv factors with 0 = function not active
M105/M106 1 = function active
Bit 4 Reduced feed-rate in the 0 = function not active
tools with M103 F... 1 = function active

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Key-simulation 4-163

8 Key-simulation
The entry to the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls is by the keys on the TNC-keyboard (TE 400) and
the manufacturer's own machine-control panel. The two control panels are joined to connectors X45
and X46 on the logic-unit by a connecting cable (see "Assembly and electrical installation ").
The key-code from the TNC-keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC. PLC inputs and outputs for the
machine-control panel are available on connector X46 . These PLC inputs and outputs must be
evaluated by the PLC and the appropriate information passed to the NC.
8.1 TNC-keyboard (TE 400)

The key-code from the TNC-keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC.
The keys on the TNC-keyboard and the soft keys on the BC 110 B can be inhibited by the PLC. With
M2876 the entire alphabetic keyboard can be inhibited. M2877 inhibits the soft-key row and M2878
inhibits the changeover keys to the right of the screen. All other keys can be inhibited selectively
with M2854 to M2923. If an inhibited key is pressed, the NC sets the marker M2182 and deposits
the key-code for the key which was operated in word W274. The PLC must reset the marker
M2182 after evaluating this information.
The keys on the TNC-keyboard and the soft keys on screen can also be simulated by the PLC. To
achieve this the appropriate key-code is entered in Word W516 and activated by the strobe-marker
M2813. After execution of the key-code the NC resets the strobe-marker M2813.
A fixed code has been introduced for certain soft key functions. As with key simulation, this function
is executed by entering the required code in W516 and activating with M2813. The appropriate soft
key function must be displayed in the foreground or background mode for this. With the trailing edge
of M2813 the PLC is told whether the function was properly executed.
W272 Operating mode NC NC

1 = Manual operation
2 = Electronic handwheel
7 = Pass over reference point
W274 Key-code for the operated, inhibited key, NC NC
Signal via M2182
W516 Word with multiple-function PLC PLC
Key-code for simulating TNC-key
activated by M2813
4-164 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 8 Key-simulation 01.98

Marker Function S R
M2182 Inhibited key was operated NC PLC

M2187 Soft key function not executed NC NC
M2813 Activate the key from W516 PLC NC
M2876 Inhibit the alpha keyboard PLC PLC
M2877 Inhibit the soft-key row below the screen PLC PLC
M2878 Inhibit the changeover keys at right of screen PLC PLC

Marker Function Key-code Set Reset
CHF
M2854 inhibit 58 PLC PLC
PGM
M2855 NAME
inhibit 59 PLC PLC
M2856 L inhibit 60 PLC PLC
RND
CC
C
M2862 MOD inhibit 66 PLC PLC
M2863 P inhibit 67 PLC PLC
PGM
M2865 CALL
inhibit 69 PLC PLC
CR

M2873 CT inhibit 77 PLC PLC
M2874 TOUCH
PROBE inhibit 78 PLC PLC
M2875 V inhibit 79 PLC PLC
TOOL
M2880 DEF
inhibit 84 PLC PLC
TOOL
M2881 CALL
inhibit 85 PLC PLC
M2882 R-L inhibit 86 PLC PLC
M2883 R+R inhibit 87 PLC PLC
CYCL
M2887 DEF
inhibit 91 PLC PLC
CYCL
M2888 CALL
inhibit 92 PLC PLC
LBL
M2889 SET
inhibit 93 PLC PLC
LBL
M2890 CALL
inhibit 94 PLC PLC

M2891 NO
ENT
inhibit 95 PLC PLC
M2892 STOP inhibit 96 PLC PLC
M2893 EXT inhibit 97 PLC PLC
CL
M2894 PGM
inhibit 98 PLC PLC
DEL
M2897 ENT inhibit 101 PLC PLC
GOTO
M2901 CE inhibit 105 PLC PLC
M2902 IV inhibit 106 PLC PLC
M2903 Z inhibit 107 PLC PLC
M2904 Y inhibit 108 PLC PLC
M2905 X inhibit 109 PLC PLC
M2906 Q inhibit 110 PLC PLC

M2907 0 inhibit 111 PLC PLC
END
M2916 APPR inhibit 120 PLC PLC

DEP

Key-code for the alphabetic keyboard:
xx 50 (Hex)
ASCII key-code (see "Appendix")
Key-code for the soft-key row on the screen:
xx51 (Hex)
xx results as follows:
08 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0A
Key code for changeover keys at right of screen:
xx52 (Hex)
xx results as follows:
00
GRAPHICS 01
TEXT
SPLIT
SCREEN
Code for soft key functions:
0000 (Hex): INTERNAL STOP

0100 (Hex): M (M-function)
0200 (Hex): S (S-function)
0300 (Hex): TOUCH PROBE
0400 (Hex): PASS OVER REFERENCE
0500 (Hex): RESTORE POSITION

Example:
If the "Positions-transfer" key is pressed in the operating mode "Positioning with manual entry" , a
linear NC-block with all three principal coordinates (X, Y, Z) is to be generated.
66 CASE W272 ;Interrogate - operating mode

. . .
70 CM 3 ;Positioning with manual entry
. . .
75 ENDC
. . .
1102 EM ;End main program
1103 LBL 3 ;Operating mode: Positioning with manual entry

1104 L M10 ;Key simulation active?
1105 SN M2896 ;No, then disable "Positions-transfer" key
1106 L M2182 ;Disabled key operated?
1107 CMT 31 ;Yes, then call key simulation
1108 EM
1109 LBL 31 ;Key simulation

1110 L M10 ;Key simulation active?
1111 R M2896 ;Yes, then enable "Positions-transfer" key
1112 SN M10 ;Otherwise set key simulation active
1113 CASE B200 ;Perform single-step
1114 CM 130 ;Key L(line)
1115 CM 131 ;Key X
1116 CM 132 ;Key "Position-transfer"
1117 CM 133 ;Key Y
1119 CM 134 ;Key Z
1121 CM 135 ;Key "END-BLOCK"
1122 CM 141 ;Reset key simulation
1123 ENDC
1124 EM
1125 LBL 130 ;L(ine)

1126 L K60 ;Key-code for L(ine)
1127 = W102
1128 CM 136 ;Simulate key
1129 EM
1103 LBL 131 ;X

1131 L K109 ;Key-code for X
1132 = W102
1134 EM
1135 LBL 132 ;"Position-transfer"

1136 L K100 ;Key-code for "Position-transfer"
1137 = W102
1139 EM

1140 LBL 133 ;Y
1141 L K108 ;Key-code for Y
1142 = W 102
1144 EM
1145 LBL 134 ;Z

1146 L K107 ;Key-code for Z
1147 = W102
1149 EM
1150 LBL 135 ;"END BLOCK"

1151 L K119 ;Key-code for "END BLOCK"
1152 = W102
1154 EM

1156 L M2813 ;Strobe - key transfer from W516
1157 JPT 137 ;Still set, then wait
1158 L B200 ;Case byte
1159 + K+1
1160 = B200 ;Increment case byte
1161 L W102 ;Buffered key-code
1162 = W516 ;To NC
1163 LN M2813
1164 S M2813 ;Set strobe (activate simulation)
1165 EM
1166 LBL 137 ;Return marker

1167 EM
1168 LBL 141 ;End key simulation

1169 L M2813 ;Simulation performed?
1170 JPT 137 ;No, then wait
1171 L K+0
1172 = B200 ;Reset step counter
1173 L M10
1174 R M10 ;Reset flag "Key simulation active"
1175 R M2182 ;Reset marker "Disabled key operated"
1176 EM


8.2 Machine-control panel
A manufacturer's specific machine-control panel can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls. See under "Assembly and electrical installation".
25 PLC inputs (I 128 to I 152) and 8 PLC outputs (O 0 to O 7) are available on the female connector
X46 for the evaluation of the keys on the machine-control panel. The evaluation of the signals from
the machine-control panel must be performed in the PLC-program. The appropriate markers will be
set thereby. For safety reasons a complement-marker must be reset when some functions are
activated. This is especially so for keys with several contacts. If the complement-marker is not
properly set or reset, the flashing error message "Error in PLC-program" will appear. The displayed
code identifies the marker where the error has occurred.
An axis-direction key which has been operated can be stored by marker M2450 (Complement-
marker M2466) . This means that the axis will be traversed until NC STOP occurs. This memory
function must be activated by machine parameter MP7680 Bit 0.
MP7680 - Machine parameter with multiple-function

Bit 0 - Memory function for axis-direction keys 0 = Not stored
1 = Stored
Marker Function Error

message Set Reset
M2448 NC-start (edge evaluation) 1A PLC PLC

M2464 Complement NC-start
M2449 Rapid traverse 1B

M2465 Complement - rapid traverse
M2488 NC-stop ("0" signifies stop)
M2450 Memory function for axis-direction keys 1C

M2466 Complement - memory function for
axis-direction keys
M2451 Feed-release 1D
M2467 Complement - feed-release
M2456 Manual traverse X+ 1I

M2472 Complement - manual traverse X+
M2457 Manual traverse X- 1J

M2473 Complement - manual traverse X-
M2458 Manual traverse Y+ 1K

M2474 Complement - manual traverse Y+
M2459 Manual traverse Y- 1L

M2475 Complement - manual traverse Y-

Marker Function Error- Set Reset
message
M2460 Manual traverse Z+ 1M PLC PLC

M2476 Complement - manual traverse Z+
M2461 Manual traverse Z- 1N

M2477 Complement - manual traverse Z-
M2462 Manual traverse 4+ 1O

M2478 Complement - manual traverse 4+
M2463 Manual traverse 4- 1P

M2479 Complement - manual traverse 4-
M2524 Manual traverse 5+ 2M

M2540 Complement - manual traverse 5+
M2525 Manual traverse 5- 2N

M2541 Complement - manual traverse
Marker for spindle control: see section "Main spindle".
Example:
NC-start key with two contacts I 128 and I 129
axis-direction key X+ with one contact I 130
.
71 L I128 ;First contact NC-start key
72 = M2448 ;NC-start
73 LN I129 ;Second contact NC-start key
74 = M2464 ;Complement - NC-start
.
100 L I130 ;Axis-direction key X+
101 = M2456 ;Manual traverse X+
102 LN I130
103 = M2472 ;Complement - manual traverse X+
.

9 Touch probe
The following 3D touch probes can be connected:
The triggering touch probes
- TS 120 with cable transmission and integrated interface electronics,
- TS 511 with infrared transmission of the switch signal and connected by a separate interface
electronics unit (APE)
- TT 110 for tool calibration
- The TNC 415/425 also supports the TM 110 measuring touch probe.
The chapter "Mounting and Electrical Installation" contains instructions for connecting the touch
probes. Machine parameters MP6010, MP6200 and MP6500 determine which touch probes are
connected. The machine tool builder must ensure that the spindle locks as soon as the touch probe
has been inserted.
9.1 Standard touch probe cycles

The touch probe can be controlled either with the probing cycles in the "Manual" and "Electronic
Handwheel" modes or by the "Touch Probe" function in the NC program (see User's Manual). The
touch probe is interfaced to the measuring conditions using machine parameters.
Touch probe function

"Reference Plane"
F1
Max. measuring range F2 Setup clearance

(MP6130) (MP6140)
Touch probe cycles

in the "Manual" and
"Electronic
Handwheel"
operating modes
F2
Max. measuring range
(MP6130)
F1 = Rapid traverse during probing cycle: MP6150 for triggering touch probe MP6200 = 0
MP6361 for measuring touch probe MP6200 = 1
F2 = Probing feed rate: MP6120 for triggering touch probe MP6200 = 0
MP6360 for measuring touch probe MP6200 = 1
4-176 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9 Touch probe 01.98

An error message "Touch point inaccessible" appears if the maximum measuring range (MP6130) is
exceeded. Machine parameters MP6140 and MP6150 have no function with the probing cycles in
the "Manual" and "Electronic Handwheel" modes.
The probing sequence must be enabled by the PLC with marker M2503. This marker is set by the
NC when a probing cycle starts and the NC waits until the PLC resets marker M2503 before
executing the probing function. A number of conditions are transferred to the PLC with markers
M2022 to M2027. This information can be processed further in the PLC program. The probing
function is controlled entirely from the NC.
In all modes if the stylus is deflected and marker M2502 is set, the controller stops the machine.
If M2502 is not set, the controller only detects stylus deflection if the probing function has started.
This is why HEIDENHAIN recommend setting marker M2502 as soon as the touch probe is in the
spindle. This recommendation does not apply to the TS 511, however, since a stylus deflection is
only recognised when the system is not in standby mode.
If M2502 is set, then the maximum feed-rate is limited by MP6150 in addition to MP 1010 and
MP1020. MP7411 selects whether the tool data (length, radius, axis) from the last TOOL CALL block
or from the calibrated data of the probe system are used in a touch probe block. The centre offset of
the probe system can be determined when calibrating. This centre offset is then automatically
corrected in all probing operations (see User's Manual). MP6160 defines whether spindle orientation
for a rotation by 180 will be performed directly by the NC or through the PLC. If the NC orients the
spindle directly, the PLC need only reset Marker M2499. If the PLC orients the spindle, the number
of the M function will be entered in MP6560. For the triggering touch probe the rotation is activated
by pressing a soft key. For the measuring touch probe the rotation is automatically activated during
calibration. This can be deselected with MP6321. During every spindle orientation the Marker
M2127 is set.
MP6010 Select touch probe

Input: 0 or 1
0 = TS 120
1 = TS 511
MP6200 Selection between triggering or measuring touch probe

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Triggering touch probe (e.g. TS 120)
1 = Measuring touch probe (e.g. TM 110)
MP6120 Probing feed rate (triggering touch probe)

MP6360 Probing feed rate (measuring touch probe)

MP6130 Maximum measuring range

Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6140 Setup clearance above measuring point

Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6150 Rapid traverse in probing cycle (triggering touch probe)

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9 Touch probe 4-177

MP6321 Measuring the centre offset when calibrating the TM 110
Entry:0 or 1
0 = Calibration with measuring the centre offset
1 = Calibration without measuring the centre offset
MP6361 Rapid traverse in the touch probe cycle (measuring touch probe)
MP6160 Spindle orientation 180 rotation

Entry: 1 to 88
1 = Spindle orientation directly through NC
0 = Function not active
1 to 88 = Number of the M function for spindle orientation by PLC
MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = With the touch probe block the current tool data are overwritten with the
calibrated data of the probe system.
1 = The current tool data are retained even with a touch probe block.
M2502 NC STOP with deflected stylus in all modes (not TS 511) PLC PLC
M2503 Enable marker for probing functions NC PLC

M2022 Touch probe not ready (no standby signal at connector X12 NC NC
or signals from TM 110 are faulty)
M2023 Stylus deflected before start of probing cycle NC NC
M2025 Stylus deflected (probing sequence is executed) NC PLC
M2026 Probing sequence ended or interrupted NC NC

M2027 Low battery voltage (battery warning at connector X12); NC NC
only evaluated during the probing sequence)
M2499 Open the spindle control loop PLC PLC
M2127 Spindle in motion NC NC

Example:
Enable of probing function in the PLC.
.
.
.
489 LN I9 ;I9 = 0 => TS not in holder
490 = M2502 ;stop if stylus deflected
491 ;
492 L M2503
493 AN I9
494 R M2503 ;acknowledge probing cycle
495 ;
496 ;
497 ;safety function
498 ;M03/M04 deactivate if TS not in holder
499 ;
500 L M2485 ;M03 activated?
501 O M2486 ;M04 activated?
502 AN I9 ;touch probe not in holder
503 S M2487 ;display M05
504 R M2485 ;deactivate M03
505 R M2486 ;deactivate M04
506 R M922 ;clear buffered marker M03
507 R M923 ;clear buffered marker M04
508 R M2488 ;NC stop

9.2 Digitizing with TS 120
Digitizing is possible with all HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes. However, because the digitizing
process can take several hours to complete, it is advisable to use the TS 120 touch probe with signal
transmission by cable. The TS 511 touch probe with its infrared signal transmission can be
continuously operated for up to 8 hours on one battery charge.
Technical Requirements
- "Digitizing with TS 120" is possible with TNC 415 using software types 259 96 and 259 97 and
with TNC 407 using type 243 02 (see also the section "Software" in the chapter headed
"Introduction", ).
- Installing the software module "Digitizing with the TS 120". The ID. number of the logic unit
indicates whether the software module is already installed (see the section "EPROM Locations" in
the chapter headed "Introduction", and the section "Hardware Components" in the chapter
"Installation and Electrical Connection").
If the module is already installed, the software number of the option will appear beneath the NC
and PLC software number, when the system is switched on or when the MOD key is pressed.
- Interfaced touch probe TS 120.
- The machine must be optimized for "Trailing error operation".
The digitizing sequence is optimized by the machine parameters.
Machine parameter MP6210 is the value for the oscillations executed by the touch probe as it scans
the form. It is governed by the dynamic response of the machine.
The dynamic response is in turn determined by the Kv factor (trailing error operation). The greater
the Kv factor, the greater the number of oscillations.
Machine parameter MP6210 determines the maximum probing feed rate in conjunction with the
programmed probe point interval, PP.INT from the scanning cycles "Meander" and "Contour Lines":
F[mm/min] = PP.INT [mm] x oscillations [1/s] x 60 [s/min]
This relation gives the formula for calculating the input value of MP6210:
optimized F [mm / min]1)

Oscillations [1/s] =
PP.INT [mm] x 60 [s / min]
1) The optimized probing feed rate depends on the feed rate in the normal direction (MP6230).

The feed rate in the normal direction (MP6230) is the resultant velocity at which the touch probe is
fed from the non-deflected to the deflected condition perpendicular to the contour and vice versa.
Normal direction
Apart from the oscillation amplitude, the feed rate in the normal direction also determines the
maximum scanning feed rate. If MP6230 is too low, the machine dynamics will be under-utilized and
the scanning feed rate will also be low. If MP6230 is too high the oscillation amplitude will be too
high. In this case the stylus will be seen to lift off from the contour (the stylus "taps" the surface of
the workpiece) and the scanning feed rate no longer increases.
The maximum stylus deflection is defined by machine parameter MP6240. MP6240 will depend on
the length of the stylus used. MP6240 defines the maximum travel by which the stylus retracts on
inside corners. If the touch probe is not "cleared" after the stylus backs out by the travel defined in
MP6240, the touch probe axis (e.g. Z) is retracted in the positive direction. Digitizing continues as
soon as the touch probe is cleared.
Machine parameter MP6260 defines whether an M90 is appended to each NC block in the output
digitized data (see also "Constant contour speed at corners with M90").
Machine parameter MP6270 defines the output format of the digitized data, i.e. the number of
decimal places to which the coordinates are output.
MP6210 Number of oscillations in normal direction per second.

Input range 0 to 65.535 [1/s]
MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction

Input range: 0 to 1000 [mm/min]
MP6240 Maximum stylus deflection

Input range: 0 to 10.000 [mm]
MP6260 Output of M90 for NC blocks with digitized data

Input value: 0 = no M90 output
1 = M90 output in each NC block
MP6270 Rounding decimal places

Input value: 0 = output 0.001 mm steps (1m)
1 = output 0.01 mm steps (10 m)
2 = output 0.0001 mm steps (0.1 m)

9.2.1 Scanning cycles
Direct access to the position control loop of the TNC controller allows the rapid recording of
measured values (3 to 5 values per second). With a programmed probe point interval of 1 mm, this
produces a scanning feed rate of 180 to 300 mm/min. Three scanning cycles are used for digitizing:
"Range", "Meander" and "Contour Lines".
The "Range" cycle defines the cuboid scanning range and the file where the digitized data are stored.
The "Meander" cycle digitizes a 3-D form The "Contour Lines" cycle digitizes a 3-D form
meander-wise (line by line) in the pre-defined level-by-level in contour lines within a pre-
range. defined range. Level-by-level digitizing is mainly
used for forms with steep edges.
Z
Y
Y
X
During meander digitizing a very flat surface may cause little movement in the probe axis. This can
result in a lack of lubrication in the probe axis. MP6220 and MP6221 make it possible to lubricate the
axis at the end of the lines.
MP6220 Traverse for lubricating the probe axis at end of line

Entry: 0.000 to 999.999 [mm]
MP6221 Time after which the probe axis must be lubricated

Entry: 0 to 65 535 [min]

The acquired data can be stored in the controller's program memory, on the FE 401 floppy disk unit
or in a PC.
FE 401
Further particulars about scanning cycles will be found in the TNC User's Manual.
9.2.2 Response of the digitizing sequence at corners
The scanning sequence responds differently for inside and outside corners. Here the two
parameters PP.INT (maximum probe point interval) and TRAVEL from the "Meander" and "Contour
Lines" scanning cycles operate like a travel limiter. Depending on the values that are entered for
these parameters, either the travel or the probe point interval are limited.
The travel is also responsible for geometrical accuracy at the corners. The smaller the stroke, the
greater the accuracy of corner resolution. If too small a stroke is defined however, it may affect
clearance at acute inside corners (minimum travel = 0.1 mm).
Outside Corners
PP. INT
Contour 1
TRAVEL
2
4
On outside corners, having probed the last point the touch probe moves down the resultant
straight line until it either makes workpiece contact again or hits one of the two limits TRAVEL or
PP.INT . In the illustrated example TRAVEL is the limit, and the touch probe returns to the contour
in the inverse scanning direction. The new scanning direction is defined by the probed points
and .

Inside Corners
Maximum stylus
deflection MP 6240
Contour
5
P.I
N
6 4
3
1 2
LE
AV
TR
P.I
N
On inside corners, having probed the last point the touch probe continues to oscillate in the same
scanning direction but changes direction because it cannot get clear. It then moves down the
resultant straight line until it either gets clear or hits one of the limits TRAVEL or PP.INT.
The touch probe moves in inverse scanning direction to get clear. If the programmed probe point
interval PP.INT is too small for the probe to clear, it travels in negative direction by up to the value
of MP6240 (maximum stylus deflection). As soon as the touch probe is clear it returns to the
contour in the inverse travel direction. The new scanning direction is defined by the probed points
and . If the touch probe has failed to clear even after it has backed out by the value of MP6240
, the touch probe axis (e.g. Z) is cleared in the positive direction. If the stylus is still deflected after
it reaches the "clearance height" (see "Range" scanning cycle) the scanning sequence is aborted and
an error message is displayed.

9.2.3 Optimizing the digitizing sequence
The following preparations should be made before optimizing machine and controller.
- Set up the flat workpiece with vertical face and plane surface in the machining plane (e.g. XY
plane).
- Probe the surface with probing function "Surface = Datum" ("MANUAL" or "EL. HANDWHEEL
MODE") and enter the reference plane as +0 mm.
- Basic setting of the relevant machine parameters for "Digitizing"
MP6210 = 5 [1/s] Oscillations in normal direction

MP6230 = 30 [mm/min] Feed rate in normal direction
MP6240 = 5 [mm] Maximum stylus deflection
- The interface must be configured in the "PROGRAMMING AND EDITING" mode, depending on
the type of desired memory for the digitized data (internal controller RAM, FE 401 or PC with
"Block Transfer" program). See TNC 407/TNC 415 Operating Manual.
- Connect FE 401 or PC to the serial data interface if necessary.
- Enter NC program with the scanning cycles "Range" and "Meander" and the scanning direction X
and the probe point interval 1 mm, e.g.
0 BEGIN PGM OPTIDIGI MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-10 Blocks 1 to 4 are needed

2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+10 for the parallel graphics
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+4 of the TNC 415
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1000
5 TCH PROBE 5.0 RANGE Define the range

6 TCH PROBE 5.1 PGM NAME: DIGIDAT to be digitized with
7 TCH PROBE 5.2 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-10 the program name for
8 TCH PROBE 5.3 X+100 Y+100 Z+10 the digitized data and
9 TCH PROBE 5.4 HEIGHT: +25 clearance height (absolute)
10 TCH PROBE 6.0 MEANDER "Meander" scanning in X

11 TCH PROBE 6.1 DIRECTN:X direction with probe point
12 TCH PROBE 6.2 TRAVEL:0.5 L.SPAC:1 P:P.INT:1 and line interval and the
13 END PGM OPTIDIGI MM stroke (for clearing steep
edges).

Optimize the X and Y axes by defining the range such that only the level surface of the component is
scanned.
Z
Y
X
MA
MI
N
Optimize the Z axis by defining the range such that mainly the vertical face is scanned.
Z Y
X
MA
MI
N X

Procedure for optimizing machine parameters
Connect a storage oscilloscope to the nominal
command input of the servo amplifier for the
X axis.
In the
"PROGRAM RUN/FULL SEQUENCE"
mode, select OPTIDIGI program and operate
the external START KEY.
Machine runs, digitizing starts.
Increase the feedrate [1] with the override

potentiometer until X nominal command attains.
maximum value and shows only minor voltage
dips (axis should just still traverse at even
speed).
U[V]
Umax
Increment MP6230
(e.g. by 10 mm/min) t[s]
Are oscillations in
no normal direction visible
(stylus tip is seen to lift off
workpiece surface)?
yes
Decrement Mp6230 again

(e.g. by 10 mm/min)
Repeat optimizing sequence for Y axis.

[1] Keep a note of the maximum Switch the NC program to scanning
direction Y [2].
feedrate that is possible in the
worst axis.
[2] The optimizing sequence is

geared to the worst axis. This is
Repeat optimizing sequence for Z axis.
why the feedrate must not be further
increased with the override Change the scanning range accordingly.
potentiometer and normal feedrate. Pay particular attention to vertical face.

Calculation of possible oscillations in normal direction
optimised F 1) [mm / min]

MP 6210 [1/s] =
PP.INT 2) [mm] x 60 [s / min]
When the calculated machine parameter MP 6210 is entered the feed override potentiometer is
trimmed to the "attained feed rate".
1)
Maximum possible feed rate noted during optimizing
2)
PP.INT is the programmed maximum probe point interval from the "Meander" scanning
cycle (in the example, PP.INT = 1 mm).

9.3 Digitising with the TM 110
The TM 110 measuring touch probe permits high digitising speeds up to 3 m/min (1181 ipm). The
stylus deflection is measured in every direction directly by integral measuring systems and
evaluated in the TNC.
Technical prerequisites
Interfaced TM 110 touch probe

"Digitising with TM 110" software protection module
TNC 415 or TNC 425 as of software version 280 54 or 280 56
PC for saving the surface data
The machine must be prepared for the use of the TM 110 measuring touch probe. The ballscrew
must be mechanically clamped and it must be ensured that the spindle drive cannot be started while
the probe is in use. The TM 110 must be at right angles to the machine axes (use a dial gauge if
necessary). The square cover on the TM 110 can be used as a datum surface.
The "Digitising with TM 110" software module also enables digitising with the TS 120 touch trigger
probe. The machine parameters for digitising with the TM 110 and TS 120 become available when
the software module has been installed.
9.3.1 Interfacing the TM 110
MP6200 defines whether the measuring or the triggering touch probe is to be used.
Danger of breakage!
If you wish to use both the triggering and the measuring touch probe, you must make quite
sure that the type of touch probe in use is entered in MP6200.
The counting direction of the measuring system signals must match the counting direction of the
measuring systems for the machine tool axes (MP210). In the "Positioning with MDI" mode the
machine can be positioned by pressing the PNT soft key. The machine must move in the direction in
which the stylus was deflected. If this is not the case, the counting directions must be changed in
MP6320.
MP6322 assigns the touch probe axes (the measuring systems in the probe) to the machine axes.
For machines with swivel heads the user must enter the respective mounting position of the touch
probe in MP6322. If the touch probe is in a horizontal position, the undefined deflection resulting
from the stylus's own weight makes it impossible to find the centre of the stylus tip. It is therefore
not possible to use the TM in a horizontal attitude to locate a workpiece. In a horizontal attitude the
TM can be used only for digitizing.
Danger of breakage!
The mounting position of the touch probe must be entered correctly in MP6322, otherwise
the calculation of the maximum deflection from MP6330 may be incorrect.

If the stylus is deflected by a distance greater than the value defined in MP 6330, the blinking error
message "Stylus deflection exceeds max" is output. The maximum permissible deflection for the TM
110 is 4 mm.
MP 6310 defines the mean constant deflection depth during digitising. On standard parts an entry
value of 1 mm has proven to be useful. On parts with sharp changes in directions (steep edges) that
are scanned at high speed the deflection depth must be increased. The probing for can also be
adjusted with the deflection depth (approx. 4 N per mm deflection).
After the "Meander" or "Contour line" cycle has been started, the probe moves at the feed rate
defined in MP6361 to the clearance height, and then in the working plain to the point above the
starting point. It then moves at the feed rate defined in MP6350 to the MIN point. If no touch point
is reached, the probe moves to the first touch point in the direction defined in the cycle at the feed
rate given in MP6350.
MP6360 (probing feed rate) and MP6361 (rapid traverse in the probe cycle) are effective in the
standard touch cycles (Chapter 9.1).
MP6362 makes it possible to automatically reduce the probing feed rate if the ball tip moves too far
from the path.
During contour-line scanning the probe sometimes ends the contour line at a point located near but
not exactly at the starting point. MP6390 defines a target window within which the probe is
considered to have returned to the starting point. The target window is a square. The entry value is
half the length of one side of the square.
MP6200 Selection of triggering of measuring touch probe

Entry: 0 or 1
1 = Measuring touch probe (e.g. TM 110)
MP6310 Stylus deflection depth (measuring touch probe)

Entry: 0.1000 to 2.0000 [mm]
MP6320 Counting direction of the measuring system signals (measuring touch probe)
Entry: %xxx
Bit 0 = X axis 0 = Positive

Bit 1 = Y axis 1 = Negative
Bit 2 = Z axis
MP6321 Measuring the centre offset while calibrating the TM110

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Calibrate and measure centre offset
1 = Calibrate without measuring centre offset

MP6322 Assignment of touch probe axes to the machine axes
Entry: 0 to 2
0= Touch probe axis X
1= Touch probe axis Y
2= Touch probe axis Z
MP6322.0 Machine axis X

MP6322.1 Machine axis Y
MP6322.2 Machine axis Z
MP6330 Maximum stylus deflection (measuring touch probe)

Entry: 0.1 to 4.000 [mm]
MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and contour approach
(measuring touch probe)
MP6360 Probing feed rate (measuring touch probe)

MP6361 Rapid traverse in scanning cycle (measuring touch probe)

MP6362 Feed rate reduction if stylus of the TM 110 is deflected away from its path
Entry: 0 or 1
0= Feed rate reduction not active
1= Feed rate reduction active
MP6390 Target window for contour-line end point

Entry: 0.1000 to 4.0000 [mm]

9.4 Tool calibration with the TT 110
The HEIDENHAIN TT 110 touch probe serves for measuring and inspecting tools. HEIDENHAIN
provides standard cycles for automatic tool measurement and calibration with the TT 110 (see
User's Manual).
Technical Prerequisites:
TT 110
TNC 4xx as of software version 280 58, 280 54, 280 56
Central tool file TOOL.T must be active (via machine parameter)
The machine must feature a controlled spindle (for spindle orientation)
9.4.1 Interfacing the TT 110
MP6500 enables the cycles for tool measurement. The cycles should only be enabled when a TT
110 is mounted and interfaced.
MP6505 defines the probing direction for tool radius measurement. For tool radius measurement,
MP6530 defines the distance from the tool bottom to the top of the probe contact. In the tool table
an additional tool-specific offset is entered in the field L-OFFS. MP6540 defines a safety zone around
the probe contact of the TT 110. When a cycle for tool measurement is started the tool moves
automatically from the "clearance height" entered in the cycle at the feed rate defined in MP6550 to
the limit of the safety zone.
The probe disk diameter or the cube edge length is entered in MP6531. The coordinates of the
probe contact centre referenced to the machine datum is entered in MP6580.
For calibrating and measuring individual teeth, the spindle must be brought to a stop at a defined
angular orientation. MP6560 defines whether the spindle is oriented directly through the NC or
through the PLC. If the spindle is oriented by the NC, the PLC need only reset the Marker M2499. If
the PLC orients the spindle the number of the M function is entered in MP6560. The respective
positions are then transferred as for the "Spindle Orientation" cycle. Marker M2127 is set during
every spindle orientation.
Probing feed rate and spindle speed
For tool measurement of a non-rotating tool the probing feed rate is taken from MP6520.
For tool measurement of a rotating tool the probing feed rate and the spindle speed are
automatically calculated by the TNC. The rotational speed is calculated from the maximum
permissible surface cutting speed (MP6570) and the tool radius from the tool table. The rotational
speed is limited to a maximum of 1000 rpm.
MP6570 n= Rotational speed [rev./min]

n= MP6570 = Maximum permissible surface speed of the tool edge
3
2 r 10
[m/min]
r= Tool radius [mm]

The probing feed rate is calculated from the calculated rotational speed and the measuring tolerance
given in MP6510.
v= Meas. tolerance n Meas. tolerance = Meas. tolerance [mm] depending on MP6507

n= Rotational speed [rpm]
MP6507 defines the method of calculating the probing feed rate:
MP6507=0: Calculation of the feed rate with constant tolerance

This setting guarantees that the measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool radius
(MP6510). If the tool is very large, however, the necessary probing feed rate comes so close to zero
that it falls below the lowest programmable increment. The smaller the maximum surface cutting
speed and the permissible measuring error, the sooner this effect becomes noticeable.
MP6507=1: Calculation of the feed rate with variable tolerance

In this setting the permissible measuring tolerance changes depending on the tool radius. This
ensures that there is a probing feed rate even for large tool radii. The measuring tolerance changes
according to the following table:
Tool radius Measuring tolerance

up to 30 mm MP6510
30 to 60 mm 2 MP6510
60 to 90 mm 3 MP6510
90 to 120 mm 4 MP6510 etc.
MP6507=2: Constant probing feed rate

The probing feed rate remains constant regardless of the tool. The absolute measuring error grows
linearly with increasing tool radius.
r r= Tool radius [mm]

Meas. tolerance = MP6510
5 [mm] MP6510 = Max. permissible measuring error [mm]
v = Meas. tolerance n v= Probing feed rate [m/min]

MP6570 MP6510 MP6570 = Maximum permissible surface speed at the
v= cutting edge [m/min]
10 10 3
Markers in the PLC

Marker M2390 is set when a tool measuring cycle is started. Marker M2391 indicates whether a
cycle for tool measurement or tool inspection was activated. If inspection shows that one of the
entered tolerances is exceeded, the tool is inhibited and Marker M2392 or M2393 is set.
Markers M2502, M2503, M2022, M2023, M2025 and M2026 function as in the standard probing
cycles. The cycles for tool measurement must therefore also be released by the PLC with Marker
M2503.
If the spindle is oriented directly by the NC (MP6560 = 1), Marker M2499 must be reset by the
PLC.

MP6500 Tool Calibration with TT 110
Entry: 0 or 1
0= Cycles for tool calibration inhibited
1= Cycles for tool calibration not inhibited
MP6505 Probing direction for tool measurement

Entry: 0 to 3
0= Positive probing direction in the angle reference axis (0axis)
1= Positive probing direction in the +90-axis
2= Negative probing direction in the angle reference axis (0 axis)
3= Negative probing direction in the +90-axis
MP6507 Calculation of the probing feed rate

Entry: 0 to 2
0= Calculation of the probing feed rate with constant tolerance
1= Calculation of the probing feed rate with variable tolerance
2= Constant probing feed rate
MP6510 Max. permissible measuring error for tool measurement with rotating tool
Entry: 0.002 to 0.999 [mm]
MP6520 Probing feed rate for tool measurement with non-rotating tool
MP6530 Distance from tool lower edge to probe contract upper edge for tool radius
measurement
Entry: 0.001 to 99.9999 [mm]
MP6531 Diameter or edge length of the TT 110 probe contact

Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6540 Safety zone around the probe contact TT 110 for pre-positioning
Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6550 Rapid traverse in the probing cycle for TT 110

MP6560 Spindle orientation for measuring individual teeth

Entry: 0 to 88
1 = Spindle orientation directly via NC
0 = Function inactive (error message)
1 to 88 = Number of the M function for spindle orientation via PLC

MP6570 Max. permissible surface cutting speed at the tool edge
Entry: 1.0000 to 120.0000 [m/min]
MP6580 Coordinates of the TT 110 stylus centre referenced to the machine datum
Entry: 99 999.9999 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6580.0 Axis X
MP6580.1 Axis Y
MP6580.2 Axis Z
M2390 Cycle for tool calibration started NC NC

M2391 0 = Tool measurement NC NC
1 = Tool inspection
M2392 Wear tolerance exceeded NC NC
M2393 Breakage tolerance exceeded NC NC
M2499 Open the control loop for the spindle PLC PLC
M2127 Spindle in motion NC NC

4
10 Electronic handwheel
The following handwheels can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN control systems:
- one integral handwheel HR 130, or
- one portable handwheel HR 330, or
- one portable handwheel HR 332, or
- up to three integral handwheels HR 150 using handwheel adapter HRA 110 (see also chapter
"Mounting and Electrical Installation"). The operation of the electronic handwheel is described in the
User's Manual.
Machine parameter MP7640 defines which handwheel is connected to the control. If a value greater
than zero is entered but no handwheel is connected, the error message "Handwheel?" appears.
Shock and vibration can cause a slight movement of the handwheel and thus lead to an unwanted
traverse movement. In order to avoid this a threshold sensitivity for the electronic handwheel is
entered in machine parameter MP7660.
Traversing with the handwheel is disabled by setting marker M2826, i.e. handwheel pulses are
suppressed.
A interpolation factor can be selected in the "Handwheel" operating mode. This interpolation factor
determines the traverse distance per turn. In order to ensure that the rapid traverse rate fixed by the
machine parameter MP1010.x is not exceeded the NC determines the minimum entry value for the
interpolation factor. The NC control goes by the smallest value which was entered, i.e. according to
the slowest axis.
MP7641 defines whether the interpolation factor can be entered direct at the TNC control panel or
via PLC module 9036 (see also Chapter 7, section "PLC Modules").
Interpolation factor Traverse distance per turn Effective from rapid traverse rate:
[mm] MP1010.x [mm/min.]
0 20 12 000
1 10 6 000
2 5 3 000
3 2.5 1 500
4 1.25 750
5 0.625 80
6 0.312 80
7 0.156 80
8 0.078 80
9 0.039 80
10 0.019 80
Machine parameter MP7670 can be used to select a higher limit than that calculated by the NC.
Initializing parameters for the handwheel are defined in machine parameters MP7645.x. These
initializing parameters are currently only evaluated by HR 332 and HRA 110. The functions are
described in the corresponding sections.
4-196 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 01.98

MP7640 Handwheel
Entry: 0 to 6
0 = no handwheel
1 = HR 330 (all keys evaluated by NC)
2 = HR 130 or HR 330
3 = HR 330 (+, - and "rapid traverse" keys evaluated by PLC)
4 = HR 332 (all keys evaluated by PLC)
5 = up to three HR 150 via HRA 110
6 = HR 410
MP7641 Entry of interpolation factor

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = entry at TNC control panel
1 = entry via PLC module 9036
MP7645 Initializing parameters for handwheel

Entry: 0 to 255
MP7645.0 to MP7645.7 currently evaluated only by HR 332, HR 410 or HRA 110 (see following
description).
MP7650 Count direction for handwheel

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = negative count direction
1 = positive count direction
MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel

Entry range: 0 to 10
MP7670.0 Interpolation factor for low speed
MP7670.1 Interpolation factor for medium speed (HR 410 only)
MP7670.2 Interpolation factor for high speed (HR 410 only)

M2826 Suppress handwheel pulses PLC PLC
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 10 Electronic handwheel 4-197

10.1 Integral handwheel HR 130
MP7640 = 2
When the axis keys are activated the corresponding highlight and the on-screen handwheel symbol
move together.

MP7640 = 1: HR 330 (all keys evaluated by NC)
The axis keys on the keyboard are used to move the highlight for actual-value transfer or for setting
datum point. The axis keys on the HR are used to move the handwheel symbol on the screen. The
+, - and rapid traverse keys are evaluated directly by the NC and inputs I160 to I162 are also set
accordingly.
MP7640 = 2: HR 330 (all keys evaluated by NC)
The axis keys on the keyboard and on the HR are used to move both the highlight and the on-screen
handwheel symbol.
The +, - and rapid traverse keys are evaluated directly by the NC and inputs I160 to I162 are also set
accordingly.
MP7640 = 3: HR 330 (+, - and rapid traverse keys evaluated by PLC)
datum point. The axis keys on the HR are used to move the handwheel symbol on the screen. The
+, - and rapid traverse keys must be evaluated by the PLC. Inputs I160 to I162 are set accordingly.
Assignment of keys to PLC inputs
Key on HR PLC input

+ I160
- I161
"rapid traverse" I162

MP7640 = 4: HR 332 (all keys evaluated by PLC)
datum point. The axis keys on the HR are used to move the handwheel symbol on the screen.
MP7645.0 defines whether all 12 keys and their LEDs can be addressed by the PLC or whether the
axis select keys and their LEDs are excluded.

10.3.1 Assignment of keys and LEDs to the PLC inputs and outputs
The 12 keys of handwheel HR 332 are assigned to different PLC inputs and the 12 LEDs to different
outputs depending on the input value of machine parameter MP7645.0.
Pressing a key sets the corresponding PLC input. The matching LED lights up when the PLC output
is set.
When MP7645.0 = 0, the X, Y, Z, IV and V keys and their LEDs are assigned to the NC. The other
keys are assigned to PLC inputs I164 to I170. The LEDs are assigned to the PLC outputs O100 to
O106.
X IV O100
I164
Y V O102
I166
Z O103 O104
I167 I168
O101 O105 O106

I165 I169 I170
When MP7645.0 = 1, all 12 keys are assigned to PLC inputs I160 to I171 and all LEDs to PLC
outputs O96 to O107.
0O96 0O97 0O98

I160 I161 I162
0O99 O100 O101

I163 I164 I165
O102 O103 O104

I166 I167 I168
O105 O106 O107

I169 I170 I171

MP7645.0 has the following meaning when an HR 332 is connected:
MP7645.0 Assignment of HR 332 handwheel keypad

Entry: 0 to 255
0 = all keys and LEDs are freely addressable with the PLC except for axis
selection keys and their LEDs
1 = all 12 keys and LEDs are freely addressable with the PLC.
MP7645.1 to MP7645.7 are not assigned

10.3.2 PLC program example
In the following example the currently selected axis is evaluated so as to be traversed with the +/-
keys. (MP7640 = 4, MP7641 = 0 and MP7645.0 = 0).
Key on HR 322 PLC input/output

+ key I170
- key I169
+ LED O105
- LED O106
;Main program
LBL 1
PS K+9 Interrogate selected handwheel axis with module 9035
CM 9035
PL B0
L K+0 Delete the 8 markers for "Manual
B= M2456 Traverse" of axis X to IV
L K$FF Set the 8 complement markers
B= M2472
L MO PLC outputs O100
ON MO to O106 are deleted.
R O100 All LEDs are
R O101 turned off except the
R O102 LED of the selected axis.
R O103
R O104
R O105
R O106
Case BO Evaluation of selected handwheel axis
CM 10 X-axis
CM 11 Y-axis
CM 12 Z-axis
ENDC
EM
LBL 10 X-axis
LN M2457 Unless X- is active
A I170 and + key is pressed,
S M2456 traverses in
R M2472 X+ direction.
S O106 LED on - key lights up.
EM
LBL 11 Y-axis
.
EM
LBL 12 Z-axis
.
EM
LBL 13 Axis IV
EM

10.4 HR 410 Portable Handwheel
MP7640 = 6
With MP7645.0 you define whether the keys on the handwheel are evaluated by the NC or the PLC.
MP7645.0 = 0 MP7645.0 =1
Keys are evaluated by NC Keys are evaluated by PLC
O96 O97
X IV I160 I161
O98 O99
Y V I162 I163
ACTUAL-
O100 O103
Z POSITION
CAPTURE I164 I167
FEED RATE FEED RATE FEED RATE
SLOW MEDIUM FAST
O104 O105 O106
I168 I169 I170
+ I171 I172
O109 O110 O111 O109 O110 O111
I173 I174 I175 I173 I174 I175
All keys except for the functions keys A, B, and All keys are evaluated by the PLC. Module
C, are evaluated by the NC. MP7670.x defines 9036 sets the handwheel's axis and
the interpolation factor for the slow, medium interpolation. With W766 you can influence
and fast settings. MP7671.x defines the speed the feed rate by pressing the direction keys.
for the slow, medium and fast settings. The
speed is entered as a percentage of the manual
feed rate (MP1020.x).

When an HR 410 is installed, MP7645.0 has the following meaning:
MP7645.0 Evaluation of HR 410 handwheel keypad
Input: 0= Keys evaluated by NC
1= Keys evaluated by PLC
MP7645.1 to MP7645.7 are without function
MP7670 Interpolation factor for handwheel

Input: 0 to 10
MP7670.1 Interpolation factor for medium speed (only HR 410)
MP7670.2 Interpolation factor for high speed (only HR 410)
MP7671 Manual feed rate in handwheel mode with HR 410

Input: 0 to 1000 [% of MP1020]
MP7671.0 Low speed
MP7671.1 Medium speed
MP7671.2 High speed

10.5 Integral handwheels HR 150 with handwheel adapter HRA 110
MP7640 = 5
If the step switch is used for the selection of the interpolation factor (S1) then inputs I160 to I167
must be evaluated in the PLC and the result must be displayed with the aid of PLC module 9036.
The third handwheel can be assigned to any desired axis. MP7645.2 defines whether the axis for
the third handwheel is selected with the axis selector switch (switch S2, see MP7645.0) or is
permanently assigned in machine parameter MP7645.1.
MP7645.0 to MP7645.2 have the following meaning when an HRA 110 is connected:
MP7645.0 Third handwheel assigned by axis selector switch

Entry: 0 to 255
Entry Switch position Handwheel #3

0 1 (left stop) Z axis
2 4th axis
3 Axis 5
1 1 (left stop) X axis
2 Y axis
3 Z axis
4 4th axis
5 Axis 5
2 3 Z axis
4 4th axis
5 Axis 5
If no axis selector switch is connected (see also MP7645.2) the third handwheel is assigned an axis
according to the input value of MP7645.1.
MP7645.1 Handwheel #3 assigned by machine parameter

Entry: 0 to 255
1 = X axis
2 = Y axis
4 = Z axis
8 = 4th axis
16 = Axis 5
MP7645.2 Handwheel #3 assigned by axis selector switch or MP7645.1

Entry: 0 to 255
0 = Assigned by axis selector switch according to MP7645.0
1 = Assigned by MP7645.1
The axis selector switch only transmits data to PLC inputs I168 to I175.
The axis selector switch can therefore be used for other functions.
MP7645.3 to MP7645.7 are not assigned

10.5.1 Assignment of switch positions to the PLC inputs
The tables below give the assignment of the switch positions of S1 and S2 to PLC inputs
I160 to I175.
The two switches operate with a 0 V logic, e.g. if switch S1 is in position 3 then input I162 is logic 0
and inputs I160, I161 and I163 to I167 are logic 1.
Step switch S1
Step switch for selecting interpolation factor
Switch position PLC input

1 (left stop) I160
2 I161
3 I162
4 I163
5 I164
6 I165
7 I166
8 (right stop) I167
Step switch S2
Step switch for selecting axis
Switch position PLC input

1 (left stop) I168
2 I169
3 I170
4 I171
5 I172
6 I173
7 I174
8 (right stop) I175

10.5.2 PLC program example
In the following example the positions of switch S1 for selecting the interpolation factor are
assigned by evaluating inputs I160 to I167 from the lowest permissible interpolation factor from
MP7670 to the maximum interpolation factor = 10 and transferred from the PLC to the NC (MP7640
= 5 and MP7641 = 1).
In this PLC example the minimum interpolation factor is read from MP7670 and processed with PLC
module 9032.
LB I160 Assignment of inputs I160 to I167

= B1 to byte (0V logic, negative logic)
== K0 if all inputs are 0, then

JPT 103 error message
LN B1 Inversion byte 1 (positive logic)

= B2
== K0 if all bits are 0, then

JPT 103 error message
LBL 100 Loop for bit test of "inverted inputs"

L B2 I160 to I167 in byte 2
BT B3
JPT 101 Jump when bit set, i.e. input Ixxx = 0V

L B3 prepare next bit for polling, i.e.
+ K+1 read input if input Ixxx was not 0V.
= B3
JP 100
LBL 101
PS K+7670 Read lowest interpolation factor from

PS K+0 MP7670 with PLC module 9032
CM 9032
PL B4 Result is in byte 4
L B3 Current switch position (0 to 7) plus

+ B4 minimum interpolation factor from MP7670
= B5 is new interpolation factor
<= K+10 if this is greater than 10, then

JPT 102
L K+10 the new interpolation factor is set
= B5 equal to 10.
LBL 102
PS K+4 Transfer new interpolation factor

PS B5 to all axis subdivision

CM 9036 factors (PLC-<NC).
PL B6 Read error code
L B6 if transfer fails,
> K0 then error message
JPT 203
EM
LBL 1032 Error message subprogram

.
Example:
Switch position 4:
Minimum interpolation factor: MP7670 = 5
The results of the PLC example are as follows:
Inputs: I160 to I162 and I164 to I167 are logic 1

Input: I163 is logic 0
Byte 1: 11110111
Byte 2: 00001000
Byte 3: 3
Byte 4: 5
Byte 5: 8
Step switch S2 is configured as follows according to the above example:
Switch position Interpolation factor

1 (left stop) 5
2 6
3 7
4 8
5 9
6 10
7 10
8 (right stop) 10

11 Analogue inputs and outputs
11.1 Analogue inputs

Eight analogue inputs are available on the input/output extensions PL 410, PL 410 B (Id.-Nr 263 371
02) and PA 110. Of these, four are analogue inputs for Pt 100 thermistors (range 0 to 100C;
resolution 0.5) and four are analogue inputs for 10 V DC (resolution 100 mV). The analogue values
are converted to digital values in the PL or PA and transferred to PLC words.
The content of the words can be further processed in the PLC for a variety of purposes (e.g.
compensating for thermal expansion, see section "Thermal compensation").
The word addresses in the PLC depend on whether the analogue inputs are on the first or second
extension. Machine parameter 4410 defines the extension on which the analogue inputs are found.
On the PL 410 the analogue inputs must be activated by a DIL switch. See chapter
"Installation and electrical connection", section "PLC Inputs/Outputs".
MP4410 Activate analogue input

Entry: %xx
Bit 0 = 0 No analogue inputs on extension #1

1 Analogue inputs on extension #1
Bit 1 = 0 No analogue inputs on extension #2
1 Analogue inputs on extension #2
Assignment of word addresses to the analogue inputs:
Input Input First Second Function Set Reset

PA PL extension extension
X2 X15 W496 W464 Voltage input 0 NC NC
X3 X16 W498 W466 Voltage input 1
X7 X19 W504 W472 Temperature input 0 NC NC
X8 X20 W506 W474 Temperature input 1
Internal value range:

Voltage input: 100 to +100 (10V to +10V)
Temperature input: 0 to 200 (0C to 100C)
4-206 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 01.98
11.2 Analogue outputs
The logic unit has six analogue outputs. Five of these are always used to output the nominal value of
the axes. The sixth analogue output is usually used as a nominal value output for the spindle.
If the nominal value for the spindle is not an analogue output, or if the spindle is not needed (e.g.
water jet and laser cutting machines), then an alternative function can be defined for analogue
output S (X8, Pin 8) in MP3011.
See also Chapter 17 "Special functions for laser cutting machines".
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 4-207

4-208 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11 Analogue inputs and outputs 01.98
12 Increment positioning
In the "Electronic handwheel" mode, the function "Incremental jog positioning" can be activated by
the PLC program.
The function "Increment positioning" is enabled by marker M2498. In the "Electronic Handwheel"
mode the "Jog Increment" dialogue is displayed in addition to the "Interpolation factor" dialogue.
For increment positioning, the start marker and the corresponding complement marker for the
desired axis must be activated. If start and complement markers are not set correctly then the
message ERROR IN PLC-PROGRAM XX appears.
In the PLC program the activation of increment positioning is usually combined with the axis
direction keys (see following PLC example). The jog increment can be limited with Module 9036.
Marker Function and entry Error Set Reset

message
M2498 Enable increment positioning PLC PLC
M2512 Start increment positioning X+ 2A PLC PLC
M2528 Complement increment positioning X+
M2513 Start increment positioning X- 2B
M2529 Complement increment positioning X-
M2514 Start increment positioning Y+ 2C
M2530 Complement increment positioning Y+
M2515 Start increment positioning Y- 2D
M2531 Complement increment positioning Y-
M2516 Start increment positioning Z+ 2E
M2532 Complement increment positioning Z+
M2517 Start increment positioning Z- 2F
M2533 Complement increment positioning Z-
M2518 Start increment positioning 4th axis+ 2G
M2534 Complement increment positioning 4+
M2519 Start increment positioning 4- 2H
M2535 Complement increment positioning 4-
M2520 Start increment positioning 5+ 2I
M2536 Complement increment positioning axis 5+
M2521 Start increment positioning 5- 2J
M2537 Complement increment positioning axis 5-
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12 Increment positioning 4-209

PLC example:
Axis direction key X+ with one contact I138

Axis direction key X- with one contact I133
L M2052 Interrogate mode

CMT 10 Electronic handwheel
.
.
EM Main program end
.
.
LBL 10 Increment positioning
L M2052
S M2498 Enable increment positioning
R M2512 Delete marker for increment positioning in X axis

R M2513
S M2528
S M2529
L I138 Increment positioning in X+ direction

AN I133
S M2512
R M2528
L I133 Increment positioning in X- direction

AN I138
S M2513
R M2529
EM
.
4-210 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12 Increment positioning 01.98

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 4-211

13 Hirth coupling
A frequent method of locking rotary axes and swivel heads is the so-called Hirth coupling in which
more or less finely splined plates engage to form a rigid connection.
The Hirth functions are implemented in the PLC program. The only operation in the NC is a rounding
off according to the grid spacing in MP430 when setting the datum point. Repositioning is initiated
as PLC positioning or an error message is displayed depending on whether the axis is automatically
or manually positioned with the Hirth coupling. MP420 defines the "Hirth coupling" functions and
MP430 the grid spacing. The positioning accuracy and other parameters are defined in free machine
parameters.
13.1 Positioning in Manual or Electronic Handwheel mode

The Axis in Position marker (M2011) is reset when selecting the 4th or 5th axis which is traversed
with the electronic handwheel. This can be used to initiate unlocking of the Hirth coupling. The same
applies to traversing with the axis direction key. Setting the Axis in Position marker starts a check of
the nominal position compared with grid. Repositioning is executed as PLC positioning by the
shortest route, i.e. to the nearest grid point.
13.2 Positioning in controlled mode

NC Start also resets the Axis in Position marker. This in turn initiates an internal check of the target
position. If the target position is not in the grid then an error message is displayed.
4-212 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 13 Hirth coupling 01.98

13.3 Program example
The positioning of the 4th axis and locking by the Hirth coupling is described in the following
example. The following machine parameters and markers are required for the example:
MP420.3 Activate Hirth coupling axis 4

1 = active, 0 = not active
MP4310.1 W978 Direction for PLC positioning for repositioning
MP430.3 Hirth grid axis 4
MP960.3 Shift Hirth grid against reference mark
(machine datum)
MP4210.3 D776 Positioning window for PLC positioning
MP4201.3 D780 Input resolution for controlled mode
MP4220.3 W966 Feed rate for PLC positioning
W540 PLC Position for axis 4
W566 Feed rate for PLC position
D12 Actual value (Ref. related)
D20 Trailing error
D36 Hirth grid left of nominal value
D40 Hirth grid right of nominal value
D44 Nominal grid value
D28 Hirth grid
Hirth positioning in controlled mode

L M0 ;create logic zero
R M0
LN M1 ;create logic one
S M1
Activate initializing after switch-on (Module 290)

L M2180 ;first PLC cycle after switch-on
O M2185 ;first PLC cycle after interruption
CMT 290 ;read MP420.3

L M301 ;Hirth function active
A M304 ;Submit 1 terminated
CMT 292 ;read Hirth grid MP430.3
L M2011 ;axis 4 in position

A M305 ;Submit 2 terminated
S M302 ;Switch-on delay terminated
Interrogate operating mode

L M2053 ;positioning with manual input
O M2054 ;program run/single block
O M2055 ;full sequence
= M5 ;controlled mode

Check nominal position
LN M2011 ;axis 4 not in position
AN M300
A M305
A M5
CMT 370 ;nominal value in grid spacing?
L M4 ;1 = not in grid
A M5 ;controlled mode
AN M2011 ;axis 4 not in position
S M3018 ;error message "Nominal position not attainable
in controlled mode"
Activate Hirth module

LN M2011 ;axis 4 not in position
A M301 ;Hirth status 1 = activated
A M302 ;switch-on delay terminated
A M305
S M300 ;set marker for memory
L M300 ;reset by subprogram 300
AN M3018 ;nominal position not attainable in controlled mode
CMT 300 Hirth positioning
EM
LBL 290 ;interrogate Submit
RPLY B128
<> K+0
EMT
SUBM 291
= B128
EM
LBL 291 ;read MP420.3
PS K + 420 ;MP420
PS K+3 ;Index 3
CM 9032
PLW ;value 1/10 000
<> K+0
= M301 ;1 = active, 0 = not active
L M1
S M304 ;Submit 1 ready
L M1 ;M1 = 1
S M2719 ;start word memory processing
S M2495 ;open activation control loop, axis 4
S M2547 ;open control loop, axis 4
EM
LBL 292 ;interrogate Submit
RPLY B128
<> K+0
EMT
SUBM 293
= B128 ;Job identifier
EM

LBL 293 ;read MP430.3
PS K + 430
PS K+3
CM 9032
PL D28 ;Hirth grid
L M1
R M302
S M305 ;Submit 2 ready
EM
LBL 300 ;Subprogram for Hirth positioning
L M2719 ;word memory processing started
SN M3021 ;PLC error message: word memory not opened
L M2011 ;axis 4 in position
AN M2707 ;strobe PLC positioning axis 4 not active
CMT 30 ;calculate nominal grid value left and right
CM 360 ;actual axis 4 in grid spacing
Locking and unlocking

LN M2011 ;axis 4 in position not fulfilled
S O3 ;reset lock
L M2 ;axis in grid spacing
A M2011 ;axis 4 in position
R O3 ;lock
Close control loop

LN M2011 ;axis 4 in position
A I4 ;lock released
AN I6 ;axis not locked
R M2547 ;close control loop axis 4
Open control loop

L M2 ;axis in grid spacing
A M2011 ;axis in position
A I6 ;axis locked
S M2547 ;open control loop axis 4
R M300 ;reset activation Hirth UP
Close control loop

LN I4 ;lock released
AN M2011 ;axis in position
AN M2547 ;control loop axis 4 closed
S M2547 ;open control loop if lock not released

Positioning on grid
L M2051 ;manual operation mode
O M2052 ;electronic handwheel mode
AN M2 ;axis 4 not in grid spacing
A M2011 ;axis 4 in position
AN M2707 ;axis 4 PLC positioning not active
CMT 340 ;start PLC positioning axis on grid spacing
Grid not reached

L M5 ;controlled operation mode
AN M2 ;axis 4 not in grid spacing
AN M2011 ;axis 4 not in position
S M3023 ;PLC error message: error on "Automatic" mode
A M2 ;axis 4 in grid
A M2011 ;axis 4 not in position
R M3023 ;PLC error message reset
EM
LBL 330 Adjacent grid spacing relate to nominal axis position
PS K+8 ;target address
PS K+3 ;trailing error
CM 9041 ;upload coordinate value
PS K+2 ;REF value
CM 9041 ;upload coordinate value
Calculate left and right grid

L D12 ;REF value axis 4
+ D20 ;trailing error axis 4
= D44 ;nominal grid value
Left grid
L D44
PSW ;load to stack
< K+0
CMT 331 ;decrement by Hirth grid
PLW ;load to ACCU
/ D28
x D28 ;suppress residual spacing
= D36 ;left grid point
Right grid
L D36
+ D28
= D40 ;right grid point
Save direction of traverse

L M2163 ;direction of traverse axis V
= M3 ;save to buffered marker
EM

LBL 331
PLW
- D28
PSW
EM
PLC Positioning to adjacent grid spacing
LBL 340 ;PLC positioning on grid spacing

CM 350 ;nearest grid spacing
PLW
= D540 ;new nominal position
L W966 ;MP4220.3 read feed rate
= W566 ;feed rate axis 4 (MP4220.3)
L M1 ;M1 =1
S M2707 ;start PLC positioning axis 4
EM
LBL 350 ;calculate nearest grid spacing
LN M2208 ;programmable with MP4310.1
JPT 351
L D44 ;nominal grid value (ref value)
- D36 ;left grid point
PSW ;left difference
CM 390 ;absolute amount
L D44
- D40 ;right grid point
PSW ;right difference
PLW
= D0 ;right difference
PLW ;left difference
> D0 ;compare
JPT 353 ;load right grid point
JPF 354 ;load left grid point
LBL 351 ;determine direction with preset value from MP

L M3 ;traverse direction for PLC positioning
XO M2209 ;programmable with MP4310.1
JPF 353 ;load right grid point
JPT 354 ;load left grid point
EM
LBL 353 ;load right grid spacing for PLC positioning
PS D40 ;right nominal grid value
EM
LBL 354 ;load left grid spacing for PLC positioning
PS D36 ;left nominal grid value
EM

LBL 360 ;actual axis in grid spacing
PS K0 ;target address
PS K2 ;REF value
CM 9041 ;upload coordinates
L D36 ;coordinate left grid point (ref value)
- D12 ;current ref position
PSW
PL D0
L D40 ;right grid point (ref value)
- D12 ;current ref position
PSW ;load to data stack
PLW ;distance to right grid point
< D776 positioning window from MP4210.2 for Hirth positioning
O[
L D0 ;distance to left grid point
< D776
]
= M2 ;axis in grid position
EM
LBL 370 ;check, nominal value = grid spacing
PS K+4 ;distance to go
PS D12 ;save distance to go to stack
PS K+8 ;;target address
PS K+3 ;trailing error
PS K+2 ;ref value
CM 9041 ;calculate new nominal value
PLW ;distance to go
+ D12 ;ref value axis
+ D20 ;trailing error
MOD D28 ;Hirth grid
PSW ;enter data in stack memory for absolute amount
PLW ;read absolute amount
= D0
L D28 ;Hirth grid axis 4
- D0 ;absolute amount
= D4
L D0
= D4
JPT 371
L D0
= D4
EM

LBL 371
L D4
> D780 ;MP4210.3 programming accuracy axis 4 for Hirth
= M4 ;== 1 scale graduation cannot be approached
EM
LBL 390 ;convert to absolute amount
PLW ;load ACCU
PSW ;load to data stack
BT K + 31 ;write bit 31 to L accu, bit test
JPF 391 ;0 = positive, jump if accu = 0
PLW ;load ACCU
X K-1 ;sign
PSW ;write data to data stack
EM
LBL 391 ;jump label
EM

4-220 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 14 Datum correction 01.98

14 Datum correction
The PLC datum correction function is used to shift the zero or datum point with the PLC program.
Each axis (X, Y, Z, 4, 5) is assigned a double word (D528 to D544) for the correction value. The
datum correction is activated by Marker M2716 during a strobe. The correction is computed in the
actual value display; the display then relates to the shifted coordinate system.
Example:
Actual position display for X axis without correction = 50

Correction in D528 = +20
Strobe marker M2716 set, i.e. correction is active

New actual position display X= +70
The corrections can be transferred to double words, D528 to D544, from different memory areas:
- Enter values in MP4210.0 to MP4210.47 and they will also be in D768 to D956; now copy values
via PLC program into D528 to D544.
- Define corrections in the NC program in function FN19 and they will also be in D280 or D284 (see
description of FN19); now copy values via PLC program into D528 to D544.
A description of the machine geometry via machine parameters MP7510 and following (e.g. cylinder
surface) must have the same reference position as any datum shift.
Address Function
D528 Datum correction for X axis
D532 Datum correction for Y axis
D536 Datum correction for Z axis
D540 Datum correction for IV axis
D544 Datum correction for V axis
Marker Function
M2716 Strobe marker for datum correction
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 14 Datum correction 4-221

PLC example:
Datum correction with M20 activated, with M21 deactivated

.
LN M2045
S M10
L M1920
A M2045 ;M20 activated
A M10 ;Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
CMT 200 ;Datum correction call
R M10
L M1921
A M2045 ;M21 activated
S M10 ;Buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
C 201 ;Deactivate datum correction call
R M10
.
.
L M1920
O M1921
A M2045
AN M2716
S M2482 ;Feedback for M20 and M21
EM ;End of main program
LBL 200 ;Activate module for datum correction
L D896 ;Value from MP4210.32
= D528 ;Shift X axis
L K0 ;Do not shift Y, Z, 4th and 5th axis
= D532
= D536
= D540
= D544
L M10
S M2716 ;Activate datum compensation
EM
LBL 201 ;Deactivate module for datum correction
L D900 ;Value from MP4210.33
= D528 ;Shift X axis
L K0 ;Do not shift Y, Z, 4th and 5th axis
= D532
= D536
= D540
= D544
L M10
S M2716 ;Activate datum correction
EM
4-222 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 14 Datum correction 01.98

4
15 Tool changer
A tool changer can be operated with the PLC of the HEIDENHAIN contouring control. If the tool
changer is to have servo-controlled axes this must be done using a positioning module (see chapter
"Positioning Module"). However it is possible to control a tool changer by simple proximity switches.
Tool data are stored in the tool table and complete tool management (replacement tool, tool life etc.)
is handled by the NC. The NC supplies the PLC with the information it needs to control the tool
changer via markers and words.
15.1 Tool table, Pocket table

The operator is able to edit the tool table in the "Program run" mode.
The tool table is called with the "TOOL TABLE" soft key. From here the operator calls the pocket
table with the "POCKET TABLE" soft key (see User's Manual).
When the operator is in the tool table or pocket table editor, he can upload or download the tool or
pocket table with the EXT key.
Identifiers T and R are assigned for the tool table and pocket table respectively on the external
memory.
The following fields can be edited in the tool table:
NAME : 16 character alphanumeric tool name

L : Tool length
R : Tool radius
R2 : Tool radius 2 for toroidal cutters
DL : Oversize for tool length
DR : Oversize for tool radius
DR2 : Oversize for tool radius 2
TL : Tool locked?
RT : Replacement tool
TIME1 : Max. tool life (M2094)
TIME2 : Max. tool life (TOOL CALL)
CUR. TIME: Current tool life
DOC : Comment on the tool
CUT : Number of tool cutting edges
LTOL : Wear tolerance for tool length
RTOL : Wear tolerance for tool radius
DIRECT : Cutting direction of the tool
PLC : Additional information for PLC (Module 9093)
TT: L-OFFS: Tool length offset
TT: R-OFFS: Tool radius offset
LBREAK: Breakage tolerance for tool length
RBREAK: Breakage tolerance for tool radius
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 15 Tool changer 4-223

The elements in the tables and the sequence in which they appear are defined in machine
parameters MP7266.x and MP7264.x
Left side of the tool table Right side of the tool table
The following fields can be edited in the pocket table:

T : Tool number
ST : Special tool
F : Fixed pocket
L : Locked pocket
PLC : Additional information for PLC (module 9093)
The tool and pocket tables cannot be edited if they are disabled or protected by MP7224 (see
section "Display and operation").
The number of tools in the tool table is defined in machine parameter MP7260. If MP7260 contains
a zero value, then the system will run without a tool table ("TOOL.T" does not exist). Tool length and
tool radius are programmed in the NC program with TOOL DEF (see User's Manual). Automatic tool
management is not possible when operating with no tool table.
The number of pockets in the tool magazine is defined in machine parameter MP7621. No pocket
table is generated if MP7621 is defined as zero. The elements displayed in the tables and their
sequence are defined in machine parameters MP7266.x and MP7264.x. The PLC can read and
overwrite the tool and pocket tables with modules 9092, 9093 and 9094 (see chapter "PLC
Programming"). The current tool data appear in the additional status display (see section "Display and
Programming").
4-224 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 15 Tool changer 01.98

MP7224.0 Disable file types
Bit 2 Tool tables 0 = not disabled
1= disabled
MP7224.1 Protect file types

Bit 2 Tool tables 0 = not protected
1= protected
MP7260 Number of tools in tool table

Entry: 0 to 254
MP7261 Number of pockets in pocket table

Entry: 0 to 254
MP7266 Elements of the tool table

Entry: 0 to 99
0 = no display
1 to 99 = position in tool table
MP7266.0 Tool name (NAME)

MP7266.1 Tool length (L)
MP7266.2 Tool radius (R)
MP7266.3 Tool radius 2 (R2)
MP7266.4 Oversize tool length (DL)
MP7266.5 Oversize tool radius (DR)
MP7266.6 Oversize tool radius 2 (DR2)
MP7266.7 Tool locked? (TL)
MP7266.8 Replacement tool (RT)
MP7266.9 TIME 1
MP7266.10 TIME 2
MP7266.11 CURRENT TIME
MP7266.12 Comment on the tool (DOC)
MP7266.13 Number of tool cutting edges
MP7266.14 Wear tolerance for tool length
MP7266.15 Wear tolerance for tool radius (RTOL)
MP7266.16 Cutting direction of the tool (DIRECT)
MP7266.17 PLC status (PLC)
MP7266.18 Tool length offset (TT: L-OFFS)
MP7266.19 Tool radius offset (TT: R-OFFS)
MP7266.20 Breakage tolerance for tool length (LBREAK)
MP7266.21 Breakage tolerance for tool radius (RBREAK)
MP7267 Elements of pocket table

Entry: 0 to 99
0 = no display
1 to 99 = position in pocket table
MP7267.0 Tool number (T)

MP7267.1 Special tool (ST)
MP7267.2 Fixed pocket (F)
MP7267.3 Locked pocket (L)
MP7267.4 PLC-Status (PLC)

15.1.1 Special Tools
In the pocket table the "ST" field can be used to define tools as special tools. If these are oversize
tools that are too big for one pocket in the tool magazine, then pockets must be reserved on either
side of that pocket. In the pocket table these pockets are locked by the "L" field.
P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10
Variable pocket coding can be restricted by the "F" field (fixed pocket). For special tools, variable
pocket coding can also be restricted with marker M2601. If marker M2601 is set then all special
tools are returned to their original pocket despite "variable pocket coding" being selected. This
function can also be defined for specific normal tools in the "F" field.
M2601 Special tool to original pocket despite variable

pocket coding PLC PLC
In software types 243 05, 259 91, 259 96, 259 97, 243 07 and 243 02 the special tools are identified
by "S" in the tool table. The number of reserved pockets has been defined in machine parameter
MP7264. MP7264 is no longer available.
MP7264 Number of reserved pockets next to special tool

Entry: 0 to 3

15.1.2 Tool life, replacement tool
The operator is able to specify two different tool lives (TIME1 and TIME2) and a replacement tool
(RT) for every tool in the tool table.
If on TOOL CALL the current tool life (CUR.TIME) is greater than TIME2, the pocket number or tool
number (MP7480) of the replacement tool is automatically downloaded. If TIME2 is greater than
zero and no replacement tool is defined, a TOOL CALL for the replacement tool provokes the error
message "MAX. TOOL LIFE EXPIRED" when this time elapses.
If the current tool life is greater than TIME1, the NC sets flag M2094. Further action can be defined
by the machine tool manufacturer (e.g. output a PLC error message).
With the M function M101, the tool can be replaced automatically after a certain service life (TIME 1
or TIME 2). The replacement tool is not installed exactly when tool life ends but can vary by several
NC blocks depending on processor capacity. A T strobe M2046 is sent to the PLC and marker
M2404 is set. With automatic replacement tool installation (M101) the same radius must be defined
for the replacement tool as for the original tool in standard NC programs (NC blocks with RR, RL or
R0).
No radius correction is defined in NC blocks with surface-normal vectors. A delta value (DR, DL) for
length and radius can be defined for each tool in the tool table. The TNC uses these delta values in
NC programs with surface-normal vectors. If the radius of the replacement tool differs from that of
the original tool, then this must be defined in the "DR" field in the tool table. The delta value must
always be negative. If a positive delta value is defined then the error message "Tool radius too large"
will appear. This error message can be reset by M-function M107. M107 is reset by M108.
MP7680 can define whether the oversize for the tool radius (DR2) is considered when calculating
tool length for NC blocks with surface-normal vectors.
The current tool life is only counted from TOOL CALL to TOOL CALL in the automatic modes
("Program run/Single block" and "Program run/Full sequence"). It does not matter whether the spindle
is turning or the machine is traversing. The tool life counter does not stop until the program is
interrupted with "Internal Stop", M02, M30 or END PGM.
The tool life counter does not run in the manual modes ("Manual Operation", "El. Handwheel" and
"Positioning with manual input").
The operator can reset the current tool life by entering zero.
M2094 Maximum tool life elapsed NC NC; PLC

(TIME1 in tool table)
MP7680 Machine parameters with multiple function

Entry: %xxxxxxx
Bit 6 Tool length for blocks with surface normal vector

0= Without DR2 from the tool table
1= With DR2 from the tool table

15.2 Controlling the tool changer
Controlling the tool changer, i.e. positioning the changing arm and carousel and the complete tool-
change sequence is performed by the PLC. The NC handles tool management, i.e. tool life, tool
pocket assignment and evaluation of the TOOL DEF and TOOL CALL blocks.
NC and PLC communicate by markers and words.
When a TOOL CALL BLOCK is executed the tool geometry of the defined tool is taken from the tool
table. With Marker M2717 the PLC can activate the tool geometry of the tool defined in W264.
M2717 can only be activated together with a strobe or when the axis is stationary ( off). With this
marker the PLC can ensure that the current tool geometry is active even when the tool changing
process is interrupted.
The TOOL DEF block can be used to pre-position the tool changer. After a tool has been changed,
the next tool is programmed with TOOL DEF. The PLC evaluates the tool and pocket number and
pre-positions the tool changer at the follow-up tool.
Example of NC program:
.
.
.
TOOL CALL 1 Z S500
TOOL DEF 2
L Z+20 R0 F500 M03
.
.
.
TOOL CALL 2 Z S1000
TOOL DEF 3
.
.
.
Variable and Fixed Pocket Coding
The system can be operated with either variable or fixed tool pocket coding.
Machine parameter MP7480 defines whether the tool number or the pocket number is transferred
to the PLC. For variable pocket coding the pocket number must be transferred to the PLC (MP7480
= 3 or 4). With fixed pocket coding it is advisable to work with the tool number (MP7480 = 1 or 2).
When executing a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block, depending on the setting of MP7480, the NC
transfers either only the tool number or the pocket number and the tool number of the programmed
tool to the word W262 or W262 and W264 respectively. The strobe marker M2046 (TOOL CALL) or
M2047 (TOOL DEF) is set. The NC does not reset these strobe markers until the PLC sets marker
M2483 (TOOL CALL) or M2484 (TOOL DEF) after processing the tool or pocket number. The
machining program is resumed when strobe markers M2046/M2047 are reset.
If tool number 0 is executed, then NC sets marker M2400 and this is not reset until there is a TOOL
CALL for another tool.

MP7480.0 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL CALL block
Entry: 0 to 6
0= No output
1= Tool number output only when tool number changes (W262)
2= Tool number output with every TOOL CALL block (W262)
3= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264) only when tool
number changes
4= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264) with every TOOL
CALL block
5= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264)only when tool
number changes. Pocket table does not change.
CALL block. Pocket table does not change.
MP7480.1 Output tool or pocket number with TOOL DEF block

Entry: 0 to 4
0= No output
1= Tool number output only when tool number changes (W262)
2= Tool number output with every TOOL DEF block (W262)
3= Output of pocket number (W262) and tool number (W264) only when tool
number changes
DEF block
Word Function
W262 Pocket number if MP7480 = 3 , 4, 5 or 6

Tool number if MP7480 = 1 or 2
W264 Tool number if MP7480 = 3, 4, 5 or 6
M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC

M2047 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC
M2483 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC
M2484 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC
M2400 Tool number 0 programmed NC NC
M2717 Geometry of the tool from W264 PLC NC

15.2.1 Output of tool number (fixed pocket coding)
Evaluating the tool number is adequate for fixed tool pocket coding. MP7480 is used to select
whether the tool number should be transferred to the PLC with every TOOL CALL (TOOL DEF)
block or only when the tool number changes (input values for MP7480 = 2 or 1). With this setting
the tool number is transferred to the word W262 when a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF block is
executed. W264 is not used.
If MP7261 > 0, then pocket numbers are displayed in the pocket table. Entering 5 or 6 in MP7480.0
transfers the pocket number to W262 and the tool number to W264. Unlike the setting with variable
pocket coding (MP7480 = 3 or 4) the assignment of tool and pocket numbers in the pocket table
does not change.

15.2.2 Output of pocket number (variable pocket coding)
With variable pocket coding, the NC must transfer the pocket number of the called tool to the PLC
(MP7480 = 3 or 4). In this setting, the pocket number is filed in word W262. In addition to the pocket
number, the NC also transfers the current tool number in W264. Variable pocket management (the
assignment of tool number to pocket number in the tool table) is handled by the NC. The PLC can
use marker M2612 to tell the NC that the pocket number in the tool table should not be updated
during "Block scan".
The number of tools with a pocket number is defined in machine parameter MP7261. The input
value for MP7261 matches the number of pockets in the tool magazine. This means that more tools
can be defined in the tool table than there is room for in the tool magazine [(MP7260) > (MP7261)]. If
a tool number is programmed and no pocket is defined for it, pocket number 255 (W262) is
transferred on TOOL CALL, and marker M2402 is set.
Only the tool number and the pocket number are transferred when TOOL DEF is programmed. A
TOOL DEF for a manual tool has no relevance in the PLC.
A fixed pocket can be defined in the field ' F' of the pocket table. Tools for which a fixed pocket is
defined are returned to the same pocket despite variable coding.

M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC
0= Normal tool follows normal tool
(N N)
or manual tool follows manual tool
(M M)
or special tool follows special tool
(S S) when M2601 = 0
1= special tool follows manual tool
(M S)
or special tool follows special tool
(S S), when M2601 = 1
or manual tool follows special tool
(S M)
or manual tool follows normal tool
(N M)
or normal tool follows manual tool
(M N)
or normal tool follows special tool
(S N) (see marker M2600)

M2600 Transfer sequence of tool numbers or pocket numbers PLC PLC
(M2093 = 1)
0= first number for old tool then number for new tool
(single changing arm)
1= first number of new tool then number of old tool
(double changing arm)
M2401 Tool programmed with pocket number NC NC
(active only when MP7480 = 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL)
M2402 Tool programmed without pocket number NC NC

(active only when MP7480 = 3 or 4 and TOOL CALL)
M2403 Special tool called (TOOL CALL) NC NC
M2404 TOOL CALL at end of tool life NC NC
0= programmed TOOL CALL
1= TOOL CALL at end of tool life
M2601 Special tool to original pocket despite variable pocket coding PLC PLC
M2612 Do not update pocket number in pocket table PLC PLC
A variety of tool types can be called from the machining program. The following definitions are used
in the examples that follow:
N = Tool for which a pocket number is defined in the tool table. (Normal).
M = Tool for which no pocket number is defined in the tool table. These tools must be changed
by hand. (Manual).
S = Special tool (defined in tool table).
Nine different combinations of tool-change sequence are therefore possible. For many tool-change
sequences, for the tool magazine to be controlled, two pocket numbers (tool numbers) must be
output in succession for one TOOL CALL. This is reported to the PLC by markers M2093 and
M2600. The PLC must evaluate and acknowledge both pocket numbers (tool numbers).
The logic diagrams for the nine different tool-change sequences are shown on the following pages
(activated by TOOL CALL).

N N: Normal tool follows Normal tool
The pocket number and tool number of the called tool are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [new N]
W264 Tool No. [new N]

S N: Normal tool follows Special tool
With this toolchange, two pocket numbers (or tool numbers) must be transferred in succession.
M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe (M2046) follows.
With M2600 the PLC can determine the sequence in which the pocket numbers are transferred. The
decision will depend on whether a single or double changing arm is in use.
S N, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0):
The pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first. Tool number 0 tells the
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483 the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [S] Pocket No. [N]
W264 Tool No. Tool No. [N]

S N, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1):
The pocket number and tool number of the new tool are transferred first. After acknowledging with
M2483 the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the
PLC to clear the spindle.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [N] Pocket No. [S]
W264 Tool No. N Tool No. 0

M N: Normal tool follows Manual tool
With this tool-change sequence two pocket numbers (or tool numbers) must be transferred in
succession. M2093 indicates that another TOOL CALL strobe (M2046) follows.
Irrespective of flag M2600, pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred first. Tool number
0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. Pocket number 255 means that there is no pocket in the tool
magazine for the called tool. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool number
of the new tool (called tool) are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. 255 Pocket No. [N]
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [N]

M M: Manual tool follows Manual tool
The pocket number 255 tells the PLC that there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. 255
W264 Tool No. [new M]

N M: Manual tool follows Normal tool
Irrespective of flag M2600, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first.
Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, pocket number
255 and the tool number of the called tool are transferred. Pocket number 255 tells the PLC that
there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [N] Pocket No. 255
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [M]

S M: Manual tool follows Special tool
Irrespective of flag M2600, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred first.
Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, pocket number
255 and the tool number of the called tool are transferred. Pocket number 255 tells the PLC that
there is no pocket in the tool magazine for the called tool.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [S] Pocket No. 255
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [M]

S S: Special tool follows Special tool
Flag 2601 or field "F" in the pocket table can be used to set whether the special tool is to be returned
to its original pocket despite variable pocket coding
The same logic diagram applies to single and double changing arms (M2600 = 0 and 1) with variable
pocket coding for special tools (M2601 = 0).
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [new S]
W264 Tool No. [new S]
If the special tool is to return to its original pocket despite variable pocket coding (M2601 = 1), there
is a different pocket number transfer sequence for single and double changing arms (M2600).

S S, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0)
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [old S] Pocket No. [new S]
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [new S]

S S, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1)
M2483, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [new S] Pocket No. [old S]
W264 Tool No. [new S] Tool No. 0

N S: Special tool follows Normal tool
There is a different pocket number transfer sequence depending on M2600 (single/double changing
arm). M2601 is not relevant.
N S, Single Changing Arm (M2600 = 0)
PLC to clear the spindle. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and tool number of
the new tool are transferred
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [N] Pocket No. [S]
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [S]

N S, Double Changing Arm (M2600 = 1)
M2483, the pocket number of the old tool and tool number 0 are transferred. Tool number 0 tells the
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. [S] Pocket No. [N]
W264 Tool No. [S] Tool No. 0

M S: Special tool follows Manual tool
Irrespective of flag M2600 and M2601, pocket number 255 and tool number 0 are transferred first.
Tool number 0 tells the PLC to clear the spindle. Pocket number 255 means that there is no pocket
in the tool magazine for the called tool. After acknowledging with M2483, the pocket number and
tool number of the new tool (called tool) are transferred.
1
M2046
0
1
M2483
0
1
M2093
0
1
M2600
0
1
M2401
0
1
M2402
0
1
M2403
0
1
M2601
0
W262 Pocket No. 255 Pocket No. [S]
W264 Tool No. 0 Tool No. [S]

15.3 PLC program example
This section describes a tool changer and contains the basic sequence diagrams of the
corresponding PLC programs. When creating a program the constraints on the PLC program
sequence must be remembered (set buffer markers etc.).
The example describes a tool changer with the following features:

- Up to 254 tools
- Variable pocket coding (MP7480 = 4)
- Special tools are permitted
- Next tool standby with TOOL DEF
- Toolchange with TOOL CALL
- Tools with no pocket number defined in the tool table can be changed by hand
- Double changing arm
- Special tools variable (M2601 = 0)
ISTREG GRE1 GRE2
SPIREG
The following sequence diagram uses variables for greater clarity. In the PLC program these
variables are replaced by byte addresses.
ISTREG = B10 = Pocket number at the tool-change position of the tool magazine
GRE1 = B11 = Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing tool magazine
GRE2 = B12 = Pocket number of tool in changing arm facing spindle
SPIREG = B13 = Pocket number of tool in spindle

Other PLC operands which are used:
M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC

M2047 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC
M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC
M2403 Special tool called (TOOL CALL) NC NC
M2483 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC
M2484 Feedback T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC
M2600 Sequence of tool number or PLC PLC
pocket number transfer (M2093 = 1)
M2601 Special tool to original pocket despite PLC PLC
variable pocket coding
W262 Pocket number
W264 Tool number
Machine parameters used:
MP7260 = 90 Number of tools in tool table

MP7261 = 12 Number of pockets in tool magazine
MP7264 = 1 Number of pockets vacant beside special tool
MP7480.0 = 4 Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL CALL block
MP7480.1 = 4 Output of pocket number and tool number with every TOOL DEF block
The sequence diagram for this tool changer is subdivided into modules.
List of modules (subroutines):
- TOOL DEF Search tool and load in GRE1

- TOOL CALL Automatic tool-change
- STANDBY Search tool and load in GRE1
- STANDBY BACK Return tool from GRE1 to magazine
- MANUAL TOOL IN Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool
- MANUAL TOOL OUT Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool
- MANUAL OUT/IN Manual tool follows Manual tool
- CHANGE Take old tool out and put new tool in
- COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH
- COMPARE P-CODE WITH ISTREG
- COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG

15.3.1 Program module TOOL DEF
Search tool and load in GRE1
Feedback is
TOOL DEF immediate so
feedback that the NC PGM
can continue
No Message:
P < 255 CANNOT
Manual tool PREPARE
MANUAL
Yes TOOL
No
P = SPIREG Tool already in spindle
Yes
No
P = GRE1 Tool already in GRE1
Yes
Load GRE1
No
GRE1 = 0 STANDBY Module
GRE1 empty
Yes
GRE1 assigned
STANDBY BACK
End
Module

15.3.2 Program module TOOL CALL
Automatic Toolchange (Main Program)
Clear spindle Another TOOL CALL S/N tool

strobe follows
No No No M tool S/N tool out

T=0 M2093 = 0 P = 255 M-tool in
IN Module
Yes Yes Yes

M tool
No No M tool M tool out

P = 255 M2093 = 1 OUT Module S-/N-tool in
M tool
Yes Yes
Another
TOOL CALL MAN. OUT/IN M-tool out
strobe follows Module M-tool in
No Tool already
P = SPIREG
in spindle
Yes
No
P = GRE1
Tool already in changing arm
Yes
No CHANGE S-/N-tool out

GRE1 = 0 STANDBY Module
Module S-/N-tool in
Yes Fetch tool to GRE1
STANDBY BACK Unload GRE1 TOOL CALL

Module feedback

15.3.3 Program module STANDBY
Search for tool and load in GRE1
No Pocket in magazine found

P = ISTREG
Yes
COMPARE
P-CODE Load ISTREG Load tool from
WITH ISTREG to GRE1 magazine to GRE1
Module
End
15.3.4 Program module STANDBY BACK

Return tool from GRE1 to magazine
GRE1 = No Pocket in magazine found

ISTREG
Yes
COMPARE Bring GRE1 to

GRE1 WITH magazine and Return tool
ISTREG load GRE1 to magazine
Module with zero
End

15.3.5 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN
N -> M or S -> M: Manual tool follows Normal or Special tool.
The old tool is returned to the tool magazine and the operator is prompted to load a manual tool (not
in tool magazine).
Move GRE2 to
No spindle and
GRE1 = 0 load SPIREG Old tool out
to GRE2
Yes
Turn changing As GRE1 is already

arm, load SPIREG zero, this routine has
STANDBY BACK with GRE1, set software relevance only.
Module GRE1 to zero
and return arm
Unload GRE1 Swap over GRE1

and GRE2
registers
STANDBY BACK Bring old tool

Module to magazine
Move axes to
TOOL CALL man. change
feedback
position
Prompt user to
load tool and press
No OK key
M2046 = 1
Yes
Strobe set
again OK key No
pressed
Yes
Load T code End

to SPIREG

15.3.6 Program module MANUAL TOOL OUT
M -> N or M -> S: Normal or Special tool follows Manual tool
The operator is prompted to unload the spindle manually as there is no pocket for the current tool in
the magazine. The called tool is loaded automatically.
Move axes to No Tool in GRE1

manual change GRE1 = P
position
Yes
No GRE1
Prompt user to GRE1 = 0 empty
unload tool and
press OK key Yes
Unload GRE1
STANDBY BACK
Module
No
OK key
pressed
Yes STANDBY
Fetch tool to
Module
GRE1
Load zero in
SPIREG
(spindle empty) CHANGE
Module
TOOL CALL
feedback
End
No
M2046 = 1
Yes
TOOL CALL
strobe set again

15.3.7 Program module MANUAL TOOL IN/OUT
M -> M: Manual tool follows Manual tool.
The operator is prompted to unload the spindle and load the new tool manually as there is no pocket
for these tools in the magazine.
Move axis to
manual change
position
Prompt user to
unload old and
load new tool
Press OK key
No OK key
pressed
Yes
Load T code to
SPIREG
End

15.3.8 Program module CHANGE
The spindle is unloaded and the new tool is loaded automatically. This module defines whether the
tool is to be returned to its old pocket in the tool magazine or not (e.g. Special tool).
Move GRE2 to
spindle, load Old tool out
SPIREG to
GRE2
Turn changing
arm, load
SPIREG with Turn changing arm
GRE1, set and load new tool
GRE1 to zero,
retract arm
Swap over No GRE1 to

GRE1 and M2093 = 1 magazine, load Store old tool
GRE2 registers GRE1 with zero in magazine
Yes
Another
TOOL CALL
strobe follows
TOOL CALL
feedback End
Wait No
M2046 = 1
Yes
TOOL CALL
strobe set
again
No
P = ISTREG
Magazine in position
Yes
COMPARE
P-CODE WITH Position tool magazine
ISTREG
Module

15.3.9 Program module COMPARE P-CODE WITH ISTREG
The tool magazine is positioned at the search pocket number by the shortest path.
Transfer
P code
to data stack
COMPUTE THE
SHORTEST
PATH IN
M3042
Module
No
P = ISTREG End
Yes
No
M3042 = 1
Yes
Index magazine Index magazine

forward reverse

15.3.10 Program module COMPARE GRE1 WITH ISTREG
The tool magazine is positioned at the pocket number of the tool in GRE1 by the shortest path.
Transfer GRE1
to data stack
COMPUTE THE
SHORTEST
PATH IN
M3042
Module
GRE1 = No
ISTREG End
Yes
No
M3042 = 1
Yes
Index magazine Index magazine

forward reverse

15.3.11 Program module COMPUTE SHORTEST PATH
The program determines the direction in which the tool magazine must move in order to reach the
search pocket number by the shortest path. The path is filed in marker M3042:
M3042 = 0: reverse
M3042 = 1: forward
Fetch search
pocket from data
stack to NOMREG
Divide number of
mag. pockets by
two and save to
MAGREG
Save absolute
value from
ISTREG-NOMREG
difference to
ABSREG
No
NOMREG >
ISTREG
Yes
No No
ABSREG < NOMREG <
MAGREG ISTREG
Yes Yes
ABSREG > No
MAGREG
Yes
Magazine Magazine
M3042 = 1 forward M3042 = 0 reverse
End

4
16 Commissioning and start-up procedure
This section describes the commissioning procedure for the controls step-by-step. The precise
descriptions of the functions may be found by referring to the appropriate sections.
16.1 Code numbers for commissioning

Certain operating conditions and functions for the commissioning procedure must be selected by
code numbers (see section "Display and operation").
Code number Function
95 148 List of machine parameters (see "Machine parameters")

807 667 PLC-operation (see "PLC-programming")
531 210 Cancel markers M1000 to M2000 and B0 to B127
75 368 Automatic offset adjustment (see section "Servo positioning")
105 296 Compensation table (see section "Non-linear axis error correction")
688 379 Oscilloscope
16.2 Preparation of the machine

The machine is prepared without a control being connected.
Follow the sequence below to commission the drive amplifiers:
Clamp the nominal value lead to 0 V:

Disconnect and short together the nominal value inputs of the drive amplifiers.
0 V must be applied to the input.
Connect the servo-enable input:

Connect the servo-enable input to 24 V, thus activating the servo.
Connect the power supply to the drive amplifiers.
Rough offset adjustment:

If the axis moves even though the nominal value input is clamped to 0 V, the offset
potentiometer must be adjusted such that the axis comes to a stop. After the offset adjustment,
remove the short-circuit bridge on the nominal value input.
Rough velocity adjustment:

Connect battery supply to the nominal value input. Adjust the battery supply to 9 V and adjust
the drive motor with the tacho-potentiometer to the desired speed (which equals the maximum
rapid traverse rate). The rated speed can be read from the drive motor with a tachometer.
4-258 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 01.98
Tuning of the drive amplifier:
As far as the control is concerned, the actual servo-loop consists of the drive amplifier, motor
and axis slide (see section "Servo positioning"). The servo-loop must be tuned before the position
control loop in the control can be optimized.
To achieve this, a battery supply is used to apply a (9 V) step function to the nominal value input
of the drive amplifier. The step response can be recorded by an oscilloscope via the tachometer
signal. The axis should be loaded with the permissible workpiece weight during the acquisition of
the step response. The subordinate control loop (current control, spindle speed control) must be
so optimized that the step response shows an overshoot. The following picture shows the ideal
response of the tacho-signal.
Given step
U [V] function 1 Overshoot
Umax
Tacho-signal
T t [ms]
The following pictures show incorrectly adjusted tacho-signals:
U [V] Several overshoots

Umax
Incorrect!
t [ms]
The P-component of the subordinate control loop is too high, or the I-component too low.
U [V]
Umax
Too flat
Incorrect!
t [ms]
The P-component of the subordinate control loop is too low, or the I-component too high..
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 4-259
Calculating acceleration
The maximum acceleration time T can be deduced from the step response.
U [V]
Umax
T t [ms]
To calculate the acceleration increase T by 10%.
From this it follows that:
vmax
a= vmax = velocity at Umax
T 11
.
a = acceleration
The step response must be investigated for all axes.
The acquired acceleration values are entered in MP1060.0 to MP1060.4.
After adjustment, switch off the supply voltage to the drive amplifiers.
This concludes the preparation of the drive amplifiers.

16.3 Commissioning the control
The machine must be prepared in accordance with section 16.2 before the machine parameters for
commissioning can be optimized.
Before connecting the control, the NC- and PLC- supply voltages and the ground connections should
be tested once more (see "Mounting and Electrical Installation ").
16.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters

After switching on the machine for the first time, the control will first of all display the message
"Operating parameters erased", which means that the machine parameters still have to be entered
(see "Machine parameters").
Most machine parameters can be pre-defined and entered according to the machine parameter list
and the functional descriptions. The parameters which affect the control loop must be assigned
provisional values (see section 16.3.6).
In order to avoid lengthy delays on restarting during the commissioning of the control, the memory
test can be suppressed by MP7690 (see section "Display and operation").
16.3.2 Entry of the PLC-program

A complete PLC-program for all machine functions must be created for commissioning and stored
either in EPROM or RAM (see "PLC-programming").
Machine parameter MP4010 (see section "Display and operation") selects whether the processing
uses a PLC-program from EPROM or from RAM.
The PLC-program in RAM is used for commissioning purposes. It only makes sense to create an
EPROM when all functions are operating without error.
In case of doubt, please contact HEIDENHAIN customer service.
16.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine

Since the EMERGENCY STOP-circuit is very important for the machine it is vital that it is tested!
Test the Function "Control operational" according to the section "EMERGENCY STOP routine".
Test the EMERGENCY STOP-circuit by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP keys and by traversing
past the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches.
16.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse
Test the controls for the direction of traverse according to the following diagram (effective machine
parameters: MP210 count direction of the measuring system signals, MP1040 polarity of the
nominal value voltage, MP1320 direction of traverse on passing over the reference marks).
START
Switch on line voltage
Was
"gross positioning
error"
YES or
direction of traverse
wrong or direction
Modify traverse wrong when
MP210 approaching
MP1040 ref. marks
MP1320 ?
NO
Reset current interruption with CE

Switch
off line
Switch on control voltage: voltage
axes are in control loop
Gross "positioning YES

error" (MP1040
or MP210 wrong)
?
NO
NO Start ref. approach (both ref.

Ref. approach approach
with start key with axis direction
keys modes must
? be run!)
YES
Is Is
direction of direction of
NO traverse correct? traverse of axes NO
(determined correct? (determined
by MP1320) by MP1040 and
MP210)
YES
Check direction of traverse of Check direction of traverse

ref. approach for all axes for all axes
This flow diagram must be worked through for every axis!
16.3.5 Fixing the software limit switch ranges
Determine the software limit switch ranges (see section "Machine axes") as follows:
In "Manual operation" mode select the REF-

display with the MOD key.

Position-displays show the distance to the
machine datum .

Move all axes with the aid of the direction keys or
the handwheel in positive and negative direction to
just before the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches. Note the
values in the positional-displays and their sign.

Enter the noted values in MP910 or MP920.

Select actual-value display with MOD key.
16.3.6 Optimizing the control with lag (MP1390 = 1)

The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the
control characteristics:
Machine parameter Function provisional entry value
MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid 9 V

traverse
MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine
(see "Preparation of the machine")
MP1810 kv factor 1
MP1820 Multiplication factor 1
max. mach. speed 100 %
Entry value =
MP1830 Kink point Rapid traverse
These values can usually be further optimized.
kv factor
Adjust the kv factor (MP1810) so that the voltage characteristic is as described in the section "Servo
positioning". If a different kv-factor is required for rapid traverse to that for the machining feed-rate, it
must be optimized separately.
Optimize kv factor for the machining feed-rate (X-axis)

Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer
of the servo amplifier of the X axis
Enter following program in

"PROGRAMMING AND EDITING"
operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F2)...
X 0 R0 F2)...
CALL LBL 1 REP 100/100
Press external START button in

operating mode, machine runs.
Caution: Set feed-rate override to 100 %.
MP1810: Increase entry value until control loop oscillates or overshoot

occurs after the acceleration ramp.
U [V]

t [s]
Machining feed-rate
MP1810 (kv-factor): Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected.
U [V]
t [s]
Repeat trimming procedure for axes Y, Z, IV and V.

1)
Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible.
2)
Enter the max. feed-rate for machining.
For axes which are mutually interpolated the kv factor must be the same.
In this case the worst axis determines the entry value.
Kink point
Check multiplication factor for the kv (MP1820 0 1) and kink point

Max. machining feed-rate x 100%
(MP1830= ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rapid traverse

of the servo amplifier of the X axis.

"PROGRAMMING AND
EDITING" operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX
Press external START button in

"PROGRAM RUN/FULL
SEQUENCE"
operating mode, machine runs.
Does tacho signal overshoot?
U [V]
t [s]
YES NO
Reduce MP1820 multiplication

factor progressively until Kink point is not required.
overshoot disappears.
Repeat trimming procedure for axes Y, Z, IV and V.
1)

16.3.7 Optimizing the control with feedforward control (MP1390 = 0)
The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the
control characteristics:
Machine parameter Function Provisional entry value
MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid 9V

traverse
MP1060 Acceleration As measured on the machine
(see "Preparation of the machine")
MP1510 kv factor 1
MP1520 Position approach 0.5 [m/min]
These values can usually be further optimized.
Optimize kv factor

of the servo-amplifier of the X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX
Press machine START button in the

"PROGRAM RUN/SINGLE BLOCK"
operating mode.
Machine runs.
kv factor MP1510: Increase entry value until position loop oscillates.

U [V]
t [ms]
kv factor MP1510: Reduce entry value until no oscillations can be detected.
U [V]
t [ms]
1)
Optimize acceleration
If the maximum acceleration of the servo loop cannot be determined with the battery supply, the
acceleration can be optimized as follows:
Connect storage oscilloscope to

tachometer of servo-amplifier of X axis.
Enter following values for

position monitoring
MP1410: 0.5
MP1420: 30

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX
Increase MP1060
"Acceleration"
progressively

operating mode, machine runs
Does control
stop machine No
with error message
POSITIONING
ERROR"?
Yes
Enter acceleration from MP1060.0
in MP 1060.1 to 1060.4. Traverse
axes Y, Z, IV and V with the
acceleration value found. Reduce
values as required.
Enter 0.7 to 0.9 times the

computed values as
acceleration in MP1060.
1)
Optimize transient response
MP1520 defines the transient response when accelerating and braking. The approach behaviour is
optimized to the target position.
Tacho U [V]
voltage
MP1530 correct
MP1530 too high
MP1530 too low
t [ms]
Since MP1520 is effective for all axes, the worst axis determines the entry value. No axis should
show an overshoot.
If MP1520 is set too low then the positioning times to the target position will increase substantially.
Optimize MP1520 with great care!
Connect storage oscilloscope to
tachometer of servo-amplifier of X axis.

operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F MAX
X 0 R0 F MAX

"PROGRAM RUN/SINGLE BLOCK"
operating mode.
Machine runs.
MP1520: Increase entry value until overshoot occurs.

U [V]
t [ms]
MP1520: Reduce entry value until overshoot stops.

U [V]
t [ms]
Check axes Y, Z, IV and V and correct MP1520, if necessary.
1)
7/95 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 16 Commissioning and start-up procedure 4-271
16.3.8 Optimize the integral factor
MP7290: "4" (display step = 1 m)
Machine stands in position, under servo control.

MP1080 integral factor (for X-axis):
raise entry value 1) , until the
Servo positioning becomes noticeably unstable
(observe the actual value display).

MP1080: reduce the entry value in small steps
until the servo positioning is steady again 2).

Repeat adjustment for Y axis, Z, IV and V.
Whether or not an integral factor is possible in connection with the automatic offset adjustment with
MP 1220 can only be judged when observing the complete machine.
The optimum solution must be found during the commissioning procedure.
1) First entry value 100, raise subsequent values in steps of 100.

2) For drives which are not quite free of backlash the entry value should be"0".
16.3.9 Adjust the offset
The rough offset-adjustment has already been carried out on the servo-amplifier. A fine offset-
adjustment can be performed with the offset-adjustment possibility described in the section "Servo
positioning".
16.3.10 Adjustment of the monitoring functions

The following entry values are recommended for the monitoring functions (see section "Servo
positioning"):
Machine parameter Function Entry value
MP1710 Position monitoring 1.2 lag in rapid traverse

MP1720 Position monitoring (EMERGENCY STOP) 1.4 lag in rapid traverse
MP1410 Position monitoring 0.5 [mm]
MP1420 Position monitoring (EMERGENCY STOP) 10 [mm]
MP1140 Movement monitoring 0.5 [V]
MP1030 Positioning window 0.01 [mm]
MP1110 Standstill monitoring 0.2 [mm]
If the drives of the machine permit narrower limits, these may be entered.
4
17 Special functions for laser cutting machines
Special functions can be activated to interface the TNC to laser cutting machines and water jet
machines.
17.1 Analogue voltage output
If the analogue output (X8, pin 8) is not needed for the spindle, MP3011 can define another function
for this analogue output. The input values in MP3011 show an effect only if the value in MP3010 is
less than 3.
MP3011 Function of analogue output S, if MP3010 < 3

Entry: 0 to 3
0 = No special function
1 = Voltage proportional to current contour feed rate (depending on MP3012)
2 = Voltage as defined by PLC module 9130
3 = Voltage is defined via M function (M200 to M204)
17.1.1 Voltage proportional to feed rate (MP3011 = 1)
A voltage proportional to the current contour feed rate is output. The feed rate achieved when 10 V is
output is entered in MP3012.
MP3012 Feed rate for output of an analogue voltage of 10 V (MP3011 = 1)

mm
Entry: 0 to 300 000 [ ]
min
17.1.2 Voltage from the PLC (MP3011 = 2)
The voltage defined through the PLC module 9130 is output. See also chapter "PLC Programming".
17.1.3 Definition of the voltage via M function (MP3011 = 3)
The analogue voltage output can be defined in the positioning block with the miscellaneous functions
M200 to M204. These M functions are available only if the value 3 is entered in MP3011. The M
functions are executed synchronously to the positioning blocks and are effective at the beginning of
the block.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4-275
Direct output of the programmed voltage: M200 V...
The TNC outputs the value programmed behind M200 V... as a voltage.
Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
Duration: M200 V... is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204.
Voltage varies with distance: M201 V...
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the traversed distance. The TNC increases or decreases
the voltage linearly from the active voltage to the value programmed behind M201 V...
Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
Duration: M201 V... is effective unit a new voltage is output through M200 to M204.
Voltage varies with the velocity: M202 FNR.
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the velocity. With machine parameters MP3013.x and
MP3014.x up to 3 characteristic curves are defined in a table. In the table certain analogue voltages
are assigned to certain feed rates. M202 FNR. selects the characteristic curve in which the TNC finds
the voltage to be output.
Entry: 1 to 3
Duration: M202 FNR. is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204.
You can enter in the table up to four kink points per characteristic curve. The output values are
interpolated linearly between the kink points. The first kink point must have the value 0. The entry
values of the following kink points must increase in sequence. The TNC recognizes the beginning of a
new characteristic curve from the entry value 0.
Example:
Velocity Voltage
MP3013.0 0 MP3014.0 0 Characteristic 1
MP3013.1 25 MP3014.1 0 "
MP3013.2 500 MP3014.2 4.5 "
MP3013.3 1000 MP3014.3 9.999 "
MP3013.5 10 000 MP3014.5 9.999 "
MP3013.7 50 MP3014.7 0.5 "
MP3013.8 300 MP3014.8 1.5 "
MP3013.9 5000 MP3014.9 9.999 "
MP3013.10 0 MP3014.10 0 Not used
MP3013.11 0 MP3014.11 0 here
4-276 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 01.98
MP3013.0 to Characteristic kink points for analogue voltage output with M202
MP3013.11
MP3014.0 to Characteristic kink points for analogue voltage output with M202
MP3014.11
Entry: 0.000 to 9.999 [V]
Voltage varies with the time (time-voltage ramp): M203 V... TIME...
The TNC outputs the voltage as a function of the time. It increases or decreases the voltage linearly in
the time programmed behind TIME from the current voltage to the voltage value programmed behind
V...
Entry: Voltage V: 0 to 9.999 [V]
TIME: 0 to 1.999 [sec]
Duration: M203 V... TIME... is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204.
Voltage for a specific time (time pulse): M204 V... TIME...
The TNC outputs the voltage programmed behind V... as a pulse. The duration of the pulse is entered
with TIME....
Entry: Voltage V: 0 to 9.999 [V]
TIME: 0 to 1.999 [sec]
Duration: M204 V... TIME... is effective until a new voltage is output through M200 to M204.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 4-277
17.2 Graphic simulation without TOOL CALL
Graphic simulation is also available on machines that operate without tool definition (e.g. water jet and
laser cutters).
The tool radius for graphic simulation is defined in machine parameter MP7315. MP7316 defines the
depth of penetration of the simulated tool. The program sections to be displayed are marked with M
functions that are defined in machine parameters MP7317.0 and MP7317.1.
MP7315 Tool radius for graphic simulation without TOOL CALL

Entry: 0.0000 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP7316 Tool penetration depth

Entry: 0.0000 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP7317.0 M function at start of graphic display

Entry: 0 to 88
MP7317.1 M function to interrupt graphic display

Entry: 0 to 88
17.3 Program stop with M functions

When an M function is output in the "Program run, full sequence" and "Program run, single block"
modes, the program run is normally interrupted until the PLC reports that the M function was
executed.
This can be a disadvantage in certain applications, such as with laser cutting machines. For such
applications it is more desirable not to wait for the acknowledgement of the M function, but rather to
run the program continuously. This function can be selected through machine parameter MP7440, Bit
2. There must be no PLC positioning, datum shift, spindle orientation or limit switch during M function
output.
This function must not be used on milling machines or boring mills.
4-278 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 17 Special functions for laser cutting machines 01.98
5
Machine parameters Contents
1 What is a machine parameter? 5-2
1.1 User parameters 5-2
2 Input/output of machine parameters 5-3

2.1 Entry format 5-3
2.2 Activating the machine parameter settings 5-4
2.3 Changing the entry values 5-4
2.3.1 Manual input 5-4
2.3.2 Changing the entry values via PLC 5-5
3 List of machine parameters 5-6

3.1 Measuring systems and machines 5-6
3.2 Positioning 5-13
3.3 Operation with feed precontrol 5-17
3.4 Operation with servo lag 5-18
3.5 Digital speed control (only TNC 425) 5-20
3.6 Spindle 5-22
3.7 Integral PLC 5-25
3.8 Setting the data interface 5-26
3.9 Measuring with a 3D touch probe 5-29
3.9.1 Digitizing with TS 120 (only with digitizing option) 5-29
3.9.2 Digitizing with TM 110 (only with digitizing option) 5-30
3.9.3 Tool calibration with TT 110 5-31
3.10 Tapping 5-32
3.11 Display and operation 5-33
3.12 Machining and program run 5-41
3.13 Hardware 5-45
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5-1

1 What is a machine parameter?
A contouring control must have access to specific data (e.g., traverse distances, acceleration) before
it can execute its programmed instructions.
The machine tool builder provides these data in so-called machine parameters. In addition, machine
parameters can be used to activated certain functions, which are possible with HEIDENHAIN
contouring controls, but are required only on certain types of machines (e.g. automatic tool
changing).
The list of machine parameters is not numbered in sequence but is split into groups according to
function.
Machine parameters Functional group

0 to 999 Measuring systems and machines
1000 to 1399 Positioning
1400 to 1699 Operation with feed precontrol
1700 to 1999 Operation with servo lag
3000 to 3999 Spindle
4000 to 4999 Integral PLC
5000 to 5999 Setting the data interface
6000 to 6199 Measuring with a 3D touch probe
6200 to 6299 Digitizing with TS 120
7100 to 7199 Tapping
7200 to 7399 Display and programming
7400 to 7599 Machining and program run
7600 to 7699 Hardware
If there is more than one input value for a single function (e.g., a separate input for each axis), the
parameter number is provided with indices.
Example:
MP330 Grating period

MP330.0 Grating period for axis X
MP330.1 Grating period for axis Y
MP330.2 Grating period for axis Z
MP330.3 Grating period for axis 4
MP330.4 Grating period for axis 5
The indices are assigned to the corresponding axes according to a fixed pattern. For example, if an
entry is possible only in axes 4 and 5, then only the indices 3 and 4 will appear.
1.1 User parameters

The MOD function "User Parameters" permits the control operator to easily access and change
certain machine parameters. The machine tool builder can define up to 16 different machine
parameters as user parameters through MP7330 (see chapter "Machine Adjustment", section
"Display and operation").
5-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 What is a machine parameter? 01.98

2 Input/output of machine parameters
If the machine parameters have not yet been entered in a HEIDENHAIN contouring control (e.g.,
during commissioning), the TNC presents the list of machine parameters after the memory test.
Now the input values must be entered either by hand on the keyboard or through the data interface.
The data interface is activated by pressing the EXT key. It is pre-set to RS-232-C format and FE1
mode. This default setting can be changed through the MOD functions (see chapter "Data
Interface").
2.1 Entry format

A number is entered for each machine parameter. This value can be, for example, the acceleration
in mm/s2 of an individual axis, or the analogue voltage in volts. In the TNC 415B and TNC 425,
values are entered and stored to exactly 0.0001 mm (or ). With the TNC 407, TNC 415F and
TNC 425E you can enter to 0.0001 mm (or ), but the entry value is rounded to 0.001 mm (or ).
You can add a written comment to your entry by placing a semicolon ";" behind the numerical entry,
followed by your comment.
The input values can be entered in decimal, binary (%) or hexadecimal ($) format.
There are machine parameters with which individual functions are activated bit-coded. Binary entry
(%) is recommended for these machine parameters. The hexadecimal format ($) may be advisable
for other machine parameters.
Example:
Disabling file types with machine parameter MP7224.0.
Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs 0 = not disabled

1 = disabled
Bit 1 DIN/ISO programs
Bit 2 Tool tables
Bit 3 Datum tables
Bit 4 Pallet tables
Bit 5 Text files
The datum tables, pallet tables and text files are to be disabled.
Input value for MP7224.0 =
Binary %111 000

Hexadecimal $ 38
Decimal 56 (23 + 24 + 25)
With software types 243 05, 259 96, 243 07 and 243 02 only the decimal format is possible for the
machine parameters. The corresponding decimal input value must be computed for bit-coded
entries. You will find a "Power of 2" table in the chapter entitled "Appendix".
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Input/output of machine parameters 5-3

2.2 Activating the machine parameter settings
After the values for the machine have been entered, exit the machine parameter list by pressing the
END - key. Missing or incorrect entries result in error messages from the control that prompt you
to correct your entry.
The following errors are displayed:
Entry error Meaning
0 No MP number found
1 Invalid MP number
2 No separator ";" found
3 Entry value incorrect
4 MP doubly defined
5 MP not defined
6 MP can not be stored
If the control does not recognise any errors, it automatically exits the machine parameter editor and
is ready for operation.
If during commissioning no entries are made in the parameter list (MP NAME), the TNC will
generate a standard machine parameter list when the END key is pressed. In this list the TNC is
defined as a programming station with the HEIDENHAIN standard colours. All other machine
parameters assume the minimum value.
It is also possible to keep several machine parameter lists and load the desired list into the TNC
when needed. The desired list can be selected in the machine parameter editor by pressing the
PGM NAME key and the SELECT soft key. The parameter list which is active when you exit the
machine parameter editor goes into effect.
2.3 Changing the entry values

After a machine parameter list has been created, it can be changed either through the machine
parameter editor or directly through the PLC.
2.3.1 Manual input

Call the machine parameter editor through the MOD function "code number".
Enter the code number 95 148 to access the complete list of machine parameters.
Entering the code number 123 opens a partial list of machine parameters. These are the machine
parameters that may be changed by the control user (see User's Manual for TNC 407/TNC 415).
The machine parameters which can be changed with the code number 123 are marked in the
following list with CN 123.
Exit the machine parameter editor by pressing the END key.
5-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Input/output of machine parameters 01.98

2.3.2 Changing the entry values via PLC
The entry values of the active machine parameter list can be changed with the module 9031 (see
chapter "PLC Programming", section "PLC-modules"). These changes are then erased when the TNC
is switched off.
The machine parameters which can by changed through the PLC are marked in the following list
with PLC EDIT or PLC RUN. PLC EDIT means that the machine parameters can only be changed if
no program is being executed on the machine. PLC RUN means that the machine parameter can be
changed even while a program is being executed.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Input/output of machine parameters 5-5

3 List of machine parameters
3.1 Measuring systems and machines
Machine Function and input Change Reaction Page

parameter via
MP10 Active axes RESET 4-6
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP30 Checking the absolute position of the PLC RUN 4-8

distance-coded reference marks
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP31 Checking the amplitude of the measuring PLC RUN 4-10

system signals
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 5 S-axis
MP32 Checking the edge separation of the measuring PLC RUN 4-10
system signals
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 5 S-axis
5-6 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 01.98

parameter via
MP40 VDU display PLC RUN 4-14
Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP50 Controlled axes PLC RUN 4-89

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = not controlled

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = controlled
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th Axis
Bit 4 5th Axis
MP60 PLC auxiliary axes PLC RUN 4-38

Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = NC axis

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = PLC axis
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th Axis
Bit 4 5th Axis
MP110.0-4 Assignment of the measuring system inputs RESET 4-13

to the axes
Entry: 0 to 5
0 = measuring system input X1

MP110.0 X axis
MP110.1 Y axis
MP110.2 Z axis
MP110.3 4th axis
MP110.4 5th axis
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 List of machine parameters 5-7

parameter via
MP120.0-4 Assignment of the nominal value outputs RESET 4-14
Entry: 0 to 5
0 = output 1
1 = output 2
2 = output 3
3 = output 4
4 = output 5
5 = output S
MP120.0 X axis
MP120.1 Y axis
MP120.2 Z axis
MP120.3 4th axis
MP120.4 5th axis
MP210 Count direction of the measuring system signals RESET 4-8

Entry: %xxxxx

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP330.0-4 Signal period PLC EDIT REF 4-7
Entry: 0.100 to 1000.000 [m] or [ 1000

1
]
MP330.0 X axis
MP330.1 Y axis
MP330.2 Z axis
MP330.3 4th axis
MP330.4 5th axis
MP340.0-4 Interpolation factor of the EXE at X5, X6 4-8

(only TNC407)
Entry: 0,1, 5
0 = no measuring system on X5, X6 or

EXE without interpolation
1 = EXE without interpolation
5 = EXE with 5-fold interpolation
MP340.0 X axis
MP340.1 Y axis
MP340.2 Z axis
MP340.3 4th axis
MP340.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP410 Axis designation PLC EDIT RESET 4-13
Entry: 0 to 5
0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
MP410.3 4th axis

MP410.4 5th axis
MP420 Hirth coupling PLC RUN 4-212

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = No Hirth coupling
1 = Hirth coupling active
MP420.3 4th axis

MP420.4 5th axis
MP430 Prescribed step for Hirth coupling PLC RUN 4-212

Entry: 0.0000 to 30.0000 []
MP430.3 4th axis

MP430.4 5th axis
MP710 Backlash compensation PLC EDIT 4-23

Entry:
1.0000 to +1.0000 [mm] or []
MP710.0 X axis
MP710.1 Y axis
MP710.2 Z axis
MP710.3 4th axis
MP710.4 5th axis
MP711 Compensation for reversal spikes in circular PLC RUN 4-24

interpolation
Entry: 1.0000 to1.0000 [mm]
MP711.0 X axis
MP711.1 Y axis
MP711.2 Z axis
MP711.3 4th axis
MP711.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP712 Compensation per control loop cycle time PLC RUN 4-25
Entry: 0.000000 to 99.999999 [mm]
MP712.0 X axis
MP712.1 Y axis
MP712.2 Z axis
MP712.3 4th axis
MP712.4 5th axis
MP715 Compensation for reversal spikes in circular PLC RUN 4-25
interpolation (M105)
Entry: 1.0000 to +1.0000 [mm]
MP715.0 X axis
MP715.1 Y axis
MP715.2 Z axis
MP715.3 4th axis
MP715.4 5th axis
MP716 Compensation per control loop cycle time (M105) PLC RUN 4-25
Entry: 0.000000 to 99.999999 [mm]
MP716.0 X axis
MP716.1 Y axis
MP716.2 Z axis
MP716.3 4th axis
MP716.4 5th axis
MP720 Linear axis-error compensation PLC EDIT 4-26
Entry: 1.0000 to +1.0000 [mm/m]
MP720.0 X axis
MP720.1 Y axis
MP720.2 Z axis
MP720.3 4th axis
MP720.4 5th axis
MP730 Selection of linear or non-linear axis error PLC EDIT 4-26
compensation 4-31
Entry: %xxxxx
0= Linear axis error compensation

1= Non-linear axis error compensation

Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis

parameter via
MP810 Display mode for rotary axes and PLC auxiliary PLC EDIT 4-135
axes
Entry: 0.0000 to 9 999.9999[]
0 = Display +/-99 999.9999; software limit switch
active
0 = Modulo value display; software limit switch
not active
MP810.0 X axis
MP810.1 Y axis
MP810.2 Z axis
MP810.3 4th axis
MP810.4 5th axis
MP850 Synchronized axes PLC EDIT 4-49
Entry: 0 to 5
0 = Main axis
1 = Axis tracked to X axis
2 = Axis tracked to Y axis
3 = Axis tracked to Z axis
4 = Axis tracked to 4th axis
5 = Axis tracked to 5th axis
MP850.0 X axis
MP850.1 Y axis
MP850.2 Z axis
MP850.3 4th axis
MP850.4 5th axis
MP855 Synchronization monitoring PLC EDIT 4-50
Entry: 0 to 100.0000 [mm]
0 = Monitoring inactive
MP855.0 X axis
MP855.1 Y axis
MP855.2 Z axis
MP855.3 4th axis
MP855.4 5th axis
MP860 Datum for synchronization control PLC EDIT 4-50
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Datum at position upon switch-on
1 = Datum at reference marks (machine datum)
MP860.0 X axis
MP860.1 Y axis
MP860.2 Z axis
MP860.3 4th axis
MP860.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP910 Traverse range 1 PLC EDIT 4-16
Default setting after switch-on;
activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 0
Default setting after switch-on;

parameter via
MP950 Datum point for positioning blocks with M92 PLC RUN 4-127
Entry:
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or []
Values referenced to machine datum
MP950.0 X axis
MP950.1 Y axis
MP950.2 Z axis
MP950.3 4th axis
MP950.4 5th axis
MP951 Simulated toolchange position for TOOL CALL with PLC RUN 4-149
block scan:
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or []
Values referenced to machine datum
MP951.0 X axis
MP951.1 Y axis
MP951.2 Z axis
MP951.3 4th axis
MP951.4 5th axis
MP960 Machine datum PLC EDIT REF 4-127

Entry:
99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or []
MP960.0 X axis
MP960.1 Y axis
MP960.2 Z axis
MP960.3 4th axis
MP960.4 5th axis
3.2 Positioning
parameter via
MP1010 Rapid traverse PLC EDIT 4-70
MP1010.0 X axis
MP1010.1 Y axis
MP1010.2 Z axis
MP1010.3 4th axis
MP1010.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP1020 Manual feed PLC EDIT 4-70
MP1020.0 X axis
MP1020.1 Y axis
MP1020.2 Z axis
MP1020.3 4th axis
MP1020.4 5th axis
MP1030 Positioning window PLC EDIT 4-87

Entry: 0.0001 to 2.0000 [mm] or []
MP1030.0 X axis
MP1030.1 Y axis
MP1030.2 Z axis
MP1030.3 4th axis
MP1030.4 5th axis
MP1040 Polarity of the nominal value voltage for the 4-8

positive direction of traverse
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = positive

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = negative
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid traverse PLC EDIT 4-70

Entry: 1.000 to 9.000 [V]
MP1050.0 X axis
MP1050.1 Y axis
MP1050.2 Z axis
MP1050.3 4th axis
MP1050.4 5th axis
MP1060 Acceleration PLC EDIT 4-68

Entry: 0.001 to 5.000 [m/s2]
MP1060.0 X axis
MP1060.1 Y axis
MP1060.2 Z axis
MP1060.3 4th axis
MP1060.4 5th axis
MP1070 Radial acceleration PLC RUN 4-80

Entry: 0.001 to 5.000 [m/s2]

parameter via
MP1080 Integral factor PLC RUN 4-78
Entry: 0 to 65 535
MP1080.0 integral factor X axis

MP1080.1 integral factor Y axis
MP1080.2 integral factor Z axis
MP1080.3 integral factor 4th axis
MP1080.4 integral factor 5th axis
MP1110 Standstill monitoring PLC EDIT 4-87
Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 [mm]
MP1110.0 X axis
MP1110.1 Y axis
MP1110.2 Z axis
MP1110.3 4th axis
MP1110.4 5th axis
MP1140 Movement monitoring PLC RUN 4-86
Entry: 0.030 to 10.000 [V]
MP1140.0 X axis
MP1140.1 Y axis
MP1140.2 Z axis
MP1140.3 4th axis
MP1140.4 5th axis
MP1150 Delay time before switching off the residual PLC RUN 4-85
voltage on error message "Position error"
Entry: 0 to 65 535 [s]
MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment PLC RUN 4-77
Entry: 0 to 65 536 [s]
0 = no automatic adjustment
MP1320 Direction for traversing the reference marks PLC EDIT 4-62
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = positive

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = negative
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP1330 Feed rate for traversing the reference marks PLC RUN 4-62
MP1330.0 X axis
MP1330.1 Y axis
MP1330.2 Z axis
MP1330.3 4th axis
MP1330.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP1331 Feed rate for leaving the reference end-position PLC RUN 4-62
(only for rotary encoders MP1350 = 2)
MP1331.0 X axis
MP1331.1 Y axis
MP1331.2 Z axis
MP1331.3 4th axis
MP1331.4 5th axis
MP1340 Sequence for traversing reference marks PLC RUN REF 4-62
Entry: 0 = no evaluation of reference mark
1 = X axis
2 = Y axis
3 = Z axis
4 = 4th axis
5 = 5th axis
MP1340.0 1st axis
MP1340.1 2nd axis
MP1340.2 3rd axis
MP1340.3 4th axis
MP1340.4 5th axis
MP1350 Type of reference mark approach PLC EDIT REF 4-53
Entry:
0 = measuring system with distance-coded
reference marks
1 = measuring system with one reference mark
2 = special sequence (linear measurement by
rotary encoder)
3 = measuring system with distance-coded
reference marks
MP1350.0 X axis
MP1350.1 Y axis
MP1350.2 Z axis
MP1350.3 4th axis
MP1350.4 5th axis
MP1390 Feed precontrol in the "Positioning with manual PLC EDIT 4-75
data input", "Program run, single block" and
"Program run, full sequence" modes
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = operation with feed precontrol
1 = operation with lag
MP1391 Feed precontrol in the "Manual" and "Handwheel" PLC EDIT 4-33
modes 4-75
Entry: %xxxxx
0 = operation with lag
1 = operation with feed precontrol
Bit 0 X axis Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 1 Y axis Bit 4 5th axis
Bit 2 Z axis

3.3 Operation with feed precontrol
parameter via
MP1410 Position monitoring in operation with feed PLC EDIT 4-85
precontrol (cancellable)
Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 [mm]
MP1410.0 X axis
MP1410.1 Y axis
MP1410.2 Z axis
MP1410.3 4th axis
MP1410.4 5th axis
MP1420 Position monitoring in operation with feed PLC EDIT 4-85

precontrol (EMERGENCY STOP)
Entry: 0.0010 to 30.0000 [mm]
MP1420.0 X axis
MP1420.1 Y axis
MP1420.2 Z axis
MP1420.3 4th axis
MP1420.4 5th axis
MP1510 kv factor for feed precontrol PLC RUN 4-76

m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1510.0 X axis
MP1510.1 Y axis
MP1510.2 Z axis
MP1510.3 4th axis
MP1510.4 5th axis
MP1511 Factor for stiction compensation PLC RUN 4-33

Entry: 0 to 16 777 215
MP1511.0 X axis
MP1511.1 Y axis
MP1511.2 Z axis
MP1511.3 4th axis
MP1511.4 5th axis
MP1512 Limit of extent of stiction compensation PLC RUN 4-33

Entry: 0 to 16 777 215 [counting steps]
MP1512.0 X axis
MP1512.1 Y axis
MP1512.2 Z axis
MP1512.3 4th axis
MP1512.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP1513 Feed-rate limit for stiction compensation PLC RUN 4-33
MP1513.0 X axis
MP1513.1 Y axis
MP1513.2 Z axis
MP1513.3 4th axis
MP1513.4 5th axis
MP1515 kv factor for feed precontrol activated (M105) PLC RUN 4-76
m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1510.0 X axis
MP1510.1 Y axis
MP1510.2 Z axis
MP1510.3 4th axis
MP1510.4 5th axis
MP1520 Transient response PLC EDIT 4-76
Entry: 0.100 to 10.000
MP1525 Maximum velocity for checking the positioning PLC EDIT 4-87
window
Entry: 0.100 to 10.000 [mm/min]
Recommended value: 0.5 [mm/min]
MP1530 Damping factor for transient response PLC EDIT 4-76

Only with software types 243 05, 259 96, 243 07,
243 02.
Entry: 0.010 to 0.999
3.4 Operation with servo lag

parameter via
MP1710 Position monitoring for operation with lag PLC EDIT 4-84
(cancellable)
Entry: 0.0000 to 300.0000 [mm]
MP1710.0 X axis
MP1710.1 Y axis
MP1710.2 Z axis
MP1710.3 4th axis
MP1710.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP1720 Position monitoring for operation with lag PLC EDIT 4-84
(EMERGENCY STOP)
Entry: 0.0000 to 300.0000 [mm]
MP1720.0 X axis
MP1720.1 Y axis
MP1720.2 Z axis
MP1720.3 4th axis
MP1720.4 5th axis
MP1810 kv factor for operation with lag PLC EDIT 4-70

m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1810.0 X axis
MP1810.1 Y axis
MP1810.2 Z axis
MP1810.3 4th axis
MP1810.4 5th axis
MP1815 kv factor for operation with lag activated by M105 PLC EDIT 4-70
m/min
Entry: 0.100 to 20.000 [ ]
mm
MP1815.0 X axis
MP1815.1 Y axis
MP1815.2 Z axis
MP1815.3 4th axis
MP1815.4 5th axis
MP1820 Multiplication factor for kv PLC EDIT 4-72

Entry: 0.001 to 1.000
MP1820.0 X axis
MP1820.1 Y axis
MP1820.2 Z axis
MP1820.3 4th axis
MP1820.4 5th axis
MP1830 Kink point PLC EDIT 4-72

Entry: 0.000 to 100.000 [%]
MP1830.0 X axis
MP1830.1 Y axis
MP1830.2 Z axis
MP1830.3 4th axis
MP1830.4 5th axis

3.5 Digital speed control (only TNC 425)
parameter via
MP1900 Select axes with digital speed controller 11-8
Entry: %xxxxx
MP1910 Speed controller monitoring 11-9
Entry: 1 to 16 777 215
MP1910.0 X axis
MP1910.1 Y axis
MP1910.2 Z axis
MP1910.3 4th axis
MP1910.4 5th axis
MP1920 Integral component for speed controller 11-9

Entry: 0 to 65 535
MP1920.0 X axis
MP1920.1 Y axis
MP1920.2 Z axis
MP1920.3 4th axis
MP1920.4 5th axis
MP1925 Limiting the integral component for speed 11-9

controller
Entry: 0.000 to 65.535 [s]
Suggested value: 0.1 to 2 s
MP1925.0 X axis
MP1925.1 Y axis
MP1925.2 Z axis
MP1925.3 4th axis
MP1925.4 5th axis
MP1940 Proportional component for speed controller 11-9
Entry: 0 to 65 535
MP1940.0 X axis
MP1940.1 Y axis
MP1940.2 Z axis
MP1940.3 4th axis
MP1940.4 5th axis
MP1945 Factor for acceleration precontrol of the rotational 11-9

speed controller
Entry: 0.000 to 9.999 [V/(m/s2)]
MP1945.0 X axis
MP1945.1 Y axis
MP1945.2 Z axis
MP1945.3 4th axis
MP1945.4 5th axis

parameter via
MP1950 Polarity for torque signal 11-10
Entry: %xxxxx
0 = positive
1 = negative
MP1951 Select measuring system for position control 11-10

Entry: %xxxxx
0 = linear measuring system for position control
1 = motor rotary encoder for position control
MP1955 Ratio of grating period LS to ROD 11-10

Entry: 0.1 to 100
MP1955.0 X axis
MP1955.1 Y axis
MP1955.2 Z axis
MP1955.3 4th axis
MP1955.4 5th axis
MP1960 Compensation for reversal spikes 11-11

Entry: 1.0000 to +1.0000
MP1960.0 X axis
MP1960.1 Y axis
MP1960.2 Z axis
MP1960.3 4th axis
MP1960.4 5th axis
MP1970 Motion monitor for position and speed 11-11

Entry: 0 to 300.0000 [mm]
0 = no monitor
MP1970.0 X axis
MP1970.1 Y axis
MP1970.2 Z axis
MP1970.3 4th axis
MP1970.4 5th axis
MP1980 Delayed shutdown of speed controller in 11-11

EMERGENCY STOP
Entry: 0 to 1.9999 [sec]

3.6 Spindle
parameter via
MP3010 Spindle-speed output, Spindle orientation PLC EDIT RESET 4-94
Entry: 0 to 8
0 = No spindle-speed output
1 = BCD-coded output of the spindle speed,
only if the spindle speed changes
2 = BCD-coded output of the spindle-speed
at every TOOL CALL
3 = Analogue output of the spindle speed, but
gear-change signal only if the gear range
changes
4 = Analogue output of the spindle speed and
gear-change signal at every TOOL CALL
5 = Analogue output of the spindle speed and
no gear-change signal
6 = As for entry value 3, but with controlled
spindle for orientation
MP3011 Function of analogue output S if MP3010 < 3 4-275

Entry: 0 to 2
0 = No special function
1 = Voltage proportional to current contour feed
rate (dependent on MP3012)
2 = Voltage as defined by PLC module 9130
3 = Voltage as defined via M function (M200 to
M204)
MP3012 Feed-rate for output of an analogue voltage of 10 V 4-207

(MP3011 = 1)
MP3013.0 to Characteristic curve kink points for analogue 4-277

MP3013.11 voltage output with M202
MP3014.0 to Characteristic curve kink points for analogue 4-277

MP3014.11 voltage output with M202
Entry: 0.000 to 9.999 [V]
MP3020 Definition of the spindle speed range PLC EDIT 4-104

Entry: 0 to 99 999

parameter via
MP3030 Axis-halt on TOOL CALL with only a spindle PLC EDIT 4-102
speed output
Entry: 0 or 1
1 = No axis-halt on TOOL CALL

0 = Axis-halt on TOOL CALL
MP3120 Zero spindle speed permitted PLC EDIT 4-97
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = 0 rpm permitted
1 = 0 rpm not permitted
MP3130 Polarity of the S-analogue voltage PLC RUN 4-95
Entry: 0 to 3
0 = M03 positive voltage

M04 negative voltage
1 = M03 negative voltage

M04 positive voltage
2 = M03 and M04 positive voltage
3 = M03 and M04 negative voltage
MP3140 Count direction of the measuring system signals PLC RUN 4-96
for the spindle
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = positive count direction with M03
1 = negative count direction with M03
MP3210.0-7 S-analogue voltage for gear range PLC RUN 4-97
Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3240.1 Minimum S-analogue voltage output PLC RUN 4-97
Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3240.2 Jog-voltage for gear change PLC RUN 4-101
Entry: 0 to 9.999 [V]
MP3310.0 Limit with S-override (maximum) PLC RUN 4-99
Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP3310.1 Limit with S-override (minimum) PLC RUN 4-99
Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP3410.0 Spindle ramp gradient for M03, M04, M05 PLC RUN 4-97
MP3410.1 Spindle ramp gradient for spindle orientation PLC RUN 4-106
MP3410.2 Spindle ramp gradient for tapping PLC RUN 4-114
MP3410.3 Spindle ramp gradient for rigid tapping PLC RUN 4-118

parameter via
MP3420 Positioning window for spindle PLC RUN 4-108
Entry: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
1 increment is equivalent to about 0.088 degree
360 degrees
=
1024 lines quadruple evaluation
MP3430 Reference mark deviation from the desired PLC RUN 4-108
position (Spindle-pre-set)
Entry: 0 to 360 []
MP3440.0-7 kv factor for spindle-orientation PLC RUN 4-108
1000/min
Entry: 0.1 to 10 [ ]

MP3510.0-7 Spindle speed for each gear range PLC EDIT 4-97
Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3515.0-7 Maximum spindle speed in each gear range PLC EDIT 4-97
Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3520.0 Spindle-speed activated by marker M2501 PLC RUN 4-108
Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]
MP3520.1 Spindle-speed for spindle-orientation PLC RUN 4-106
Entry: 0 to 99 999.999 [rpm]

3.7 Integral PLC
parameter via
MP4010 PLC-program from RAM or from EPROM RESET 7-28
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = EPROM-operation
1 = RAM-operation
MP4060.0-4 Path dependent lubrication PLC RUN 4-19
Entry: 0 to 65 535
[units of 65 536 m]
MP 4070 Compensation value per PLC cycle for axis error 4-32
compensation with lag tracking
Entry: 0.0001 to 0.005 [mm]
MP4110.0 Value for Timer T0 to T47 PLC RUN 7-25
to Entry: 0 to 65 535 [PLC-cycles]
MP4110.47 (TNC 415: 20 ms; TNC 407: 24 ms)
MP4120.0 Pre-set value for counters C0 to C31 PLC RUN 7-26
to Entry: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
MP4120. 31
MP4130 Fast PLC input to suppress the monitoring PLC EDIT 4-83
functions
Entry: 0 to 255 [No. of the PLC input]
MP4131 Activation condition for fast PLC input from PLC EDIT 4-83
MP4130
Entry: 0 or 1
MP4210.0 Set a number in the PLC (D768 to D956) PLC EDIT 7-21
to Entry: 99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999 [mm] or []
MP4210.47
MP4220.0-4 Machine parameter with multiple function PLC EDIT
Entry: 10 to 30 000
Feed rate for returning to the contour 4-148
To set a number in the PLC in the word range
W960 to W968 7-23
MP4230.0 Set a number in the PLC (Module 9032) 7-23
to Entry: 99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
MP4230.31
MP4231.0 Set a number in the PLC (Module 9032) 7-23
to Entry: 99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
MP4231.31
MP4310.0-6 Set a number in the PLC ( W976 to W988) PLC EDIT 7-22
Entry: 0 to 65 535 7-178
MP4410 Activation of analogue inputs PLC RUN 4-206
Entry: %xx
Bit 0 = 0 no analogue inputs on 1st extension

1 analogue input on 1st extension
Bit 1 = 0 no analogue inputs on 2nd extension
1 analogue input on 2nd extension

3.8 Setting the data interface
parameter via
MP5000 Inhibit data interface PLC RUN 8-21
Entry: 0 to 2
0 = Not inhibited
1 = RS-232-C/V.24 inhibited
2 = RS-422/V.11 inhibited
MP5020.0 Operating mode EXT 1 PLC RUN 8-24
MP5020.1 Operating mode EXT 2 CN 123
MP5020.2 Operating mode EXT 3 (PLC)
Entry: %xxxxxxx
Bit 0 7 or 8 Data bits

0 = 7 Data bits
1 = 8 Data bits
Bit 1 Block-Check-Character
0 = BCC-character optional
1 = BCC-character not Control character
Bit 2 Transmission stop through RTS
0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 3 Transmission stop through DC3
0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 4 Character parity
0 = even
1 = odd
Bit 5 Character parity
0 = not required
1 = required
Bit 6/7 Stop bits
Bit 6 Bit 7
1 1/2 Stop-Bits Bit 0 Bit 0
2 Stop-Bits Bit 1 Bit 0
1 Stop-Bit Bit 0 Bit 1
1 Stop-Bit Bit 1 Bit 1
MP5030.0 Operating mode EXT 1 PLC RUN 8-24

MP5030.1 Operating mode EXT 2 CN 123
MP5030.2 Operating mode EXT 3 (PLC)
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = "Standard data transmission"

1 = "Blockwise transfer"

parameter via
MP5040 Data transfer rate in operating mode EXT3 PLC RUN 8-47
(data transfer via PLC)
Entry: 0 to 9
0 = 110 baud 5= 2 400 baud

1 = 150 baud 6= 4 800 baud
2 = 300 baud 7= 9 600 baud
3 = 600 baud 8= 19 200 baud
4 = 1200 baud 9= 38 400 baud
MP5200 Control character for beginning of text (STX) PLC RUN 8-25
MP5200.0 in operating mode EXT 1 CN 123
MP5200.1 in operating mode EXT 2
MP5200.2 in operating mode EXT 3 (PLC)
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5201 Control character for end of text (ETX) PLC RUN 8-25
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5202 ASCII character for file type for data entry PLC RUN 8-26
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5203 ASCII character for input identification (E) PLC RUN 8-26
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5204 ASCII character for file type for data output PLC RUN 8-26
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5205 ASCII character for output identification (A) PLC RUN 8-26
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5206 ASCII characters for start of heading (SOH) PLC RUN 8-25
Entry: 0 to 127

parameter via
MP5207 ASCII characters for end of transmission block PLC RUN 8-25
(ETB) CN 123
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5208 ASCII characters for acknowledgement (ACK) PLC RUN 8-25
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5209 ASCII negative acknowledgement characters(NAK) PLC RUN 8-25
Entry: 0 to 127
MP5210 Control characters for end of transmission (EOT) PLC RUN 8-25
Entry: 0 to 127

3.9 Measuring with a 3D touch probe
parameter via
MP6010 Selection of the touch probe system PLC EDIT 4-177
Entry: 0 or 1 CN 123
0 = TS 120
1 = TS 511
3.9.1 Digitizing with TS 120 (only with digitizing option)

parameter via
MP6120 Probing feed rate (triggering touch probe) PLC RUN 4-177
Entry: 10 to 3000 [mm/min] CN 123
MP6130 Maximum measuring range PLC RUN 4-177
Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm] CN 123
MP6140 Safety-clearance over measurement point PLC RUN 4-177
Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm] CN 123
MP6150 Rapid traverse for probe cycle (triggering touch PLC RUN 4-177
probe) CN 123
MP6160 Spindle orientation for 180 rotation PLC RUN 4-178
Entry: 1 to 88 CN 123
1 = Spindle orientation directly through NC
0 = Function not active
1 to 88 = Number of the M function for spindle
orientation by PLC
MP6200 Selection of triggering or measuring touch probe 4-177
system (only with "Digitizing with TM 110" option)
Entry: 0 or 1
1 = Measuring touch probe(e.g.. TM 110)
MP6210 Number of oscillations per second in normal PLC RUN 4-181
direction CN 123
Entry: 0 to 65 535 [Hz]
MP6220 Traverse for lubricating the probe axis at end of line 4-182
Entry: 0.000 to 99 999.999 [mm]
MP6221 Time after which the probe axis must be lubricated 4-182
Entry: 0 to 65 535 [min]
MP6230 Feed rate in normal direction PLC RUN 4-181
Entry: 0 to 1000 [mm/min] CN 123
MP6240 Maximum deflection of stylus PLC RUN 4-181
Entry: 0 to 10.000 [mm] CN 123
MP6260 Output of M90 on NC blocks of digitized data PLC RUN 4-181
0 = no output of M90
1 = output of M90 in every NC block

parameter via
MP6270 Rounding of decimal places PLC RUN 4-181
0 = Output in 0.001 mm increments [1 m]
1 = Output in 0.01 mm increments [10 m]
2 = Output in 0.0001 mm increments [0.1 m]
3.9.2 Digitizing with TM 110 (only with digitizing option)

parameter via
MP6310 Stylus deflection depth (measuring touch probe) 4-190
Entry: 0.1000 to 2.0000 [mm]
MP6320 Counting direction of the measuring system signals 4-190
(measuring touch probe)
Entry: %xxx
Bit 0 = X axis 0 = Positive
Bit 1 = Y axis 1 = Negative
Bit 2 = Z axis
MP6321 Measuring the centre offset while calibrating the 4-178
TM110
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Calibrate and measure centre offset

1 = Calibrate without measuring centre offset
MP6322 Assignment of touch probe axes to the machine 4-191
axes
Entry: 0 to 2
0= Touch probe axis X
1= Touch probe axis Y
2= Touch probe axis Z
MP6322.0 Machine axis X

MP6322.1 Machine axis Y
MP6322.2 Machine axis Z
MP6330 Maximum stylus deflection (measuring touch 4-191
probe)
Entry: 0.1 to 4.000 [mm]
MP6350 Feed rate for positioning to the MIN point and 4-191
contour approach
(Measuring touch probe)
MP6360 Probing feed rate (measuring touch probe) 4-177
Entry: 10 to 3000 [mm/min] 4-191
MP6361 Rapid traverse in scanning cycle (measuring touch 4-178
probe) 4-191

parameter via
MP6362 Feed rate reduction if stylus of the TM 110 is 4-191
deflected away from its path
Entry: 0 or 1
0= Feed rate reduction not active
1= Feed rate reduction active
MP6390 Target window for contour-line end point 4-191
Entry: 0.1000 to 4.0000 [mm]
3.9.3 Tool calibration with TT 110

parameter via
MP6500 Tool Calibration with TT 110 4-194
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Cycles for tool calibration inhibited
1 = Cycles for tool calibration not inhibited
MP6505 Probing direction for tool measurement 4-194
Entry: 0 to 3
0 = Positive probing direction in the angle
reference axis (0axis)
1 = Positive probing direction in the +90-axis
2 = Negative probing direction in the angle
reference axis (0 axis)
3 = Negative probing direction in the +90-axis
MP6507 Calculation of the probing feed rate 4-194
Entry: 0 to 2
0 = Calculation of the probing feed rate with
constant tolerance
1 = Calculation of the probing feed rate with
variable tolerance
2 = Constant probing feed rate
MP6510 Max. permissible measuring error for tool 4-194
measurement with rotating tool
Entry: 0.002 to 0.999 [mm]
MP6520 Probing feed rate for tool measurement with non- 4-194
rotating tool
MP6530 Distance from tool lower edge to probe contract 4-194
upper edge for tool radius measurement
Entry: 0.001 to 99.9999 [mm]
MP6531 Diameter or edge length of TT 110 probe contact 4-194
Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6540 Safety zone around the probe contact TT 110 for 4-194
pre-positioning
Entry: 0.001 to 99 999.9999 [mm]

parameter via
MP6550 Rapid traverse in the probing cycle for TT 110 4-194
MP6560 M function for spindle orientation for measuring 4-194
individual teeth
Entry: 0 to 88
1 = Spindle orientation directly via NC
0 = Function inactive (error message)
1 to 88 = Number of the M function for spindle
orientation via PLC
MP6570 Max. permissible surface cutting speed at the tool 4-194
edge
Entry: 1.0000 to 120.0000 [m/min]
MP6580 Coordinates of the TT 110 stylus centre referenced 4-194
to the machine datum
Entry: 99 999.9999 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP6580.0 Axis X
MP6580.1 Axis Y
MP6580.2 Axis Z
3.10 Tapping

parameter via
MP7110.0 Minimum feed-override when tapping PLC RUN 4-114
Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP7110.1 Maximum feed-override when tapping PLC RUN 4-114
Entry: 0 to 150 [%]
MP7120.0 Dwell-time for change of direction of spindle PLC RUN 4-114
rotation in "tapping" cycle
Entry: 0 to 65.535 [s]
MP7120.1 Advanced switch time of spindle for "tapping" cycle PLC RUN 4-116
with coded output
Entry: 0 to 65.535 [s]

MP7120.2 Spindle run-on time after reaching total hole depth PLC RUN 4-114
Entry: 0 to 65.535 [s]
MP7130 Spindle run-in characteristic PLC EDIT 4-118
Entry: 0.001 to 10 [/min]
(matching MP1520)
MP7140 Transient response of spindle on acceleration PLC EDIT 4-118
Entry: 0.001 to 1
(matching MP1530)

parameter via
MP7150 Positioning window for tool axis PLC EDIT 4-118
Entry: 0.0001 to 2 [mm]

MP7160 Spindle orientation with Cycle 17 4-118
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = spindle orientation before execution of
Cycle 17
1 = no spindle orientation before execution of
Cycle 17
3.11 Display and operation

parameter via
MP7210 Programming station CN 123 RESET 4-153
Entry: 0, 1, 2
0 = Control and programming
1 = Programming station, "PLC active"
2 = Programming station "PLC inactive"
MP7212 "POWER INTERRUPTED" PLC RUN 4-155
0 = "POWER INTERRUPTED" message must be

acknowledged with CE key
1 = no "POWER INTERRUPTED" message
MP7220 Block-number increment size for ISO programs PLC RUN 4-151
MP7222 Filename length PLC RUN 4-150
0 = 8 characters
1 = 12 characters
2 = 16 characters
MP7224.0 Disable file type PLC RUN RESET 4-150
Entry: %xxx xxxxx CN 123
0 = Not disabled
1 = Disabled
Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs
Bit 2 Tool tables
Bit 3 Datum tables
Bit 4 Pallet tables
Bit 5 Text files
Bit 6 Help files
Bit 7 Point tables

parameter via
MP7224.1 Protect file type PLC RUN RESET 4-150
Entry: %xxxxxxx CN 123
0 = Not protected
1 = Protected
Bit 0 HEIDENHAIN programs
Bit 2 Tool tables
Bit 3 Datum tables
Bit 4 Pallet tables
Bit 5 Text files
Bit 6 Help files
Bit 7 Point tables
MP7226.0 Size of pallet tables PLC RUN 4-151

Entry: 0 to 255 [lines] CN 123
MP7226.1 Size of datum tables PLC RUN 4-151
Entry: 0 to 255 [lines] CN 123
MP7228 Storage requirement in drip feed mode 8-20
Entry: 0 to 1024 bytes
MP7228.0 Minimum storage

MP7228.1 Maximum storage
MP7230 Change dialogue language PLC RUN 4-153

0 = First dialogue language

1 = Basic language English
MP7240 PGM entry inhibit at (PGM NAME) = PLC RUN 9-5
(OEM cycle number in EPROM) CN 123
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Inhibited
1 = Not inhibited

parameter via
MP7245.0 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN cycles 1 to 15 PLC RUN 4-144
Entry: 0 to 65 535
$0 to $FFFF
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
Bit 1 Cycle 1
Bit 2 Cycle 2
Bit 3 Cycle 3
Bit 4 Cycle 4
Bit 5 Cycle 5
Bit 6 Cycle 6
Bit 7 Cycle 7
Bit 8 Cycle 8
Bit 9 Cycle 9
Bit 10 Cycle 10
Bit 11 Cycle 11
Bit 12 Cycle 12
Bit 13 Cycle 13
Bit 14 Cycle 14
Bit 15 Cycle 15
MP7245.1 Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles 16 to 30 PLC RUN 4-145

Entry: 0 to 65 535
$0 to $FFFF
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
Bit 0 Cycle 16
Bit 1 Cycle 17
Bit 2 Cycle 18
Bit 3 Cycle 19
Bit 4 Cycle 20
Bit 5 Cycle 21
Bit 6 Cycle 22
Bit 7 Cycle 23
Bit 8 Cycle 24
Bit 9 Cycle 25
Bit 10 Cycle 26
Bit 11 Cycle 27
Bit 12 Cycle 28
Bit 13 Cycle 29
Bit 14 Cycle 30
Bit 15 Cycle 31
MP7246 Disable paraxial positioning blocks PLC RUN 4-155

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = paraxial positioning blocks enabled
1 = paraxial positioning blocks disabled

parameter via
MP7250 Difference between Q-parameter numbers for PLC RUN 9-5
DLG-CALL-block and DLG-DEF-block in OEM cycle
Entry: 0 to 50
MP7251 Number of global Q parameters transferred from PLC RUN 9-5
OEM cycle to calling program
Entry: 0 to 100
MP7260 Number of tools in the tool table CN 123 RESET 4-225
Entry: 0 to 254
MP7261 Number of pockets in tool carousel CN 123 RESET 4-225
Entry: 0 to 254
MP7264 Number of reserved pockets for special tools RESET 4-226
Entry: 0 to 3
MP7266 Items in tool table CN 123 4-225
Entry: 0 to 99
0 = No display
1 to 99 = Position in tool table
MP7266.0 Tool name (NAME)

MP7266.1 Tool length (L)
MP7266.2 Tool radius (R)
MP7266.3 Tool radius 2 (R2)
MP7266.4 Oversize tool length (DL)
MP7266.5 Oversize tool radius (DR)
MP7266.6 Oversize tool radius 2 (DR2)
MP7266.7 Tool locked? (TL)
MP7266.8 Replacement tool (RT)
MP7266.9 TIME 1
MP7266.10 TIME 2
MP7266.11 CURRENT TIME
MP7266.12 Commentary on the tool (DOC)
MP7266.13 No. of tool cutting edges (CUT)
MP7266.14 Wear tolerance for tool length
(LTOL)
MP7266.15 Wear tolerance for tool radius
(RTOL)
MP7266.16 Cutting direction of the tool
(DIRECT)
MP7266.18 Tool length offset (TT:L-OFFS)
MP7266.19 Tool radius offset (TT:R-OFFS)
MP7266.20 Breakage tolerance for tool
length (LBREAK)
MP7266.21 Breakage tolerance for tool
radius (RBREAK)

parameter via
MP7267 Items in pocket table CN 123 4-226
Entry: 0 to 99
0 = No display
1 to 99 = Position in pocket table
MP7267.0 Tool number (T)

MP7267.1 Special tool (ST)
MP7267.2 Fixed pocket (F)
MP7267.3 Locked pocket (L)
MP7270 Display of the feed rates in manual operating PLC RUN 4-138
modes (Manual operation, Electronic handwheel) CN 123
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Display of the axis feed-rate only when an

axis-direction key is pressed (axis-specific
feed from MP1020.X)
1 = Display of the axis feed-rate before operating
an axis-direction key (smallest value
from MP1020.X for all axes)
MP7280 Decimal sign PLC RUN 4-154

0 = Decimal comma
1 = Decimal point
MP7285 Calculation of the tool length in the position display PLC RUN 4-134
of the tool axis CN 123
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = tool length ignored
1 = tool length taken into account
MP7290 Position display step PLC RUN 4-134
0 = 0.1 mm or 0.1
1 = 0.05 mm or 0.05
2 = 0.01 mm or 0.01
3 = 0.005 mm or 0.005
4 = 0.001 mm or 0.001
5 = 0.0005 mm or 0.0005 TNC 415 B only
6 = 0.0001 mm or 0.0001 TNC 415 B only
MP7290.0 = X axis
MP 7290.1 = Y axis
MP 7290.2 = Z axis
MP 7290.3 = 4th axis
MP 7290.4 = 5th axis

parameter via
MP7295 Inhibit datum setting PLC RUN 4-127
Entry: %xxxxx CN 123
Bit 0 X axis0 = not disabled

Bit 1 Y axis1 = disabled
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP7296 Set datum with axis keys PLC RUN 4-128
0 = datum can be set with axis keys and soft key
1 = datum can be set with soft key only
MP7300 Cancel Status-display and Q-parameters PLC RUN 4-140
0 = Cancel status display and Q parameters and

tool data when program is selected
1 = Cancel status display, Q parameters and tool
data with M02, M30, END PGM and when
program is selected
2 = Cancel status display and tool data when
program is selected
3 = Cancel status display and tool data when
program is selected and with M02, M30, END
PGM
4 = Cancel status display and Q parameters when
program is selected
5 = Cancel status display and Q parameters when
program is selected and with M02, M30, END
PGM
6 = Cancel status display when program is
selected
7 = Cancel status display when program is
selected and with M02, M30, END PGM

parameter via
MP7310 Graphics-display PLC RUN 4-133
Entry: %xxxx CN 123
Bit 0 Changeover of
3-plane display
0 = European preferred
1 = American preferred
Bit 1 Rotation of the coordinate system
in the machining plane + 90
0 = no rotation
1 = coordinate system rotated by +90
Bit 2 BLK form after datum shift
0 = BLK form will not shift
1 = BLK form will shift
Bit 3 Show cursor position in 3-plane display
0 = not shown
1 = cursor position shown
MP7315 Tool radius for graphic simulation without PLC RUN 4-272
TOOL CALL CN 123
Entry: 0.0000 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP7316 Tool penetration depth PLC RUN 4-272

CN 123
Entry: 0.0000 to 99 999.9999 [mm]
MP7317.0 M function to start graphic display PLC RUN 4-272

MP7317.1 M function to interrupt graphic display PLC RUN 4-272

MP7330.0 Determination of the User-parameters PLC RUN 4-151
to Entry: 0 to 9999.00 (Number of desired machine
MP7330.15 parameter)
MP7340.0 Dialogues for User-parameters PLC RUN 4-151
to Entry: 0 to 4095 (EPROM address line number of
MP7340.15 the dialogue)
Colour for Standard colour adjustment PLC RUN 4-130
MP7350 Window frame $030200C

MP7351 Error messages $03F3F0F
MP 7352 Operating-mode display Machine
MP 7352.0 Background $0000000
MP 7352.1 Text for operating mode $0342008
MP 7352.2 Dialogue $03F3828
MP7353 Operating-mode display Programming

parameter via
Colour for Standard colour adjustment PLC RUN 4-130
MP 7354 Program-text display Machine

MP 7354.0 Background $0080400
MP 7354.1 General program-text $038240C
MP 7354.2 Current block $038341C
MP 7354.3 Background of active window $00C0800
MP7355 Program-text-display Programming
MP7355.3 Background of active window $00C0800
MP7356 Status- and PLC-window
MP7356.0 Background $00C0800
MP7356.1 Axis positions in the status-display $03F2C18
MP7356.2 Status-display, except axis positions $03F280C
MP7357 Soft key-display Machine
MP7358 Soft- key display Programming
MP7360 Graphics: 3D-depiction
MP7360.1 Surface $0203038
MP7360.2 Front face $00C1820
MP7360.3 Text-display in graphics window $03F3F3F
MP7360.4 Side face $0102028
MP7361 Graphics: view in three planes (and oscilloscope)
MP7361.1 Plan (Grating) $0203038
MP7361.2 Front and side view (not selected channel)
$0203038
MP7361.3 Axis cross and text in graphics-display (cursor, data,
screen window) $03F3F3F
MP7361.4 Cursor (selected channel) $03F0000
MP7362 Additional status-display in graphics window
MP7362.0 Background graphics window $0080400
MP7362.1 Background status display $00C0800
MP7362.2 Status symbols $038240C
MP7362.3 Status values $03F2C18
MP7363 FK-graphics
MP7363.1 Resolved contour $03F3F3F
MP7363.2 Subprograms and frame for zoom $0003F00
MP7363.3 Alternative solutions $0003F00
MP7363.4 Unresolved contour $03F0000

3.12 Machining and program run
parameter via
MP7410 Scaling factor cycle in two or three axes PLC RUN 4-147
0 = Cycle Scaling factor operates in all three
principal axes
1 = Cycle Scaling factor only operates in the
machining plane
MP7411 Tool data in touch probe block PLC RUN 4-178

0= With the touch probe block the current tool
data are overwritten with the calibrated data
of the probe system.
1= The current tool data are retained even with
a touch probe block.
MP7420 Cycles for milling pockets with free-programmed PLC RUN 4-147
contours CN 123
Entry: %xxxx
Bit 0 Slot-Milling direction

0= Anti-clockwise slot-milling of the
pocket contours, clockwise for
islands
1= Clockwise slot-milling of the pocket
contours, anti clockwise for islands
Bit 1 Sequence for clearing out and slot milling

0= First slot-milling, then clear out
pocket
1= First clear out pocket, then
slot-milling
Bit 2 Merge programmed contours

0= Contours merged only if the tool
centre paths intersect
1= Contours merged if the
programmed contours overlap
Bit 3 Clear out and slot-milling to pocket depth,

or for each peck
0= Clearing out and slot-milling
performed in one operation for all
pecks
1= For each peck, first perform slot-
milling and then feed clearing out
(depending on Bit 1) before next
peck

parameter via
Bit 4 Position after machining
0= Return to position that was
approached before cycle was called
1= TNC moves tool to clearance height
MP7430 Overlap-factor for pocket milling PLC RUN 4-145
Entry: 0.1 to 1.414 CN 123
MP7431 Arc end-point tolerance PLC RUN 4-155

Entry: 0.0001 to 0.016 [mm] CN 123
MP7440 Output of M-functions PLC RUN 4-162

Entry: %xxxxx CN 123
Bit 0 Program-halt on M06

0= Program halt on M06
1= No program-halt on M06
Bit 1 modal cycle-call M89

0= normal code-transfer of M89
at beginning of block
1= modal cycle-call M89 at end of
block
Bit 2 Program-halt on M-functions

0= Program-halt until acknowledgement
of M-function
1= No program-halt (does not wait for
acknowledgement)
Bit 3 Select Kv factors with M105/M106

0 = function not active
1 = function active
Bit 4 Reduced feed-rate in tool axis with M103

0 = function not active
1 = function active

parameter via
MP7450 Calculate the tool change position from MP951 in PLC RUN 4-149
block scan
Entry: %xxxxx
Bit 0 Axis X 0 = Do not calculate

Bit 1 Axis Y 1 = Calculate
Bit 2 Axis Z
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP7460 Constant feed rate in corners PLC RUN 4-81

Entry: 0.0001 to 179.9999 []
MP7475 Datum in datum table PLC RUN 4-151

0 = Datum point is workpiece datum

1 = Datum point is machine datum
MP7480.0 Output of tool number or pocket number with PLC RUN 4-229
TOOL CALL block
Entry: 0 to 6
0 = No output
1 = Output of tool number only when tool number
changes (W262)
2 = Output of tool number with every TOOL
CALL block (W262)
3 = Output of pocket number (W262) and tool
number (W264) only when tool number
changes
number (W264) with every TOOL CALL block
changes. Pocket table does not change.
number (W264) with every TOOL CALL
block. Pocket table does not change.

parameter via
MP7480.1 Output of tool number or pocket number with PLC RUN 4-229
TOOL DEF block
Entry: 0 to 4
0 = No output
1 = Output of tool number only when tool number
changes (W262)
2 = Output of tool number with every TOOL DEF
block (W262)
changes
number (W264) with every TOOL DEF block
MP7490 Number of traverse ranges PLC RUN 4-17

Entry: 0 to 3
0 = 1 traverse range, 3 datum points

1 = 3 traverse ranges, 3 datum points
2 = 1 traverse range, 1 datum point
3 = 3 traverse ranges, 1 datum point
MP7500 MP7500 "Tilt working plane" function PLC EDIT 4-42

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = inactive
1 = active
MP75x0 MP75x0 Transformed axis PLC EDIT 4-42

Entry: %xxxxxx
Entry 0 means "End of transformation sequence"
Bit 0 X axis
Bit 1 Y axis
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 A axis
Bit 4 B axis
Bit 5 C axis

parameter via
MP75x1 Supplementary identifier for transformation PLC EDIT 4-42
Entry: %xx
Bit 0 Swivel axis

0 = swivel head
1 = tilting table
Bit 1 Dimension in MP75x2

0 = incremental step (for swivel
head)
1 = absolute related to machine
datum (for tilting table)
MP75x2 Dimension for transformation PLC EDIT 4-42

Entry: 99,999.9999 to +99,999.9999
Entry 0 means "free rotating axis"
3.13 Hardware
parameter via
MP7620 Feed rate and spindle override PLC RUN 4-99
Entry: %xxxx
Bit 0 Feed rate override if rapid traverse button

is pressed in "program run"
0 = Override not active
1 = Override active
Bit 2 Feed rate override if rapid traverse
buttons and machine direction buttons are
pressed in "manual" operating mode
0 = Override not active
1 = Override active
Bit 3 Spindle override in 1% increments or
according to a non-linear characteristic
curve
0 = 1% increments
1 = non-linear characteristic curve

parameter via
MP7640 Machine with handwheel PLC RUN 4-197
0 = no handwheel
1 = HR 330 (all keys evaluated by NC)
2 = HR 130 or HR 330
3 = HR 330 (+, and "rapid traverse" keys
evaluated by PLC)
4 = HR 332 (all keys evaluated by PLC)
5 = up to three HR 150 via HRA 110
6 = HR 410
MP7641 Entry of handwheel interpolation factor PLC RUN 4-197

0 = entry at TNC control panel

1 = entry via PLC module 9036
MP7645.0-7 Initializing parameters for handwheel PLC RUN 4-197

MP7645.0 4-200
MP7645.1 4-202
MP7645.2 4-202
MP7645.3-7 at present without function 4-202
MP7650 Count direction for handwheel PLC RUN 4-197

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Negative count direction

1 = Positive count direction
MP7660 Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel PLC RUN 4-197

Entry: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
MP7670 Minimum interpolation factor for handwheel PLC RUN 4-197

Entry: 0 to 10
MP7670.1 Interpolation factor for medium speed (HR 410
only)
MP7670.2 Interpolation factor for high speed (HR 410 only)
MP7671 Manual feed rate in "Handwheel" operating mode 4-201
with HR 410
Entry: 0 to 1000 [% to MP 1020]
MP7671.0 Low speed
MP7671.1 Medium speed
MP7671.2 High speed

parameter via
MP7680 Machine parameter with multiple function PLC RUN 4-155
Entry: %x xxx xxx
Bit 0 Memory function for axis-direction keys

0 = not stored
1 = stored
Bit 1 Re-approaching the contour
0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 2 block scan (mid-program startup)
0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 3 Interruption of block scan with STOP or
M06
0 = interruption
1 = no interruption
Bit 4 Include programmed dwell time during
block scan
0 = include dwell time
1 = do not include dwell time
Bit 5 Start calculation with block scan
0 = start from cursor position
1 = start from beginning of program
Bit 6 Tool length for blocks with surface normal
vector
0= Without DR2 from the tool table 4-227
1= With DR2 from the tool table
MP7690 Memory test at switch-on 4-154

Entry: %xx
Bit 0 RAM-test
0 = Memory test at switch-on
1 = No memory test at switch-on
Bit 1 EPROM-test
0 = Memory test at switch-on
1 = No memory test at switch-on

61 List of markers
The markers listed in italics have been retained to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355. It is
recommended, however, that these functions be activated through the new word functions.
Marker Function Set Reset Page

M2000 Axis enable X NC NC 4-89
M2001 Axis enable Y NC NC 4-89
M2002 Axis enable Z NC NC 4-89
M2003 Axis enable 4 NC NC 4-89
M2004 S-analogue voltage not on a ramp NC NC 4-97
M2005 S-analogue voltage = 0 V NC NC 4-97
M2007 Spindle in position NC NC 4-108
M2008 X axis in position NC NC 4-90
M2009 Y axis in position NC NC 4-90
M2010 Z axis in position NC NC 4-90
M2011 4th axis in position NC NC 4-90
M2012 Lubrication pulse X axis, since value of MP4060.0 NC NC 4-20
was exceeded
M2013 Lubrication pulse Y axis, since value of MP4060.1 NC NC 4-20
was exceeded
M2014 Lubrication pulse Z axis, since value of MP4060.2 NC NC 4-20
was exceeded
M2015 Lubrication pulse 4th axis, since value of MP4060.3 NC NC 4-20
was exceeded
M2016 Axis enable 5 NC PLC 4-89
M2017 Axis 5 in position NC NC 4-90
M2018 Soft key Manual operation pressed NC NC 4-148
M2019 Restore position is active NC NC 4-148
M2022 Touch probe system not ready (ready-signal missing on NC NC 4-178
connector X12 or signals from TM are faulty)
M2023 Stylus deflected before start of probing cycle NC NC 4-178
M2025 Stylus deflected (probe operation has been performed) NC PLC 4-178
M2026 Probe operation ended or interrupted NC NC 4-178
M2027 Battery voltage too low (battery-warning on connector X12); NC NC 4-178
is evaluated only during the probe operation
M2029 Lubrication pulse 5 axis, since value of MP4060.4 NC NC 4-20
was exceeded
M2032 T-Code 1st bit (lsb) NC NC 7-177
M2033 T-Code 2nd bit NC NC 7-177
M2034 T-Code 3rd bit NC NC 7-155
M2035 T-Code 4th bit NC NC 7-155
M2039 T-Code 8th bit (msb) NC NC 7-155
M2041 Basic language English is selected NC NC 4-153
M2042 Analogue output of the spindle speed NC NC 4-95
M2043 Gear code change signal NC NC 4-101
M2044 S-code change signal NC NC 4-104
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 61 List of markers 6-1

M2045 Strobe signal for M-function NC NC 4-159
M2046 Strobe signal T code (P code) with TOOL CALL NC NC 4-229
M2047 Strobe signal 2nd T code (2nd P code) with TOOL DEF NC NC 4-229
M2048 Tapping cycle called NC NC 4-114
M2051 Operating mode: Manual NC NC 7-177
M2052 Operating mode: Electronic handwheel NC NC 7-177
M2053 Operating mode: Positioning with manual data input NC NC 7-177
M2054 Operating mode: Program run, single block NC NC 7-177
M2055 Operating mode: Program run, full sequence NC NC 7-177
M2057 Operating mode: Traversing the reference marks NC NC 7-177
M2059 Block scan (mid-program startup) is active NC; NC; 4-148
PLC PLC
M2061 END-PGM, or M02 or M30 has been executed NC NC 4-154
M2064 S-Code 1st bit (lsb) 7-177
M2065 S-Code 2nd bit 7-177
M2066 S-Code 3rd bit 7-177
M2067 S-Code 4th bit 7-177
M2071 S-Code 8th bit (msb) 7-177
M2072 M-Code 1st bit (lsb) 7-177
M2073 M-Code 2nd bit 7-177
M2074 M-Code 3rd bit 7-177
M2075 M-Code 4th bit 7-177
M2079 M-Code 8th bit (msb) 7-177
M2080 Minimum rpm from MP3020 1st bit (lsb) 7-177
M2081 Minimum rpm from MP3020 2nd bit 7-177
M2082 Minimum rpm from MP3020 3rd bit 7-177
M2083 Minimum rpm from MP3020 4th bit 7-177
M2087 Minimum rpm from MP3020 8th bit (msb) 7-177
M2088 Increment from MP3020 1st bit (lsb) 7-177
M2089 Increment from MP3020 2nd bit 7-177
M2090 Increment from MP3020 3rd bit 7-177
M2091 Increment from MP3020 4th bit (msb) 7-177
M2092 Illegal spindle speed NC NC 4-102
M2093 Another T code (P code) follows with TOOL CALL NC NC 4-231
M2094 Maximum tool life elapsed (Time 1 in the tool table) PLC NC;PLC 4-227
M2095 Tapping rigid tapping active NC NC 4-118
M2096 X Key last pressed NC NC 4-135
M2097 Y Key last pressed NC NC 4-135
M2098 Z key last pressed NC NC 4-135
M2099 Key IV last pressed NC NC 4-135
M2100 X-axis is tool axis NC NC 4-14
6-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 61 List of markers 01.98

M2101 Y-axis is tool axis NC NC 4-14
M2102 Z-axis is tool axis NC NC 4-14
M2103 4-axis is tool axis NC NC 4-14
M2104 G-Code S-analogue 1st bit (lsb) 7-178
M2105 G-Code S-analogue 2nd bit 7-178
M2106 G-Code S-analogue 3rd bit (msb) 7-178
M2112 T-Number (P-Number) 1st decade (lsb) 7-178
M2113 T-Number (P-Number) 1st decade 7-178
M2114 T-Number (P-Number) 1st decade 7-178
M2115 T-Number (P-Number) 1st decade (msb) 7-178
M2116 T-Number (P-Number) 2nd decade (lsb) 7-178
M2117 T-Number (P-Number) 2nd decade 7-178
M2118 T-Number (P-Number) 2nd decade 7-178
M2119 T-Number (P-Number) 2nd decade (msb) 7-178
M2127 Spindle in motion NC NC 4-109
4-177
4-198
M2128 X axis in motion NC NC 4-91
M2129 Y axis in motion NC NC 4-91
M2130 Z axis in motion NC NC 4-91
M2131 axis 4 in motion NC NC 4-91
M2132 axis 5 in motion NC NC 4-91
M2136 reference marks X axis not yet passed NC NC 4-63
M2137 reference marks Y axis not yet passed NC NC 4-63
M2138 reference marks Z axis not yet passed NC NC 4-63
M2139 reference marks axis 4 not yet passed NC NC 4-63
M2140 reference marks axis 5 not yet passed NC NC 4-63
M2148 Key V last pressed NC NC 4-135
M2149 Transfer with FN19 active NC NC 7-19
M2150 Dimensional unit for transfer with FN19 NC NC 7-19
0 = mm; 1 = inch
M2151 Rapid traverse is output NC NC 4-138
M2160 X axis direction of traverse 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-9
M2161 Y axis direction of traverse 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-9
M2162 Z axis direction of traverse 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-9
M2163 Axis 4 direction of traverse 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-9
M2164 Axis 5 direction of traverse 0 = positive 1 = negative NC NC 4-9
M2176 Code-Operating mode (lsb) 7-178
M2177 Code-Operating mode 7-178
M2178 Code-Operating mode 7-178
M2179 Code-Operating mode (msb) 7-178
M2180 1st PLC scan after switch-on NC NC
M2182 Inhibited key was operated NC PLC 4-165
M2183 Program interruption NC NC 4-140
("Control operational" display flashes)
M2184 Control operational NC NC 4-140
("Control operational" display goes on or flashes)
M2185 1st PLC scan after interruption of the PLC program NC NC
M2186 Code number 84159 entered 7-178
M2187 Soft key function not executed NC NC 4-165

M2190 Non-flashing error message is displayed NC NC 4-142
M2191 "External EMERGENCY OFF" message is displayed NC NC 4-120
M2192 Markers changeable NC NC 7-178
to via MP4310.0, MP 4310.1 and MP 4310.2
M2239
M2240 OEM cycle 68 inhibit NC PLC 9-5
M2259 OEM cycle 87 inhibit PLC PLC 9-5
M2390 Cycle for tool calibration started NC NC 4-199
M2391 0 = Tool measurement NC NC 4-199
1 = Tool inspection
M2392 Wear tolerance exceeded NC NC 4-199
M2400 Tool number 0 programmed NC NC 4-229
M2401 Active tool with pocket number NC NC 4-232
(MP7260/MP7261)
M2402 Active tool without pocket number NC NC 4-232
(MP7260/MP7261)
M2403 Active tool = special tool NC NC 4232
M2404 TOOL CALL programmed or by end of tool life NC NC 4-232

M2408 Cycle 13 is executed NC PLC 4-108
M2448 NC start (edge evaluation) PLC PLC 4-174
M2449 Rapid traverse PLC PLC 4-174
M2450 Memory function for axis-direction keys PLC PLC 4-174
M2451 Feed-release PLC PLC 4-90
M2452 Activate PLC-positioning axis X PLC NC 7-178
M2453 Activate PLC-positioning axis Y PLC NC 7-178
M2454 Activate PLC-positioning axis Z PLC NC 7-178
M2455 Activate PLC-positioning axis 4 PLC NC 7-178
M2456 Manual traverse X+ PLC PLC 7-174
M2457 Manual traverse X+ PLC PLC 7-174
M2458 Manual traverse Y+ PLC PLC 4-174
M2459 Manual traverse Y- PLC PLC 4-174
M2460 Manual traverse Z+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2461 Manual traverse Z- PLC PLC 4-175
M2462 Manual traverse 4+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2463 Manual traverse 4- PLC PLC 4-175
M2464 Complement NC-start PLC PLC 4-174
M2465 Complement rapid traverse PLC PLC 4-174
M2466 Complement memory function for axis-direction keys PLC PLC 4-174
M2467 Complement feed-release PLC PLC 4-90
M2468 Complement PLC positioning axis X NC PLC 7-178
M2469 Complement PLC positioning axis Y NC PLC 7-178
M2470 Complement PLC positioning axis Z NC PLC 7-178
M2471 Complement PLC positioning axis 4 NC PLC 7-178
M2472 Complement manual traverse X+ PLC PLC 4-174
M2473 Complement manual traverse X- PLC PLC 4-174
M2474 Complement manual traverse Y+ PLC PLC 4-174
M2475 Complement manual traverse Y- PLC PLC 4-174
M2476 Complement manual traverse Z+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2477 Complement manual traverse Z- PLC PLC 4-175
M2478 Complement manual traverse 4+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2479 Complement manual traverse 4- PLC PLC 4-175
M2480 Acknowledgement Gear change completed PLC PLC 4-101
M2481 S-code acknowledgement PLC PLC 4-104
M2482 Acknowledgement of M-function PLC PLC 4-159
M2483 Acknowledgement T code (P code) with TOOL CALL PLC PLC 4-229
M2484 Acknowledgement T code (P code) with TOOL DEF PLC PLC 4-229
M2485 Status-display and sign of S-analogue for M03 PLC PLC 4-96
M2486 Status-display and sign of S-analogue for M04 PLC PLC 4-96
M2487 Status-display for M05 and spindle stop PLC PLC 4-96
M2488 NC-stop (0 signifies stop) PLC PLC 4-174
M2489 Change direction of spindle rotation PLC PLC 4-96
M2490 Spindle rotation left (for gear change) PLC PLC 4-101
M2491 Spindle rotation right (for gear change) PLC PLC 4-101
M2492 Await open control loop X axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2493 Await open control loop Y axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2494 Await open control loop Z axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2495 Await open control loop axis 4 PLC PLC 4-92

M2496 Enable marker for the decoded M-code transfer in Markers PLC PLC 4-159
M1900 to M1999
M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC-inputs PLC PLC 7-27
Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1659
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1859
M2498 Release jog positioning PLC PLC 4-209
M2499 Open spindle control loop PLC PLC 4-106
4-118
M2500 Await open control loop axis 5 PLC PLC 4-92
M2501 Activates spindle-speed MP3520.0 and direction of rotation PLC PLC 4-109
from marker M2656
M2502 NC-STOP in all operating modes if stylus is deflected PLC PLC 4-178
M2503 Enable-marker for probe functions NC PLC 4-178
M2505 Actual nominal value transfer axis 5 PLC PLC 4-92
M2506 Reference end-position for axis 5 PLC PLC 4-63
M2507 Open control loop axis 5 PLC PLC 4-92
M2508 Status display M07, M08, M09 and MK PLC PLC 4-139
M2512 Jog positioning axis X+ PLC PLC 4-203
M2513 Jog positioning axis X PLC PLC 4-209
M2514 Jog positioning axis Y+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2515 Jog positioning axis Y PLC PLC 4-209
M2516 Jog positioning axis Z+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2517 Jog positioning axis Z PLC PLC 4-209
M2518 Jog positioning axis 4+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2519 Jog positioning axis 4 PLC PLC 4-209
M2520 Jog positioning axis 5+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2521 Jog positioning axis 5 PLC PLC 4-209
M2522 Activate PLC-positioning axis 5 PLC NC 7-178
M2524 Manual traverse 5+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2525 Manual traverse 5 PLC PLC 4-175
M2527 Activate spindle orientation PLC NC 7-178
M2528 Complement Jog positioning axis X+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2529 Complement Jog positioning axis X PLC PLC 4-209
M2530 Complement Jog positioning Axis Y+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2531 Complement Jog positioning Axis Y PLC PLC 4-209
M2532 Complement Jog positioning Axis Z+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2533 Complement Jog positioning Axis Z PLC PLC 4-209
M2534 Complement Jog positioning Axis 4+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2535 Complement Jog positioning Axis 4 PLC PLC 4-209
M2536 Complement Jog positioning Axis 5+ PLC PLC 4-209
M2537 Complement Jog positioning Axis 5 PLC PLC 4-209
M2538 Complement PLC-Positioning Axis 5 NC PLC 7-178
M2540 Complement manual traverse 5+ PLC PLC 4-175
M2541 Complement manual traverse 5 PLC PLC 4-175
M2543 Complement Spindle-Orientation NC PLC 7-178
M2544 Open control loop X axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2545 Open control loop Y axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2546 Open control loop Z axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2547 Open control loop axis 4 PLC PLC 4-92
M2548 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication X axis PLC PLC 4-20

M2549 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Y axis PLC PLC 4-20
M2550 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication Z axis PLC PLC 4-20
M2551 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication of axis 4 PLC PLC 4-20
M2552 Actual nominal value transfer X axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2553 Actual nominal value transfer Y axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2554 Actual nominal value transfer Z axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2555 Actual nominal value transfer 4 axis PLC PLC 4-92
M2556 Reference end-position for X axis PLC PLC 4-63
M2557 Reference end-position for Y axis PLC PLC 4-63
M2558 Reference end-position for Z axis PLC PLC 4-63
M2559 Reference end-position for axis 4 PLC PLC 4-63
M2560 BCD numerical values for PLC positioning, tool number, spindle PLC PLC 7-178
to orientation and Q parameters
M2589
M2597 Tool number: output mode PLC PLC 7-178
0 = binary 1 = BCD
M2600 Tool change sequence for changing from special tools to PLC PLC 4-232
normal tool
M2601 Return special tool to its original pocket in spite of flexible PLC PLC 4-226
pocket coding 4-232
M2608 Status-display M03, M04, M05 inverse and S-analogue output PLC PLC 4-139
= 0V
M2609 Status-display M08, M09 inverse PLC PLC 4-139
M2610 T-character for tool status is displayed inverted PLC PLC
M2611 Confirm the transfer with FN19 PLC PLC 7-19
M2612 Do not update pocket number in pocket table PLC PLC 4-148
4-232
M2613 Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis 5 PLC NC 4-20
M2614 Read-in inhibited (after acknowledgement of the M/S/T/Q PLC PLC
strobes the subsequent NC blocks are not executed)
M2615 Repeat reference mark evaluation for spindle-orientation PLC NC 4-108
M2624 Limit switch X+ NC NC 4-18
M2625 Limit switch X NC NC 4-18
M2626 Limit switch Y+ NC NC 4-18
M2627 Limit switch Y NC NC 4-18
M2628 Limit switch Z+ NC NC 4-18
M2629 Limit switch Z NC NC 4-18
M2630 Limit switch 4+ NC NC 4-18
M2631 Limit switch 4 NC NC 4-18
M2632 Limit switch 5+ NC NC 4-18
M2633 Limit switch 5 NC NC 4-18
M2656 Spindle-orientation from stop PLC PLC 4-106
M2657 Status display M07, M08, M09 and MK PLC PLC 4-139
M2688 No monitoring X axis PLC PLC 4-83
M2689 No monitoring Y axis PLC PLC 4-83
M2690 No monitoring Z axis PLC PLC 4-83
M2691 No monitoring axis 4 PLC PLC 4-83
M2692 No monitoring axis 5 PLC PLC 4-83

M2704 Activate PLC-positioning X axis PLC NC;PLC 4-35
M2705 Activate PLC-positioning Y axis PLC NC;PLC 4-35
M2706 Activate PLC-positioning Z axis PLC NC;PLC 4-35
M2707 Activate PLC-positioning axis 4 PLC NC;PLC 4-35
M2708 Activate PLC-positioning axis 5 PLC NC;PLC 4-35
M2712 Activate PLC-positioning for spindle-orientation PLC NC 4-106
M2713 Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the PLC NC 4-155
Q-Parameter defined in W516
M2716 Strobe marker for datum correction PLC NC 4-221
M2717 Geometry of the tool from W264 PLC NC 4-228
M2719 Deactivate the TNC 355 mode PLC PLC 7-175
M2720 Activate/deactivate function Free rotation of rotary axis PLC NC 4-136
M2800 Key code PLC PLC 7-178
to
M2808
M2809 Activate the numerical value transfer from PLC to NC PLC PLC 7-178
M2813 Activate the key from W516 PLC NC 4-165
M2814 Activation of gear range and rpm via PLC PLC NC 4-101
M2815 Flashing PLC error message PLC PLC 4-142
M2816 Select range PLC PLC 4-17
M2817 Select range PLC PLC 4-17
M2818 Q-Number (msb) PLC PLC 7-178
M2819 Activate datum correction PLC NC 7-178
M2824 Activation of the selected range (M2816/M2817) PLC NC 4-18
M2826 Suppress handwheel pulses PLC PLC 4-197
M2827 Suppress EMERGENCY STOP, open the control loop, stop NC PLC PLC 4-92
4-120
M2830 Stop NC and open the control loop PLC PLC 4-92
M2832 Key code of the activated inhibited key NC NC 7-178
to
M2839
M2854 Inhibit keys PLC PLC 4-166
to 4-167
M2875
M2876 Inhibit alpha keyboard PLC PLC 4-165
M2877 Inhibit soft keys below the screen PLC PLC 4-165
M2878 Inhibit switch-over keys next to screen PLC PLC 4-165
M2880 Inhibit keys PLC PLC 4-146
to
M2923
M2924 Error messages PLC NC 4-142
to PLC
M3023
M3168 Overflow during multiplication NC PLC 7-68
7-85
7-123
M3169 Division by 0 NC PLC 7-69
7-85
7-123

M3170 MODULO wrongly executed NC PLC 7-70
7-86
7-123
M3171 Error status for PLC modules NC PLC 7-123
NC 7-136ff.
M3172 Reserved for errors, which the PLC programmer would like to PLC PLC 7-123
trap
M3200 Values from MP4310.3 to MP4310.6 7-179
to
M3263

2 List of words
Words Function Page

W256 G-Code for S analogue 4-101
W258 S-Code 4-104
W260 Code for M-Function 4-159
W262 Pocket number with MP7480 = 3 or 4 4-247
Tool number with MP7480 = 1 or 2
W264 Tool number with MP7480 = 3 or 4 4-247
W270 Help file line number 4-156
1 = No help file selected
2 = No valid numerical value
0 to 9999 = Line number
W272 Operating mode 4-63
1 = Manual operation 4-164
2 = Electronic handwheel
7 = Pass over reference point
W274 Key-code for the operated, inhibited key. Signal via M2182 4-164
D276 Value of the code-number most recently entered by MOD 4-153
D280 1st number value from FN19 7-19
D284 2nd number value from FN19 7-19
W320 Nominal spindle speed 4-95
W322 Actual spindle speed 4-95
D356 Programmed spindle speed 4-95
D360 Programmed feed rate (NC PLC)
D388 Current feed rate
W464 Analogue input 0 2nd I/O extension 4-206
W472 Thermistor input 0 2nd I/O extension 4-206
W492 %-factor spindle override (NC I/O) 4-99
W494 %-factor feed rate override (NC I/O) 4-138
W496 Analogue input 0 1st I/O extension 4-206
W504 Thermistor input 0 1st I/O extension 4-206
6-10 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 List of words 01.98

Words Function Page
W516 Word with multiple function 4-154
Key code for simulating TNC keys
activated by M2813 4-164
Number of the Q-parameter to be overwritten (Q100 to Q107 = 0 to 7)
B518 0 = Free-rotation function cancelled 4-136
8 = Free-rotation function for axis 4
16 = Free-rotation function for axis 5
B519 Definition of the direction of traverse 4-136
B520 Axis specific feed rate release 4-90
Bit 0 +1 Feed rate enable in the X axis

+0 No feed rate enable X in the axis
Bit 1 +2 Feed rate enable in the Y axis
+0 No feed rate enable in the Y axis
Bit 2 +4 Feed rate enable in the Z axis
+0 No feed rate enable in the Z axis
Bit 3 +8 Feed rate enable in the 4th axis
+0 No feed rate enable in the 4th axis
Bit 4 +16 Feed rate enable in the 5th axis
+0 No feed rate enable in the 5th axis
W522 Monitoring functions suppressed if PLC 4-83
input from MP4130 is activated
D528 Value to be transferred to the Q parameter 4-154
Axis X datum correction 4-222
Position of X axis [1/10 000 mm] 4-35
D532 Axis Y datum correction
Position Y axis
D536 Axis Z datum correction
Position Z axis
D540 Axis IV datum correction
Position 4 axis
D544 Axis V datum correction
Position 5 axis
W560 Feed X axis [mm/min] 4-35
W562 Feed Y axis 4-35
W564 Feed Z axis 4-35
W566 Feed axis 4 4-35
W568 Feed axis 5 4-35
W576 Lag tracking error compensation 4-32
to (compensation speed from MP4070)
W584 1
Input range: +32 767 to 32 768 [ m]
10
W576 Axis X
W578 Axis Y
W580 Axis Z
W582 Axis 4
W584 Axis 5
D592 Nominal position for spindle orientation (Strobe M2712) 4-106
D596 Rapid traverse from PLC 4-70
W754 %-factor of feed-override "feed rotation" (0 to 300 %) 4-136
D756 Set spindle-speed from the PLC; programmed spindle speed 4-101
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 List of words 6-11

Words Function Page
W764 %-factor spindle override (PLC NC) 4-99
W766 %-factor - feed rate override (PLC NC) 4-138
D768 Value from MP4210.0 to MP4210.47 7-21
to 7-22
D956
W960 Value from MP4220.0 to MP4220.4 7-22
to
W968
W976 Value from MP 4310.0 to MP4310.6 7-22
to
W988
W1008 S-code for minimum rpm 4-104
6-12 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 List of words 01.98

7PLC Programming Contents
1 PLC functions Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.-177-6

1.1 Select PLC operation 7-6
1.2 PLC Main menu 7-7
1.3 File management 7-8
1.4 Text Editor 7-10
1.5 File output via data interface 7-10
1.6 Test functions for the PLC program 7-11
1.6.1 TRACE functions 7-11
1.6.2 Logic diagram 7-11
1.6.3 TABLE function 7-12
1.6.4 COMPILE function 7-12
2 Program creation 7-16

2.1 Program structure 7-16
2.1.1 Command 7-16
2.1.2 Module technique 7-17
2.2 Address allocation 7-18
2.2.1 Operand directory 7-18
2.2.2 Addressing the memory 7-18
2.3 Data transfer NC/PLC 7-19
2.3.1 Number transfer 7-19
2.3.2 General data transfer (Strobes) 7-23
2.4 Timers and counters 7-24
2.4.1 Timers 7-24
2.4.2 Counters 7-26
2.5 Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs 7-27
2.6 EPROM creation 7-28
2.7 Error messages 7-30
3 Commands 7-36
3.1 Load and Assign Commands 7-36
3.1.1 LOAD (L) 7-36
3.1.2 LOAD NOT (LN) 7-38
3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S-COMPLEMENT (L) 7-40
3.1.4 LOAD BYTE (LB) 7-41
3.1.5 LOAD WORD (LW) 7-41
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD) 7-41
3.1.7 ASSIGN (=) 7-43
3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE (B=) 7-45
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD (W=) 7-45
3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) 7-45
3.1.11 ASSIGN NOT (=N) 7-46
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7-1

3.1.12 ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -) 7-46
3.2 Set-Commands 7-48
3.2.1 SET (S) 7-48
3.2.2 RESET (R) 7-49
3.2.3 SET NOT (SN) 7-50
3.2.4 RESET NOT (RN) 7-51
3.3 Logic Gates 7-53
3.3.1 AND (A) 7-53
3.3.2 AND NOT (AN) 7-55
3.3.3 OR (O) 7-57
3.3.4 OR NOT (ON) 7-59
3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO) 7-61
3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON) 7-63
3.4 Arithmetic Commands 7 7-66
3.4.1 ADDITION (+) 7-66
3.4.2 SUBTRACTION () 7-67
3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION (x) 7-68
3.4.4 DIVISION (/) 7-69
3.4.5 REMAINDER (MOD) 7-70
3.4.6 INCREMENT (INC) 7-71
3.4.7 DECREMENT (DEC) 7-71
3.5 Comparisons 7-73
3.5.1 EQUAL TO (==) 7-73
3.5.2 LESS THAN (<) 7-74
3.5.3 GREATER THAN (>) 7-75
3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=) 7-76
3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=) 7-77
3.5.6 UNEQUAL (<>) 7-78
3.6 Parentheses with logical gating 7-80
3.6.1 AND [ ] (A[ ]) 7-80
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ]) 7-80
3.6.3 OR [ ] (O[ ]) 7-80
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ]) 7-80
3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ]) 7-81
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ]) 7-81
3.7 Parentheses with arithmetic Commands 7-85
3.7.1 ADD [ ] (+[ ]) 7-85
3.7.2 SUBTRACT [ ] ([ ]) 7-85
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ]) 7-85
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) 7-85
3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ]) 7-86
3.8 Parentheses with comparison Commands 7-89
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ]) 7-89
7-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 01.98

3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ]) 7-89
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ]) 7-89
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ]) 7-89
3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ]) 7-90
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ]) 7-90
3.9 Shift Commands 7-93
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT (<<) 7-93
3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT (>>) 7-94
3.10 Bit Commands 7-96
3.10.1 BIT SET (BS) 7-96
3.10.2 BIT RESET (BC) 7-97
3.10.3 BIT TEST (BT) 7-98
3.11 Stack Operations 7-100
3.11.1 Load Data onto the Data Stack (PS) 7-100
3.11.2 Acquire Data from the Data Stack (PL) 7-101
3.11.3 Load Logic Accumulator onto the Data Stack (PSL) 7-101
3.11.4 Load Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack (PSW) 7-102
3.11.5 Acquire Logic Accumulator from the Data Stack (PLL) 7-102
3.11.6 Acquire Word Accumulator from the Data Stack (PLW) 7-102
3.12 Jump Commands 7-105
3.12.1 Unconditional Jump (JP) 7-105
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT) 7-105
3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF) 7-105
3.12.4 Call Module (CM) 7-107
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT) 7-107
3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF) 7-108
3.12.7 End of Module, Program End (EM) 7-110
3.12.8 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (EMT) 7-110
3.12.9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (EMF) 7-110
3.12.10 Jump Label (LBL) 7-110
3.13 INDEX-Register 7-112
3.14 Commands for STRING Execution 7-114
3.14.1 LOAD (L) 7-115
3.14.2 ADD (+) 7-115
3.14.3 Storing a STRING (=) 7-116
3.14.4 Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR) 7-116
3.15 Logical Comparisons in STRING Execution 7-119
3.15.1 EQUAL TO (==) 7-119
3.15.2 LESS THAN (<) 7-119
3.15.3 GREATER THAN (>) 7-120
3.15.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=) 7-120
3.15.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=) 7-120
3.15.6 UNEQUAL (<>) 7-121
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7-3

3.16 Submit Programs 7-123
3.16.1 Call up of the Submit Program (SUBM) 7-123
3.16.2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program (RPLY) 7-124
3.16.3 Cancellation of a Submit Program (CAN) 7-124
3.17 Constants Field (KF) 7-127
3.18 Program Structures 7-127
3.18.1 IF ... ELSE ... ENDI Structure 7-128
3.18.2 REPEAT ... UNTIL Structure 7-128
3.18.3 WHILE ... ENDW Structure 7-129
3.18.4 CASE Branch 7-129
3.19 Linking Files 7-131
3.19.1 USES Instruction 7-131
3.19.2 GLOBAL Instruction 7-132
3.19.3 EXTERN Instruction 7-133
4 PLC Modules 7-136

4.1 Marker, Byte, Word, Doubleword 7-136
4.1.1 Copy in Marker or Word Range (Module 9000/9001) 7-136
4.1.2 Read in Word Range (Module 9010/9011/9012) 7-137
4.1.3 Write in Word Range (Module 9020/9021/9022) 7-138
4.2 Machine Parameters 7-139
4.2.1 Overwrite Machine Parameter (Module 9031) 7-139
4.2.2 Read Machine Parameter (Module 9032) 7-140
4.2.3 Select Machine Parameter File (Module 9033) 7-140
4.3 Status and Coordinates 7-141
4.3.1 Read Status Information (Module 9035) 7-141
4.3.2 Write Status Information (Module 9036) 7-144
4.3.3 Read Coordinates (Module 9040/9041/9042) 7-145
4.4 Number Conversion 7-147
4.4.1 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII (Module 9050) 7-147
4.4.2 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII (Module 9051) 7-148
4.4.3 Number Conversion ASCII to Binary (Module 9052) 7-149
4.4.4 Conversion Binary to ASCII/Hexadecimal (Module 9053) 7-150
4.4.5 Conversion ASCII/Hexadecimal to Binary (Module 9054) 7-150
4.5 String Processing 7-151
4.5.1 Copying a Number from a String (Module 9070) 7-151
4.5.2 Compute String Length (Module 9071) 7-152
4.6 PLC Window 7-152
4.6.1 Delete PLC Window (Module 9080) 7-152
4.6.2 Interrogate PLC Window (Module 9081) 7-153
4.6.3 Display String (Module 9082) 7-153
4.6.4 Display Bar Chart (Module 9083) 7-155
7-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 01.98

4.7 Files 7-157
4.7.1 Executing a Pallet Program (Module 9090) 7-157
4.7.2 Tool and Datum Table (Module 9092/9093/9094) 7-158
4.7.3 Non-linear Axis Error Compensation (Module 9095) 7-161
4.8 Data Interface 7-162
4.8.1 Assign Data Interface (Module 9100) 7-163
4.8.2 Enable Data Interface (Module 9101) 7-163
4.8.3 Status of Data Interface (Module 9102) 7-164
4.8.4 Transmit String across Data Interface (Module 9103) 7-165
4.8.5 Receive String across Data Interface (Module 9104) 7-165
4.8.6 Transmit Binary Data across Data Interface (Module 9105) 7-167
4.8.7 Receive Binary Data across Data Interface (Module 9106) 7-167
4.8.8 Read from Receive Buffer (Module 9107) 7-168
4.8.9 Transmit a Message by LSV/2 (Module 9110) 7-169
4.8.10 Read a Message by LSV/2 (Module 9111) 7-170
4.9 PLC Axes 7-171
4.9.1 Start PLC Axis (Module 9120) 7-171
4.9.2 Stop PLC Axis (Module 9121) 7-172
4.9.3 Status PLC Axis (Module 9122) 7-172
4.9.4 Traverse Reference Marks for PLC Axis (Module 9123) 7-173
4.9.5 Override for PLC-axis (Module 9124) 77 7-174
4.10 Analogue voltage output (Module 9130) 7-176
4.11 Inserting an NC block (Module 9150) 7-177
4.12 Spindle orientation (Module 9171) 7-178
5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7-179

5.1 PLC Program Conversion 7-180
5.2 Compatibility Markers 7-181
5.3 Incompatibility 7-183
5.3.1 PLC Macros 7-183
5.3.2 PLC Error Messages 7-185
5.3.3 Mode Code 7-185
5.3.4 Non-Implemented Markers 7-186
5.3.5 PLC Cycle Time 7-187
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 7-5

1 PLC functions
The integrated PLC in the TNC contains its own Text Editor for creating the list of instructions for the
PLC program. Commands and comments are entered via the ASCII keyboard on the control panel
(see section "Programming and editing files").
The functions TRACE and TABLE, as well as a Syntax check on entering the PLC commands and a
logical test with the Function COMPILE were introduced to make it easier to find faults in the PLC
program (see section "Test functions").
10 ms are available for a PLC run. Up to 8 000 logic commands, equivalent to 64 KB, can be
processed within this period (executable memory). A new PLC run commences every 20 ms in the
TNC 415 and every 24 ms in the TNC 407 (PLC cycle time), i.e. every 20 ms or 24 ms the inputs are
read and outputs are set.
1.1 Select PLC operation

PLC operation covers all functions for creating and testing the PLC programs, for creating the PLC
error messages and the dialogue texts for OEM cycles, the Help files and compensation lists for
non-linear axis error correction.
It can be selected as follows, using the code number 807 667:
Select NC operating mode

"Programming and editing"

Press MOD
key

Enter code number 807 667

ENT key

PLC operation is selected
(Main menu)
PLC operation can be stopped by pressing the soft key END or the END key.
Provided the TNC has not been switched off and the PLC operation has already been selected once
with the code number, it is possible to return to PLC operation quite simply, without using the code
number, by means of the MOD key and the soft key PLC EDIT.
7-6 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 PLC functions 01.98

1.2 PLC Main menu
After entering the code number (or soft key PLC EDIT) the following screen display will appear (main
menu):
PROCESSING TIME: MAXIMUM XXX%
CURRENT XXX%
CODE LENGTH XX KBYTE
RUNTIME PGM XXXX XXXX.XXX
EDITOR PGM XXXX XXXX.XXX
Select edit Select table Select TRACE Compile PLC Binary output Activate Call machine Quit PLC
mode M/I/O/T/C function program of PLC dialogue or parameter list Mode
program error message
file
Processing time
The PLC processing time (time for a PLC run) is given in % of the maximum time of 10 ms, whereby
10 ms is equivalent to 200 %
Processing time: Maximum

The longest occurring run time for the current executable program is displayed in % . If this time
exceeds the absolute maximum of 10 ms, then the flashing error message "PLC-program error 53"
will be displayed.
Current (processing time)

The time for the latest PLC run, displayed in % .
Code length
This is the length of the compiled executable program in KB.
Executable program
The last compiled PLC program is displayed here. If you are working from the RAM (MP4010) then
the desired program can be selected using the PGM NAME and SELECT soft key and must be
compiled with the COMPILE function (soft key).
A program which was already selected as an executable program before switching on will be
compiled automatically. The PLC program is only active after compilation!
Editor program
The name of a file which was selected with the soft key SELECT can be seen in the line
PGM IN EDIT MEM.
If no executable program has been activated and no Editor program has been selected, then the
relevant name fields will be empty!
The various PLC functions can be accessed from inside the Main menu.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 PLC functions 7-7

1.3 File management
All the EPROM and RAM files can be listed by operating the PGM NAME key on the keyboard unit
and the soft key SHOW ALL. The following functions appear at the same time in the soft-key row:
Scroll Select file Copy Modify display Select file type Switch to Return to main
for selected display with menu
window two windows
Scroll Protect Cancel Rename Change file Return to main

program program steps type menu
The following soft-key row is displayed when the MODIFY WINDOW soft key is operated.
Select file type List from RAM List from List across
EPROM data interface
You can choose whether the file list from the RAM, the EPROM or across the data interface will be
displayed in the selected window. You can also define the type of files to be listed using the
SELECT TYPE soft key.
Use the WINDOW soft key to toggle between the display with one and the display with two
windows. The display with two windows is useful for the input/output of data and for copying data
from the EPROM. The following soft-key rows are offered with the two-window display.
Scroll Copy file from window to window Select file type Switch to Return to main
display with menu
one window

Scroll Change file Modify display
type for selected
window
The soft key functions are only active for the selected window. Use the arrow keys to toggle
between the two windows.
Operate the SELECT TYPE soft key to select a different file type. The following soft-key rows are
shown:
Display all file PLC programs PLC error PLC error Dialogues for Dialogues for ASCII files
types messages, first messages, OEM cycles, OEM cycles,
language English first language English
Help files Binary files Compensation Compensation

tables assignment
Operate the CONVERT soft key to change the type of the selected file. The following soft-key row
is shown:
PLC program Cross- PLC program Unformatted

with block reference list with block
number number and
cross-
reference list

1.4 Text Editor
A file which is loaded into the editor (EDITOR PGM) can be displayed on the screen with the soft
key EDIT from the main menu. If it is a new file then the screen will be empty, apart from the status
display for the editor.
The status display contains the following information:
FILE: Name of the file

LINE: Current line number of the cursor (bright field).
COLUMN: Current column number of the cursor (bright field).
INSERT or
OVERWRITE: Use the soft key to choose between
- insert mode (INSERT) and
- overwrite mode (OVERWRITE).
See User's Manual for a detailed description of the Text Editor.
1.5 File output via data interface

The EXT key is used to initiate the output of data across the data interface (see chapter entitled
"Data Interface").
PLC programs, PLC error messages and dialogues for OEM cycles can be transferred as ASCII text
via the data interface (see chapter "Data interface").
PLC programs, PLC error messages, dialogues for OEM cycles and the OEM cycles themselves can
also be given out as binary code for the creation of EPROMs.
After operating the soft key "OUTPUT BINARY CODE 0001" it is possible to collect the files that
are to be transferred in a list. The required ID number for the EPROM which is to be created must
be entered in the first line of this table. The preset names in the list can be overwritten.
To start data transfer, the user must press the EXT key.
The HEIDENHAIN service department is at your disposal for further information about creating
EPROMs.
A table could look like this:
IDENT 123 456 99

LOAD PLC0CODE.PLC
LOAD PLC0CODE.ER1
LOAD PLC0CODE.ERE
LOAD PLC0CODE.DI1
LOAD PLC0CODE.THE
LOAD 999 999 69.H (OEM-cycle)
If the PLC program is to be transferred to a 2MB EPROM, the command "SIZE 2MB" must be
entered in the table (as of software 280 58, 280 54, 280 56). The PLC main program is designated
with /M. Help files (.HLP) and machine parameters lists (.MP) can also be transferred into the
EPROM.

1.6 Test functions for the PLC program
1.6.1 TRACE functions

The TRACE function makes it possible to check the logical states of the markers, inputs, outputs,
timers and counters as well as to test the contents of Byte, Word and Doubleword.
These functions are available from the Main menu by using the soft key TRACE.
The list of instructions for the compiled program will then be displayed. In addition, the contents of
the Operand and Accumulator for each line of the program are shown in HEX or decimal code. Every
active command in the LIST is identified with a "*". The cursor keys or the GOTO function can be
used to display the required portion of the program.
The soft keys now have the following meaning:
HEX DECIMAL
The contents of the Operands and the Accumulators can be displayed either in decimal or HEX code.
The soft key can be used to toggle the display.
START/STOP DISPLAY
The dynamic display of the Operands and the Accumulators can be frozen with STOP DISPLAY.
On operating START DISPLAY they will again be continuously updated.
Further soft key functions are described in the next section.
1.6.2 Logic diagram

The logical states of up to 16 Operands (M, I, O, T, C) can be shown graphically and simultaneously
on the VDU screen. 1 024 PLC runs can be recorded.
The selection is made by soft key SELECT M/I/O/T/C, which makes it possible to create a table with
the required Operands. The individual positions in the table are determined by dialogue. Wrong
entries can be erased with the DEL key. For each Operand a trigger condition can be entered. 512
states are recorded before and 512 after a trigger event. The following trigger conditions are
possible:
"1" => Record when Operand is logical "1"

(Triggering on positive edge)
"0" => Record when Operand is logical "0"

(Triggering on negative edge)
If no trigger condition is wanted then confirm with NO ENT.

If no trigger condition is entered for any of the Operands then the Operand states will be
continuously recorded and the last 1024 remain in memory.

A recording commences with START TRACE and is ended either with STOP TRACE or when the
trigger event takes place. During recording of the logical states, the message PCTR will blink in the
status window. The blinking will stop when the recording is finished.
The cursor keys can be used to select the desired range in the TRACE buffer.
After operating the soft keys SELECT M/I/O/T/C the soft keys will have the following meaning:
Return to Display logic Start TRACE Stop TRACE Return to main

instruction list diagrams of recording recording menu
display with the selected
operands and operands
accumulator
content
1.6.3 TABLE function

The table of markers, inputs, outputs, timers and counters can be dynamically displayed on the
VDU screen by using the soft key TABLE from within the Main menu. The selection, as well as the
set and reset of the markers, inputs, outputs, timers and counters is performed by soft keys.
The cursor keys or the GOTO key are used to select the positions within the table. Return to the
Main menu by pressing the END key.
1.6.4 COMPILE function

A PLC program is only transferred to the executable memory when it is compiled (see PLC Main
menu). After pressing the soft key COMPILE a directory of the available PLC programs is displayed.
The program which is to be compiled must be chosen with SELECT.
During compilation, error messages may be displayed which result from programming errors (see
section: "Program creation").




2 Program creation
The PLC program can be created directly on the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls. For this, the PLC
Editor must be called with the code number 807 667 (see section "PLC functions").
HEIDENHAIN can supply the PLC.EXE PLC development software for creating PLC programs on
your personal computer. Further particulars can be obtained from your HEIDENHAIN customer
service.
2.1 Program structure
2.1.1 Command
A command is the smallest unit in a PLC program. It consists of the
operation portion and the Operand portion.
A I 28 ;Comment
Operation Operand Operand

designation address;
(A, AN...) (I, O, M, T, C, constant value
B, W, D, K)
Operand
The operation describes the function which is to be performed. It explains what is done with the
Operands.
The Operand shows what is to be operated on. It consists of the Operand abbreviation and a
parameter (Address). Register and memory contents can be gated, erased and loaded by using PLC
commands.
Both Bit and Word processing are possible. In Word processing it is possible to address memory
contents with a length of 8 Bits (Byte), 16 Bits (Word) or 32 Bits (Doubleword) (see section
"Commands").
7-16 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Program creation 01.98

2.1.2 Module technique
It is good practice to make the maintenance of the PLC programs easier by creating the program
with the most transparent structure possible. This can be best achieved by dividing the PLC program
into individual modules (structured programming).
Only the most important PLC functions should be programmed in the main routine.
Individual PLC functions such as spindle orientation and key simulation are programmed in their own
modules.
0 L M2719
1 SN M2719 ;Activate the strobes for Word processing
2 L M2497
3 SN M2497 ;Activate the edge evaluation
4 L M2496
5 SN M2496 ;Activate transfer of decoded M codes
;(M1900 to M1999)
. . .
. . .
. . .
20 L M1919 ;M Function M19
21 A M2045 ;Change signal for M function
22 AN M12 ;Spindle orientation already active?
23 CMT 180 ;Spindle orientation
24 LM 2182 ;Disabled key operated?
25 CMT 31 ;Yes, then call key simulation
. . .
. . .
. . .
150 EM ;End main program
. . .
. . .
. . .
200 EM
201 LBL 180 ;Spindle orientation
. . .
. . .
. . .
259 EM
. . .
. . .
. . .
Error conditions in the machine should be interrogated in the PLC program and a plain language error
message should be displayed on the VDU screen. See chapter "Machine integration", section
"Display and operation" and chapter "PLC programming", section "Modules".
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Program creation 7-17

2.2 Address allocation
2.2.1 Operand directory

Operand Abbreviation Address range
Marker M (Marker) 0 to 3023

Input I (Input) I0 to I31; I128 to I152;
I64 to I126 (first extension board);
I192 to I254 (second extension board)
Output O (Output) O0 to O30;
O32 to O62(first extension board);
O64 to O94 (second extension board);
Counter C (Counter) Set counter : C0 to C31
Counter contents: C48 to C79
Release count pulse: C96 to C127
Timer T (Timer) Timer start: T0 to T47
Timer running: T48 to T95
Byte B (Byte) 0 to 1023 (8 Bit)
Word W (Word) 0 to 1022 (16 Bit)
Doubleword D (Doubleword) 0 to 1020 (32 Bit)
Constant K - 2 147 483 647 to + 2 147 483 647
2.2.2 Addressing the memory

The memory for the Operands B (8 Bit), W (16 Bit), D (32 Bit) is only 8 Bit wide. Since the Operands
can be 8,16 or 32 Bit wide, an overlap of the memory areas will occur, which must be taken into
account in addressing the memory.
8 bit
D0 W0 B0 7 0 High-Byte for W; Highest-Byte for D

B1 Low-Byte for W
W2 B2
B3 Lowest-Byte for D
D4 W4 B4
B5
.. .. ..
. . .
D1020 W1020 B1020
..
. B1021
W1022 B1022
B1023
In Byte addressing every address from 0 to 1023 is accessible. In Word addressing, every second
address from 0 to 1022 is accessible and in Doubleword addressing every fourth from 0 to 1020.
The address parameter gives the High Byte for a Word Address (W) , or the Highest Byte for a
Doubleword address (D).

Markers M1000 to M1999 and Bytes B0 to B127 are non-volatile, i.e. the contents of this memory
are maintained when the supply voltage is switched off.
After entry of the code number 531 210 the markers M1000 to M1999 and Bytes B0 to B127 are
erased.
B0 to B127 Freely available, not deleted with RESET

B128 to B255 Freely available, deleted with RESET
B256 to B511 Data transfer NC PLC
B512 to B767 Data transfer PLC NC
B768 to B1023 Machine parameters
2.3 Data transfer NC/PLC

The information exchange between PLC and NC is conducted by markers, Bytes, Words and
Doublewords. The function of the individual markers, Bytes, Words and Doublewords is fixed.
Either numerical data or general data (controlled by strobes) can be transferred.
2.3.1 Number transfer

The Parameter function FN19 can be used to transfer two numbers to the PLC. The transferred
values are deposited in the Doublewords D280 and D284.
During the transfer the marker M2149 is set by the NC. The transfer must be confirmed by the PLC
by setting marker M2611.
Marker M2150 determines whether dimensions are in mm or inches.
The transferred value is deposited as an integer number in units of 1/10 000.

M2149 Transfer with FN19 active NC NC
M2611 Confirm the transfer with FN19 PLC PLC
M2150 Dimensional unit for transfer with FN19 NC NC
0 = mm; 1 = inch
Address Function
D 280 1st Number value from FN 19
D 284 2nd Number value from FN 19

Example:
NC program 0 BEGIN PGM 5 MM

.
.
.
11 FN19:PLC =+20.25/+100
.
.
.
33 END PGM 5 MM
PLC program .
.
.
LN M2149 ;Strobe signal/Transfer
R M2611 ;Acknowledgement
.
.
.
L M2149 ;Strobe signal/Transfer
CMT 199
.
.
.
LBL 199
L D280 ;1st value from FN19
= D120 ;Internal buffer 1st value
.
.
.
L D284 ;2nd value from FN19
= D124 ;Internal buffer 2nd value
L M2149 ;Change signal for transfer
S M2611 ;Acknowledgement
After the program has been performed, the following data will be in the Doublewords D120 and
D124 :
D120 = 202 500

D124 = 1 000 000
M2150 = 0, since program no. 5 was programmed in mm

The number transfer from the PLC to the machining program is carried out by the Q parameters
Q100 to Q107, i.e. the Q Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. The required
numerical value is entered in doubleword D528 and the Q parameter number (0-7) is defined in
Word W516. The transfer is activated by the strobe marker M2713. The Q parameter values are
transferred with the next M/S/T strobe.

M2713 Activate the Q Parameter transfer to the NC PLC NC
Data from D528
Q No. from W516
Address Function
D 528 Doubleword with multiple function, in this instance data for transfer
from the PLC to the NC (07, Q number from W516, strobe marker
M2713)
W516 Q number for numerical value transfer from PLC to NC (transfer of
the value from D528, strobe marker M2713)
122 different machine parameters are reserved for data transfer in the PLC. MP4210.x, MP4220.x
and MP4310.x are stored in PLC words. The contents of MP4230.x and 4231.x must be called by
module 9032. For example, PLC positioning, datum shifts, feed rates for PLC positioning or coding
for the release of certain PLC functions can be filed in these machine parameters. These numerical
values are evaluated in the PLC program.
Although the TNC 407 / TNC 415F / TNC 425E accept entry values to 0.0001 mm (or ), the controls
round these values to 0.001 mm (or ) for their calculations.
Address Function
D768 Value from MP4210.0




Address Function





W960 Value from MP 4220.0



MP4210.0 Set a number in the PLC
to MP4210.47 Entry : 99 999.9999 to +99 999.9999
MP 4220 Machine parameter with multiple function

Entry : 80 to 30 000
- Set a number in the PLC. In Word range W960 to W968.
- Feed rate for re-approaching the contour
MP4220.0 X axis
MP4220.1 Y axis
MP4220.2 Z axis
MP4220.3 axis 4
MP4220.4 axis 5
MP4310.0 Set a number in the PLC, in the Word range W976 to W988
to MP4310.6 Entry : 0 to 65 535
MP4230.0 Set a number in the PLC (Module 9032)

to MP4230.31 Entry : - 99 999.0000 to +99 999.9999
MP4231.0 Set a number in the PLC (Module 9032)

to MP 4231.31 Entry : - 99 999.0000 to +99 999.9999
2.3.2 General data transfer (Strobes)

The NC transfers general data to the PLC, e.g. M functions, S word, T word, G code.
The transfer is controlled by strobes.
Example:
When an M function is output, the NC sets the strobe signal M2045. After evaluating the M
function, the PLC sets the acknowledge marker M2482. The PLC must reset M2482 otherwise no
further strobes can be transferred by the NC.

2.4 Timers and counters
2.4.1 Timers
48 timers are available in the PLC. These 48 timers are controlled by special markers with the
abbreviation symbol T. The time period for the timer is defined in the machine parameter MP4110.X.
The time unit corresponds to the PLC cycle time (TNC 415: 20 ms; TNC 407: 24 ms).
The timers are started by setting the markers T0 to T47 which also sets the timer to the value from
MP4110.X. This activation may only be performed for a single PLC run, as otherwise the timers will
be restarted by every succeeding run.
The markers T48 to T95 (timer running) will remain set for the period defined in the machine
parameters.
Example:
Start of Timer 1
Period in MP4110.1 = 9 (PLC cycles)
T1
T49

Timer start Timer running Machine parameter
T0 T48 MP4110.0
T1 T49 MP4110.1
T2 T50 MP4110.2
T3 T51 MP4110.3
T4 T52 MP4110.4
T5 T53 MP4110.5
T6 T54 MP4110.6
T7 T55 MP4110.7
T8 T56 MP4110.8
T9 T57 MP4110.9
T10 T58 MP4110.10
T11 T59 MP4110.11
T12 T60 MP4110.12
T13 T61 MP4110.13
T14 T62 MP4110.14
T15 T63 MP4110.15
T16 T64 MP4110.16
T17 T65 MP4110.17
T18 T66 MP4110.18
T19 T67 MP4110.19
T20 T68 MP4110.20
T21 T69 MP4110.21
T22 T70 MP4110.22
T23 T71 MP4110.23
T24 T72 MP4110.24
T25 T73 MP4110.25
T26 T74 MP4110.26
T27 T75 MP4110.27
T28 T76 MP4110.28
T29 T77 MP4110.29
T30 T78 MP4110.30
T31 T79 MP4110.31
T32 T80 MP4110.32
T33 T81 MP4110.33
T34 T82 MP4110.34
T35 T83 MP4110.35
T36 T84 MP4110.36
T37 T85 MP4110.37
T38 T86 MP4110.38
T39 T87 MP4110.39
T40 T88 MP4110.40
T41 T89 MP4110.41
T42 T90 MP4110.42
T43 T91 MP4110.43
T44 T92 MP4110.44
T45 T93 MP4110.45
T46 T94 MP4110.46
T47 T95 MP4110.47
Entry range for MP4110.X: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles] (TNC 415: 20 ms, TNC 407: 24 ms)

2.4.2 Counters
32 counters are available in the PLC. Each of these 32 counters is controlled by special markers with
the abbreviation symbol C. After setting a marker from the range C0 to C31 the counter is loaded
with the value from machine parameter MP4120.X. The marker range C48 to C79 indicates whether
the count has been completed or not. The marker range C96 to C127 is used to start the counter
(counter release pulse).
Example: Logic diagram for counter C1

Contents of machine parameter MP4120.1 = 10 (PLC cycles)
C1
C49
C97
C0 C48 C96 MP4120.0

C1 C49 C97 MP4120.1
C2 C50 C98 MP4120.2
C3 C51 C99 MP4120.3
C4 C52 C100 MP4120.4
C5 C53 C101 MP4120.5
C6 C54 C102 MP4120.6
C7 C55 C103 MP4120.7
C8 C56 C104 MP4120.8
C9 C57 C105 MP4120.9
C10 C58 C106 MP4120.10
C11 C59 C107 MP4120.11
C12 C60 C108 MP4120.12
C13 C61 C109 MP4120.13
C14 C62 C110 MP4120.14
C15 C63 C111 MP4120.15
C16 C64 C112 MP4120.16
C17 C65 C113 MP4120.17
C18 C66 C114 MP4120.18
C19 C67 C115 MP4120.19
C20 C68 C116 MP4120.20
C21 C69 C117 MP4120.21
C22 C70 C118 MP4120.22
C23 C71 C119 MP4120.23
C24 C72 C120 MP4120.24
C25 C73 C121 MP4120.25
C26 C74 C122 MP4120.26
C27 C75 C123 MP4120.27
C28 C76 C124 MP4120.28
C29 C77 C125 MP4120.29
C30 C78 C126 MP4120.30
C31 C79 C127 MP4120.31

MP4120.0 Preset value for counters C0 to C31
to MP4120.31 Entry range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
2.5 Edge evaluation of the PLC inputs

The edge evaluation for the PLC inputs can be activated by marker M2497. An automatic edge
evaluation cannot be activated for the PLC inputs I192 to I254 on the second PLC I/O expansion
board.
Edge evaluation means that if the signal at the PLC input changes, a certain marker will be set for
the duration of a PLC run. If marker M2497 is set, the following markers will be set if the signals
change at the PLC inputs.
Marker for rising edges at the PLC inputs:
Marker PLC inputs

M1500 to M1531 I0 to I31
M1564 to M1626 I64 to I126 (first extension board)
M1628 to M1652 I128 to I152
Marker for falling edges at the PLC inputs:
Marker PLC inputs

M1700 to M1731 I0 to I31
M1764 to M1826 I64 to I126 (first extension board)
M1828 to M1852 I128 to I152

M2497 Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs PLC PLC
Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1652
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1852

2.6 EPROM creation
Machine parameter MP4010 selects whether the PLC program is run from the RAM area of the
control or the EPROM area.
During the creation and test of the PLC program the control should operate from the RAM area.
HEIDENHAIN recommends that an EPROM is created for the PLC program before delivering the
machine to the customer (see also chapter "Introduction").
MP4010 PLC program from RAM or from EPROM

Entry:
0 = EPROM operation
1 = RAM operation
A PC and the MEGA-PROMMER-Software (Version 2.12.or later) are necessary for programming
the PLC EPROMS.
The PLC files from the RAM area in the control can be transferred to the PC via the data interface
(see chapter "Data interface").The output is initiated from the control with the soft key "BINARY
OUTPUT" (see section "PLC functions").
The PLC files are then transferred to the PC in the Motorola EXORMAX S3 format. With the MEGA-
PROMMER these data can be read in the MOX format and the EPROM programmed.
Please contact the HEIDENHAIN customer service if you have further questions.


2.7 Error messages
Creating the instruction list and testing the program is supported by the display of error messages.
In the PLC Editor or when compiling the program in the PLC programming mode, errors are
displayed by the message "INPUT ERROR n". The flashing message "ERROR IN PLC Program n" is
displayed when compiling the program after switching on the control system or when a timing error
occurs. After resetting, the error can be located by calling the PLC Editor. Basically, when an error is
displayed in the PLC Editor, the relevant file is opened and the cursor is on the error line. With timing
error 53 (maximum PLC cycle time has timed out) the cursor is on the last jump instruction to be
executed.
Error classification:
The system indicates when every error was detected. The following abbreviations are used:
E - Detected while editing, the line is not formatted.

S - Detected during syntax check in PLC Editor (Compile soft key).
(S) - May have been detected during syntax check, otherwise during Compiler run.
C - Detected during Compiler run either after control is switched on or in PLC programming
mode.
R - Detected at PLC program run time.
List of error codes:
Error Code Explanation

0 ESC Not a valid command
- The read line cannot be interpreted as a PLC command
1 - spare (earlier versions: Operand for jump is no label)
2 ESC Invalid operand type
- An invalid operand type has been defined.
- The command cannot be used with the defined operand type.
3 ESC Operand not found
- A type has been specified for the operand, but not a value.
4 ESC Operand not in acceptable range
- An operand number has been defined that is outside the range
available for the operand.
5 ESC No limiter after command
- The PLC command is followed by other characters that cannot be
interpreted.
6 ESC No end of line found
- The line is more than 128 characters long.
7 SC Label not defined
- There is a reference to a label that is not defined elsewhere with LBL,
KFIELD or EXTERN.

8 SC No end of block found
- At the end of the program file there are PLC commands not
terminated by an EM or JP command. There is an attendant risk of an
undefined program range being run at run time.
9 SC Program too long (RAM Overflow)
- The total length of the program code to be generated exceeds the
storage space available in the control..
10 SC Assignment to a parenthesis
- An attempt has been made to assign a gating result to an operand
even though not all open parentheses have been closed again.
11 SC Parenthesis nesting too deep
- An attempt has been made to nest more than 16 parentheses..
12 SC Jump in a gating chain
- An unconditional jump has been programmed even though the
assignment chain previously begun has not yet been assigned.
13 SC Close parenthesis with no open parenthesis
- A "close parenthesis" command has been programmed before writing
the relevant "open parenthesis" command.
14 SC Label within a parenthesis
- A label has been set inside a parenthesis gate. This is not permitted
because "close parenthesis" commands cannot be executed before the
corresponding "open parenthesis" commands.
15 SC Label within a gating chain
- A label has been programmed in a gate that has already begun. This is
not permitted because the first command after the label would have to
be interpreted either as a gate or as a load command depending on the
program flow.
16 SC Jump within a parenthesis
- A jump command has been programmed in a parenthesis. This is not
possible because opened parentheses must always be closed again
due to internal implementation, and this would not happen with the
jump.
17 SC Parenthesis opened at end of block
- An EM instruction has been programmed with parenthesis open.
Parentheses must always be closed again.
18 SC Label defined twice
- A label name imported from another module with EXTERN has been
used again with an LBL or KFIELD instruction.
- A name reserved for internal modules (9000 .. 9255) has been used
with an LBL, KFIELD or EXTERN instruction.
19 SC No word assignment
- A word gate has been executed but the result has not been assigned
to any operand and a new gate has begun instead.
20 SC No logic assignment
- A logic gate has been executed but the result has not been assigned
to any operand and a new gate has begun instead.

21 SC Word accumulator not loaded
- A command has been programmed that gates, assigns or manipulates
the already loaded word accumulator even though the accumulator
was not loaded before.
22 SC Logic accumulator not loaded
- A command has been programmed that gates, assigns or manipulates
the already loaded logic accumulator even though the accumulator
was not previously loaded.
23 SC Accumulators not loaded with open parenthesis
- An "open parenthesis" command has been programmed even though
neither a logic nor a word string was previously begun.
24 SC Wrong type of parenthesis result
- Depending on the gate formed before a parenthesis and the
parenthesis command used, the system expects the string in the
parenthesis to provide a result of the same type (word/logic). With
different types the gate required by the "open parenthesis" command
cannot be formed.
25 SC Conditional jump with invalid logic accumulator
- A conditional jump (CMT/CMF/JPT/JPF/EMT/EMF) has been
programmed without first beginning a gating chain in the logic
accumulator.
26 SC ENDC/ENDK outside a CASE/KFIELD instruction
- An ENDC command has been programmed without a prior CASE
instruction.
- And ENDK command has been programmed without a prior KFIELD
label.
27 SC Wrong command within CASE table/KFIELD
- A command other than CM has been programmed after a CASE
instruction and before the corresponding ENDC instruction.
- A command other than K has been programmed after a KFIELD label
and before the corresponding ENDK label.
28 SC Too many table entries in CASE
- A CASE table with more than 128 entries has been programmed.
29 SC Blank CASE instruction/KFIELD
- A CASE instruction has been programmed followed immediately by an
ENDC label.
- A KFIELD instruction has been programmed followed immediately by
an ENDK label.
30 SC String accumulator not loaded
- A command has been programmed which gates, assigns or
manipulates the already loaded string accumulator even though the
accumulator was not previously loaded.
31 SC String instruction within parentheses
- A string instruction has been programmed within parentheses even
though string gates cannot be nested with parentheses.
32 SC No string assignment
- A new gating chain has started without assigning the gating result
previously formed in the string accumulator.

33 SC GLOBAL/EXTERN not at start of file
- The commands GLOBAL or EXTERN have been written after another
program code in the file. These commands must always come before
the program code.
34 (S)C Too many modules
- An attempt has been made to link more than 64 files into one program
with the USES instruction.
35 (S)C File not found
- A file linked with USES cannot be found.
- An attempt has been made to link a file of the .PLC type with
MP4010=0 (EPROM).
36 SC File too long
- The program code for an individual file is bigger than 64 K so cannot be
compiled. The file must be split up into several files and linked with
USES
37 SC Too many local labels
- More than 1000 labels have been issued in a file. All LBL, KFIELD and
EXTERN instructions are added together, also the (invisible) labels
generated by structured commands. The file must be split up into
several files and linked with USES.
38 C Too many global labels
- Over 1000 global labels have been defined from all participating files.
39 C External label not defined
- A label declared as EXTERN has not been defined as GLOBAL in any
of the participating modules.
40 SC External label in CASE instruction
- A label declared as EXTERN has been entered in the CM List of a
CASE instruction. A local module must be defined that only calls the
global module with CM in the simplest case.
41 SC External label in JP instruction
- An attempt has been made to jump to a label defined as EXTERN with
a JP/JPF/JPT instruction.
42 (S)C Global label defined twice
- The same label has been defined as GLOBAL several times in the
same or in different files.
43 SC Wrong instruction structure
- An ELSE/ENDI/ENDW/UNTIL instruction has been programmed
without an IF/ELSE/WHILE/REPEAT instruction first.
- Instructions with different structures have been interleaved instead of
nested. The structures must always be closed in the reverse order in
which they were opened!
44 SC Structure open at end of file
- A structured instruction has been opened but not closed again by the
end of file.
45 SC GLOBAL instruction in main file
- A module from the main file has been defined as GLOBAL. Only
modules from files linked with USES can be made accessible to other
files using the GLOBAL instruction.

46..49 spare
50 R Nesting too deep
- An attempt has been made to nest more than 32 module calls.
- A recursive module call has been programmed which exceeds the
nesting depth limit of 32.
51 R Stack underflow
- An attempt has been made to fetch data from the stack even though
they were not previously stored there.
52 R Stack overflow
- An attempt has been made to store more than 128 bytes of data to
the stack. Word operands (B/W/D/K) occupy 4 bytes each, logic
operands (M/I/O/T/C) occupy 2 bytes each.
53 R Time out
- It took longer than 10 ms to process the program section that runs
cyclically. Check the subprogram structure, if necessary very
processor-intensive sections will have to be started as SUBMIT jobs.
- The displayed computer time may be increased by V.24 transfers and
handwheel mode. In case of doubt select handwheel mode and start
data transfer with V.24 (baud rate 38400 if possible), then check
"MAXIMUM PROCESSING TIME" in PLC programming environment.
100% corresponds to 5 ms, the block processing speed is still
achieved with this load. Values above 150% should not occur (safety
margin for adverse operating conditions!).
54 R CASE out of range
- The operand for the CASE instruction contains a value that cannot be
interpreted as an offset in the CM table (<0 or > table length -1).
55 R Subprogram not defined
- This error cannot occur at present..
56 R - The address for a write access to data types B/W/D/M/I/O/T/C is in a
range invalid for this operand type owing to inclusion of the index
register.
- While accessing a constants field the index register contains a value
which is not possible for that field (<0 or > field length -1).
- The address of a string leads to a prohibited value owing to inclusion
of the index register.
- The number of a dialogue (S#Dn[X]) or an error message (S#En[X])
leads to a prohibited value owing to inclusion of the index register (<0
or >999).
- While addressing a substring (Sn^X) the value range for the index
register (0..127) was overshot.


7
3 Commands
3.1 Load and Assign Commands
3.1.1 LOAD (L)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: L (LOAD)
Logic Byte/Word Double Constant

Execution time [s] 0.2 to 0.7 0.5 to 0.8 0.2 to 0.7 0.0 to 0.3
Number of bytes 4 6 4 6
Logic execution with LOAD command
Operands: M, I, O, T, C
Operation:
The addressed operand is copied into the Accumulator. A load command is always used at the start
of a logic chain, in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same function is achieved
when the gating commands A, O, XO are used at the start of a logic chain, however this should
only be used when compatibility with the TNC 355 is required.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2. Thus the logic
state of Input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent gating commands.
Initial state: Input I4 = 1

Input I5 = 0
Output O2 = ?
Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand-Contents
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
... x x x x x x X x x x x x x x
1 L I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
2 A I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to output O2.
7-36 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Commands 01.98

Word execution with the LOAD command
Operands: B, W, D, K
Operation:
The addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) is copied into the Word Accumulator. In addition,
the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit. In contrast to logic execution the
start of a word gating chain must always be with the L command. It is not possible to use a gating
command.
Example:
A Constant and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state: Byte B5 = 2A (hex)

Constant: 54 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Line Instruction Accumulator Contents Operand Contents
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K+54 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Byte B8.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Commands 7-37

3.1.2 LOAD NOT (LN)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: LN (LOAD NOT)

Logic execution with the LOAD NOT command
Operation:
The complement of the addressed operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. A load command is
always used at the start of a logic chain in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same
function is achieved when the gating commands AN, ON, XON are used at the start of a logic chain,
however this should only be used when compatibility with TNC 355 is required.
Example:
The inverted logic state of Input I4 and Input I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to
Output O2. Thus the inverted logic state of Input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable
subsequent gating commands.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 LN I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The inverted operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Output O2.

Word execution with the LOAD NOT command
Operation:
The complement of the contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or Constant (K) is loaded into
the Word Accumulator. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit.
In contrast to logic execution a word gating chain must always start with a load command. It is not
possible to use a gating command.
Example:
The complement of Byte B6 and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte
B8.

Byte B6 = B6 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 LN B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 10110110
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00001000
Line 1: The inverted contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Word Accumulator.

3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S-COMPLEMENT (L)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: L (LOAD MINUS)

Execution time [s] ---- 0.5 to 1.6 0.5 to 0.7 0.2 to 0.3
Number of bytes ---- 8 6 8
Operation:
The contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) are loaded into the Word
Accumulator as a two's complement. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to
the sign bit. The two's complement allows negative numbers to be stored. i.e. a number loaded with
the L- command appears in the Accumulator with an inverted sign.
This command may only be used with Word execution.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 is to be negated, added to Byte B6 and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state: Byte B5 = 15 (dec)

Byte B6 = 20 (dec)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 L B5 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 (15) (+15) 00001111
2 + B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5) (+20) 00010100
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5) (+5) 00000101
To aid understanding of this example, the contents of the Accumulator and operands are shown as
decimal values in parentheses.
Line 1: The contents of Byte B5 are loaded into the Accumulator and the sign of the value is
inverted.
Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Byte B8.

3.1.4 LOAD BYTE (LB)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: LB (LOAD BYTE)
Execution time [s] 10.8 to 12.5

Number of bytes 18
Operation:
With the command LB, 8 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
are loaded into the Word Accumulator. Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator. The
designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator, the designated address + 1 the
LSB + 1 and so on. In this way, the last affected operand occupies the MSB!
If necessary, the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit.
3.1.5 LOAD WORD (LW)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: LW (LOAD WORD)

Number of bytes 18
Operation:
With the command LW, 16 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: LD (LOAD DOUBLE WORD)

Number of bytes 16
Operation:
With the command LD, 32 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering

Example for the Commands LB, LW and LD:
Via the Inputs I3 to I10, a binary coded value is to be read in and assigned to Byte B8 for further use.
Initial state: Input I3 = 1 Input I7 = 0

Input I4 = 1 Input I8 = 1
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 I10 I3
1 LB I3 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 01100111
7 0
2 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 01100111
Line 1: Inputs I3 to I10 are loaded into the Word Accumulator (Bit 0 to Bit 7).
Line 2: The Accumulator Contents are assigned to Byte 8.
The Commands LW and LD are processed in the same way except that 16 or 32 operands are used
accordingly.

3.1.7 ASSIGN (=)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: = (ASSIGN)

Execution time [s] 0.2 to 0.5 0.2 to 0.5 0.2 to 0.5 ----
Number of bytes 4 4 4
Logic execution with the ASSIGN command
Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Logic-Operands (M, I, O, T, C) copies the contents of the Logic
Accumulator to the addressed operand. The = command is only used at the end of a logic chain in
order that a gating result is available. The command may be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Outputs O2 and O5.

Input I5 = 0
Output O2 = ?
Output O5 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
4 = O5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.

Word execution with the ASSIGN command
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Word-Operands (B, W, D) copies the contents of the Word
Accumulator to the addressed operand. In contrast to bit processing, the = command can also be
used within a word gating chain. The command can be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
A Constant (K) and the contents of Byte B5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to
Byte B8 and Byte B10.

Constant 54 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Byte B10 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 7 0
1 L K+54 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
4 = B10 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
5 = B10 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 01010000
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator is stored in B8

3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE (B=)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: B= (ASSIGN BYTE)

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command B=, 8 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD (W=)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: W= (ASSIGN WORD)

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command W=, 16 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs,
Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The
LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated
address + 1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: D= (ASSIGN DOUBLE)

Number of bytes 14
Operation:
With the command D=, 32 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
Example:
A bit pattern, as defined in Word W8 , is to be assigned to Outputs O5 to O20.
Initial state: Word W8: 36 FF (hex)

Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W8 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00110110 11111111
O20 ... ... O5
2 W= O5 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00110110 11111111
Line 1: The contents of Word W8 are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are assigned to the Outputs O5 to O20.
The Commands B= and D= are processed in the same way except that 8 or 32 bits are used
accordingly.
3.1.11 ASSIGN NOT (=N)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: =N (STORE NOT)
Logic processing
Operation:
An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a logic operand (M,I,O,T,C) copies the one's complement of the
contents of the logic accumulator to the addressed operand.
For example see ASSIGN command (=).
Word processing
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a word operand (B,W,D) copies the one's complement of the
contents of the word accumulator to the addressed operand.
3.1.12 ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: = - (STORE MINUS)
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
An ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT copies the two's complement of the contents of the word
accumulator to the addressed operand.


3.2 Set-Commands
3.2.1 SET (S)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: S (SET)
Operand changed Operand unchanged

Execution time [s] 0.1 to 0.8 0.2 to 0.5
Number of bytes 8 (6)
Byte value in parentheses:

With certain preceding program sequences, the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command depends on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
S-command is used at the end of a logic chain so that the gating result may influence the operand.
The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and input I5 should be gated with OR.
If the gating result is 1, output O2 and marker M500 should be set.
Initial state: Input I4 =1

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 O I5 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 S O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
4 S M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The contents of the operand are loaded into the Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR.
Line 3: The gating result = 1: output O2 is set.
Line 4: The gating result = 1: marker M500 is set.

3.2.2 RESET (R)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: R (RESET)


With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command is dependent on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
R command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may influence the
operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 1, Output O2 and Marker M500 should be reset.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 R O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
4 R M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR.
Line 3: The gating result = 1: Output O2 is reset.
Line 4: The gating result = 1: Marker 500 is reset.

3.2.3 SET NOT (SN)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: SN (SET NOT)


Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0 , then the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An SN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are set.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 SN O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
4 SN M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1

Line 3: The gating result = 0: Output O2 is set.
Line 4: The gating result = 0: Marker 500 is set.

3.2.4 RESET NOT (RN)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: RN (RESET NOT)


Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0, then the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An RN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are reset.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Marker M500 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 RN O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
4 RN M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 3: The gating result = 0: Output O2 is reset.
Line 4: The gating result = 0: Marker M500 is reset.


3.3 Logic Gates
3.3.1 AND (A)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: A (AND)

Logic execution with the AND command
Operation:
This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command, i.e. the logic state of the
operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special L command.
In PLC programs for the TNC 407/TNC 415, a logic chain should always be started with a load
command (see L, LN, L).
b) Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with AND. The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0


Word execution with the AND Command
Operation:
The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand (B, W, D, K) are gated with
AND. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16
or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 of the operand
Bit 1 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 of the operand and so on.
The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 A B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00101010
3 = B8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 00100010
Line 1: The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator.


3.3.2 AND NOT (AN)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: AN (AND NOT)

Logic execution with the AND NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special LN command.
In PLC programs for the TNC 407/TNC 415 a logic chain should always be started with a load
b) Within a logic chain, the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with AND NOT.
The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =1
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 AN I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND NOT.

Word execution with the AND NOT command
Operation:
AND NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit),
8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand.
Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on.
Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.
Initial state: Word W4 = 36 AA (hex)

Word W6 = 3C 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 AN W4 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 00001000 00010100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with AND NOT.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Word W8.

3.3.3 OR (O)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: O (OR)

Logic execution with the OR command
Operation:
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with OR.
The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1


Word execution with the OR command
Operation:
OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or
32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus: Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Word W8.

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 O B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 00101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 00000000 00111110

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with OR.

3.3.4 OR NOT (ON)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: ON (OR NOT)

Logic execution with the OR NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special LN command. In PLC programs for the TNC 407/TNC 415 a
logic chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with OR NOT. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic
Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 =0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 ON I5 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR NOT.

Word execution with the OR NOT command
Operation:
OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8,
16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.

Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 ON W4 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 11111101 01110111

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with OR NOT.

3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: XO (EXCLUSIVE OR)

Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command
Operation:
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned to Output O2.

Input I5 = 1
Output O2 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 XO I5 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.

Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command
Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit;
D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned
to Word W8.
Initial state Byte B5 = 2A (hex)

Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L B6 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00110110
2 XO B5 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 00101010
3 = W8 ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 00000000 00011100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.

3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: XON (EXCLUSIVE OR NOT)

Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command
Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as a LN command, i.e. the complement of the
control which did not have the special LN command.
(M, I, O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.
Example:
Input I4 and Marker M500 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result assigned to
Output O2.

Marker M500 = 0
Output O2 =?
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 L M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
2 XON I4 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 0
3 = O2 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and the Input I4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.

Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command
Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit;
D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result
assigned to Word W8.

Word W8 = ?
Bit 31 . . . 15 7 0 15 87 0
1 L W6 ... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 00111100 00110110
2 XON W4 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 00110110 10101010
3 = W8 ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 11110101 01100011

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.


7
3.4 Arithmetic Commands 7
3.4.1 ADDITION (+)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: + (PLUS)

Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits).
Then the contents of the operand are added to the Word Accumulator. The result of the operation is
stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A constant and a stored value in Word W6 are to be added. The result is then stored in Doubleword
D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 000 (dec)

Word W6 = 200 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and operand are shown in decimal
notation.
The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents
(2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100000 1 0 0 0 0 0
2 + W6 1 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0
3 = D8 1 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and Word W6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Doubleword D8.

3.4.2 SUBTRACTION ()
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: (MINUS)

Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are subtracted from the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A stored value in Word W6 is to be subtracted from a Constant. The result is then stored in
Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 000 (dec)

Word W6 = 200 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal
notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100000 1 0 0 0 0 0
2 W6 9 9 8 0 0 2 0 0
3 = D8 9 9 8 0 0 9 9 8 0 0

Line 2: The contents of Word W6 are subtracted from the Accumulator.

3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION (x)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: x (MULTIPLY)

Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are multiplied with the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If the
multiplication is not correctly executed the Marker M3168 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant and a value stored in Word W6 are to be multiplied. The result is then stored in
Doubleword D8.
Initial state Constant = 100 (dec)

Word W6 = 20 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100 1 0 0
2 x W6 2 0 0 0 2 0
3 = D8 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are multiplied by the contents of Word W6.

3.4.4 DIVISION (/)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: / (DIVIDE)

An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 s.
Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits) .
Then the contents of the Word Accumulator are divided by the contents of the operand. The result
of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If the division is
not correctly executed the Marker M3169 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant is to be divided by the value stored in Word W6 . The result is then assigned to
Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Constant = 100 (dec)

Word W6 = 20 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K100 1 0 0
2 / W6 5 2 0
3 = D8 5 5

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the contents of Word W6.

3.4.5 REMAINDER (MOD)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: MOD (MODULO)

An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 s.
Operation:
Then the REMAINDER is determined from a division of the contents of the Word Accumulator by
the contents of the operand. The REMAINDER is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be
processed further. If the MOD command is not correctly executed then the Marker M3170 is set,
otherwise it is reset.
Example:
The REMAINDER of a division of the value stored in Word W6 by a constant is to be determined.
The REMAINDER is then stored in Doubleword D8.
Initial state: Word W6 = 50 (dec)

Constant K = 15 (dec)
Doubleword D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L W6 5 0
2 MOD K15 5 5 0
3 = D8 5 5

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the constant and the integer
REMAINDER is left in the Accumulator.
Line 3: The REMAINDER is assigned to Doubleword D8.

3.4.6 INCREMENT (INC)
INCREMENT Operand
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: INC
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The contents of the addressed operand increases by one.
INCREMENT Word Accumulator

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: INCW
Operation:
The contents of the word accumulator increases by one.
INCREMENT Index Register

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: INCX
Operation:
The contents of the index register increases by one.
3.4.7 DECREMENT (DEC)

DECREMENT Operand
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: DEC
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The contents of the addressed operand decreases by one.
INCREMENT Word Accumulator

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: DECW
Operation:
The contents of the word accumulator decreases by one.
INCREMENT Index Register

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: DECX
Operation:
The contents of the index register decreases by one.


3.5 Comparisons
3.5.1 EQUAL TO (==)

Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: == (EQUAL)
Byte/Word/Double Constant
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs. The contents of the
Word Accumulator and the contents of the addressed operand are compared. If the Word
Accumulator and the operand are equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place over the number
of bits corresponding to the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the contents of Doubleword D8. The result is then assigned to
Marker M500.
Initial state: Constant = 16 000

Doubleword D8 = 15 000
The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator
allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents (2 147 483 647).
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 == D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
3 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Doubleword D8 are compared
( Accumulator = Operand ? ).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator (The result of the comparison) are
assigned to Marker M500.

3.5.2 LESS THAN (<)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: < (LESS THAN)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand. If the Word
Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is smaller or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and
D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 < D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared
(Accumulator < Operand ?).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.

3.5.3 GREATER THAN (>)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: > (GREATER THAN)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Accumulator is greater than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 > D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator
> Operand ? ). As this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.

3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor: <= (LESS EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is
set to 1. If the Word Accumulator is greater than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 <= D8 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x 0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator <=
Operand). As this condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.

3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >= (GREATER EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator is
greater than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If
the Word Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit, W=16 bit
and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the content of Doubleword D8. The result is then assigned to
marker M500.

Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand Content
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 >= D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the
following criteria: Word Accumulator >= Operand. As this condition is fulfilled, the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1.
Line 3: The content of the Logic Accumulator (result of the comparison) is assigned to marker
M500.

3.5.6 UNEQUAL (<>)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <> (NOT EQUAL)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator and
the operand are not equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If the Word
Accumulator is equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place
over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit,W=16 bit and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
marker M500.
Output state Constant = 16 000

Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand

Content
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L K16000 1 6 0 0 0
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
1 <> D8 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1 5 0 0 0
2 = M500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: Contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the following
criteria: Word Accumulator <> Operand. If this condition is fulfilled, the Logic Accumulator
is set to 1.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator [result of the comparison] is assigned to
marker M500.


3.6 Parentheses with logical gating
Execution time and code length are summarised respectively for the "open-parentheses" and
corresponding "close-parentheses" commands.
3.6.1 AND [ ] (A[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: A[ ] (AND [ ])
Logic Byte/Word/Double
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: AN[ ] (AND NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.3 OR [ ] (O[ ])
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: O[ ] (OR [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: ON[ ] (OR NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none

3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ])
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: XO[ ] (EXCL: OR [ ])
Number of bytes 6 6
Operands: none
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: XON[ ] (EXCL: OR NOT [ ])
Number of bytes 8 8
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Logic Commands:

The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-
parentheses" command loads the contents of the Accumulator onto the Program Stack. If the Logic
Accumulator is addressed in the previous command, prior to a "parentheses-open" instruction, the
content of the Logic Accumulator is loaded into the Program Stack. By addressing the Word
Accumulator, the content of the Word Accumulator will be distributed.
The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the Logic Accumulator and/or the Word Accumulator, depending on which Accumulator was
addressed prior to the "parentheses-open" instruction. The result is then available in the
corresponding Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.

Examples for the commands AND [ ], AND NOT [ ], OR [ ], OR NOT [ ], EXCLUSIVE OR [ ],
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ]. With the use of parentheses, an instruction listing may be developed
according to the following logic block-diagram.
M500
OR
M501
AND O12
I0
OR
I1
Initial state: Marker M500 = 0Input I0 = 0 Output O12 = ?

Marker M501 = 1Input I1 = 1
bit 31 7 0
2 O M501 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
3 A [ ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
6 ] ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
7 = O12 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Program-stack:
xxxxxxxx 1 xxxxxxx
bit 15 7 0
Line 1: Marker state M500 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The Logic Accumulator is gated with Marker M501.
Line 3: Open parentheses: the Accumulator contents are buffered on the Program Stack.
Line 4: Input state I0 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 5: The Logic Accumulator is gated with Input I1.
Line 6: Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated with the content of the Program Stack,
according to the command (A[, O[, NO[ ...).
Line 7: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Output O12.

Note:
The functional sequence is in principle the same for word execution, with the exception that the
whole Accumulator is written onto the Stack.


3.7 Parentheses with arithmetic Commands
Execution time and code length are summarised respectively for the "open-parentheses" and
corresponding "close-parentheses" commands.
3.7.1 ADD [ ] (+[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: + [ ] (PLUS [ ])
Execution time [s] ----- 0.9 to 2.2
Number of bytes ----- 6
Operands: none
3.7.2 SUBTRACT [ ] ([ ])
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: [ ] (MINUS [ ])
Operands: none
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: x [ ] (MULTIPLY [ ])
Operands: none
Marker M3168 is set if an error occurs.
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] (/[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: / [ ] (DIVIDE [ ])
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 s.
Operands: none

3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ])
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: MOD [ ] (MODULO [ ])
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 s.
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Arithmetic Commands:

With arithmetic commands, only word execution comes into question. The execution sequence in a
ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-parentheses" command loads the
content of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. Then the Accumulator is available for the
calculation of intermediate results. The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the
buffered value from the Program Stack with the content of the Word Accumulator. The result is
again loaded into the Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.
Example for the commands ADD [ ], SUBTRACT [ ], MULTIPLY [ ], DIVIDE [ ], DIVISION

REMAINDER [ ]
The following example demonstrates how parentheses influence the result of the operation.
Initial state: Constant = 1000 (decimal)

DoublewordD12 = 15000 (decimal)
DoublewordD36 = 100 (decimal)
DoublewordD100 =?
The specification of Accumulator and operand contents is given in decimal notation. The ten-place
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of (2 147 483 647).

Command sequence without parentheses:
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 + K1000 1 6 0 0 0
3 / D36 1 6 0 1 0 0
4 = D100 1 6 0 1 0 0
Command sequence with parentheses:
x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 + [ 1 5 0 0 0
3 L K1000 1 0 0 0
4 / D36 1 0 1 0 0
5 ] 1 5 0 1 0
6 = D100 1 5 0 1 0 1 5 0 1 0
Program-stack:
1 5 0 0 0
Line 1: The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 2: Open parentheses: buffer the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
Line 3: A constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 4: The content of the Word Accumulator is divided by the content of Doubleword D12.
Line 5: Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the command
(+[, -[, x[ ...) with the content of the Program Stack.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Doubleword D100.


3.8 Parentheses with comparison Commands
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open-parenthesis" and the
corresponding "close-parenthesis" commands.
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: == [ ] (EQUAL [ ])
Execution time [s] ---- 0.5 to 0.8
Number of bytes ---- 6
Operands: none
3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: < [ ] (LESS THAN [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: > [ ] (GREATER THAN [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <= [ ] (LESS EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none

3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ])
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >= [ ] (GREATER EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ])

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <> [ ] (NOT EQUAL [ ])
Operands: none
Function of parentheses with comparison commands:

The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-
parentheses" command loads the contents of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. The
Accumulator is now available for the calculation of intermediate results.
The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the content of the complete Word Accumulator. The result is loaded again into the
Accumulator. The maximum nesting depth is 16 parentheses.
A direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place with comparison commands. If the
comparison condition is "true", the Logic Accumulator is set to "1". If the condition is not fulfilled, the
Logic Accumulator is set to "0".
Example:
Initial state: Constant = 1000 (decimal)

Doubleword D12 = 15000 (decimal)
Doubleword D36 = 10 (decimal)
Output O15 =?
The Accumulator contents and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of 2 147 483 647.
The Accumulator is again represented in binary notation after program line 5, as the transition to
logic execution occurs here.

x x x x x x x x x x
1 L D12 1 5 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0
2 >= [ 1 5 0 0 0
3 L K1000 1 0 0 0
4 x D36 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
bit 31 . . . 7 0
5 ] x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
6 = O15 x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
Program-stack:
1 5 0 0 0
Line 1: The content of Doubleword D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Line 2: Open parentheses: buffering of the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
Line 3: Loading of a Constant into the Word Accumulator.
Line 4: The content of the Word Accumulator is multiplied by the content of Doubleword D12.
Line 5: Close parentheses: Word Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the
command(==[, >=[, <=[ ...) with the content of the Program Stack . The transition from
Word to Logic processing occurs in this program line. The Logic Accumulator is set or
reset, depending on the result of the comparison.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to output O15.


3.9 Shift Commands
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT (<<)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: << (SHIFT LEFT)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT LEFT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be multiplied by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the left. The result must lie in the
range of 2 147 483 648 to +2 147 483 647, otherwise the Accumulator contains an undefined value.
The number of shift events is defined by the operand. The Accumulator is filled on the right side
with nulls.
Initial state: Doubleword D8 = 3E 80 (hex)

Doubleword D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation, and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx
1 L D8 00000000 00000000 00111110 10000000 00 00 3E 80
2 << K+1 00000000 00000000 01111101 00000000
3 << K+1 00000000 00000000 11111010 00000000
4 << K+1 00000000 00000001 11110100 00000000
5 << K+1 00000000 00000011 11101000 00000000
6 = D12 00000000 00000011 11101000 00000000 00 03 E8 00
Line 1: Load Doubleword D8 into the Accumulator.

Line 2 to 5: The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the left by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command << K+4.
Line 6: The result is stored in the Doubleword D12.

3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT (>>)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >> (SHIFT RIGHT)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT RIGHT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be divided by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the right. The number of the shift
operations is determined via the operand. Thus the set bits, which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to
the right, are lost; the Accumulator is filled according to the sign, from the left-hand side. With operand
contents greater than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division
(operand value)/32.
Example:
The content of the Doubleword D8 is to be shifted four times to the right and then stored in D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
Line Instruction Accumulator Content Operand

Content
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
1 L D8 00000000 00000000 00111110 10000000 00 00 3E 80
2 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000
3 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00001111 10100000
4 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00000111 11010000
5 >> K1 00000000 00000000 00000011 11101000
6 = D12 00000000 00000000 00000011 11101000 00 00 03 E8

Line 2 to 5: The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the right by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command >> K+4.
Line 6: The result is stored in Doubleword D12.


7
3.10 Bit Commands
3.10.1 BIT SET (BS)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BS (BIT SET)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "1"
through the use of the BS command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant. In the bit-numbering, bit 0 corresponds to
the LSB and bit 31 the MSB. For operand contents larger than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is
used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand value)/32.
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, set the bit 0 of the Accumulator to "1" and store the result
in Doubleword D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 80 00 00 3E 80
2 BS K+0 00 00 3E 81
3 = D12 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to 1.

3.10.2 BIT RESET (BC)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BC (BIT CLEAR)
Number of bytes 6 8
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "0"
through the use of the BC command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, set bit 0 of the Accumulator to "0" and store the result in
Doubleword D12.

Doubleword D12 = ?
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81
2 BC K+0 00 00 3E 80
3 = D12 00 00 3E 80 00 00 3E 80

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to "0".

3.10.3 BIT TEST (BT)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: BT (BIT TEST)
Number of bytes 8 0
Operation:
With this command, the status of each individual bit in the Accumulator may be interrogated. With
BT commands, a direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place. The BIT TEST tests the
status of a bit from the Word Accumulator and then acts correspondingly on the Logic Accumulator.
If the tested bit is "1", then the Logic Accumulator is also set to "1"; if it is "0" ,it is set to "0". The
program continues in logic execution. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
Example:
Load Doubleword D8 in the Accumulator, and assign the logic state of bit 0 to an Output.

Output O12 = ?
Word Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation, the Logic
Accumulator in binary representation.
xx xx xx xx
1 L D8 00 00 3E 81 00 00 3E 81
2 BT K+0 00 00 3E 81
3 = O12 x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is tested as to its status.
Line 3: The Logic Accumulator is assigned to Output O12.


3.11 Stack Operations
It should be noted that with Stack operations all read/write operations on the Data Stack take place
according to the LIFO principle (Last In First Out).
3.11.1 Load Data onto the Data Stack (PS)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PS (PUSH)

Logic Execution with the PS Command
Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed operand is loaded onto the Data
Stack. Since the Data Stack is organised as 16 bit, a minimum width of one Word must be used in
writing to it. During this the operand value is copied into bit 7 of the current address in the Data
Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack
overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15 7 0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x
Word Execution with the PS Command
Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed memory area (B, W, D, K) is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. With Word execution, two Words are reserved as
standard on the Data Stack per PS command. The operand is extended in the Stack with sign
justification corresponding to the MSB. In the event of a Stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack upon saving of:
Bit 31 15 7 0
Byte X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X B B B B B B B B
Word X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X W WW WW WW W W W W WW WW W
Doubleword DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Constant K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

3.11.2 Acquire Data from the Data Stack (PL)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PL (PULL)

Execution time [s] 1.1 to 1.5 0.9 to 1.3 0.9 to 1.3 ----
Number of bytes 20 20 18 ----
Logic Execution with the PL Command
Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With logic execution, bit 7 is copied from the current address
of the Data Stack into the addressed operand with a PL command. If the Stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
Logic Execution with the PL Command
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With Word execution, two Words are copied from the current
address of the Data Stack into the addressed memory area with a PL command. If the Stack is
empty, an error message will be issued.
3.11.3 Load Logic Accumulator onto the Data Stack (PSL)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PSL (PUSH LOGICACCU)

Number of bytes 20
Operands: none
Operation:
The Logic Accumulator can be buffered with the PSL command. For this purpose, the Logic
Accumulator is loaded onto the Data Stack. Since the Data Stack is organised as 16 bits, it must be
written to with a minimum width of one Word. During this the content of the Logic Accumulator is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are
undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15 7 0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x

3.11.4 Load Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack (PSW)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PSW (PUSH WORDACCU)

Number of bytes 20
Operands: none
Operation:
The content of the Word Accumulator can be buffered with the PSW command. For this purpose,
the Word Accumulator is copied into the Data Stack. The content of the Word Accumulator (32 bit)
reserves two Words on the Data Stack. In the event of a stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
3.11.5 Acquire Logic Accumulator from the Data Stack (PLL)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PLL (PULL LOGICACCU)

Number of bytes 16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLL command complements the PSL command. With a PLL instruction, bit 7 from the current
address of the Data Stack is copied into the Logic Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
3.11.6 Acquire Word Accumulator from the Data Stack (PLW)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: PLW (PULL WORDACCU)

Number of bytes 16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLW command complements the PSW command. With a PLW instruction, two Words are
copied from the Data Stack into the Word Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error message will
be issued.

Examples for the commands PS, PL, PSL, PSW, PLL, PLW
The Module 15 is to be called at a specific point in the program. After the return into the main
program, the original Accumulator content is again required for further program run.
Accumulator contents prior to the Call Module: 1A 44 3E 18
Line Instruction Accumulator Contents

.
.
49 . 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
50 PSW 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
52 CM 15
54 PLW 1 A 4 4 3 E 1 8
55 .
.
.
Data stack:
1 A 4 4
3 E 1 8
Line 50: Save the Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack.
Line 52: Subprogram 15 is called up.
Line 54: The original Accumulator contents are transferred back from the Data Stack and
is available for further program run.
Note:
The sequence for stack operations is the same for all commands. Only the data width varies.


3.12 Jump Commands
3.12.1 Unconditional Jump (JP)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JP (JUMP)
Jump processed Jump not processed

Execution time [s] 0.6 to 1.0 ----
Number of bytes 8
Operands: jump address (LBL)
Operation:
A JP command instructs the processor to continue the program at the specified jump address
(Label). This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JPT (JUMP IF TRUE)

Byte information in brackets:
A shorter command is employed in certain high-priority program sequences.
Operation:
A JPT command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "0" the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: JPF (JUMP IF FALSE)

Operation:
A JPF command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.

Example for the commands JP, JPT, JPF
A certain program section is to be skipped, depending on Input 15.
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 JPT 10 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
3 L I3
4 O M500
5 = O20
6 LBL 10

Line 1: Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.

Line 2: Dependent on Input I5, a program jump is processed.
Line 3: Skipped in this example.
Line 6: Jump address: The program run is continued from here.

3.12.4 Call Module (CM)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CM (CALL MODULE)

Number of bytes 22
Special Library Call:
Number of bytes 24
Operation:
A Call Module instructs the processor to leave the main program and process the Module
designated by the jump address (LBL). Modules are independent subprograms and are terminated
by the command EM. They can also be called at multiple points in the main program. This command
interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CMT (CALL MODULE IF TRUE)

Number of bytes 28

Operation:
A CMT command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.

3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CMF (CALL MODULE IF FALSE)

Number of bytes 28

Operation:
A CMF command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
Example for the commands CM, CMT, CMF
A certain Module is to be called, depending on Input I5.
Bit 31 . . . 7 0
2 CMF 10 ... x x x x x x 0 x x x x x x x

499 EM
500 LBL 10
502 OM 500 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
503 = O20 ... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x 1
504 EM

Line 1: Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.
Line 2: Dependent on Input I5, the Call Module is processed.
Line 499: End Module of the main program.
Line 500: Start of the Module, identified by LBL.
Line 501: Instruction in the subprogram.
Line 504: End Module: Effects the return to the main program.
Line 3: The main program continues at this point once the Module is processed.

3.12.7 End of Module, Program End (EM)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: EM (END OF MODULE)

Number of bytes 4
Operands: none
Operation:
Every program and/or every subprogram (Module) is terminated with an EM command. An EM
command in a Module initiates the return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF). The program is
continued with the instruction following the Call Module. The command EM is handled as program
end criterion; thus subsequent program instructions can be reached using a jump address.
3.12.8 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (EMT)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: EMT (END OF MODULE IF TRUE)
Operation:
An EMT command only initiates a return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF) when the Logic
Accumulator is "1".
3.12.9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (EMF)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: EMF (END OF MODULE IF FALSE)
Operation:
An EMF command only initiates a return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF) when the Logic
Accumulator is "0".
3.12.10 Jump Label (LBL)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: LBL (LABEL)
Execution time [s] 0

Number of bytes 0
Operands: ASCII name (up to 32 characters long)
Operation:
The jump label defines a program position as an entry point for the CM and JP commands. Jump
labels may be allocated addresses in the range 0 to 511. Up to 1000 jump labels per file can be
defined.
The ASCII name of the jump label may be up to 32 characters long, but only the first 16 characters
are used to distinguish jump labels.
For importing global jump labels, see EXTERN instruction.


3.13 INDEX-Register
Under the control of the PLC programmer this register can be used for data transfer, intermediate
storage of results and for index addressing of operands. The register is 32 bits wide but only the
lower 16 bits are used for index addressing. The X register can be used anywhere in the program
there is no contents validity check however there is a check for address space overflow with
indexed write accesses.
Example: = B100[X]
X can assume values from -100 to +923 which corresponds to addressing the complete available
address space for the Byte operand type. If the address space is overshot the error message
"ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 56" flashes in the display. Reset with END to display the error line in the
PLC Editor.
Before using a command with the index-register it must be assigned a defined value. At the
beginning of each PLC cycle the index register is set to 0.
The following operands can be addressed.
Mn[X]
In[X]
On[X]
Cn[X]
Tn[X] Operand number = n+X
Bn[X] Operand number = n+X

Wn[X] Operand number = n+2*X
Dn[X] Operand number = n+4*X
Sn[X] String number = n+X

S#Dn[X] Dialogue text number = n+X
S#En[X] Error text number = n+X
Sn^X Substring from X-th characters of n-th string
The types S"", K and K$ cannot be indexed.

Caution: When addressing S#Dn[X] and S#En[X] the sequence Dnnn or Ennn is
loaded in the string accumulator, with nnn as the modified string number!

Commands for operating the Index Register:
The following commands have been introduced to permit data interchange between the Word
Accumulator and the Index Register or between the Stack and Index Register:
LX (Load Index to Accu) Index Register --> Word Accumulator

=X (Store Accu to Index) Word Accumulator --> Index Register
PSX (Push Index Register) Index Register --> Stack
PLX (Pull Index Register) Stack --> Index Register
INCX (Increment Index Register)
DECX (Decrement Index Register)

3.14 Commands for STRING Execution
STRING execution allows the creation and manipulation of any texts via the PLC program. These
texts may be displayed in the PLC window of the screen by the use of Module 9082, and/or deleted
again with Module 9080 (refer to PLC modules). A STRING Accumulator and four STRING memories
are provided in the control for STRING execution. A maximum of 128 characters may be loaded into
this.
STRING accumulator: 128 Characters
1 128
STRING memory: 128 Characters
1 128
S0
S1
S2
S3
Example:
1 128
C O O L A N T 1 O N
STRING Accumulator and STRING memory are volatile, and so are again deleted upon powering off.
For STRING execution, the new operand "S" has been introduced. The operand "S" may be used with
various arguments.
Explanation of the Operand:
The operand "S" is only used in STRING execution. The following locations may be addressed with
the various arguments:
STRING memory: Should a STRING memory be addressed, the number of the required memory
(S0-S3) must be specified after the Operand-Designation.
Part of a STRING: If only part of a STRING is to be addressed, then this can be done by addressing
Sn^X (see INDEX REGISTER).
The substring will be addressed from the X-th character in the specified STRING.
Immediate STRING: A STRING can also be entered directly into the PLC program. The Text
STRING, which may contain 0 37 characters, must be identified by quotation marks.
Example: S "COOLANT 1 ON"
Text from the PLC-Error Message files and/or from the PLC-Dialogue files: Text from the active
error message or dialogue files may be read by the input of the line number.

PLC-ERROR: S#Exx xx: Line Number from the PLC-Error Message file (0 to 999)
PLC-DIALOG: S#Dxx xx: Line Number from the PLC-Dialogue file (0 to 4095)
The character sequence #Exx or #Dxx is entered in the Argument <arg> for the STRING-Command.
A 5 Byte long character train E0xx or D0xx is loaded into the Accumulator ( 
= ASCII ). Instead of this character train, the line xx of the active error message or dialogue
file is read for display on the screen.
Note:
The execution times depend on the length of the STRINGS. The specified times indicate maximum
values. For the Immediate STRINGS, the length "n" of the STRINGS must respectively be added to
the command length; should this be odd, the next larger even length must be added.
3.14.1 LOAD (L)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: L (LOAD)
Execution time [s] < 80

Number of bytes STRING memory: 10
Immediate STRING: 18 + n
STRING from error message or dialogue files 24
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
The STRING Accumulator is loaded with this L command. The selection of the STRINGS to be
loaded, proceeds using the Argument <arg> after the operand designation.
Refer also to operand explanation.
3.14.2 ADD (+)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: +

Number of bytes STRING memory: 10
Immediate STRING: 18 + n
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command another STRING is added to the STRING in the STRING Accumulator. The
selection of the STRINGS, which should be added, proceeds using the Argument <arg> after the
operand designation. Refer also to operand explanation. The resultant STRING must not be longer
than 128 characters.

3.14.3 Storing a STRING (=)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: =

Number of bytes STRING memory 10
Immediate STRING
STRING from error message or dialogue files
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With the = command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory. The
selection of the memory, into which the STRING should be copied, proceeds using the Argument
<arg> after the operand designation. Whereby only the Arguments 0 3, which address a STRING
memory (S0 S3) are valid here.
3.14.4 Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: OVWR (OVERWRITE)

Immediate STRING
STRING from error message or dialogue files
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With the OVWR command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory.
This command functions in a similar manner to the = command, with the difference that the
character "STRING-End" is not transferred alongside. By this means, the beginning of a STRING
which is already in the STRING memory, can be overwritten.
The selection of the memory, into which the STRING should be copied, proceeds using the
Argument <arg> after the operand designation. Whereby only the Arguments 0 3, which address a
STRING memory (S0 S3) are valid here.

Example of STRING execution:
A STRING from the STRING memory S0 is to be added to an Immediate STRING. This STRING must
overwrite the contents STRING memory S1.
Initial condition: Immediate STRING: HYDRAULICS

STRING memory S0: OIL
STRING memory S1: NO COOLANT
1 128
S0 O I L
S1 N O C O O L A N T
S2
S3
Line Instruction STRING Accumulator
1 128
1 L S "HYDRAULICS" H Y D R A U L I C S
2 + S0 H Y D R A U L I C S O I L
3 OVWR S1 H Y D R A U L I C S O I L
Final condition: 128

S0 O I L
S1 N O H Y D R A U L I C S O I L
S2
S3
Line 1: Load the immediate STRING into the STRING accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the STRING memory S0 is added to the contents of the STRING accumulator.
Line 3: The STRING accumulator overwrites the contents of the STRING memory S1.


3.15 Logical Comparisons in STRING Execution
Two STRINGS are compared according to the argument as follows:
If STRING memory or Immediate STRING are entered in the command, both STRINGS are compared
character for character. The Logic Accumulator is reset after the first character for which the comparison
conditions are not fulfilled. The remaining characters are checked no further. For the purposes of
comparison, the number of the character in the ASCII table is always used. This results in, for example:
A A
If PLC-Error messages or PLC-Dialogue texts are entered, the position in the file (0 to 4095) is
compared, not the actual text as with Immediate STRING.
The execution times depend on the length of the STRINGS. The quoted times represent maximum
values. With the Immediate STRINGS, the length "n" of the STRINGS respectively must be added to
the command length. In the event that this is odd, the next larger even-numbered length must be
added.
3.15.1 EQUAL TO (==)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: == (EQUAL)

Immediate STRING 20 + n
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command a direct transition from STRING- to logic execution takes place. The content of
the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument.
If the STRING Accumulator and the operand are equal, the condition is true and the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1. If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
3.15.2 LESS THAN (<)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: < (LESS THAN)

Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command a direct transition from STRING to Logic execution takes place. The content of
the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument. If the STRING Accumulator
is smaller than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If the STRING
Accumulator is greater than or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.

3.15.3 GREATER THAN (>)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: > (GREATER THAN)

Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command a direct transition from STRING- to logic execution takes place. The content of the
STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument.
If the STRING Accumulator is greater than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is
set to 1. If the STRING Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
3.15.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <= (LESS EQUAL)

Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument.
If the STRING Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1. If the STRING Accumulator is greater than the operand the Logic Accumulator is
set to 0.
3.15.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: >= (GREATER EQUAL)

Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument. If the STRING Accumulator is
greater than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If the
STRING Accumulator is less than the operand the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.

3.15.6 UNEQUAL (<>)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: <> (NOT EQUAL)

Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command a direct transition from STRING- to logic execution takes place. The content of
the STRING Accumulator is compared with the STRING in the Argument.
If the STRING Accumulator is not equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1. If the STRING Accumulator is equal to the operand the Logic Accumulator is
set to 0.
Example of STRING execution

An Immediate STRING is to be compared with the content of the STRING-Memory S0. Depending
on the comparison result, Module 50 is called.
Initial state: STRING memory S0: SPINDLE 2

Immediate STRING: SPINDLE 1
1 128
S0 S P I N D L E 2
S1
Line Instruction STRING Accumulator

1 128
1 L S "SPINDLE 1" S P I N D L E 1
2 <> S0 S P I N D L E 2
3 CMT 50 bit 31 ... 7 0

...xxxxxx 1 xxxxxx
Line 1: Load the Immediate STRING into the STRING Accumulator.

Line 2: The content of the STRING Accumulator is compared with the content of the STRING
memory S0 according to the command.
Line 3: Since the result of the comparison is "true", the Logic Accumulator is set and the Call
Module is processed.


3.16 Submit Programs
Submit programs are subprograms which the PLC submits to the NC for processing. This allows
tasks to be performed which are very processor-intensive, require program loops or must wait for
external results. It is assumed, however, that these programs are not bound by a particular time
frame. Depending on processor loading, each Submit program is allocated a certain computing
power, but always at least 5% of the total power. Submit programs are started from the PLC
program and can access all the same data memories (M/B/W/D) as can the main program. This can
lead to problems in certain circumstances. Such problems can be avoided if the data processed by
the PLC program are clearly separated from the data processed by the Submit program.
Up to eight Submit programs can be entered in a queue (Submit Queue). Each receives an
"Identifier", a number between 1 and 255 allocated by the NC, which is transferred into the Word
Accumulator. With this "Identifier" and the REPLY function, it can be interrogated whether or not the
program is in the queue, is being processed or is already complete. The Submit programs are
executed in the order of their placement in the queue. Should an error occur during the execution of
the Submit programs, the following Markers are set:
M3168: Overflow during Multiplication

M3169: Division by 0
M3170: MODULO incorrectly executed
M3171: Error status for PLC module
M3172: Reserved for errors, which the PLC programmer would like to intercept
These markers are listed separately in the submit job. This means that the same markers can be
edited as those in the PLC run program without changing the original markers.
Exact times cannot be given for the commands for the management of the Submit queue. The
execution times denote maximum values.
3.16.1 Call up of the Submit Program (SUBM)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: SUBM (SUBMIT)

Number of bytes 10
Operation:
The SUBM command allots an "Identifier" (1 to 255) to the subprogram, designated by the jump
address (LBL). Simultaneously, the allocated number is written to the Word Accumulator. If there
are already programs transferred into the Submit queue, the addressed program will not be
processed until the program immediately prior to it is finished. A submission to the queue may only
take place from a PLC program, a SUBM command in a Submit program is not possible.
If no location is free in the queue, or if the SUBM command is programmed in a Submit program
(nesting), a "0" will be returned to the Word Accumulator.

3.16.2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program (RPLY)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: RPLY (REPLY)
Execution time [s] <5

Number of bytes 10
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
With the RPLY command the Status of the Submit program is interrogated with the specified
Identifier. This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte, Word or Doubleword prior to the calling up
of the Submit program. With the RPLY command and the memory address specified above, which
contains the Identifier, one of the following messages about the status is transferred to the Word
Accumulator:
Word Accumulator 0: Program complete/not in the queue

Word Accumulator 1: Program running
Word Accumulator 2: Program in the queue
3.16.3 Cancellation of a Submit Program (CAN)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CAN (CANCEL)

Number of bytes 10
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
With the CAN command the Submit-Program with the specified Identifier is cancelled during
execution or removed from the queue. This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte, Word or
Doubleword prior to the calling up of the Submit-Program. After the cancellation of the Program, the
next Submit program in the queue will immediately be processed.
The following PLC modules cannot be cancelled with CANCEL at any desired point:
PLC module for access to the screen (908X).
PLC module for reading NC files (909X).
In these cases, the RPLY command must be used to check whether or not the CAN command may
be used.

Example of the use of the SUBM command:
Dependent on Input I10 the subprogram with the Label LBL 300 is handed over to the NC for
processing. In addition, the execution of the subprogram is checked in the main program with the
RPLY command and cancelled with the CAN command in conjunction with Input I11.
Line Instruction Program Comments:

1 L I10 ;Interrogate state of Input I10
2 JPF 100 ;Dependent on Input I10 skip
;Call Module
3 RPLY B 128 ;Interrogate status of the Submit program
4 <> K+0 ;Submit program already transferred to
;the NC for processing ?
5 JPT 100 ;If program already transferred to the NC,
;renewed program call skipped
6 SUBM 300 ;Call up Submit program
7 = B 128 ;Store Identifier in Byte 128
8 LBL 100 ;Jump address
9 L I 11 ;Interrogate state of Input I11
10 JPF 110 ;Dependent on Input I11, skip the deletion
;of the Submit program
11 CAN B 128 ;Interrupt execution of the Submit program
;or remove program from the queue
12 LBL 110 ;Jump address
;Continuation
;Main program
;
XX EM ;End main program
XX LBL 300 ;Begin Submit program (is added as with Modules

XX ;at the end of the main program)
XX ;
XX ;
XX EM ;End Submit program
In this case, the contents of the Submit program could, for example, be a display in the PLC
window, which can be done via a fixed PLC Module.


3.17 Constants Field (KF)
The Constants Field data type can be used to access one of several constants defined in tabular
form, depending on the value of the Index Register X.
Addressing is with KF Name[X], where 'Name' is a jump label that identifies the beginning of the
Constants Field.
Constants Fields start with the label KFIELD Name followed by a random (not zero) number of
constants followed by the end label ENDK. Constants Fields may only be created when the program
has been previously terminated with an EM or JP instruction.
The name of the Constants Fields conforms to the rules for jump labels.
Example:
L KF VALUESFIELD ;ACCESS TO VALUESFIELD WITH
VALUESFIELD[X]
;X=[0 TO 3]
= W0 ONE OF THE CONSTANTS IS
STORED
EM
KFIELD VALUESFIELD
K+10 CONSTANT TO BE LOADED IF X=0
K+1
K$ABC
K-100000 CONSTANT TO BE LOADED IF X=3
ENDK
Access to Constants Fields is checked in the same way as write access to indexed operands. This is
why X may only assume positive values from 0 to "Length of Constants Field -1".
3.18 Program Structures

A program is split up into program sequences so as to make it clearer. To do this the programmer
uses jump labels (LBL) and conditional and unconditional jumps.
When structured instructions are used, the jump labels and jump commands are created by the
Compiler. Remember that internal jump labels are generated to implement these structured
commands, so the total number of available jump labels will be reduced accordingly. Structured
instructions can be nested to up to 16 levels but there must be no "interleaving".
Right: IFT Wrong: IFT

... ...
WHILEF WHILEF
... ...
ENDW END
... ...
ENDI ENDW
Instructions IFT, IFF, WHILET, WHILEF, ENDW, UNTILT and UNTILF require a valid gating result in
the Logic Accumulator. They terminate the gating chain.
Instructions ELSE, ENDI and REPEAT require all gating chains to be terminated first.

3.18.1 IF ... ELSE ... ENDI Structure
The IF ... ELSE ... ENDI structure permits the alternative processing of two program branches
depending on the value in the Logic Accumulator. The ELSE branch can be omitted. The following
commands are available:
IFT (If Logic Accu True) Following code only if Logic Accumulator=1
IFF (If Logic Accu False) Following code only if Logic Accumulator=0
ELSE (else) Following code only if IF not fulfilled
ENDI (End of IF-Structure) End of IF Structure
Example:
L I0
IFT ;If Logic Accu=1
.... ;Program code for I0 = 1
ELSE ; can be omitted
.... ;Program code for I0 = 0 can be omitted

ENDI ;end of conditional processing
Internal jump labels are generated for the IF and ELSE instructions.
3.18.2 REPEAT ... UNTIL Structure

The REPEAT ... UNTIL structure repeats a program sequence until a condition is fulfilled.
Under no circumstances must this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC program to
happen!
The following commands are available:
REPEAT (Repeat) Repeat program sequence from here

UNTILT (Until True) Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator=1
UNTILF (Until False) Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator=0
A REPEAT ... UNTIL loop is always run at least once!
Example:
= M100 ;end of previous chain
REPEAT ;repeat following code
..... ;code to be executed
LX ;load Index Register
>= K100 ;check Index Register
UNTILT ;repeat until X>=100
An internal jump label is generated for the REPEAT ... UNTIL structure.

3.18.3 WHILE ... ENDW Structure
The WHILE ... ENDW structure repeats a program sequence if a condition is fulfilled.
Under no circumstances must this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC program to
happen!
The following commands are available:
WHILET (While True) Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator=1

WHILEF (While False) Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator=0
ENDW (End While) End of program sequence, go back to beginning
A WHILE ... ENDW loop is only run when the WHILE condition is fulfilled at the beginning. The
execution condition must be repeated before the ENDW instruction. The condition can also be
repeated differently than before the WHILE instruction!
Example:
.....
L M100 ;create condition for 1st WHILE scan
WHILET ;execute following code if Logic Accumulator = 1
..... ;code to be executed
L M101 ;create condition for repeat processing
A M102 ;next condition
ENDW ;return to WHILE scan
Two internal jump labels are generated for the WHILE ... ENDW structure.
3.18.4 CASE Branch

Indexed Module Call (CASE)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: CASE (CASE OF)
Byte Word
Number of bytes 46 44
4 bytes must be added to the length for each entry in the jump table (CM).
Operands: B, W
Operation:
The CASE command is used to select a defined subprogram from a list of module calls (CM). These
CM commands come directly after the CASE command and are numbered internally in ascending
order from 0 to 127 maximum. The content of the operand (B, W) addresses the desired module.

End of Indexed Module Call (ENDC)
Abbreviation for PLC Editor: ENDC (ENDCASE)
Byte Word
Execution time [s] 0 0
Number of bytes 0 0
Operands: none
Operation:
The ENDC command is used together with the CASE command. It must come directly after the list
of CM commands.
Structure of a CASE instruction:
Internal addressing (0 to 127 max.)

1 CASE B 150
2 CM 100 <------- (0)
3 CM 200 <------- (1)
4 CM 201 <------- (2)
5 CM 202 <------- (3)
6 CM 203 <------- (4)
7 CM 204 <------- (5)
8 CM 300 <------- (6)
9 ENDC
Line 1: Command + Operand; the internal address of the required module must be filed in the
operand
Line 2: Call Module if operand content 0
Line 9: End of CASE instruction

3.19 Linking Files
The source code of the PLC program can be stored in several different files that are managed with
the USES, GLOBAL and EXTERN commands. These must be written at the beginning of the file, i.e.
before any PLC instruction.
The USES command links another file to the program.

The GLOBAL command supplies a jump label from its own file as an entry that can be used by all
other files.
The EXTERN command supplies a jump label defined in another file where it is declared as GLOBAL
for use in its own file.
Splitting the source code up into a number of files helps improve clarity and overview by swapping
out individual function groups.
The number of possible jump labels increases dramatically because the maximum of 1000 jump
labels can be used for each individual file. This means a theoretical number of 60,000 jump labels for
60 files.
In all, up to 64 files can be linked to form a program. Each file can generate up to 64 K of code. The
total potential length of the code is limited to 128 K (TNC 407: 64 K).
Where several files exist, the main program must have the status flag "M" in the directory. In the
RAM this is done by selecting the PLC program function "COMPILE" once, in the EPROM it is done
by specifying the /M option after the main program in the Linker file for binary output.
3.19.1 USES Instruction

The USES instruction links other files to the main program. Files linked with USES can also link other
files with the USES instruction. It is also acceptable for one file to be linked by several other files
with USES, and code for that file is only generated once.
The USES instruction requires a file name as its argument.
Linking files from the RAM is not allowed when executing from the EPROM (MP4010 = 0).
When executing from the RAM (MP4010 = 1) the file is searched first in the RAM and then in the
EPROM.
The USES instruction only links the file, the program code for the file is not executed, i.e. USES
cannot be compared to a CM instruction. The linked files must therefore contain individual modules
which can then be called with CM instructions.

Example:
USES PLCMOD1 ;module depends on MP4010 from RAM or EPROM

USES EPRUPG ;
USES RAMPLC ;
Example of file linking:
PLCMAIN.PLC
;main program
USES SPINDEL.PLC
USES TCHANGE.PLC
;code
TCHANGE.PLC SPINDEL.PLC
;tool change ;spindle control
USES PLCUPG.PLC USES PLCUPG.PLC
;code ;code
PLCUPG.PLC
;general subprograms
;Code
3.19.2 GLOBAL Instruction

Up to 1000 local jump labels can be defined in each of the files linked with USES.
Modules defined in one file must be defined globally before they can be called from another file.
This is done with the GLOBAL instruction at the beginning of the file.
Jump labels can only be defined globally when they are defined as LBL later on in the program (and
not as KFIELD!).
Syntax:
GLOBAL jump label ;declaration of "jump label" beyond the file boundary
GLOBAL definitions must not be written in the main program. A single jump label cannot be
declared globally by more than one module, however a name that has been declared globally by file
A can be used again locally in file B.
In all, 1000 jump labels can be defined globally by all modules.

3.19.3 EXTERN Instruction
For a jump label to be able to access in one file modules which other files have declared as
GLOBAL, it must be declared as EXTERN. The EXTERN instruction must be written at the beginning
of the file.
The commands CM, CMT and CMF can then jump to this label in the program code.
The instructions JP, JPT, JPF, access to a Constants Field and linking with CM to a CASE Branch are
not possible with external jump labels.
The name of the jump label cannot be assigned again in this file for a local jump label. Every external
jump label reduces the number of available local jump labels.
Syntax:
EXTERN Jump label ;the "Jump Label" Module can now be called from another file
with the CM instruction.


7
73 Commands

4 PLC Modules
A number of PLC modules are available for PLC functions that cannot be executed or which are very
complicated to execute with PLC commands. The error status is displayed after execution of the
module in Marker 3171.
4.1 Marker, Byte, Word, Doubleword
4.1.1 Copy in Marker or Word Range (Module 9000/9001)

Modules 9000 (Marker) and 9001 (Byte/Word/Double) copy a block with a certain number of markers
or bytes beginning from the start address to the specified target address.
For module 9001 the length should always be defined in bytes.
Constraints:
- Copying is sequential, starting with the first memory cell. This means that the function is not
guaranteed when the source and destination blocks overlap and the source block begins at a lower
address than the destination block. In this case the overlapping part of the source block is
overwritten before copying takes place.
Possible errors:
- A block of the defined length cannot be read from the defined address in the marker or word RAM
(address is too high or block is too long).
- A block of the defined length cannot be written to the defined address in the marker or word RAM
(address is too high or block is too long).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number 1st marker source block>

PS B/W/D/K <Number 1st marker destination block>
PS B/W/D/K <Length of block in markers>
CM 9000 Transfer in marker range
or
PS B/W/D/K <Number 1st byte source block>

PS B/W/D/K <Number 1st byte destination block>
PS B/W/D/K <Length of block in bytes>
CM 9001 Transfer in word range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Block was transferred

1: Error conditions see above
7-136 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 01.98

4.1.2 Read in Word Range (Module 9010/9011/9012)
A byte, word or doubleword is read from the defined position in the word memory and returned to
the stack as an output variable. Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable
as the name of the memory cell.
Possible errors:
- The defined address is outside the valid range (0..1023).
- Module 9011: The defined address is not a word address (not divisible by 2).
- Module 9012: The defined address is not a doubleword address (not divisible by 4).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of byte to be read> (Address)

CM 9010 read byte
PL B <byte read> (Value)
or
PS B/W/D/K <Number of word to be read> (Address)

CM 9011 read word
PL W <word read> (Value)
or
PS B/W/D/K <Number of doubleword to be read> (Address)

CM 9012 read doubleword
PL D <doubleword read> (Value)
Example of Module 9010
Wortspeicher STACK
B10 35 ..
.
35 (80) PS B10
CM9010
B35 80
PL
.. B100
.
B100 80
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Byte/word/doubleword was read

1: Error condition see above
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 PLC Modules 7-137

4.1.3 Write in Word Range (Module 9020/9021/9022)
The defined byte, word or doubleword is written to the defined position in the word memory.
Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable as the name of the memory cell.
Possible errors:
- The defined address is outside the valid range (0..1023).
- Module 9021: The defined address is not a word address (not divisible by 2).
- Module 9022: The defined address is not a doubleword address (not divisible by 4).
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of byte to be written> (Address)

PS B/W/D/K <byte to be written>
CM 9020 write byte (Value)
or
PS B/W/D/K <Number of word to be written> (Address)

CM 9021 write word (Value)
or
PS B/W/D/K <Number of doubleword to be written> (Address)

CM 9022 write doubleword (Value)
Example of Module 9020
Wortspeicher STACK
B10 35 ..
.
120 PS B10
PS B100
B35 120 35
CM9020
..
.
B100 120
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Byte/word/doubleword was written


4.2 Machine Parameters
4.2.1 Overwrite Machine Parameter (Module 9031)

Overwrites the value of a machine parameter that is defined by its number and index.
Constraints:
- The value of the machine parameter must be specified as an integer, with the decimal point
shifted by the number of possible places after the decimal. Example: to set MP910.0 to 100.12
mm write 1001200 (four places after the decimal lead to a multiplication by 10000).
- Only the value in the run-time memory is modified, the value in the editable machine parameter list
does not change. This means that the old value is valid again after editing and escaping from the
machine parameter list.
- Zero must be given as the index for non-indexed machine parameters.
- Once the NC program has started the module only operates during the output of M/G/S/T/T2/Q
strobes.
- Not every MP can be modified by the PLC. The machine parameters that can be modified by the
PLC are marked "PLC" in the chapter "Machine Parameters".
Possible errors:
- The machine parameter specified by the MP number and index does not exist.
- The specified MP cannot be modified by the PLC or not once the NC program has started.
- The module was not called from a Submit Job.
- The module was called after the NC program started without a strobe marker being active.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <MP Number>

PS B/W/D/K <MP Index>
PS B/W/D <MP Value>
CM 9031
PL B/W/D <Error Code>
0: No error
1: MP does not exist/not modifiable/not
modifiable once PC PGM has started
2: MP value out of range
3: Error when saving (Fatal Error)
4: Call was not from SUBMIT Job
5: Call once PGM started without strobe
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: MP was written


4.2.2 Read Machine Parameter (Module 9032)
Reads the value of a machine parameter that is defined by its number and index from the editable
machine parameter list.
Constraints:
- The value of the machine parameter is returned as an integer, with the decimal point being shifted
by the number of possible places after the decimal. Example MP910.0 = 100.12 mm is read as
1001200 (four places after the decimal lead to a multiplication by 10000).
- Only the value from the editable machine parameter list is read, not any value in the run-time
memory modified by PLC Module 9031.
- Zero must be given as the index for non-indexed machine parameters.
Possible errors:
- The machine parameter specified by the MP number and index does not exist.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <MP Number>

PS B/W/D/K <MP Index>
CM 9032
PL B/W/D <MP value> / <Error Code>
1: No such MP number
2: No separator
3: MP value out of range
4: MP not in file
5: No MP file found
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: MP was read

4.2.3 Select Machine Parameter File (Module 9033)

The machine parameter file with the specified name is selected (M status assigned) and a control
reset is executed if another file was previously selected.
Constraints:
- The module can only be called from a SUBMIT Job.
- The module disregards any safety problems when initiating the control reset (e.g. free run-out of
axes and spindle).
- The module can only be used on files in the RAM.
- The new MP file to be selected is checked, a faulty file is not selected.
- There is no return to the calling PLC program if file selection is successful.
- The file name is specified in a string that must contain the file name with extension. Additional
characters (including blanks) are not allowed.
- If the PLC program is created externally ensure that lower-case letters are not used for the file
name.
- Once the NC program has started the module only operates during the output of M/G/S/T/T2/Q
strobes.

Possible errors:
- The module was not called from a SUBMIT Job.
- The specified string does not conform to the above conventions.
- There is no file with the specified name.
- The file to be selected is faulty.
- The module was called after the NC program started without a strobe marker being active.
- An incorrect string number was specified (out of range 0..3)
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <String Number>
CM 9033 Warning: Program execution ends here if a new

file is selected
PL B/W/D <Error Code>

0: No error, file was already selected
1: String contains no valid file name
2: File not found
3: File is faulty
4: Wrong string number specified (0..3)
5: Call was not from a SUBMIT Job
6: Call once PGM started without strobe
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: File was already selected

4.3 Status and Coordinates
4.3.1 Read Status Information (Module 9035)

Status information can be read with module 9035. A number is specified that identifies the desired
information.
The following status information is available:
Specified number: Values read:
0 Main mode Editor 0 - Edit

1 - Test run
1 Main mode 0 - Approach reference points
Machine 1 - Manual mode
2 - Electronic handwheel
3 - Positioning with manual input
4 - Program run/single block
5 - Program run/full sequence

2 Overlaid 0 - None (main mode active)
Editor mode 1 - Mode active
2 - Directory/Ext screen active
3 - MP Editor active
4 - PLC Editor active
3 Overlaid 0 - None (main mode active)

Machine mode 1 - Mode active
2 - Directory/Ext screen active
3 - Tool Editor active
4 Displayed screen Bit-coded

window Bit #0..#7: Editing screen:
#0 =1: Editing screen displayed
#1 =1: Window mode active
#2 =1: Block display/program select/
setup window active
#3 =1: Position display active
#4 =1: PLC status window active
#5 =1: Status/Graphics window active
#6/#7: spare
Bit #8..#15: Machine screen
#8 =1: Machine screen displayed
#9 =1: Mode window active
#10=1: Block display/program select/setup
window active
#11=1: Position display active
#12=1: PLC status window active
#13=1: Status/Graphics window active
#14/#15: spare
5 Selected file in 0 - No file

edit/test run 1 -.H (plain language NC PGM)
2 -.I (ISO NC PGM)
3 -.T (TOOL table)
4 -.D (Datum table)
5 -.P (Pallet table)
6 -.A (ASCII file)
7 -.S (Compensation table)
6 Selected file 0 - No file

in single block / full 1 - .H (plain language NC PGM)
sequence 2 - .I (ISO NC PGM)
7 Selected axis 0 - X axis

Editor (for actual 1 - Y axis
value transfer) 2 - Z axis
3 - 4th axis
4 - 5th axis
8 Selected axis See above

Machine (for actual
value transfer)

9 Handwheel axis -1 - None or several
0 - X axis
1 - Y axis
2 - Z axis
3 - 4th axis
4 - 5th axis
10 Handwheel axes Bit #0 =1 - X axis controlled by handwheel

bit coded Bit #1 =1 - Y axis controlled by handwheel
Bit #2 =1 - Z axis controlled by handwheel
Bit #3 =1 - 4th axis controlled by handwheel
Bit #4 =1 - 5th axis controlled by handwheel
11 Handwheel 0..10
subdivision factor X axis
12 Handwheel 0..10
subdivision factor Y axis
13 Handwheel 0..10
subdivision factor Z axis
14 Handwheel 0..10
subdivision factor 4th axis
15 Handwheel 0..10
subdivision factor 5th axis
16 Input format of $MDI 0 = .H file

file 1 = .I file
17 Display units 0 = MM
1 = INCH
18 Working plane Bit0 = 1 Tilting is active
Bit1 = 1 Tilting is selected for manual operation
Bit2 = 1 Tilting selected for program run
Possible errors:
- The specified input parameter describes none of the status information available in the software
version used.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of desired status information>

CM 9035
PL B/W/D <Status Information>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status information was read

1: Wrong number specified

4.3.2 Write Status Information (Module 9036)
NC status information that is not protected by a checksum can be modified. The information to be
overwritten is identified by a specified number. The following status information can be modified:
Specified Function Value

number
0 Handwheel interpolation X 0 to 10
1 Handwheel interpolation Y 0 to 10
2 Handwheel interpolation Z 0 to 10
3 Handwheel interpolation 4 0 to 10
4 Handwheel interpolation 5 0 to 10
5 Handwheel interpolation all axes 0 to 10
6 Select handwheel axis 0= Axis X
(MP7640 = 0 to 4) 1= Axis Y
2= Axis Z
3= 4th axis
4= 5th axis
7 to 9 Reserved
10 Limit for jog increment 0 to 50 mm = limit for jog
increment
1, <2 or >50 = cancel the
limit and activate the last jog
increment entered
2 = cancel the limit and enter
the minimum of the last jog
increment and the last limit
value
Constraints:
- Handwheel subdivision factors are limited to the lowest possible value according to the rapid
traverse of the corresponding axis. There is no error message however.
- A handwheel subdivision can only be specified by MP7641=1.
- The value for the jog increment limit is transmitted in units of 1/10 000 mm
- After power switch-on the jog increment limit is always erased
- If the jog increment limit is entered in inches, the limit value [] for rotary axes is calculated from
the limit value in millimeters divided by 24.5.
- The input parameter "Number of status information" does not identify status information that can
be overwritten in this software version.
- The specified value is outside the range valid for this status information.
- The entry of this status information is disabled, e.g. by machine parameters.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of status information>
PS B/W/D/K <value to be written>
CM 9036
PL B/W/D <Error identifier> 0: Status written
1: Wrong status identifier
2: Specified value out of range
3: Entry disabled (e.g. by MP)
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status was written


4.3.3 Read Coordinates (Module 9040/9041/9042)
Module 9040: PLC reads axis coordinates ( Format: 0.001 mm)
Module 9040 downloads axis coordinates for all NC axes from the control loop. The values are filed
in 5 doublewords in the format 1/1000 mm starting with the specified target address.
Constraints:
- The values for all axes are always downloaded irrespective of whether individual axes are disabled
by machine parameter MP10. The values for disabled axes are undefined.
- Before the reference point is traversed on an axis the coordinate value of that axis is undefined.
Possible errors:
- The argument for the coordinate type is outside the permitted range.
- The specified target address is not a doubleword address (i.e. not divisible by 4).
- 5 doublewords cannot be written at the specified target address (target address too big).
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Target address Dxxx>
PS K/B/W/D <Coordinate type>
0 = Actual value
1 = Nominal value
2 = Actual value in reference system
3 = Trailing error
4 = Distance to go
5 = Deflection (measuring touch probe)
6 = Actual values in the shifted datum system (datum shift)
CM 9040
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Data was read

1: Faulty call data
Module 9041: PLC reads axis coordinates (Format: 0.0001 mm)
Module 9041 downloads axis coordinates for all NC axes from the control loop. The values are filed
in 5 doublewords in the format 1/10000 mm starting with the specified target address.
Constraints:
- The values for all axes are always downloaded irrespective of whether individual axes are disabled
by machine parameter MP10. The values for disabled axes are undefined.
- Before the reference point is traversed on an axis the coordinate value of that axis is undefined.

Possible errors:
- The argument for the coordinate type is outside the permitted range.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Target address Dxxx>

PS K/B/W/D 0 = Actual value
1 = Nominal value
2 = Actual value in reference system
3 = Trailing error
4 = Distance to go
5 = Deflection (measuring touch probe)
6 = Actual values in the shifted datum system (datum shift)
CM 9041
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Data were read

1: Faulty call data
Module 9042: PLC reads spindle coordinates
The coordinates for actual value, nominal value, actual value in reference system, trailing error and
distance-to-go of the spindle are filed in 5 consecutive doublewords starting from the specified
target address. The data for actual, nominal and reference values are standardized to 0..+360.000
degrees, the data for trailing error and distance to go are displayed between -2879.912 degrees and
+2879.912 degrees. The display is in 1/1000th degree format.
Constraints:
- All coordinates are read as 0 when MP3010 < 6 (not a controlled spindle).
- During operation as an analogue spindle (M3/M4 active or M5 and spindle control not active) the
nominal value equals the actual value. Trailing error and distance to go are 0.
Possible errors:
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Target address Dxxx>

CM 9042
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Spindle coordinates were read

1: Faulty call data

4.4 Number Conversion
4.4.1 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII (Module 9050)

Converts a binary numerical value consisting of mantissa and exponent to the base 10 to an ASCII-
coded decimal number.
The number specified as mantissa and exponent is converted to a decimal number and stored at the
specified address as a string. The exponent relates to the lowest-value place in the number. A
negative number is detected when the mantissa corresponds to a negative number in the notation
as a two's complement. A sign is only set in front of negative numbers. Trailing zeroes after the
decimal point or leading zeroes before the decimal point are not converted, the string is written left-
justified starting from the specified target address in the string buffer.
Constraints:
- The decimal sign is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a decimal comma (MP7280 = 0) or
a decimal point (MP7280 = 1).
Possible errors:
- The number of the target string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- The conversion would result in more than 10 places after the decimal point.
- The conversion would result in more than 10 places before the decimal point.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Mantissa of numerical value to be converted>

PS K/B/W/D <Exponent to base 10 of the value>
PS K/B/W/D <Number of target string>
CM 9050
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Number was converted

Examples:
Mantissa Exponent Decimal number

123 0 "123"
-123 0 "-123"
123 2 "12300"
123 -3 "0.123"
123456 -3 "123.456"
123 -5 "0.00123"
100 -3 "0.1"
1234567890 -11 "0.0123456789"
123 -11 Error: more than 10 places after decimal
point
123456789 1 "1234567890"
123 8 Error: more than 10 places before decimal
point

4.4.2 Number Conversion Binary to ASCII (Module 9051)
Converts a binary numerical value to an ASCII-coded decimal number in the format specified.
The specified number is converted to a decimal number and stored as a string in the specified
address.
The number is notated as a two's complement. When notated without a sign the absolute amount
of the number is converted without a sign being put before the string. With the signed notation a
sign ("+" or "-") is placed before the string in any event.
With the inch notation the numerical value is divided by 25.4 before being converted. If the number
has more decimal places than the total of specified places before and after the decimal point, then
the highest-value decimal places are omitted. With right-justified notation leading zeroes before the
decimal point are replaced by blanks, with left-justified notation they are suppressed. Trailing zeroes
after the decimal point are always converted.
Constraints:
- The decimal sign is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a decimal comma (MP7280 = 0) or
a decimal point (MP7280 = 1).
Possible errors:
- The number of the target string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- There are more than 16 decimal places in all (before and after decimal point).
- No places before the decimal point are specified.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <numerical value to be converted>

PS K/B/W/D <display mode (bit coded)>
Bit #3: display with sign
Bit #2: display converted to INCH
Bit #1/#0: Format
00: Sign and number left-justified
1: Sign left-justified, number right-justified
10: Sign and number right-justified
11: Not permitted
PS K/B/W/D <Number of places after the decimal point>

PS K/B/W/D <Number of places before the decimal point>
PS K/B/W/D <Target address in string buffer>
CM 9051
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Number was converted


Examples:
Binary Mode Before After Dec. Number

value Dec. Dec.
123 0 3 0 "123"
123 0 3 2 "1.23"
123 8 3 2 "+1.23"
123 9 3 2 "+ 1.23"
123 10 3 2 " +1.23"
254 0 3 1 "254.0"
254 4 3 1 "10.0"
1000 9 3 3 "+ 1.000"
-1000 9 3 3 "- 1.000"
123456 0 3 0 "456"
4.4.2 Number Conversion ASCII to Binary (Module 9052)

Converts an ASCII coded decimal number (possibly with places after the decimal point) into a
mantissa and an exponent to the base 10.
The string identified by the source string number is read and converted to a signed number and an
exponent to the base 10. If the sign is missing the number is detected as positive. Both the comma
and the point are accepted as the decimal character. If the full extent of the mantissa cannot be
notated in a doubleword then the last places are omitted and the exponent corrected accordingly. If
possible the exponent is adjusted to correspond with the ASCII notation of the number.
Possible errors:
- The number of the source string is outside the valid range (0..3).
- The source string does not contain a string that can be interpreted as a number.
- The string overflows the end of the string buffer, 128 characters were read without an end of
string being found.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Number of source string>

CM 9052
PL B/W/D <Numerical value>
PL B/W/D <Exponent 10Exx>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String was converted


4.4.4 Conversion Binary to ASCII/Hexadecimal (Module 9053)
Converts a block of binary values from the word marker range into a string of ASCII coded
hexadecimal numbers.
The specified number of bytes is read from the place specified by the source address and converted
to a hexadecimal-coded ASCII string. Each byte in the source block makes 2 characters in the
destination string. the destination string is identified by the destination string number.
Possible errors:
- The address for the source block is outside the range 0 to 1023.
- The number of the destination string is outside the valid range (0..3).
Call:
PS K/B/W/D <Source address in Word-RAM>

PS K/B/W/D <Number of destination string>
PS K/B/W/D <Number of data bytes>
CM 9053
Example:
S0 = Hex 63 6 3
B0 = 99 0110 0011
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String was converted

4.4.5 Conversion ASCII/Hexadecimal to Binary (Module 9054)

Converts a string of ASCII coded hexadecimal values to a block of binary values in the word marker
range.
The string in the string buffer with the specified number is interpreted as a chain of ASCII coded
hexadecimal numbers and converted into a block of corresponding binary bytes. Two ASCII
characters make one binary byte. The binary block is stored in the word marker range starting from
the specified destination address.
Possible errors:
- The number of the source string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- The address for the destination block is outside the range 0 to 1023.
- The source string contains characters that cannot be interpreted as hexadecimal values (different
characters 0..9, A..F).
- The source string contains an uneven number of characters (the last byte is not fully defined).
- The destination block has no room at the specified address.

Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Destination address in Word-RAM>
CM 9054
Example:
S0 = Hex 63 6 3
B0 = 99 0110 0011
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Binary block was converted

4.5 String Processing
4.5.1 Copying a Number from a String (Module 9070)

Searches for a numerical value in the source string in the string buffer with the specified source
string number. The first numerical value found is copied as a string to the string identified by the
destination string number.
Any conflict between source and destination strings is not checked, the source string is overwritten
if necessary (but the module will still function in this case). The module recognizes signed and
unsigned numbers with and without places after the decimal point. Both the comma and the point
are accepted as the decimal character. The distance (in characters) of the first character after the
number found in the source string is also recorded.
Possible errors:
- The numbers of source or destination string are outside the valid range (0..3).
- There is no number in the specified source string.
- The source string has been searched without an end of string being found.
- The found number string is longer than 79 characters, i.e. internal overflow.
Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Number of destination string>
CM 9070
PL B/W/D <Offset end of number string in source string>

Example:
Beispiel: 1 11
S0 X - P O S . : 1 2 3
S1 1 2 3 1 1 STACK
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Number was transferred

4.5.2 Compute String Length (Module 9071)

Computes the length of the string with the specified number in the string buffer.
Possible errors:
- The number of the source string is outside the valid range (0..3).
- The source string has been searched without an end of string (<NUL>) being found.
Call:

CM 9071
PL B/W/D <Length of string>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String length was computed

1: Error conditions see above
4.6 PLC Window
4.6.1 Delete PLC Window (Module 9080)

Deletes the screen window for the PLC status display. The background color of the window is
defined in machine parameter MP7320.2 or MP7356.0.
Constraints:
- This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
The module is also active when the currently selected screen shows no PLC status window (e.g.
large graphic displays) or when the screen with PLC status window is in the background.
Possible errors:
- The module has not been called from a SUBMIT Job.

Call:
CM 9080
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Screen window was deleted

4.6.2 Interrogate PLC Window (Module 9081)

Interrogates the status of the screen window for the PLC status display.
The status is transferred bit-coded to the stack. Bit #0 is set when a window for PLC status display
is on the selected screen. This is not the case with a full-page graphic display, when a program is
selected or in the MOD operating mode. Bit #1 is set when the screen with the PLC status window
is in the foreground. All other bits are cancelled.
Call:
CM 9081
PL B/W/D <Status of screen window>
Marker M3171 is not affected.
4.6.3 Display String (Module 9082)

Displays a string in the screen window for the PLC status display at the specified position and in the
specified color.
The string that is identified by the string number and which ends on the ASCII character <NUL> is
displayed in the screen window for the PLC status display on line 0 (top line) or 1 (bottom line) and
from column 0 (left margin) to 37 (right margin) in the specified color (1 to 15).
Line 0
Line 1
Column 0 37
References to PLC dialogues or PLC error messages are deleted. If the specified dialogue or error
number is greater than the length of the corresponding file, then ASCII character `@' is displayed
instead . If the text contains a non-displayable character except the string end, then ASCII character
`^' is displayed instead.
Constraints:
- The character set that is used is determined by the size of the screen window, i.e. the current
operating mode, and cannot be modified. The color refers to one of the machine parameters
MP735x or MP732x and can be seen from the following table:

Color 1: MP7354.0 or MP7320.1
Color 2: MP7356.0 or MP7320.2
Color 3: MP7352.0 or MP732x.3 depending on the displayed graphics
Color 8: MP7350 or MP7320.8
Color 9: MP7357.1 or MP7320.9
Color 10: MP7354.1 or MP7320.10
Color 11: MP7356.2 or MP7320.11
Color 12: MP7356.1 or MP7320.12
Color 13: MP7354.2 or MP7320.13
Color 14: MP7352.2 or MP7320.14
Color 15: MP7351 or MP7320.15
Colors 1 to 5 (or 1, 2 and 4 with NC software 24305 and 24307) are background colors and contrast
poorly. Color 2 in particular is the background color for the PLC window and so cannot be used as a
foreground color in this window. Colors 11 and 12 are the foreground colors that go with background
color 2 depending on how the machine parameters are grouped, and should therefore be given
preference for displaying dialogues and status information. The NC control uses color 15 to display
error messages and is therefore recommended for displaying alarms and error conditions.
If color 0 is specified, then the text appears in the same color as the last displayed character.
Because the complete line is always displayed again in the window when a string is displayed (even
when a column greater than 0 is specified), a text (e.g. "Spindle Output") with the color 0 is always
displayed in the color of the numerical value to its left (e.g. color 11 when output is under 110% and
color 15 when output is over 110%) even though PLC Module 9082 only displays the numerical
value again. If the color 0 is specified for the first characters on a line however, then the color in
which these characters are displayed is not defined and can change between two displays of the
line.
When PLC Module 9082 is used in conjunction with software 24305 or 24307, the display of colors
3 to 7 varies with the selected graphics. These colors should therefore be avoided where possible to
prevent the display changing when different graphics are selected. This problem does not arise with
NC software releases 25996, 24302 and 25993.
If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC status display (window is not opened or in
background) the module will run through normally and the string is not displayed until the
corresponding screen window is displayed again and provided the string has not been overwritten
by a repeat call of Module 9082 in the meantime. Module 9081 can be used to check whether the
display is currently active. This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the
module in a SUBMIT Job.

Possible errors:
- A line less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified.
- A column less than 0 or greater than 37 was specified.
- The number of the string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- No end of string was found.
- The last character(s) in the string cannot be displayed in the screen window.
The string is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D Line number (0...1)

PS K/B/W/D Column number (0...37)
PS K/B/W/D Color number (0...15)
PS K/B/W/D String number (0...3)
CM 9082
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String displayed (when screen window for
PLC status is displayed)
1: No display, error condition see above
4.6.4 Display Bar Chart (Module 9083)

Displays a bar chart in the screen window for the PLC status display on the specified line, with the
specified lengths and in the specified colors.
A bar chart can be displayed in the left half of each line in the PLC status window. In this mode the
ASCII text only appears in the right half of every line (19 characters max.).
Line 0
Line 1
Column 0 150 0 19
The operator must specify the line, maximum length (0...150), current length (<= maximum length)
and the colors of the bars or the margin and scale graduation (0...15). If the maximum length
exceeds 150 it is limited to 150. If current length exceeds maximum length then it is limited to the
maximum length.
The chart comprises a rectangular grid with the maximum length and height of the ASCII characters.
A scale graduation is shown at the top after every 10 units. The bar starts from the left hand edge of
the grid. The unused part of the grid is filled in with the background color.
Constraints:
- The height of the bar chart varies according to the size of the screen window, i.e. the current
operating mode, and cannot be modified.

The specified color refers to one of the machine parameters MP735x and can be seen from the
following table:
Color 0: MP736x.0 depending on the displayed graphics

Color 1: MP7354.0
Color 2: MP7356.0
Color 3: MP7352.0
Color 4: MP7353.0
Color 5: MP7357.0
Color 6: MP7352.1
Color 7: MP7353.1
Color 8: MP7350
Color 9: MP7357.1
Color 10: MP7354.1
Color 11: MP7356.2
Color 12: MP7356.1
Color 13: MP7354.2
Color 14: MP7352.2
Color 15: MP7351
Color 2 is the background color for the screen window and can be used for margin and scale
graduations if these are not to be displayed. If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC
status display (window is not opened or in background) the module will cycle normally and the bar
chart will not be displayed until the corresponding screen window reappears and provided the chart
is not overwritten by a repeat call of Module 9083 in the meantime. Module 9081 can be used to
check whether the display is currently active. This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during
processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
Possible errors:
- A line less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified.
The bar chart is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes.
Call:
PS K/B/W/D Line number (0...1)

PS K/B/W/D Color for bar (0...15)
PS K/B/W/D Color for frame and scale graduation (0...15)
PS K/B/W/D Current length of bar (0...150)
PS K/B/W/D Maximum length of bar (0...150)
CM 9083
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String displayed (when screen window for PLC status is
displayed)
1: No display, error condition see above

4.7 Files
4.7.1 Executing a Pallet Program (Module 9090)

Selects an NC program and a datum table from a pallet file.
With module 9090 the PLC can select a block of NC files for execution. The file names must be
defined in a pallet file (.P) that must be selected by the machine (status "M" in directory). Module
9090 can only run within a SUBMIT Job in the PLC Queue.
Constraints:
- If no datum table is specified in the pallet file then the previous file is retained.
- If the file type "Datum Table" is disabled in machine parameter MP7224 then any datum table
specified in the pallet file will be ignored.
- If the file types "Plain Language NC Program" or "DIN/ISO NC Program" are disabled in machine
parameter MP7224 then the system will not search for files of this type. If a file of this type is
explicitly defined in the pallet file then the routine will report an error (NC program not found).
- This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
Possible errors:
- The module was called while an NC program was being executed.
- The control is not in the basic mode for executing NC programs (full sequence or single block
mode).
- There is no pallet file in the NC memory that bears an "M" flag in the directory.
- A line number has been specified but is not in the selected Pallet file.
- The NC program in the pallet file has an incorrect type designation or the point between filename
and file extension is missing (i.e. all extensions except ".I" or ".H" and more than 8 characters in the
filename).
- The NC program specified in the pallet file is not in the NC memory.
- The NC program name specified in the pallet file is not clear. It has no extension and the NC
memory contains both an ".H" program and an ".I" program with this name.
- The datum table (".D") specified in the pallet file is not in the NC memory.

Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Line number in pallet file>

CM 9090
PL B/W/D <Error condition>
0: Files were selected
1: Call not from SUBMIT Job
2: Call after program started
3: Control not in correct mode
4: Pallet file not found
5: No such line in pallet file
6: Wrong type of NC program or point missing
7: NC program not found
8: NC program name not clear
9: Datum table not found
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Files were selected

1: Error condition as Status word
4.7.2 Tool and Datum Table (Module 9092/9093/9094)

Module 9092: Searching for an entry in tables selected for machining (.T/.D/.TCH)
With Module 9092 values can be sought in specific columns in a table (with M status set) selected
for machining. The function supplies the number of the line in which the value is found. This makes
it possible, for example, to search for the vacant pocket (corresponding to T0) in the pocket table
(.TCH).
Constraints:
- The module can only run within a SUBMIT Job.
- The value must be entered as an integer, shifted by the number of definable places after the
decimal point.
- If the value is to be sought again, the starting line must be entered as the line in which the value
was found plus one.
Possible errors:
- There is no file of the specified type that has M status.
- The specified line number is not in the file.
- The specified file type does not exist.
- The specified element does not exist.
- The entered numerical value was not found.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <File type>
PS B/W/D/K <Element value>
PS B/W/D/K <Element number>
PS B/W/D/K <Line number for beginning the search>
CM 9092
PL B/W/D <Line number> (1, if M3171=1)
PL B/W/D <Error number>

Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Element was read
Values for file type: Values for element number for .T file:
0: .T file (Tool table) 0: Tool length
1: .D file (Datum table) 1: Tool radius
2: .TCH file (Pocket table) 2: spare
3: Replacement tool (-1 if not defined)
Values for element number for .D file: 4: spare
0: Offset X 5: Max. tool life
1: Offset Y 6: Max. tool life with Tool Call
2: Offset Z 7: Current tool life
3: Offset 4 8: 2nd tool radius
4: Offset 5 9: Allowance on tool length
10: Allowance on tool radius
Values for element number for .TCH file 11: Allowance on 2nd tool radius
(pocket table): 12: Tool disabled (0= no, 1= yes)
0: Tool number (1 if no tool entered) 13: Number of tool cutting edges (CUT)
1: Special pocket (0= no, 1= yes) 14: Tolerance for tool length (LTOL)
2: Fixed pocket (0= no, 1= yes) 15: Tolerance for tool radius (RTOL)
3: Disabled pocket (0= no, 1= yes) 16: Cutting direction of the tool (DIRECT) (0 (0 =
4: PLC status (PLC) (available for OEM) = )
17: PLC status (PLC) (available for OEM)
18: Tool length offset (TT:LOFFS)
19: Tool radius offset (TT:ROFFS)
20: Breakage tolerance for tool length (LBREAK)
21: Breakage tolerance for tool radius (RBREAK)
Error numbers:
0: No error, element was read
2: No such file type
3: No file of specified type with M status found
4: Line number not in file
5: Wrong element number
6: Element value not found
PLC Module 9093: Read data from tables selected for execution (.T/.D/.TCH)
With Module 9093 the contents of a line can be read in a table (with M status set) selected for
execution. The module must be told the identifier of the desired table, the line number (= tool
number for .T, vector number for .D or pocket number for .TCH) and the number of the element to
be read.
Constraints:
- The values are returned as integers shifted by the number of definable places after the decimal
point.
Possible errors:

Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Line number>
CM 9093
PL B/W/D <Element value>
PL B/W/D <Error number>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Element was read

Entry value as with Module 9092.
Error numbers:
0: No error, element was read
Module 9094: Write data to a Tool and Datum Table
With Module 9094 the contents of a line can be overwritten in a table (with M status set) selected
for execution. The module must be told the identifier of the desired table, the line number (= tool
number for .T, vector number for .D or pocket number for .TCH), the number of the element to be
written and the new value. Running the module 9094 results in a new initialization of the geometry.
Constraints:
- The values must be entered as integers shifted by the number of definable places after the
decimal point.
Possible errors:
- The specified value is outside the permitted range.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Line number>
PS B/W/D/K <Element value>
CM 9094
PL B/W/D <Error status>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Element was written

Entry values as for Module 9092

Error numbers:
0: No error, element was written
6: Element value is outside permitted range
4.7.3 Non-linear Axis Error Compensation (Module 9095)

Selects a line in the compensation table for non-linear axis error compensation.
The module selects the specified line in the active compensation assignment table (.CMA) as the
active line and activates the non-linear axis error compensation according to the compensation
tables entered on this line.
Constraints:
- The specified line stays selected as the active line after a control reset.
- Once an NC program starts the module only operates during the output of M/G/S/T/T2/Q strobes.
- The axis nominal values may alter slightly when the compensation table is switched over.
Possible errors:
- There is no .CMA file.
- The specified line does not exist in the selected .CMA file.
- One or more compensation tables (.COM) from the selected line do not exist.
- The module was called after the start of an NC program without any strobe marker being active.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <active line>

CM 9095
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: No error
1: Entered line does not exist
2: No such compensation table (.COM)
3: Compensation value table (.COM) has more than 256 entries
4: Permissible total number of compensation points exceeded
5: Too many compensation value tables (.COM)
6: No such .CMA file
5: Call after started PGM without Strobe
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Compensation was activated


4.8 Data Interface
The following modules enable the PLC to transfer data across the V.24/RS-232-C or V.11/RS-422
data interfaces.
(For transfer parameters see chapter entitled "Data Interface")
The PLC assigns and enables the interfaces with Modules 9100 and 9101 respectively; the current
status of the data interface can be interrogated with Module 9102.
The transmit and receive buffers for the PLC are 128 characters long. Since every STRING ends with
an END character a STRING in the transmit or receive buffer can only be up to 127 characters long.
As well as transmitting and receiving a STRING from the STRING memory (Modules 9103 and
9104), Modules 9105 and 9106 can be used to transfer a block of binary values (bytes) from the
Word memory.
However ASCII characters are transmitted and received across the interface in both instances
(STRING and binary transmission).
Example: Transferring a binary block
.
B126 11111010 = $ FA
. 10000001 = $ 81
. .
.
.
.
When transferring binary data from the Word memory from address B126 the ASCII characters "F",
"A", "8", "1" etc. are transmitted consecutively across the interface.
Since each byte contains two ASCII characters when transferring binary data, the transmit and
receive buffers are 63 bytes long.
With the help of Module 9107, when transferring binary data, each byte (two ASCII characters) can
be read from the receive buffer without the buffer being erased.

4.8.1 Assign Data Interface (Module 9100)
Module 9100 assigns one of the serial interfaces to the PLC and configures the transfer parameters.
The interface is also initialized and any errors are reset. The interface is switched to receive mode.
Once assigned to the PLC, the interface is disabled for use by the Input/Output program of the user
interface.
Constraints:
- The assignment of an interface to the PLC is cancelled when the PLC program is recompiled.
- Configuration for 19200 baud is not possible when the other interface is already configured for
38400 baud, and vice versa (irrespective of whether this interface is assigned to the PLC or the
NC).
- Module 9100 only operates within the scope of a Submit Job.
Possible errors:
- The interface is already assigned elsewhere (by the Input/Output program of the NC user
interface).
- The call parameters contain no valid values (0/1 for selecting the interface and defining the transfer
parameters).
- The required baud rate is not possible owing to the configuration of the other interface (see
Constraints).
- The Module was not called from a Submit Job.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Interface 0:RS232/1:RS422>

PS B/W/D/K <Transfer parameters 0: from MP5xxx.2 / 1:
from mode>
CM 9100
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Interface was configured for PLC
4.8.2 Enable Data Interface (Module 9101)

Module 9101 cancels the assignment of a serial interface to the PLC and reassigns it to the
Input/Output program of the NC user interface. The receive mode of the interface is cancelled.
Constraints:
Possible errors:
- The interface was not assigned to the PLC.
- The Module was not called from a Submit Job.

Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Interface 0:RS232/ 1:RS422>

CM 9101
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Interface assignment was cancelled

4.8.3 Status of Data Interface (Module 9102)

Module 9102 reads all the relevant status information about one of the two serial interfaces in bit-
coded form.
Constraints:
- The information "interface ready" is only updated when the interface is assigned to either the PLC
or the NC. If the interface is not assigned, the Module reads the status which was valid before the
last interface enable (whether by PLC or NC).
- Module 9102 can also be called from the cyclical PLC program section.
Possible errors:
- The call parameter for interface selection is outside the permitted range (0..1).
Call:

CM 9102
PL B/W/D <Interface status>
Bit 0: Interface is assigned
1: Interface is assigned to PLC
2: Interface is ready (see above)
3: Transmit buffer is empty
4: Transmit error
5: Receive buffer is full
6: Receive error
7: ETX was received (not ready to receive)
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status was read

1: Wrong call parameter

4.8.4 Transmit String across Data Interface (Module 9103)
Module 9103 transmits a string from one of the 4 string memories across one of the two serial
interfaces. References to the PLC error file and PLC dialogue file are deleted (see description of
Module 9082).
Constraints:
- The interface must be assigned to the PLC and initialized by Module 9100 before Module 9103 is
called.
Possible errors:
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range (0..1 for the interface, 0..3 for the string
number).
- The interface is not assigned to the PLC.
- The transmit buffer is not empty.
- Deleting the references to error and dialogue files has resulted in a string that is longer than 127
characters.
- A transfer error was detected when the transfer was initialized.
Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Number of source string in string buffer (0..3)>
CM 9103
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String is transmitted

4.8.5 Receive String across Data Interface (Module 9104)

With Module 9104 a string can be read from the receive buffer of an serial interface to one of the 4
string buffers and the receive buffer reset.
Constraints:
called.
Possible errors:
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range (0..1 for the interface, 0..3 for the string
number).
- There is no complete string in the receive buffer.
- The string in the receive buffer is longer than 127 characters.

Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Number of destination string in string buffer (0..3)>
CM 9104
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: String was read


4.8.6 Transmit Binary Data across Data Interface (Module 9105)
Module 9105 transmits a block of binary values from the Word RAM of the PLC to one of the two
serial interfaces. The transfer is in the form of ASCII coded hexadecimal values, so every byte in the
source block makes 2 ASCII characters at the serial interface.
Constraints:
called.
Possible errors::
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range (0..1 for the interface, 0..1023 for the start of
the binary block, 0..63 for the length of the binary block).
- The transmit buffer is not empty.
- Because of its length the binary block cannot be read from the specified address (start+length >
1024).
- A transmit error was detected when the transmission was initialized.
Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Number of 1st byte in binary block (0..1023)>
PS K/B/W/D <Length of binary block (0..63)>
CM 9105
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Hexadecimal string is transmitted

4.8.7 Receive Binary Data across Data Interface (Module 9106)

Module 9106 reads a block of binary values from one of the two serial interfaces to the Word RAM
of the PLC. The transfer is in the form of ASCII coded hexadecimal values, so every 2 ASCII
characters from the serial interface make 1 byte in the binary block. The length of the read binary
block is returned as the initial variable.
Constraints:
called.

Possible errors:
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range (0..1 for the interface, 0..1023 for the start of
the binary block).
- The receive buffer contains no data.
- The string in the receive buffer is longer than 128 characters.
- The string in the receive buffer contains an uneven number of characters.
- Because of its length the binary block cannot be written to the specified address (start+length >
1024).
- The string in the receive buffer contains characters that cannot be interpreted as ASCII coded
hexadecimal values (== 0..9,A..F).
Call:

PS K/B/W/D <Number of 1st byte in binary block (0..1023)>
CM 9106
PL B/W/D <Length of binary block in bytes>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Binary block was read

4.8.8 Read from Receive Buffer (Module 9107)

Module 9107 reads 2 ASCII characters from the receive buffer to one of the two serial interfaces
and encodes them to a binary value. It is possible to specify an offset which corresponds to the
position of the byte to be read in a binary block read by Module 9106 (i.e. half the offset in the ASCII
string). The contents of the receive buffer are retained and can be read by Modules 9104 or 9106.
Constraints:
called.
- The system does not check whether characters of the received string are still at the place in the
receive buffer indicated by the offset. If this is not the case, then an undefined value is read.
Possible errors:
- The call parameters are outside the permitted range (0..1 for the interface, 0..63 for the offset in
the binary block).
- The interface is not assigned to the PLC
- The receive buffer contains no data.
- The characters in the receive buffer cannot be interpreted as ASCII coded hexadecimal values
(== 0..9,A..F).

Call:

PS B/W/D/K <Offset of byte to be read in binary block>
CM 9107
PL B/W/D <read binary value>
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Binary value was read

4.8.9 Transmit a Message by LSV/2 (Module 9110)

With Module 9110 a message (binary data or string) can be transmitted to a host computer
connected by LSV/2 protocol.
Constraint:
- The message is transmitted to the host by the LSV/2 command "M PC<msg.I>".
Possible errors:
- The control has no LSV/2 connection to a host computer.
- The transmit buffer for the transfer is full.
- A wrong value was specified for the data type (doubleword or string).
- A wrong value was specified for the address. String: 0..3 Binary: 0..1020, divisible by 4.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Data type>

0: Binary data doubleword
1: String
PS B/W/D/K <Source address>
With binary: number of doubleword (0..1020)
With string: number of string (0..3)
CM 9110
0: Message transmitted
1: No connection to host
2: Transmit buffer full
3: Wrong data type (not 0 or 1)
4: Wrong source address
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Message downloaded


4.8.10 Read a Message by LSV/2 (Module 9111)
With Module 9111 a message (doubleword or string) that has been received from a host
computer connected by LSV/2 protocol can be read.
Constraint:
- The message must be sent from the host by the LSV/2 command "M PC<msg.I>".
Possible errors:
- The control has no LSV/2 connection to a host computer.
- There is no message of the desired type in the receive buffer.
- A wrong value was specified for the data type (doubleword or string).
- A wrong value was specified for the address. String: 0..3 Binary: 0..1020, divisible by 4.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Data type>

0: Binary data doubleword
1: String
PS B/W/D/K <Target address>
For binary: number of doubleword (0..1020)
For string: number of string (0..3)
CM 9111
0: Message was read
1: No connection to host
2: No message of this type in receive buffer
3: Wrong data type (not 0 or 1)
4: Wrong target address
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Message uploaded


4.9 PLC Axes
4.9.1 Start PLC Axis (Module 9120)

Axis positioning is started by defining a target position (in the reference system), a feed-rate and a
flag register. The axis is positioned totally independently of other control sequences, specifically
there is no contour interpolation with other axes.
Constraints:
- The specified axis must be activated by MP10 and declared by MP60 as a PLC axis.
- The values for rapid traverse, analogue voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration etc. must be set
correctly in the machine parameters.
- For axes with automatic reduction (modulo value in MP810.x) the axis always traverses to the
target position in the direction of the shorter traverse path unless the target position has been
specified as an incremental value.
- The system does not check for limit switch overshoot!
- The axis must be stationary. Any ongoing positioning must first be aborted with Module 9121.
- There is no feed-rate override.
- If the axis was previously in the "Search Reference Point" mode, this mode is cancelled.
Positioning always starts from the current register contents.
- If Modules 9120 (Start PLC Axis), 9121 (Stop PLC Axis) and 9122 (Traverse reference mark) are
called more than once for the same axis during a PLC cycle then only the last activated command
is executed.
- Any "Positioning error" status that is set in this axis is cancelled.
Possible errors:
- A non-existent axis has been specified.
- An axis has been specified that is not declared as a PLC axis by MP10 and MP60.
- An absolute target position outside the range (0 .. modulo value) has been specified for a modulo
axis.
- The axis is already positioning.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis> (0..4 for X/Y/Z/4/5)
PS B/W/D/K <Target position>
(in reference system, format 0.0001 mm)
PS B/W/D/K <Feed-rate>(mm/min)
PS B/W/D/K <Flag register>
Bit 0 = 1: Target position incremental
CM 9120
0: Positioning has started
1: Non-existent axis specified
2: Axis not configured as PLC axis
3: Axis is already positioning
4: Absolute position outside modulo range
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning has started


4.9.2 Stop PLC Axis (Module 9121)
A positioning sequence previously started with Module 9120 (Start PLC Axis) or Module 9123
(Traverse reference marks) can be aborted anywhere with Module 9121.
Constraints:
is executed.
Possible errors:
- The specified axis is already stationary.
Call:

CM 9121
0: Position is aborted
3: Axis was already stationary
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning was stopped

4.9.3 Status PLC Axis (Module 9122)

A bit-coded status word is specified for a certain axis and provides information about the current
operating mode of that axis.
Constraints:
- Status changes as a result of commands sent by the PLC to the controller of the PLC axes
(Modules 9120, 9121, 9123) are not detected until the next PLC cycle.
- After power-up Bit 1 (axis over ref.) is cancelled. It is also possible to traverse the axis without first
approaching the reference point.
Possible errors:

Call:

CM 9122
PL B/W/D <Status>
Bit 0: 1= Axis is PLC axis
Bit 1: 1= Axis already over reference point
Bit 2: 1= Axis positioning
Bit 3: 1= Direction of motion is negative
Bit 4: 1= Positioning error
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Status is reported

4.9.4 Traverse Reference Marks for PLC Axis (Module 9123)

The module starts positioning in a defined direction and continues until a reference mark is found or
positioning is aborted by Module 9121. Owing to the possible problems with locating a target
position during the reference traverse (motion reversal etc.), stopping after locating the reference
point will be unavoidable!
Constraints:
- The values for rapid traverse, analogue voltage for rapid traverse, acceleration etc. must be set
correctly in the machine parameters.
- The system does not check for limit switch overshoot!
- The axis must be stationary. Any ongoing positioning must first be aborted with Module 9121.
- There is no feed-rate override.
- The "Search Reference Point" mode is set for the axis.
- An existing reference point on this axis is cancelled but not the numerical value of the axis. This is
not re-initialized until the reference point is located.
is executed.
- Any "Positioning error" status that is set in this axis is cancelled.
- Positioning stops as soon as the reference point is reached. Depending on the braking distance of
the axis, the latter will be slightly beyond the reference point in the direction of motion.
Possible errors:
- The axis is already positioning.

Call:

PS B/W/D/K <Feed rate> (mm/min)
PS B/W/D/K <Flag register>Bit 0 = 1:negative traverse
direction
CM 9123
0: Positioning has started
3: Axis is already positioning
Error status after call: M3171 = 0: Positioning has started

4.9.5 Override for PLC-axis (Module 9124) 77
The traversing speed of a PLC axis can be influenced by setting an override value.
Constraints:
- The axis must be activated through MP10 and be declared as a PLC axis in MP60.
- The override value can lie between 0% and 100.00% (resolution 0.01%) and must be transmitted
as an integer (0 .. 10000).
- The last transmitted override value is accounted for at the beginning of movement.
- After a reset or interruption of the PLC program the override value of each PLC axis is set to
100.00%.
- The modules can also be called while a PLC axis is moving.
- The module can be called in addition to a module from the group (9120/9121/9123) in the same
PLC scan. However, it becomes effective after this module.
Possible errors:
- A non-existent axis was transferred.
- An axis was transferred that has not been declared as a PLC axis in MP10 and MP60.
- An incorrect override value was transferred.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Axis> (0..4 for X/Y/Z/IV/V)

PS B/W/D/K <Override> (Format 0.01%)
CM 9124
0: Override was set
1: Invalid axis was transferred
2: Axis not defined as PLC axis
3: Incorrect override value
Error status after call: M3171 =0: Override was set

=1: See above error conditions

4.10 Analogue voltage output (Module 9130)
With Module 9130 it is possible for the PLC to have the NC control send a voltage to an analogue
output.
Constraints:
- Only the analogue voltage for the spindle can be output. There is no access to the analogue
outputs for the NC, nor is there any access to analogue outputs for PLC axes that are driven with
Modules 9120 .. 9123.
- The voltage is output with a slight delay after the end of the PLC run. The module should be called
only once per PLC run.
- The analogue voltage for the spindle can only be output when MP3010 < 3 and MP3011 = 2.
- The voltage must be transferred in 1mV format. Voltages are limited to a value between 10 V
and 10 V.
Possible errors:
- The indicated analogue output does not exist.
- The indicated analogue output is not available for the PLC.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Number of the analogue output>

0: Analogue output for spindle
PS B/W/D/K <Analogue voltage in millivolts>
CM 9130
Error condition after call: M3171 = 0: Analogue voltage is output

1: See above error conditions

4.11 Inserting an NC block (Module 9150)
With Module 9150 is it possible to define an NC block during an active M/S/T/G/Q output from the
NC to the PLC, or also when no program has been started. The defined NC block is executed after
the acknowledgement of the M/S/T/G/Q strobe (immediately, if no PGM is started), before the
control continues with the execution the NC program.
Constraints:
- If there are several commands during a strobe output, only the last one is executed.
- If there are several commands when the spindle is stationary, it is not defined which command is
recognized.
- Erroneous parameters (e.g. incorrect tool number, non-existent file) result in a abortion of the NC
program with the corresponding error message. If the error occurs while the spindle is stationary,
there is no error message.
Possible errors:
- The call was made during a running NC program without active M/S/T/G/Q strobe.
- The call was made with an unknown command code.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Command code>

0: TOOL-CALL
PS B/W/D/K <Address of the Parameter>
Number of the first Double of the parameter block, or number of the
string
CM 9150
0: NC block was inserted
1: Running NC PGM and no strobe
2: Unknown error message
Parameter:
TOOL-CALL B<Adr> active elements bit-coded

Bit 0 =1: Transfer tool number otherwise modal
Bit 1 =1: Transfer tool axis otherwise modal
Bit 2 =1: Transfer spindle speed otherwise modal
Bit 3 =1: Transfer length oversize otherwise 0
Bit 4 =1: Transfer radius oversize otherwise 0
B<Adr+1> Tool axis (0..4 = X..V)
W<Adr+2> Tool number
D<Adr+4> Spindle speed (Format 0.001 1/min)
D<Adr+8> Length oversize (Format 0.0001 mm)
D<Adr+12>Radius oversize (Format 0.0001 mm)
Error status after call: M3171 =0: NC block was inserted

=1: See above error conditions

4.12 Spindle orientation (Module 9171)
Module 9171 makes it possible to define the velocity, angle and the direction of rotation for spindle
orientation. Marker M2712 is set as long as the spindle is being oriented.
Constraints:
- If Marker M2712 and Module 9171 are set in the same scan, the tool is oriented with the
parameters from the module call.
- If the module is called several times in the same scan, the tool is oriented with the parameters
of the last call.
- If the module is called while the tool is still being oriented from a previous PLC scan, the call is
ignored.
- The module works only in the cyclic PLC program.
- If the module is called while the spindle is turning, the transferred direction is ignored. The
spindle is always oriented in the direction in which it is already turning.
- When the values +2 to +4 are transferred it is possible to start an orientation to the angle last
defined in CYCL DEF 13. The transferred angle is added to the value from CYCL DEF 13. An
additional spindle preset, therefore, can be transferred from the PLC.
- The nominal position during tool measurement with TT 110 is transferred exactly as with CYCL
DEF 13
- If 0 is transferred as the spindle speed, the speed is taken from MP3520.1.
- The module can function only if M2719 = 1 (word processing).
Possible errors:
- The module was called from a SUBMIT Job.
- The parameter for the direction is erroneous.
- The spindle is already being oriented.
- A negative spindle speed was transferred.
Call:
PS B/W/D/K <Angle> [1/10 000 ]
or additional preset with value from CYCL DEF 13
PS B/W/D/K <RPM> [1/1 000 revolution per minute] 0 = value from MP3520.1
PS B/W/D/K <Direction of rotation> 1: Negative direction (M04)
0: Direction of the shortest path
1: Positive direction (M03)
2: Same as 1 but with angle from CYCL DEF 13
3: Same as 0 but with angle from CYCL DEF 13
4: Same as +1 but with angle from CYCL DEF 13
CM 9150
Error status after call: M3171 = 0 Spindle is being oriented (M2712 = 1)

M3171 = 1 See above error conditions

5 Compatibility with TNC 355
The marker ranges for the TNC 355 have also been used for the TNC 407 and TNC 415 to enable
PLC routines created for the TNC 355 to be run on the TNC 407 and TNC 415 as well.
However there are many functions that can be programmed much more simply with PLC words
with the TNC 407 and TNC 415. PLC marker M2719 must be set to activate the strobes for word
processing.

M2719 Deactivate the TNC 355 modules PLC PLC
0 = Activate strobes for marker range
1 = Activate strobes for word processing
M2719 = 1 M2719 = 0
Meaning Marker Data Marker Data
Start PLC-Pos. X 2704 D528 2452 M2560 to M2564
Start PLC-Pos. Y 2705 D532 2453 M2565 to M2569
Start PLC-Pos. Z 2706 D536 2454 M2570 to M2574
Start PLC-Pos. IV 2707 D540 2455 M2575 to M2579
Read out strobe for 2713 D528 2809 M2560 to M2576
values in Q
parameter (Q100
to Q107)
Read out strobe -- 1) 2599 M2560 to M2567
tool number M2112 to M2119
Read in strobe tool 1) 2598 M2560 to M2567
number M2572 to M2579
Strobe datum 2716 D528 to D540 2819 MP4210.32 to
correction MP4210.46
Spindle orientation 2712 D592 2527 M2585 to M2589
HEIDENHAIN recommend programming the PLC functions over the word range only. This makes
the PLC program easy to read and a lot shorter.
1) Module 9093/9094
7-178 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 01.98
5.1 PLC Program Conversion
PLC programs created for the TNC 355 can also be used on the TNC 407 and TNC 415.
When these PLC programs are downloaded to the TNC 407 or TNC 415 the following command
codes are automatically modified:
U A
UN AN
E I
A O
Z C
An EM block is automatically appended at the end of the PLC program.

The programmer must ensure that the PLC program starts with a logic sequence.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Compatibility with TNC 355 7-179
5.2 Compatibility Markers
The table below lists the PLC markers that have only been retained for compatibility with the TNC
355. However the various PLC functions should be programmed with the TNC 407 and TNC 415
using the appropriate PLC words.
Marker Function Set Reset TNC 407/415

M2032 T-Code 1. Bit (lsb) NC NC
M2033 T-Code 2. Bit NC NC
M2035 T-Code 4. Bit NC NC W262
M2036 T-Code 5. Bit NC NC W264
M2039 T-Code 8. Bit (msb) NC NC
M2051 Mode: Manual NC NC
M2052 Mode: Electronic handwheel NC NC
M2053 Mode: Position with manual input NC NC
M2054 Mode: Program run/Single block NC NC W272
M2055 Mode: Program run/Full sequence NC NC
M2057 Mode: Traverse reference marks NC NC
M2064 S-Code 1. Bit (lsb)
M2065 S-Code 2. Bit
M2066 S-Code 3. Bit
M2067 S-Code 4. Bit
M2068 S-Code 5. Bit W258
M2069 S-Code 6. Bit
M2070 S-Code 7. Bit
M2071 S-Code 8. Bit (msb)
M2072 M-Code 1. Bit (lsb)
M2073 M-Code 2. Bit
M2074 M-Code 3. Bit
M2075 M-Code 4. Bit
M2076 M-Code 5. Bit W260
M2077 M-Code 6. Bit
M2078 M-Code 7. Bit
M2079 M-Code 8. Bit (msb)
M2080 minimum speed from MP3020 1. Bit (lsb)
M2081 minimum speed from MP3020 2. Bit
M2082 minimum speed from MP3020 3. Bit W1008
M2087 minimum speed from MP3020 8. Bit (msb)
M2088 Increment from MP3020 1. Bit (lsb)
M2089 Increment from MP3020 2. Bit
M2090 Increment from MP3020 3. Bit
M2091 Increment from MP3020 4. Bit (msb)
M2104 G-Code S-analogue 1st Bit (lsb) W256
M2105 G-Code S-analogue 2nd Bit
M2106 G-Code S-Analogue 3rd Bit (msb)
M2112 T number (P number) decade 1 (lsb)
M2113 T number (P number) decade 1
M2115 T number (P number) decade 1 (msb) W262
M2116 T number (P number) decade 2 (lsb) W264
M2119 T number (P number) decade 2 (msb)
M2176 Mode code (lsb)
M2177 Mode code W272
M2178 Mode code
M2179 Mode code (msb)
M2186 Code number 84159 entered NC PLC D276
M2192 Markers controllable by MP4310.0, MP4310.1 and NC NC W976
to MP4310.2 to
M2239 W980
M2452 Activate PLC positioning X axis PLC NC M2704
M2453 Activate PLC positioning Y axis PLC NC M2705
M2454 Activate PLC positioning Z axis PLC NC M2706
M2455 Activate PLC positioning axis 4 PLC NC M2707
M2468 Complement PLC positioning X axis NC PLC
M2469 Complement PLC positioning Y axis NC PLC
M2470 Complement PLC positioning Z axis NC PLC
M2471 Complement PLC positioning axis 4 NC PLC
M2522 Activate PLC positioning axis 5 PLC NC M2708
M2527 Activate spindle orientation PLC NC M2712
M2538 Complement PLC positioning axis 5 NC PLC
M2543 Complement spindle orientation NC PLC
M2560 BCD numerical values for PLC positioning, tool PLC PLC D528
to number, spindle orientation and Q parameters to
M2589 D544
M2597 Tool number: output mode, 0 = binary, 1 = BCD PLC PLC
M2800 Key-Code PLC PLC W516
to
M2807
M2808 Strobe for key code PLC NC M2813
M2809 Activate numerical value transfer PLC to NC PLC PLC M2713
M2817 Q-number (lsb) PLC PLC W516
M2818 Q-number (msb) PLC PLC W516
M2819 Activate datum correction PLC NC M2716
M2832 Key code of the operated disabled key NC NC W274
to
M2839
M3200 Values from MP4310.3 to MP4310.6 NC NC W 972
to to
M3263 W 988
5.3 Incompatibility
It has not been possible to maintain compatibility in all areas of the PLC programs. This is because
the TNC 355 differs considerably from the TNC 407 and TNC 415 both in memory organization and
ergonomics.
5.3.1 PLC Macros

The following macro programs are available in the TNC 355 for controlling the tool changer.
M3264 Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code

M3265 Increment actual value of pocket number
M3266 Decrement actual value of pocket number
M3267 Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number
These macro programs are no longer available in the TNC 407 and TNC 415. The following PLC
subroutines can be used in place of the macro programs.
Convert tool number or pocket number to binary code
M2032 to M2039 -> M3024 to M3031

LBL 200 ;M3264 (TNC 355)
L W262 ;T code in binary
B= M3024 ;file in bit area
== K+0
= M3043 ;T code == 0
LB M3200 ;low byte from MP4310.3
= B255 ;load MP4310.3
LB M3024
> B255
= M3044 ;Tcode > MP4310.3 1 byte
EM
Increment actual value of pocket number
(M3032 to M3039) = (M3032 to M3039) + 1

LBL 210 ;B265 (TNC 355)
= B255 ;number of mag. pockets
LB M3032 ;actual value
+ K+1 ;increment by 1
B= M3032 ;
<= B255 ;less than or equal to actual value
JPT 211
L K+1 ;load 1 as actual value
B= M3032 ;
LBL 211
EM
Decrement actual value of pocket number
(M3032 to M3039) = (M3032 to M3039) - 1

LBL 220 ;M3266 (TNC 355)
= B255 ;number of mag. pockets
LB M3032 ;actual value
- K+1 ;decrement by 1
B= M3032 ;
> K+0
JPT 221
L B255 ;load number of mag. pockets
B= M3032 ;as actual value
LBL 221
EM
Compare actual and nominal values of pocket number
LBL230 ;M3267 (TNC 355)

LB M3032 ;read actual value from markers
= B250 ;actual value
LB M3024 ;read nominal value from markers
= B252 ;nominal value
LW M3200 ;read reduction and tool max
= W254 ;high byte reduc. byte 254, low byte max. T byte 255
L B250
== B252 ;test actual/nominal for parity
= M3040 ;actual== nominal
JPT 231 ;if actual==nominal then end
L B250 ;actual - nominal=>B248
- B252
= B248
> K+0
JPT 232
L- B248
= B248 ;B248:=Abs(actual - nominal)
LBL232
; Compute reduction
L B255
- B254
<= B248
O[
L B248
<= B254
]
= M3041 ;Reduction reached
; Compute shortest path
L B255 ;Max. tool's
>> K+1 ;DIV 2
= B255 ;Max. tool's DIV 2
L B252 ;nominal value

> B250 ;actual value
A[
L B248 ;Abs (actual - nominal)
<= B255 ;Max. tool's Div 2
]
O[
L B252 ;nominal value
< B250 ;actual value
A[
L B248 ;Abs (actual - nominal)
>= B255 ;Max. tool's Div 2
]
]
= M3042 ;direction marker
LBL231
EM
5.3.2 PLC Error Messages

The TNC 407 and TNC 415 contain dedicated files for error messages in the first dialog language and
for English error messages. File .EE1 (.ER1) or file .EEE (.ERE) is accessed depending on machine
parameters MP7230 (dialog language) and MP4010 (PLC program from RAM or EPROM). (See "PLC
Programming" Register, Chapter 1.3).
This means that, to select the appropriate error message, it is no longer necessary to interrogate the
dialog language with PLC marker M2041 as was the case with the TNC 355.
PLC marker M2041 has no function in the TNC 407 or TNC 415.
5.3.3 Mode Code

The code for the "Programming & Editing" and "Test Run" modes is no longer displayed because a
foreground and a background mode can be active in the TNC 407 and TNC 415 at the same time.
(M2176 to M2179 and W272)
5.3.4 Non-Implemented Markers
Marker Function
M2020 Spindle speed under-ranged
M2021 Nominal/actual speed difference over-ranged
M2024 Touch probe ready
M2049 Mode : Background Programming
M2050 Mode: Programming & Editing
M2056 Mode: Test program
M2060 DIN/ISO Programming
M2062 "Code number" dialog
M2063 Central tool file
M2188 Checksum error for non-volatile Q parameters
M2288 X axis was moving when program aborted
M2289 Y axis was moving when program aborted
M2290 Z axis was moving when program aborted
M2291 Axis 4 was moving when program aborted
M2292 Axis 5 was moving when program aborted
M2504 Axis clamping after constant contour transition
M2509 Activate a % factor for feed rate over-ride
M2510 Deactivate spindle over-ride
M2511 Deactivate feed rate over-ride
M2526 Switch X/Y or Z to 4th axis
M2542 Complement for M2526
M2585 PLC positioning axis S (lsb)
M2586 PLC positioning axis S
M2589 PLC positioning axis S (msb)
M2590 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis (lsb)
M2591 Define the axis to be switched to 4th axis (msb)
M2592 Tool number from M2560 to M2567
M2593 Go to Hirth grid after NC STOP
M2594 Central tool file cannot be edited
M2595 Output tool number in addition to pocket number
M2596 Select central tool file during active program run mode
M2598 Transfer tool number
M2599 Transfer tool number
M2602 Define reference point traverse
M2603 Axis sequence for reference point traverse (lsb)
M2604 Axis sequence for reference point traverse
M2607 Axis sequence for reference point traverse (msb)
M2657 Display a second auxiliary function
M2664 No standstill monitoring X axis
M2665 No standstill monitoring Y axis
M2666 No standstill monitoring Z axis
Marker Function
M2667 No standstill monitoring axis 4
M2668 No standstill monitoring axis 5
M2810 Data format of a numerical value in M2560 to M2576
M2820 Update the central tool file
M2821 Strobe for updating the central tool file
M2822 Strobe for % factor for spindle voltage
M2823 Select ramp pairs for S analogue
5.3.5 PLC Cycle Time

The contouring controls of the TNC 355, TNC 407 and TNC 415 have different PLC cycle times. This
must be remembered when using the timers and counters.
Contouring Control PLC Cycle Time

TNC 355 without 20 ms
extended memory
TNC 355 with 22 ms
extended memory
TNC 407 24 ms
TNC 415 20 ms
8Data Interface Contents
1 Introduction 8-3
1.1 Principles of data transfer 8-4
1.1.1 Serial/parallel 8-4
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format 8-5
1.1.3 Checking data 8-7
1.1.4 Data transfer rate 8-8
1.2 Handshaking 8-9
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking 8-9
1.2.2 Software handshaking 8-9
2 TNC data interfaces 8-10

2.1 General 8-10
2.2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface 8-10
2.2.1 Hardware 8-10
2.2.2 Signal levels 8-11
2.2.3 Signal designations 8-12
2.2.4 Pin layouts 8-14
2.3 RS-422/V.11 interface 8-15
2.3.1 Hardware 8-15
2.3.2 Signal levels 8-16
2.3.3 Signal designations 8-16
2.3.4 Pin layouts 8-17
2.4 Data interface functions 8-17
2.4.1 Saving/reading files 8-18
2.4.2 Output to external devices 8-19
2.4.3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs (DNC operation) 8-19
2.4.4 Communication between TNCs 8-20
2.5 Configuration of interfaces 8-21
2.5.1 Selection of interfaces 8-21
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces 8-21
2.6 External programming 8-27
2.7 Interfacing with other equipment 8-27
3 Data transmission protocols 8-28
3.1 Standard transmission protocol 8-28
3.1.1 General 8-28
3.1.2 Protocols 8-30
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Introduction 8-1

3.2 Data Transfer with Block Check Character (BCC) 8-36
3.2.1 General 8-36
3.2.2 Protocols 8-40
3.3 LSV/2 Protocol 8-46
4 Data transfer by PLC 8-47

4.1 Configuration of PLC data interface 8-47
4.1.1 General 8-47
4.1.2 Free configuration 8-47
5 Error messages 8-48

5.1 TNC error messages 8-48
5.2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals' error codes 8-49
5.3 Data transmission software error messages 8-50
8-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Introduction 01.98

1 Introduction
When operating a computer system (PC, Controller), a wide variety of peripherals, such as printers,
external memories (floppy-disk drives; hard disks) or other computer systems, can be installed in
addition the Central Processing Unit (CPU).
Communication between the CPU and the peripherals is made possible by using a data interface.
Communication requires facilities for transferring data to the peripherals and of course, physical
connection via a transmission line. Peripheral device control and communication, via the interface, is
generally the responsibility of the computer system. The computer system therefore has to meet
certain requirements.
The interfaces, which primarily consist of the physical links between the computer system and the
peripherals, need appropriate software in order to control the transfer of information between the
individual units. The relationship between hardware and software, which fully defines an interface, is
illustrated by the following diagram:
Interface
Computer Software Hardware Software Peripheral
e.g. PC, e.g. Printer,

Controller external memory
The "hardware" in the diagram covers all the physical components, such as circuit construction, pin
layout, electrical characteristics, etc. The "software" includes, for example, the drivers for the output
modules, which are part of the operating software both of the computer system and the peripherals.
Due to the wide variety of computers, controllers and peripherals, standard interfaces have been
introduced, which, in an ideal situation, enable extremely varied devices to be connected to each
other.
Such standards include, for example, the RS-232-C/V.24 and RS-422/V.11 interfaces, which are
described in detail later.

1.1 Principles of data transfer
Since all information is conveyed as data, one first needs to become familiar with a few of the
principles of data transfer. The term "Data" is used to describe all of the information which the
computer is capable of collecting and processing.
1.1.1 Serial/parallel
Data can be transmitted in either serial or parallel format.
Basically, data is coded in the computer system, e.g. as bytes (8 bits) and supplied to the interface in
parallel.
In the case of serial data transmission, the parallel information from the computer system has to be
converted into a serial data-flow by using an USART (Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter).
The receiver accepts the serial data-flow and converts it back again into parallel information.
Sender Empfnger
Transmitter Receiver
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer Schnittstellen-Puffer Speicher
Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory
0 MSB 0 0 MSB 0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 LSB 1 1 LSB 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
A parallel interface, on the other hand, does not need a USART: just a line driver. Typically, the
connection between the computer system and a peripheral consists of a 36-way ribbon cable. Its
maximum length is generally about 3 metres.

Sender Empfnger
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer Schnittstellen-Puffer Speicher
Memory Interface buffer Interface buffer Memory
0 MSB 0 0 0 MSB 0
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1
1 LSB 1 1 1 LSB 1
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
One obvious advantage of serial data transmission becomes apparent when long distances have to
be covered. With parallel transmission, the cost of the cable increases with every additional bit
which has to be transmitted. In addition, the effect of interference on adjacent wires from sharp
signal edges and electrical coupling is far greater over long lines than it is with serial transmission
which is relatively slower and uses fewer wires.
The comparatively slow speed of serial data transmission is, at the same time, its greatest
drawback. Since the individual bits are sent along the line one after the other and each transfer takes
a specified time, it takes far longer to send a binary word to the receiver than it would if conveyed by
parallel transmission. As it happens, most peripheral devices work fairly slowly and cannot in fact
cope with data transmitted at high speed. Serial data transmission is generally adequate for devices
such as external memories or mechanical printers, especially as such devices have a large internal
buffer for incoming characters.
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format

In order for communication to be established between two devices involved in data interchange,
they have to use a common language.
In the field of computer engineering, this language consists of digital coding of letters, figures and
control characters.
One of the most common codes is the ASCII code (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) which codes all characters with seven bits.
In all, it is possible to code 27 = 128 characters. According to the ASCII code, the control character
"Line Feed" or <LF> is coded with the following combination of bits:
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 = 10 dec = 0A hex
MSB LSB
The letter 'z' is represented by the following combination of bits:

1 1 1 1 0 1 0 = 122 dec = 7A hex
MSB LSB
i.e. when the letter "z" is transmitted via a serial interface, the appropriate bits are sent one after the
other. The ASCII code is shown in full in the Appendix.
Proper data transmission requires the device concerned to interpret incoming data correctly and, in
particular, to determine the start of a transmission. For this purpose, there is a synchronization
process which ensures that the receiver detects the first bit of a character correctly. With an
asynchronous data format, a start bit is sent before each data word and the word is then ended by
one or two stop bits. One feature of this data format is that, starting from a quiescent state,
transmission of a data word can begin at any time.
A quiescent state exists before switch-on and is reverted to after each transmission. Before a data
bit can be transmitted this has to be communicated to the receiver. Otherwise, if the first bit of the
data word has the same value as the quiescent state, the receiver will not notice any difference
from the quiescent state.
A so-called "start bit" is used for this purpose:
For the duration of a single bit, the transmitter emits a logic value which clearly differs from the
quiescent state and which gives the receiver an opportunity to prepare its polling logic to read in the
data bit. After the start bit has been sent, the data word is transmitted, bit by bit, starting with the
LSB (Least Significant Bit). After the MSB (Most Significant Bit) of the data word, a so-called "parity
bit" is inserted (see paragraph 1.1.3 "Checking data").
The parity bit is followed by one or two stop bits. These final stop bits ensure that the receiver has
enough time to recognise the transmitter again before the start of the next character.
Synchronization is repeated before each character. The complete word is referred to as a character
frame.
Character frame
Quiescent state Quiescent state
Start 1st Bit 2nd Bit 3rd Bit 4th Bit 5th Bit 6th Bit 7th Bit Parity 1 or 2
bit LSB MSB bit stop bits
Data bits

1.1.3 Checking data
With an asynchronous character frame, transmission errors can be detected by using a parity-check
procedure. A parity bit is sent in addition to the data bits. The evaluation of this bit enables the
receiver to check the parity of received data.
The parity bit can take three different forms; the same form of parity must be set at both interfaces.
No parity check
Error detection is dispensed with.
Even parity
The transmitter counts bits with a value of 1. If the number is odd, the parity bit is set to 1,
otherwise it is cleared to 0. The sum of the set data bits and the parity bit is therefore always even.
Upon receiving a word, the receiver counts all of the set bits, including the parity bit. If this count
yields an odd number, there is a transmission error and the data word must be repeated, or an error
message will be displayed.
Odd parity
In this case, the parity bit is so chosen by the transmitter that the total number of all the set bits is
odd. In this case, an error will be detected if the receiver observes an even number of set bits in its
evaluation.
Example:
Parity bit
1 Even parity
Letter: "z" 1111010
0 Odd parity

1.1.4 Data transfer rate
The data transfer rate of an interface is given in 'BAUD' and indicates the number of bits of data
transmitted in one second.
[ Bits]
1 baud = 1
Common baud rates are:

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 baud.
The time taken to transmit one bit (tB) can be calculated from the baud rate:
"1"
"0"
t
tB
1
tB =
bits
Baud rate[ ]
s
For example, a baud rate of 19,200 baud will have a bit duration of tB = 52.083 s.
The number of characters transmitted can be calculated from the baud rate and the transmission
format:
bits
Baud rate[ ]
s
Characters per second =
Number of bits per character
Example:
With a transmission format of seven data bits, one start bit, two stop bits and a data transfer rate of
exactly 300 baud:-
300 Baud
= 30 characters per second
10 bits
will be transmitted.

1.2 Handshaking
A "handshake" procedure is often used in connection with interfaces. This means that two devices
are, as it were, working "hand in hand" in order to control data transfer. A distinction is drawn
between "software handshaking" and "hardware handshaking".
Either hardware or software handshaking can be chosen for communication between two units.
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking

With this procedure, control of data transfer is executed by electrical signals. Important information,
such as "Clear To send" (CTS), "Clear to receive", "Start transmission" and "Stop transmission", is
signalled by the hardware.
For example, when a computer character is to be transmitted, the CTS signal line (see Section 2.2
"RS-232-C/V.24 interface") is checked to see whether it is active (ON). If it is, the character is
transmitted. Otherwise the computer will delay transmission until the CTS line is switched to active.
Hardware handshaking requires, as a minimum, two data lines - TxD and RxD, the RTS control line
and the CTS signal line and a ground connection.
1.2.2 Software handshaking

With software handshake, control of data transfer is achieved by appropriate control characters
transmitted via the data line. One such handshake is the XON/XOFF method, which is in widespread
use on the RS-232-C/V.24 interface. The meaning "XON" is assigned to an ASCII code control
character (DC1) and the meaning "XOFF" to another (DC3). Before transmitting a character, the
computer checks whether the receiving unit is transmitting the XOFF character. If it is, it delays
transmission until it receives the character XON, indicating that the connected unit is ready to
receive further characters.
Apart from the data lines (TxD, RxD), and ground, no other lines are needed for software
handshaking.

2 TNC data interfaces
2.1 General
Besides the standard RS-232-C/V.24 interface, the TNC 407/415 has another data interface, the
RS-422/V.11, which is used for long transmission distances.
The two interfaces differ only in the construction of their hardware (signal lines, signal levels and pin
layout).The data format and transmission protocol are the same for both interfaces.
The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit, ME 101 magnetic tape unit (no longer in production) and
external devices with appropriate data interfaces (computers, printers, readers, punches) can be
connected via either RS-232-C/V.24 or RS-422/V.11 interfaces.
The two interfaces of the TNC can also be operated in parallel; for example, a program can be read
in via the RS-232-C/V.24 interface and simultaneously executed, while a data file could be read in via
the RS-422/V.11 interface.
However, an external interface for level conversion must be used when connecting a floppy disk unit
and magnetic tape unit to the RS-422/V.11 interface.
Two transmission protocols are available for data transfer:
Standard data transmission protocol

Data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC)
The data format and control characters concerned are freely configurable within the framework of
these protocols.
2.2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface

RS-232-C is the designation of a serial interface based on the EIA standard of the same name and
can be used for transmission rates up to 19,200 bits/sec. Data transfer is executed asynchronously,
with a start bit before each character and one or two stop bits after each character. The interface is
designed for transmission distances of up to 30 metres.
The RS-232-C interface has been adopted with slight modifications and has been introduced into
Europe as the V.24 interface. The relevant German standard is DIN 66020.
2.2.1 Hardware
The physical connection between two RS-232-C/V.24 interfaces is an asymmetrical line, i.e. the
common ground connection between transmitter and receiver is used as a return wire.
8-10 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 01.98

Physical connections:
Sender Empfnger
TxD RxD
RxD TxD
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
2.2.2 Signal levels

The RS-232-C/V.24 interface must differentiate between two different signal lines and their levels.
Data lines:
The data signals are defined as being logic "1" (MARK) over the range -3V to -15V and as logic "0"
(SPACE) over the range +3V to +15V.
Control and signal lines:

These signals are defined as being ON (High) over the range +3V to +15V and as OFF (Low) over the
range from -3V to -15V.
For all of the signals, the voltage range from -3V to +3V is not defined as a logic level and can
therefore not be evaluated.
U [V] Datensignale Steuer- und Meldesignal

Data signals Control and message signal
+ 15
"0" HIGH
SPACE ON
+ 13
0
13
"1" LOW
MARK OFF
15
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 TNC data interfaces 8-11

2.2.3 Signal designations
The RS-232-C/V.24 interface distinguishes between data lines, control/signal lines and the earth
conductor.
Data lines:
TxD Transmitted data

RxD Received data
Control/signal lines:
DCD (Data Carrier Detect): Received signal level. The DCD signal indicates
to the transmitter that the information received
at the receiver lies within the defined level.
The DCD signal (pin 8) is not used by the TNC,

i.e. the TNC delivers no signal from pin 8.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready): This signal shows that the TNC is ready for service
(e.g. receiving buffer full => DTR = Low).
DSR (Data Set Ready): Peripheral ready for service.
RTS (Request to Send): Switch transmission unit on. TNC wishes to transmit
data.
CTS (Clear to Send): Readiness for transmission. The peripheral is ready to

receive data.
Earth conductor (cables for power supply):
Chassis GND: Casing connection

Signal GND: 0-Volt lines for all signals

The lines of the RS-232-C/V.24 serial interface:
Chassis GND
Transmitted data TxD
Received data RxD
Switch on transmission unit RTS
Transmission readiness CTS
Operational readiness DSR
Received signal level DCD
Terminal unit ready for service DTR
Signal ground GND
Peripheral TNC

2.2.4 Pin layouts
The differences between the pin layouts of the logic unit and the adapter block of the TNC should be
noted! The corresponding pin layouts are shown below (see the "Installation and Electrical
Connection" Manual).
V.24-Adapter-Block
LE
ws/br
Chassis GND 1 1 1 1 WH/BN
ge
ws/br
WH/BN 1 1 GND Chassis
TXD 2 2 2 2 GN 2 2 RXD
gn YL
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD
rs GY
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS
gr PK
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS
br BL
DSR 6 6 6 6 6 6 DTR
rt RD
Signal GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal
8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19
bl BN
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR
A 9-pin plug on a PC should have the following pin layout:
Pin Allocation
1 Not in use
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI (Ring Indicator)

2.3 RS-422/V.11 interface
Due to the limited capabilities of the RS-232-C/V.24 interface, the RS-422/V.11 interface was
developed . This interface is also standardized and works symmetrically. The RS-422/V.11 interface
is suitable for data transfer speeds up to 10 Mbit/sec. Since the interface module of the TNC can
only cope with a rate of up to 38,400 baud, a transfer rate of 38,400 baud must also be set at the
RS-422/V.11 interface.
However, at this baud rate it is possible to transmit over a cable one kilometre long.
2.3.1 Hardware
The standard RS-422/V.11 works with differential voltages. The advantage of this method is that, on
the transmission path, radiated interference acts simultaneously and by the same amount on both
signal lines. At the receiver only the differential voltage of the two signal lines is evaluated and
therefore the radiated interference is unimportant.
Considerably longer lines can therefore be used and, because of the suppression of interference, the
transfer speed can be considerably higher.
Physical connections:
Sender Empfnger
TxD RxD
RxD TxD
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path

2.3.2 Signal levels
On a RS-422/V.11 interface, the signals are both transmitted and received as differential voltage.
A positive differential voltage corresponds to logic "0" (OFF), and a negative differential voltage to
logic "1" (ON).
Differential voltages between
Vdmin = 2V and Vdmax = 5V
are transmitted and the control unit detects the differential voltages between
Vdmin = 0.2V and Vdmax = 6V
as a logically defined level.
Ud [V] Ausgang Eingang

Output Input
+ 0.6
+ 0.5
"0" "0"
OFF OFF
+ 0.2
+ 0.2
0.2
0.2
"1" "1"
ON ON
0.5
0.6
2.3.3 Signal designations

With a RS-422/V.11 interface, the following signals are transmitted as differential signals:
Data signals:
TxD, TxD RxD, RxD
Control and verification signals:
RTS, RTS CTS, CTS

DSR, DSR DTR, DTR

These signals perform the same functions as those on the RS-232-C/V.24 interface.
The transmission protocol is absolutely identical for the RS-232-C/V.24 and RS-422/V.11 interfaces.
In addition, the protective earth connects the transmitter and receiver casings. The signal GND
represents the differential voltage reference conductor.
2.3.4 Pin layouts

On the TNC 407/415, the following pin layout is adopted at the logic unit and adapter block (see the
"Installation and Electrical Connection" Manual)
V.11-Adapter-Block
RS-422 Adapter block LE
sw sw
1 1 1
BL bl BL BL
1 1 GND Chassis
2 2 2 2 2 RXD
gr GY
3 3 3 3 3 CTS
ws WH
4 4 4 4 4 TXD
gn GN
5 5 5 5 5 RTS
ws/gn WH/GN
6 6 6 6 6 DSR
gr/rs GY/PK
7 7 7 7 7 DTR
sw BK
8 8 8 8 8 GND Signal
rt RD
9 9 9 9 9 RXD
rs PK
10 10 10 10 10 CTS
br BN
11 11 11 11 11 TXD
ge YL
12 12 12 12 12 RTS
br/gn BN/GN
13 13 13 13 13 DSR
rt/bl RD/BL
14 14 14 14 14 DTR
15 15 15 15 15
2.4 Data interface functions

The data interfaces on the TNC can be used to save data and files and read them back in again, to
output programs to external devices (e.g. printers), to read in programs and simultaneously execute
them and to carry out data transfer (communication) between TNCs.

2.4.1 Saving/reading files
The following table lists all the files which can be saved to external memory (floppy disk unit,
magnetic tape unit and PC) and can be read back in from them.
File File extension Code
HEIDENHAIN Dialog NC program .H H

DIN/ISO NC program .I D
Tool table .T T
Pallet table .P L
Datum table .D N
Machine parameters .MP M
Compensation table .COM V
Compensation Assignment .CMA S
PLC program .PLC P
Text file .A A
Error messages (1st language) .ER1 A
Error messages (English) .ERE A
Dialogs (1st language) .DI1 A
Dialogs (English) .DIE A
Pocket table - R
Help files .HLP J
Pocket tables .TCH R
Help files .HLP J
Point tables .PNT U
After the appropriate key numbers for the PLC, the machine parameters and the correction table
have been entered, these files can be written-to or read-from via the data interfaces.
Data transfer is initiated with the EXT key as usual.
Current values of Q parameters, PLC error messages and dialogs can also be outputted via the two
interfaces (NC program: FN 15: PRINT).
The magnetic tape unit is only suitable as an external data carrier to a limited extent, because only
one file can be stored per cassette side. However, this file can contain several programs.
Using the floppy disk unit, up to 256 programs (approximately 25,000 program blocks) can be
stored. This represents a storage capacity of approximately 790 kilobytes.
When transmitting and receiving a file the appropriate code file is outputted and read in again
complete with a Block Check Character (BCC).
If the file is stored in an external computer using HEIDENHAIN's TNC.EXE data transfer software, a
new file extension is generated. This extension consists of the code and the letters NC.
Example:
If a pallet-table is stored, it is given the file extension *.LNC.

When outputting the file, the error messages, dialogs and text files are all output as ASCII files
with the code A.*. Consequently, if they are sent on an external data carrier, these files must
have different file names so that they are not overwritten by files with similar names.
If the files are read in again, they are first of all stored as ASCII files and have to be converted
back to the original file-type by the user.
The menu functions "Read all files", "Read files with acknowledgement" and "Show ext. directory"
only work with files which contain the name concerned at the start of the file (NC programs and
tables). The remaining files (PLC, error, dialog and ASCII files) have to be read in individually.
2.4.2 Output to external devices

Any external device, e.g. computers, printers, readers and punches, can be addressed via either of
the two interfaces.
For this purpose, the TNC has three freely configurable interface modes (EXT1/EXT2/EXT3) which,
within certain limits, permit any setting of the data format and control characters of the required data
transmission protocol.
The setting selected at the external devices must of course match the TNC. On printers, this is done
by setting the DIP-switches or adjusting the transmission parameters.
If data transfer to a computer is desired, appropriate data-transfer software must be installed. To

help in this, HEIDENHAIN offer their TNC.EXE data transfer software, which permits transfer
between TNC and a PC using a fixed transmission protocol.
2.4.3 Reading in and simultaneously executing programs

(DNC operation)
In RUN PROGRAM mode with "Block transfer", machine programs can be transmitted from an
external memory or the FE floppy disk unit via serial data interfaces and be executed simultaneously
(DNC operation). This allows machine programs which exceed the storage capacity of the control
unit to be executed.
After the program has started, executed blocks are erased and further blocks are continuously called
from the external memory.
The minimum and maximum memory requirement for the drip feed mode is defined with machine
parameters MP7228.0 and MP7228.1 respectively. The maximum memory requirement can also be
set to leave enough spare for parallel programming during execution.
The error message "Program Memory Overflow" is output if the minimum storage is not enough.
If the program blocks are read into the TNC faster than they can be executed, the entire NC memory
is initially fully loaded up to the maximum memory limit (MP7288.1). If it is full, transfer is suspended
until a storage space of 256 bytes is vacated by execution. Only then is transfer resumed, until once
again the memory is filled.

MP7228 Storage requirement in drip feed mode
Entry range: 0 to 1024 KBytes
MP7228.0 Minimum storage

MP7228.1 Maximum storage
2.4.4 Communication between TNCs

For certain applications, it is necessary for TNCs to be able to exchange data or to communicate
with each other. This is made possible by both RS-232-C/V.24 and RS-422/V.11 interfaces.
The simplest form of data exchange is the transfer of files (e.g. NC programs) from one TNC to
another. To do this, the same transmission format must be set at both control units and transfer
started. It must be ensured that the reading-in control unit is the first to start.
For the application "Positioning module", i.e. further NC axes are required, the positioning values
have to be transmitted from the master logic unit to the slave logic unit. On this basis, data can be
transferred to another TNC via the data interface, using PLC modules at the PLC level (see Section 5
"Data transfer via PLC").

2.5 Configuration of interfaces
2.5.1 Selection of interfaces

Either data interface may be inhibited with MP 5000.
MP 5000 Inhibit data interfaces

Input range: 0 to 2
0 = no interface inhibited
1 = interface RS-232-C/V.24 inhibited
2 = interface RS-422/V.11 inhibited
If neither of the two interfaces is inhibited, the following settings can be selected with the
appropriate data format and the data transmission protocol.
In addition to the three freely configurable operating modes EXT1/EXT2/EXT3 (for PLC only, see
Section 5 "Data transfer by PLC"), there are three fixed modes (ME, FE1/FE2). The FE1 and FE2
modes have to be set if the HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit or an external computer using the
TNC.EXE transmission software is connected. In both these modes, the transmission protocol with
Block Check Character is rigidly defined [for the difference between FE1 and FE2 operation: see
Section 4 "Data transfer with block Check Character (BCC)"].
The ME operating mode matches the HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit and must be
selected if this is to be connected.
In this mode, the standard transmission protocol is set.
However, there is one important difference:
The character <EOT> is never sent because this character cannot be processed by the magnetic
tape unit.
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces

The three operating modes EXT1/EXT2/EXT3 (PLC) are freely configurable via the machine
parameters.
The data format and the type of handshake are set in the MP 5020.
Data bits
Bit 0 can be set to determine whether transmission is to be with 7 or 8 data bits. Transmission with
7 bits is normally used, but 8 bits are needed, especially for printer interfacing.
BCC
If calculation of the BCC produces a number less than $20 (i.e. a control character) then a "Space"
character ($20) is sent in addition immediately before <ETB>. The BCC will consequently always be
greater than $20 and cannot therefore be recognised as a control character.

Hardware handshaking
Bit 2 can be set to determine whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device by using RTS.
Data output TNC -> EXT

When the receiving buffer is full, the external device resets the RTS signal. The TNC thereby
detects that the peripheral unit receiving buffer is full because of the CTS input.
TNC EXT
+ +
RTS CTS

Receiving
+ buffer full +
CTS RTS

Data Data Data
+ +
TxD RxD

Start
+ +
RxD TxD

+ Positive voltage level

Negative voltage level
Data input EXT -> TNC

When the receiving buffer is full, the TNC removes the RTS signal, which is detected by the
peripheral device at its CTS input.
TNC EXT
Receiving
+ buffer full +
RTS CTS

+ +
CTS RTS

+ +
TxD RxD

+ +
RxD TxD

Start
+ Positive voltage level

negative voltage level

The DTR and DSR signals from the TNC indicate the operational status of the TNC and peripheral
(these cannot be set via the machine parameters).
DTR: Interrogated by peripheral; it is logic "1" if TNC is ready for service.

DSR: Interrogated by TNC.
LOW level => ext. data input/output not ready.
HIGH level => ext. data input/output ready.
Software handshaking
Bit 3 determines whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device with control character
<DC3>. Transfer is resumed with character <DC1>.
If transfer is stopped with character <DC3>, up to 12 characters can still be stored. The remaining
incoming characters are lost. Software handshake is normally recommended when interfaces are
connected to an external device.
The following pin layout is possible for the external device:
Peripheriegert V.24-Adapter-Block LE
Peripheral unit RS-232-C Adapter block
ws/br
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 WH/BN ws/br
WH/BN 1 1 GND Chassis
ge GN
TXD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RXD
gn Yl
RXD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TXD
rs GY
RTS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 CTS
gr PK
CTS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RTS
br BL
DSR 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 DTR
rt RD
GND 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 GND Signal ground
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
bl BN
DTR 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DSR
A HEIDENHAIN standard cable, ref. 242 869, is recommended.
The TNC reacts both to hardware and software handshakes, regardless of the setting in
MP5020.x.
If no transmission stop is set in the MP5020.x, the TNC stops the peripheral unit with the software
handshake.
If transmission stop by both RTS and by DC3 is active, the TNC stops transfer with the hardware
handshake.

Character parity
Bits 4 and 5 determine the type of parity check (see paragraph 1.1.3 "Checking data").
Stop bits
Bits 6 and 7 determine the number of stop bits sent at the end of a character.
MP 5020.0 Operating mode EXT1

MP 5020.1 Operating mode EXT2
MP 5020.2 Operating mode EXT3 (PLC)
Entry: %xxxxxxxx
Bit 07 or 8 data bits 0 = 7 data bits

1 = 8 data bits
Bit 1Block check character 0 = any BCC
1 = BCC not control character
Bit 2Transmission stop by RTS 0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 3Transmission stop by DC3 0 = not active
1 = active
Bit 4Character parity 0 = even
1 = odd
Bit 5Character parity 0 = not desired
1 = desired
Bit 6/7 Stop bits
Bit 6 Bit 7
1 1/2 stop bits Bit 0 0
2 stop bits Bit 1 0
1 stop bit Bit 0 1
1 stop bit Bit 1 1
For operating modes EXT1/EXT2/EXT3, MP5030 defines the transmission protocol.
MP5030.0 Operating mode EXT1

MP5030.1 Operating mode EXT2
MP5030.2 Operating mode EXT3 (PLC)
Entry : 0 or 1
0 = "Standard data transfer"

1 = "Transfer blockwise"

For the control characters for the data transmission protocols (<SOH> <ETB>, <STX>, <ETX>,
<EOT>, <ACK> <NAK>), any other ASCII characters can be chosen using the following machine
parameters (for table of ASCII characters, see Appendix). If these machine parameters are loaded
with a nought, the standard settings given in brackets are active (as for FE1 and FE2 operation).
MP5200 Control character for Start of Text (STX)

MP5200.0 In mode EXT 1
MP5200.2 In mode EXT 3 (PLC)
Input range: 0 to 127
MP5201 Control character for End of Text (ETX)

MP5206 Control character for Start of Command Block (SOH)

MP5207 Control character for End of Command Block (ETB)

MP5208 Control character for "Transfer O.K." (ACK)

MP5209 Control character for "Transfer Defective" (NAK)

MP5210 Control character for "End of Transmission (EOT)

When selecting ASCII characters, it must be ensured that the control characters are not arbitrarily
mixed and that no figures or letters which occur in the transferred text are used.
Example: The control character for Start of Text (MP5200.x) must not be assigned to <DC3>,
otherwise transmission will stop when software handshaking is set on the peripheral.

For the file type, when transferring with Block Check Characters (see paragraph 2.4.1
"Saving/reading files"), an ASCII character must be entered for the file which is being output or input.
With an input value of nought, the TNC automatically enters the correct type of file in the file header.
MP5202 ASCII character for file type for data input

MP5204 ASCII character for file type for data output

Example: If a DIN/ISO program is to be output in operating mode EXT2, MP5204.1 = 68 (='D') must
be set (or MP5204.1=0).
The ASCII characters for input and output identification can also be freely defined.
If the machine parameters concerned are loaded with nought, the standard settings apply
(E=Input/A=Output).
MP5203 ASCII character for input identification (E)

MP5205 ASCII character for input identification (E)


2.6 External programming
In the case of external programming and subsequent transfer, attention should be paid to the
following:
<CR><LF> or <LF> must be programmed at the start of the program and after each program
block
After the end-of-program block <CR> <LF> and, in addition, the end-of-text control character must
be programmed (standard setting <ETX> or via MP 5201.x)
Blank characters between the individual words can be omitted in NC programs.
When reading in DIN blocks, '*' is not needed at the end of the block
Comments are separated from the NC block by a semicolon ';'
Comments located in front of the program are not stored
Block numbers do not need to be programmed - they are generated by the TNC (only for dialog
programming)
2.7 Interfacing with other equipment

Any other external devices can be interfaced with the TNC by using configurable operating modes
ET1/EXT2/EXT3. For this purpose, machine parameters 5020.x to 5210.x permit relatively free
adjustment of the data format, the data transmission protocol and the control characters.
Consider the example of interfacing EXT1 with a printer using a serial interface (Example: NEC
P7PLUS).
The following setting is selected at the printer itself (see the Operating Manual of the printer
concerned):
Serial interface
Data bits
Even character parity
XON/XOFF protocol (software handshake)
9,600 baud
The following settings (EXT1) are made at the TNC:
MP5000 = 0 No interface inhibited

MP5020.0 = %10101001 8 data bits
Any BCC character
Transfer stop by RTS not active
Transfer stop by DC3 active
Character parity even
Character parity required
1 stop bit
MP5030.0 = 0 Standard data transfer
In the "RS-232/RS-422 Setup" of the TNC, the EXT1 operating mode must still be assigned to the
RS-232 interface and the baud rate set to 9,600 (see the TNC 407/415 Operating Manual).

3 Data transmission protocols
The TNC enables data and files to be transferred using different protocols (which can be selected via
the interface setup or the machine parameters).
These transmission protocols can be selected in six different operating modes, as follows:
ME Standard transmission protocol to match HEIDENHAIN

magnetic tape unit (7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit)
FE1, FE2 Transmission with Block Check Character and with fixed control
characters (7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit)
EXT1, EXT2, EXT3 Freely configurable operating modes: data format, transmission
protocol and control characters can be freely set via machine
parameters
LSV/2 Two-way transfer for TNC diagnostics and remote operation
conforms to DIN 66019. This protocol always runs in the
background of the TNC and is started externally by a PC.
The following applies to data transmission protocols (except LSV/2) :
If a file which is read in is already stored in the TNC, the message "ERASE/OVERREAD" is
displayed. In this case the TNC aborts transmission with the appropriate handshake and does not
continue transfer until after acknowledgement.
In the event of an attempt to erase write-protected files, the error message "PROTECTED PGM" is
displayed and the dialog "CONTINUE = ENT/END = NOENT ". In this case, either the next file can
be read in or the transfer can be aborted.
If a file has been read out and the data transfer menu has been terminated with the END key,
the TNC outputs characters <ETX> and <EOT> (or ASCII characters according to setting in
MP5201.x and MP5210.x in operating modes EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3).
If a transmission is terminated with the END-key, the error message "PROGRAM INCOMPLETE" is
issued.
3.1 Standard transmission protocol
3.1.1 General
This protocol is set as standard in operating mode ME and can also be optionally selected for
operating modes EXT1/EXT2/EXT3 via the machine parameters. In the following, the control
characters which are sent and received with this protocol are listed for the various transmission
alternatives. When outputting a file, the <NUL> character is sent exactly 50 times at the start of the
file. When reading in, however, the control unit ignores this character. Therefore it is of no
importance how often the peripheral unit sends the <NUL> character before the file.
If, however, ME mode is set instead of EXT1/EXT2/EXT3, attention must be paid to the following:
All the programs in a file which end with the end-of-text character <ETX> are stored in the magnetic
tape unit ME.

The ME transmits this file with all the programs to the control unit. The TNC then selects the
appropriate program and stores it.
A further important difference between EXT1/EXT2/EXT3 mode in the standard

protocol and ME mode is that the <EOT> character is never sent in ME mode because
the magnetic tape unit is incapable of processing this character.
In this protocol, if an error is to be signalled to the TNC, the following sequence of instructions must
be sent:
<ESC> <1> 'ERROR NUMBER'
The blocks are not checked for correctness but are transmitted one after the other. If the receiver's
data buffer is full it can stop the transfer and resume in one of two ways:
Stop transfer by sending the character <DC3> (XOFF);

continue by transmitting character <DC1> (XON) (software handshake).
By suitable levels on the control and message lines RTS and CTS of interfaces
V.24/RS-232-C or V.11/RS-422 (hardware handshake).
Example: Protocol for dialog program
<NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL>... 50 times
0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM<CR><LF> Program block 1
1 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+3<CR><LF> Program block 2
.
.
.
26 END PGM 1 MM <CR><LF> End of program
<ETX><EOT> Close data transfer menu

Example of software handshake:
Peripheral unit Transmission path TNC
.
.
.
12 Z+Z FMAX <CR> <LF>
Receive buffer fulll

<DC3>
Receive butter
ready again
<DC1>
13 Z10 F100 M03 <CR> <LF>

.
.
.
Hardware handshake (see section "Freely configurable interfaces")
3.1.2 Protocols
This section lists the transfer protocols for the various methods of data output and input.
The EXT1 mode is set:
Control character for "End of Text": <ETX>

Control character for "End of Transfer": <EOT>
Software handshake

Request external directory
Using the soft key "Show ext. directory", the list of file names can be requested from an external
memory and displayed in the TNC.
If the external directory is requested, the TNC sends control character <DC1>.
If the request is immediately interrupted with the END key, the TNC sends characters <ETX><EOT>
and no directory is read in.
If the request is not interrupted, the peripheral unit sends all of the external programs in order. Their
names are then shown in the TNC.

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

1st line of file <CR> <LF>
.
1st file .
.
Last line of file <CR> <LF>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

. .
2nd file .
.
.
.
.
.
.
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>
1st line of file <CR><LF>
Last .
file .
.
<ETX>
<EOT>

Output selected file
The TNC outputs all of the program lines in order. The peripheral unit can stop transmission with
character <DC3> and start it again with character <DC1>.

<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>. . .
. .
. .
. . 5th line of file <CR> <LF>
<DC3>
<DC1>
6th line of file <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
Output all files
The procedure is similar to the protocol described in paragraph 3.1.2 "Outputting a selected file". The
TNC arranges all the programs in order and transmits them. No control character is sent between
the individual files.
Output file with acknowledgement
The programs are transmitted in the same way as described in section 3.1.3 "Outputting all files".
However, an acknowledgement is expected from the user between the transmission of individual
programs.
Read-in selected file
If a file is read in from a peripheral unit (e.g. a PC), the corresponding name must be indicated in the
TNC and the TNC be started first, i.e. the TNC outputs the character <DC1>. Transmission of the file
concerned is then initiated at the peripheral unit.
When the entire file has been transferred, the TNC sends character <EOT>.

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

. .
. .
. .
Last line of file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
In this transfer method, the TNC can stop transmission with <DC3> and continue it with <DC1>.
If the file name in the first line of the file and the name indicated in the TNC are not identical, the
TNC reads each block in and searches for the file name concerned.
If the END PGM-block has been read in, and the selected name is not known, the TNC remains
static without an error message, and transfer must be terminated with the END key.
Example: Reading in program 100.H.

100.H "START"
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line PGM100 <CR> <LF>
. .
. .
. .
Last line PGM 100 <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
If, in this case, the last PGM-block ends with the <ETX> character then transfer is terminated
without an error message but the data is not stored.

Read-in all files
If both the peripheral unit and the TNC have been started, the following protocol is followed:

<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
Last line of file 1. <CR> <LF> .
.. .
1st line of file 1 <CR> <LF> .
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line of file 2 <CR> <LF> .
..
. .
.
Last line of file 2 <CR> <LF>
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line of last file <CR> <LF>
.. .
. .
.
Last line of last file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
If several programs are gathered together in a file which ends with <ETX> then these programs are
read in without being requested by <DC1>.
The request <DC1> is not sent until a program has ended with <ETX>.

Read-in file with acknowledgement
After commencement of transfer, the peripheral unit sends the first program module until the
receiving buffer of the TNC is full. The TNC then stops transmission with <DC3> and awaits
acknowledgement from the user. If the file is to be transferred, the TNC sends <DC1> and the
program is read in and stored. Otherwise the file is in fact read in but not stored. If hardware
handshaking is set, transfer by using the RTS signal is stopped and restarted.
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line of file 1 <CR> <LF>
<DC3> Polling:
<DC1> Read in
Yes / No
2nd line of file 1 <CR> <LF>

.
.
. .
.
.
Last line of file 1 <CR> <LF> <ETX>
.
.
. <DC1>
<NUL>
.
.
. .
.
.
Last line of last file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<DC1>
<ETX>
<EOT>

3.2 Data Transfer with Block Check Character (BCC)
3.2.1 General
This protocol is specific to HEIDENHAIN and operates with different control characters and an
additional data check feature when transferring.
The protocol is set with the following operating modes:
- FE1 mode
- FE2 mode
- EXT1/EXT2/EXT3 mode (selectable)
The data transfer protocol is fully identical for all these modes except for the FE1 mode in which a
command sequence is automatically output at the beginning to request the contents directory from
the peripheral unit.
In the freely configurable modes (EXT1/EXT2/EXT3) the following control characters (<SOH>,
<ETB>, <STX>, <ACK>, <NAK>, <ETX>, <EOT>) can be defined at will as ASCII characters
(see section "Freely configurable interfaces").
When a file is transferred the first block - the so-called Header - is transmitted, consisting of the
following characters:
<SOH>"H" "Name" "M" <ETB>BCC<DC1>
<SOH> (Start of Header): This character identifies the beginning of the header.
The header contains the identifier "H" of the program (see section "Saving/reading files"), the program
name "Name" and the transfer mode "M" (E=Input/A=Output).
The header terminates with the character <ETB> which ends a data transfer block.
The next character BCC provides an additional data check:
As well as checking the parity of the individual characters (see chapter "Checking data") the parity of
the complete transferred block is also checked. The BCC (Block Check Character) always rounds the
individual bits of the transferred characters in a data transfer block to even parity.
Example of BCC generation:
Character Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SOH 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
H 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
5 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
E 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
ETB 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
BCC 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

In this example program "15" that has been written in HEIDENHAIN dialog ("H") is downloaded
across the data interface (E"). A parity bit is also generated for the BCC (with even parity the BCC
parity bit in this example is assigned significance "1").
The character <DC1> is transmitted after the BCC. This character (XON) is necessary for certain
devices in order to explicitly request an answer from them and to reactivate the transfer.
The transfer of the <DC1> character can be suppressed in modes EXT1, EXT2 and EXT3 by setting
bit 3 in machine parameter 5020.X ("Transmission stop by DC3") to zero (see section "Freely
configurable interfaces").
The <DC1> character is not required when reading in a file in the format with BCC.
At the end of every block the receiver checks that it has transferred correctly. To do this the receiver
computes a BCC from the received block and compares it with the received BCC. If the received
BCC and the computed BCC are identical, the receiver transmits the <ACK> character (= positive
checkback), i.e. the data block has been transmitted without error.
If the two BCCs are not identical then the receiver transmits the <NAK> character (= negative
checkback), i.e. the data block was not transmitted correctly and must be re-transmitted. This
process is repeated three times, then the error message ("TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT E {XE
"TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT E") is output and the transfer is aborted.
If the header is acknowledged with <ACK> however the first file block can be transmitted:
<STX>0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM <ETB> BCC <DC1>
The beginning of a data block is always identified by the control character <STX>. The other control
characters in this block are identical with the control characters in the header.
If the block is acknowledged by <ACK> then the next program block is transmitted, with <NAK> the
same block has to be re-transmitted etc.
Once the last program block has transferred successfully (acknowledged by <AC>) the transmission
is terminated by the characters <ETX> (end of text) and <EOT> (end of transmission).

Table of control characters:
Character Name Description
SOH Start of Header SOH identifies the beginning of the
data transfer header. This is a
character string that contains the
program number and information
about the type of program and the
transfer mode.
STX Start of Text STX identifies the beginning of a
program block.
ETB End of Text Block ETB terminates a data transfer block.
The character that follows ETB (BCC)
is used for data checking.
DC1 Start data transfer (XON) DC1 starts the transfer of data.
DC3 Stop data transfer (XOFF) DC3 stops the transfer of data.
ETX End of Text ETX is transmitted at the end of a
program.
EOT End of Transmission EOT terminates the data transfer and
establishes the idle state. The
character is transmitted by the TNC
at the end of a program input and to
the external device in the event of an
error.
ACK Positive checkback ACK is transmitted by the receiver
(Acknowledge) when a data block has transferred
without error.
NAK Negative checkback (Not NAK is transmitted by the receiver
Acknowledge) when a data block has transferred
with an error. The transmitter must
re-transmit the block.

Example:
To upload a Pallet file with the name "PPP" to a peripheral device (e.g. FE 401).
FE 401 Transmission path TNC

<SOH> <L> PPP <A> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
. <STX> "1st line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK> .
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> "10th line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<NAK>
<ACK>
<ACK> .
.
.
.
. .
. .
. <STX> "last line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>

The software handshake is very easy to accomplish when transmitting with BCC. The receiver
transmits neither a positive (<ACK>) nor a negative (<NAK>) acknowledgement and the transmitter
waits until it receives one of these characters.
When the receive buffer of the receiver unit is ready to receive again the unit transmits another
<ACK> and the transmitter resumes the data transfer.
The software handshake can also be done with the aid of the control characters <DC1> and <DC3>
however. If the hardware handshake (EXT1/EXT2/EXT3) was selected this is identical with the
standard data transfer and BCC transfer (see section "Freely configurable interfaces").
3.2.2 Protocols
In the following, the transmission protocols are listed for the various file input and output
possibilities. FE2 mode is set.
If an error occurs at a peripheral device, the following block must be sent to the TNC.
<SOH>"Error text"<ETB>BCC
<SOH> "Error" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK> <EOT>
The received error message is displayed in the TNC, but can be acknowledged and erased with the
CE key.

Request external directory
If the soft key "Show ext. directory" is operated, the TNC outputs a header without a program name.
The peripheral then starts to output the files to the TNC, but, after the first file block has been sent,
the TNC immediately requests the next file.
<SOH> <N> <E> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> Name 1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ACK>
<STX> Name 2 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
.
. .
. .
.
<STX> Last name <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>
The program names read in are displayed in the TNC.
In FE1 mode, the following 'Escape' sequence is sent to request the external directory:
<DC3><ESC><DC1><0><SP><D><CR><LF>
The TNC expects the following input to this request:

The first four lines, each ending in <CR><LF>, are ignored. In subsequent lines ending with
<CR><LF>, only the program name and, after any number of blank characters, the number of
occupied sectors are stored.
xxxxxx"Name" "Sectors"xxxxxx<CR><LF>
If the character combination 'FREE:' is detected, only a number (= number of free sectors) will be
read in.

Output selected file
The following protocol is followed:
<SOH> <N> Name <A> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
.
. .
. .
.
<ACK>
. <STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
.
.
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>
The program name may contain up to 16 characters.
Output all files
The files are output in order, as in section 4.1.2 "Outputting a selected file". Control characters
<ETX><EOT> are sent to the peripheral device between files.
Output file with confirmation
In this mode, a question is asked before each file output in order to determine whether or not the
file is to be output. After each file, control characters <ETX> and <EOT> are sent, as in section 4.1.3
"Outputting all files". If output of a file is not desired, the TNC immediately offers the next file in the
directory for output.

Read-in selected file
If a file is to be read in from an external memory, the TNC sends a header with the file name
concerned, whereupon the peripheral sends the file.
<SOH> <N> Name <E> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
. .
.
.
<STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>

Read-in all files
In this case the TNC sends a header without a program name, and the peripheral unit sends the first
file. The TNC again outputs a header without a program name, the next program is sent and so on.
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
. <ACK>
.
.
.
.
<STX> Last line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1> .
<ACK>
<ACK>
.
. .
. .
.
<STX> Last line of last file <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>
Read-in file with acknowledgement
In this mode, the TNC first of all sends a header without a program name. The peripheral unit then
starts data transfer, until it is stopped by the TNC. The TNC interrupts transfer by not sending a
positive acknowledgement (no <ACK>) and awaits acknowledgement.
If a positive acknowledgement is given then the program is read in. Otherwise a header is
immediately sent again.

<ACK>
<ACK>
<STX> 2nd line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 3rd line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>

"Read in program Yes/No"
<ACK> Yes
.
<STX> 4th line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1> .
. .
.
.
<STX> 3rd line PGM2 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
"Read in program Yes/No"
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB> BCC <DC1> No
<ACK>
.
.
. <ACK>
.
<STX> Last line of last PGM <ETB> .
BCC <DC1> .
<ACK>
<ACK> <ETX>
<EOT>
The number of blocks transmitted before the TNC stops to await acknowledgement will depend on
the transfer rate set. At a low data transfer rate, the TNC will stop after the first block.

3.3 LSV/2 Protocol
The LSV/2 protocol is a data transfer protocol for the two-way transfer of commands and data
according to DIN 66019.
The commands and data are transferred in so-called telegrams, i.e. the data is split up into blocks
(telegrams) and transmitted.
The following functions are possible:
Data transfer
File management (delete, copy and rename files)
Write screen to a file (screen dump)
Remote operation of the control functions, i.e. the control screen appears on the screen of the
computer and all TNC functions can be executed from the external computer.
Real DNC operation, i.e. starting and stopping the machine from the PC.
Diagnosis of TNC error messages and key operations for service purposes (the last 100 events
are stored in the TNC).
The LSV/2 protocol always runs in the background (independently of the interface set-up; standard
baud
rate 9600) and is started externally by a PC. A higher baud rate can be set in the interface set-up at
the control.
HEIDENHAIN offer two software packages:
- TNC REMOTE: Software for TNC remote control. Can be run on an AT compatible PC with MS-
DOS. All the above functions are available with this software.
- LSV/2 TOOL BOX: Software tools in C programming language for creating the transfer telegrams
(library, executable files for telegrams, source codes, INCLUDE files for LSV/2,
MAKE files).

4 Data transfer by PLC
Using PLC modules (for description see the section on "Data Transfer by PLC" in the "PLC
Programming" Manual), data can be transferred by the PLC via the RS-232-C/V.24 or RS-422/V.11
data interfaces. These modules, for example, permit communication between two logic units at PLC
level via the interface. One application of this type of data transfer is the positioning module, which
is described in detail in the "Positioning Module" Manual.
4.1 Configuration of PLC data interface
4.1.1 General
When data is transmitted by the PLC, use of the interface is inhibited by the input/output program of
the user interface. The user has the possibility of configuring the PLC interface according to the FE1,
FE2 or ME mode already described, from the RS-232-/RS-422 setup, or to configure it freely.
However, the following limitation applies:
A configuration at 19,200 baud is impossible if the other interface is already configured at 38,400
baud, regardless of whether this interface is assigned to the PLC or NC.
4.1.2 Free configuration

As with the interfaces EXT1 and EXT2 of the NC, the EXT3 PLC interface is also freely configurable.
The appropriate control characters and the data format for EXT3 are set in the machine parameters
MP5xxx.2, which are described in detail in section 2.6.2 "Freely configurable interfaces". In addition,
the baud rate for transfer can be selected via MP5040.
MP5040 Data transfer rate in operating mode EXT3 (data transfer via PLC)
Entry : 0 to 9
0 = 110 baud 5 = 2400 baud
1 = 150 baud 6 = 4800 baud
2 = 300 baud 7 = 9600 baud
3 = 600 baud 8 = 19 200 baud
4 = 1200 baud 9 = 38 400 baud
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 Data transfer by PLC 8-47

5 Error messages
5.1 TNC error messages

Listed below are the error messages for data transfer, which are displayed at the TNC. In most
cases the messages are self-explanatory.
General error messages:
BAUD RATE NOT POSSIBLE One interface is configured for 19,200 baud and the other
for 38,400 baud.
INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED Transfer is already taking place via interface, or data transfer
has not been completed.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE A transfer has been interrupted or the file has not ended
correctly (no END character or END block).
EXT. OUTPUT/INPUT NOT READY Interface is not connected; peripheral unit is switched off of
faulty.
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X X can assume the values A to H, K or L (error codes).
Error codes:
E During data transfer with Block Check Character (BCC), a (<NAK>) has been received
three times in sequence.
A to H The receiving component has detected an error with one of the following causes:
except Same baud rate not set at TNC and peripheral unit
E Parity bit wrong
Incorrect data frame (e.g. no stop bit)
Receiving component of interface faulty
K During the transmission of an error to the TNC the <1> character was not transmitted
after the <ESC> character.
L An incorrect error number was received after the <ESC><1> error sequence (error
numbers 0 to 7 are permitted).
N An expected <ACK> or <NAK> acknowledgement was not transmitted within a certain
time.
M For data transmission with BCC, <NAK> was transmitted three times in sequence.
Error codes K and L are displayed only for transfer with standard data transmission protocol.
Error messages occurring only in ME-mode:
WRONG OPERATING MODE

TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT
WRONG PROGRAM DATA
ME: TAPE END
DATA MEDIUM MISSING
DATA MEDIUM EMPTY
DATA MEDIUM WRITE-PROTECTED
8-48 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Error messages 01.98

5.2 HEIDENHAIN peripherals' error codes
These error messages refer to the FE401 floppy disk unit and to magnetic tape unit ME 101/
ME 102. With the floppy disk unit (FE 401) connected, one of the following error codes could be
outputted by the TNC:
Error code Meaning

ERR: 001 Wrong instruction code
ERR: 002 Illegal program name
ERR: 003 Defective data transmission
ERR: 004 Program incomplete
ERR: 010 Program not on floppy disk

ERR: 011 Program protected against erasure
ERR: 012 Program storage in progress
ERR: 013 Program directory full
ERR: 014 Floppy disk full
ERR: 100 Floppy disk not formatted

ERR: 101 Sector number too large
ERR: 102 Drive not ready
ERR: 103 Floppy disk write-protected
ERR: 104 Data on floppy disk defective
ERR: 105 Sectors not found
ERR: 106 Check sum defective
ERR: 107 Disk controller faulty
ERR: 108 DMA faulty
If a magnetic tape unit is connected, the following error codes could be sent to the TNC and an
appropriate error message outputted:
Error code Error message

<ESC><1><0> TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT
<ESC><1><1> DATA CARRIER MISSING
<ESC><1><2> DATA CARRIER WRITE-PROTECTED
<ESC><1><3> WRONG OPERATING MODE
<ESC><1><4> WRONG PROGRAM DATA
<ESC><1><5> DATA CARRIER EMPTY
<ESC><1><6> PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
<ESC><1><7> ME: END OF TAPE
A detailed description of these peripherals can be found in the appropriate operating manual.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Error messages 8-49

5.3 Data transmission software error messages
If data is transferred using the HEIDENHAIN - TNC.EXE data transmission program then the
following error messages might be displayed at the TNC:
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT

Attempts to transmit block to control unit has failed four times.
SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED

Search feature not included in number of acceptable characters.
INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED

Request instruction issued by control unit is not allowed.
PROGRAM NOT PRESENT

File requested by control unit does not exist in currently configured access path.
FILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME

Name of NC program and name of file do not match.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
NC program does not contain an end block.
PROTECTED FILE
File which is protected with read-only or hidden attribute is likely to be overwritten.
DATA CARRIER @: IS FULL

Data carrier >@:< full.
A precise description of this software is given in the Operating Manual of the transmission software.
8-50 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 Error messages 01.98

9
OEM-cycles Contents
1 Creating OEM cycles 9-2

1.1 Dialog block with DLG-DEF or DLG-CALL 9-3
1.2 Q parameters and functions in OEM cycles 9-6
2 Dialogs for OEM cycles 9-7
3 Output in binary code 9-8
4 "Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle example 9-9
5 OEM-cycles in NC programs 9-10

5.1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialog program 9-10
5.2 Calls in a DIN/ISO program 9-11
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 9-1

1 Creating OEM-cycles
OEM-cycles (customized macros) are programmed in the HEIDENHAIN dialog as NC programs.
By using these cycles in machining programs created in the HEIDENHAIN dialog or in accordance
with DIN/ISO, repetitive machining tasks or machine-specific functions can be executed via a single
call. Execution of the OEM-cycles can be affected by parameter transfer.
Up to 32 different OEM-cycles, with a maximum of 128 different customer-specific dialog texts, can
be produced, tested and stored in the NC program memory.
In order not to tie up the NC program memory (RAM) with the OEM-cycles and dialogs, it is possible
to store this data in the PLC EPROM.
Instructions for creating OEM-cycles
OEM-cycles in the NC program memory can be called for testing by cycle 12: "Program call". It is
thus also possible to test serviceability in the "Program run/single block" mode. (With a program call,
all the Q parameters are globally effective!)
Permitted functions in OEM-cycles
Tool definition with numerical values or Q parameters for tool length and radius (only in PLC
EPROM).
Tool call.
M functions apart from M02, M30, M06, without program-run stop.
Nesting OEM-cycles:
Other OEM-cycles or standard cycles can be called in the OEM-cycles (nesting depth four levels).
Call from main programs of OEM-cycles which are transmitted in "block mode" and are executed
simultaneously. The OEM-cycles must be stored in the control unit memory.
Re-approach to contour after an external STOP. With an external and internal STOP, re-approach
must be via block scan (mid-program start-up) (see the "Machine Interfacing" Manual and the TNC
407/TNC 415 Operating Manual).
Functions not permitted in OEM-cycles
M functions M02, M30, M06 with program-run stop.

Programmed STOP block.
Program calls with PGM-CALL.
Definition of cycle 14 "Contour":
Cycle 14 "Contour" must be defined in the main program.
Repetition of sections of program with CALL LBL ... REP .../...:
OEM-cycles with program-section repetitions stored in PLC EPROM cannot be executed.
However, program-section repeats can also be programmed via the Q parameter function (IF ...
GOTO LBL ...) (see the "Bolt hole circle" example).
9-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Creating OEM-cycles 01.98

1.1 Dialog block with DLG-DEF or DLG-CALL
Programming an OEM-cycle and, by the same token, the dialog block, is only possible if the program
name is in the range 99999968.H to 99999999.H.
Each of these program names is permanently assigned a cycle number (e.g. program name
99999968.H represents OEM-cycle 68).
Programming the dialog block is initiated by key "LBL SET" and then "NO ENT".
DLG-DEF
If the OEM-cycles are to be active in the NC program immediately after the definition, a "DEF-active"
OEM-cycle is programmed with the "ENT" key, e.g. cycle for co-ordinate transformation.
DLG-CALL
If the OEM-cycles are to be activated later in the NC program via CYCL-CALL or M99, a "CALL-
active" OEM-cycle is programmed with the "NO ENT" key, e.g. for a machining cycle.
Up to 15 dialog numbers can then be input. The first dialog number is always assigned to the
designation of the OEM-cycles. The remaining numbers are assigned to the Q parameters in
ascending order.
If fewer than 15 dialogs are to be programmed, the dialog block can end with "END". In this
connection, see also MP7250 in the following description of the relevant machine parameters.
Example:
0 BEGIN PGM 99999968 MM
1 DLG-DEF 0/2/8/100
.
.
.
15 END PGM 99999968 MM
Using machine parameter MP7240, it is possible to inhibit program input for [Program name] =
[OEM-cycles number].
If MP7240 has a value 0, no program with the program name of an OEM-cycle which is held in the
EPROM can be input or read into the NC program memory.
If MP7240 has a value 1, the program-name range of the OEM-cycles can also be used when the
OEM-cycles are held in the PLC EPROM. If a OEM-cycles is generated in the NC program memory
and if at the same time there is a OEM-cycles with the same number in the PLC EPROM, then the
OEM-cycles in the NC program memory will be executed at a cycle call.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Creating OEM-cycles 9-3

In the NC program, when defining the OEM-cycles created with dialog support, Q parameters are
assigned specified input values. The Q-parameter numbers are automatically generated by the TNC.
In order to prevent the same Q-parameter numbers being generated for "DLG-DEF" cycles and "DLG-
CALL" cycles, the difference between Q-parameter numbers can be specified for "DLG-CALL" and
"DLG-DEF" blocks.
In the case of a "DLG-CALL" block, the input values of the OEM-cycles are assigned in ascending
order of magnitude to the Q parameters Q1 to Q14. For the "DLG-DEF" block, the input values are
assigned to Q parameters Q[1 + MP7250] to Q[14 + MP7250].
Example for MP7250 = 30
Parameter number in OEM-cycle with

DLG-CALL DLG-DEF
Cycle parameter 1 Q1 Q31
. . .
. . .
. . .
MP7251 determines whether the values of the Q parameters which are changed in the OEM-cycles
by calculation or assignment are globally transferred to the called program (e.g. in the case of
"nesting" of OEM-cycles).
With machine parameter MP7251, the range of Q parameters from Q[100 - MP7251] to Q99 is
defined as "global".
The operation of global and local Q parameters may be shown by reference to following example:
MP7251 = 40
Q [100 40] = Q60 => Q60 to Q99 are global Q parameters and
Q1 to Q59 are local Q parameters
MP7251 = 40 MP7251 < 40

Q1 Q60=global Q1 Q60=local
BEGIN PGM 100 MM
FN0: Q1 = +1 +1 +0 +1 +0
FN0: Q60 = +5 +1 +5 +1 +5
CYCL DEF 69.0 OEMCYCLE 1 +1 +5 +1 +5
CYCL DEF 69.1 Q1 = +2 +2 +5 +2 +5
BEGIN PGM 99999969 MM

DLGDEF 0/32
FN1: Q1 = Q1 + 10 +12 +5 +12 +5
FN1: Q60 = Q60 + 10 +12 +15 +12 +15
END PGM 99999969 MM
STOP +2 +15 +2 +5
END PGM 100 MM

MP7240 Inhibit program input for [Program name] = [OEM-cycle number in EPROM].
Input value 0 or 1
0 = inhibit
1 = not inhibit
MP7250 Difference between Q-parameter number for "DLG-CALL" and "DLG-DEF" block
in OEM-cycles.
MP7251 Number of global Q parameters transferred from OEM-cycle to calling program.

OEM-cycles stored in the PLC EPROM can be inhibited in the PLC program via flags M2240 to
M2271. Inhibited cycles cannot be defined in NC programs.
If programs with definitions of inhibited OEM-cycles are transferred to the control unit, an error
message "ERROR=..." is generated in the transferred program and the program cannot be executed.
Flag Function Set Reset
M2240 Inhibit OEM-cycle 68 PLC PLC

. .
. .
. .
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Creating OEM-cycles 9-5

1.2 Q parameters and functions in OEM-cycles
Q-parameter programming can be used to create OEM-cycles with variable program data, with
which, for example, extremely varied drilling patterns, curves (e.g. spirals, sinusoidal, ellipse,
parabola) and shaped components can be milled.
A detailed description of Q parameters and functions is given in the TNC 407/TNC 415 Operating
Manual.
Q parameters with special significance
During a program run, data is transferred to the following Q parameters. When creating OEM-cycles,
these can be read and also overwritten:
Q108 Tool radius of tool last called

Q109 Current tool axis
Q110 M function last output for spindle rotation direction
Q111 Coolant on/off
Q112 Overlapping factor for pocket-milling (from MP7430)
Q113 Main program contains measurements in millimetres or inches
FN-Functions with special significance
The following FN functions can be used to execute various tasks, such as error messages and data
transfer NC -> PLC in the OEM-cycles.
FN14 Output of error messages and dialogs to VDU

FN15 Output of error messages, dialogs and Q-parameter values to a file or via a data interface
(V.24/RS-232-C or V.11/RS-422).
FN19 Assignment of two numerical values or Q-parameter values from an OEM-cycle to PLC.
(Function FN19 is described in detail in the "PLC Programming" Manual).

2 Dialogs for OEM-cycles
The dialog numbers defined in the dialog blocks of the OEM-cycles determine the text to be
displayed from the dialog file concerned. Which dialog file is active will depend on the dialog
language selected (MP7230) and whether dialogs are read from the EPROM or are stored in the NC
program memory (see the section on "Functions for file management" in the "PLC Programming"
Manual).
The dialog numbers (input: 0 to 127) of the dialog block are assigned to the first 128 lines of a dialog
file.
Example:
DLG-DEF 0/1/.../127
Dialog number in OEM-cycle Line number of dialog file Dialog example

0 1 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
1 2 NUMBER OF HOLES
. . .
. . .
. . .
127 128 PITCH
Up to 20 characters can be displayed on a dialog line. In all, a maximum of 34 characters may be

input, being reproduced in full in the NC program, but only in abbreviated form on the dialog line.
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Dialogs for OEM-cycles 9-7

3 Output in binary code
If the OEM-cycles have been fully tested and the dialogs have been specified, the two can be output
in binary form for EPROM programming, together with the PLC program and the error messages. It
is possible to output the files located in both the PLC EPROM and the NC program memory in binary
code.
An accurate description of file output via the data interface is given in the "PLC Programming"
Manual.
9-8 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Output in binary code 01.98

4 "Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle example
The following "Bolt hole circle" program is an example of an OEM-cycle. (This cycle has not been
loaded in the control unit!)
The Z-axis acts as the tool axis. The first hole in the circle is at 0o. The OEM-cycle calculates the
angular position of the holes from the number of holes. The drilling positions are approached in
succession in an anti-clockwise direction, and the holes are made automatically with an in-feed.
Before the cycle is called, the tool is held at the safety clearance.
Y Input parameters:
Q1 = Number of holes
Q2 = Radius of bolt hole circle
Q3 = X co-ordinate of centre of bolt hole circle
Q4 = Y co-ordinate of centre of bolt hole circle
Q2 Q5 = Safety clearance for Z axis
(negative input)
0 Q6 = Hole depth in Z axis (negative input)
Q7 = Drilling feed
Q4
Q3 X
"Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle

0 BEGIN PGM 99999968 MM
1 DLG-CALL 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Dialog block
2 FN1: Q6 = +Q6 + +Q5 Distance traversed in Z
3 FN4: Q50 = +360 DIV + Q1 Angle increment
4 FN0: Q60 = +0 Start angle
5 CC X+Q3 Y+Q4 Centre of bolt hole circle
6 LBL 11 Jump label
7 LP PR +Q2 PA +Q60 R0 FMAX Approach drilling position
8 L IZ +Q6 FQ7 Drilling with feed
9 L IZ Q6 FMAX Clear
10 FN 1: Q60 = +Q60 + +Q50 Next angle
11 FN12: IF +Q60 LT +360 GOTO LBL 11 Last bore?
12 END PGM 99999968 MM
Dialogs for "Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle
Dialog No. DIALOG

0 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
1 NUMBER OF HOLES?
2 RADIUS?
3 X COORDINATE CC?
4 Y COORDINATE CC?
5 SAFETY CLEARANCE?
6 TOTAL HOLE DEPTH?
7 IN-FEED DEPTH?
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 4 "Bolt hole circle" OEM-cycle example 9-9
5 OEM-cycles in NC programs
OEM-cycles in the NC program memory or PLC EPROM can be defined, called and executed both in
HEIDENHAIN dialog programs and also in DIN/ISO programs.
5.1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialog program

In the HEIDENHAIN dialog program, OEM-cycles are defined as standard cycles (see "Dialog
Programming" in the TNC 407/TNC 415 Operating Manual).
The dialog for cycle definition is initiated with the "CYCL DEF" key. The desired cycle is selected
either by skimming through the pages using the vertical arrow keys or by "GOTO" and input of the
cycle number (e.g. 68). The cycle is entered with the "ENT" key.
The individual parameters are input via the digital keyboard and entered with "ENT".
In the case of a "DEF-active" OEM-cycle, the cycle is effective immediately after definition. Once
defined, a "CALL-active" OEM-cycle can be called and hence activated either via "CYCL CALL" or
M99.
Example:
0 BEGIN PGM 1000 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z20 Definition of blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 For test/program-run graphics
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+2 Tool definition
4 TOOL CALL 1 Z S1000 Tool call
5 L Z+2 R0 FMAX M3 Approach safety clearance
6 CYCL DEF 68.0 Bolt hole circle Definition of cycle 68 "Bolt hole circle"
7 CYCL DEF 68.1 Q1=+8 Q2=+40 Q3=+60
8 CYCL DEF 68.2 Q4=+50 Q5=2 Q6=20
9 CYCL DEF 68.3 Q7=+100
10 CYCL CALL Call cycle
11 END PGM 1000 MM
9-10 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 OEM-cycles in NC programs 01.98

5.2 Calls in a DIN/ISO program
In a DIN/ISO program, OEM-cycles are not defined via a G- function but via key "D".
The desired OEM-cycle is entered by inputting its number (e.g. 68) and "ENT". The individual
parameters are input via the digital keyboard and entered with "ENT". The definition of the OEM-
cycles ends with "END".
In the case of a "DEF-active" OEM-cycle, the cycle is effective immediately after definition. Once
defined, a "CALL-active" OEM-cycle can be called and hence activated either via G79 or M99.
Example:
% 1000 G71*
N10 G30 G17 X+0 Y+0 Z20* Definition of blank
N20 G31 G90 X+100 Y+100 Z+0* For test/program-run graphics
N30 G99 T1 L+0 R+2* Tool definition
N40 T1 G17 S1000* Tool call
N50 G00 G40 G90 Z+2 M3* Safety clearance
N60 D68 P1+8 P2+40 P3+60 Definition of cycle 68 "Bolt hole circle"
P4+50 P52 P620 P7+100*
N70 G79* Call cycle
N99999 % 1000 G71*
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 5 OEM-cycles in NC programs 9-11

10
Positioning Module - Contents
1 PLC positioning module 10-2

1.1 Introduction 10-2
1.2 Hardware 10-3
1.3 EMERGENCY STOP routine 10-5
1.4 Reference signal evaluation 10-6
1.5 Installing the positioning module 10-6
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 10-1

1 PLC positioning module
1.1 Introduction
One hardware version of the LE 360 - the LE 234.003 - can be used in conjunction with the
TNC407/TNC415 as a positioning module.
This means that the TNC 407/TNC 415 can be extended by up to 4 secondary axes. PLC inputs and
outputs of the LE 234.003 can also be used.
The positioning module can be used for toolchangers, for pallet infeed and for controlling rotary axes
and swivel heads.
The NC software of the TNC 360 can also run on the LE 234.003, i.e. all functions of the TNC 360
are also available with the positioning module.
Detailed technical particulars are given in "Technical Manual TNC 360"
10-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 01.98

1.2 Hardware
Differences in hardware between LE 234.003 and LE 360 C:
- the X25 connector contains the RS-232-C/V.24 and the RS-422/V.11

- there is no X4 measuring system input (sinus)
- X5 measuring system input (square) is additional
Control loop board

X1 X2 = Measuring system 2 (~)
X11
X21 X24 X3 = Measuring system 3 (~)
X5 = Measuring system 5 ( )
X2 X6 = Measuring system S ( )
24V
X12 X8 = Nominal value output 1,2,3,4,S
X25 X9 = Screen unit (for commissioning only)
X3
X31
X22 B = Operational ground
X8
X26
X21 = PLC output
X22 = PLC input
X5 X23 = TNC keyboard (TE)
(for commissioning only)
X6 X23 X27 X24 = 24 V supply for PLC
X9 X25 = RS-422/V.11 data interface (V.24/RS-232)
X31 = 24 V supply for LE
X11, X12 and X26 are not required.

X4 is not fitted.
B
Connecting cable
LE 234.003 LE 407/415
Id.-Nr. 292
265 123
479 ..
max. 50 m
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 10-3

Pin layout
X25 data interface RS-422/V.11 and RS-232-C/V.24
Flange socket with female insert (25-pin)
Pin No. Assignment Assignment

RS-422/V.11 RS-232-C/V.24
1 Screen
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 CTS
5 RTS
6 DTR
7 GND Signal
8 spare
___
9 RxD
___
10 CTS
___
11 TxD
___
12 RTS
___
13 DSR
___
14 DTR
15 DTR
16, 17, 18 spare
19 GND Signal
20 DSR DSR
21 RxD
22 CTS
23 TxD
24 RTS
25 Chassis Outer screen
GND Chassis
X5 Measuring system Input 5 ( )
Pin No. Assignment

5 Ua1

6 Ua1
8 Ua2

1 Ua2
3 Ua0

4 Ua0

7 UaS
2 + 5 V (UP)
12 + 5 V (UP)
11 0 V (UN)
10 0 V (UN)
9 (spring) Screen = Chassis

1.3 EMERGENCY STOP routine
The internal EMERGENCY STOP shutdown of the TNCs is tested when the supply voltage is
switched on, i.e. the supply voltage to each processor is turned off for a short time.
Suitable protective circuitry must be used to ensure that the positioning module is not ready for
operation if the NC test reveals an error, i.e. the voltage for the feedback is mutually interrupted.
This can be achieved by the circuit illustrated. The test starts when the control voltage is switched
on.
LE 407/415
Switch opens for a short time when control

voltage to each processor is turned on
X41/34 X44/2 X44/1 X42/4

"Control is 24V not 24V Feedback
ready" interruptible interruptible "Control ready"
EMERGENCY
STOP buttons k1
Control + -
voltage k1
on 24 V
k3 PLC
K1
LE 234.003
Switch opens for a short time when control
voltage to each processor is turned on
X41/34 X44/2 X44/1 X42/4

"Control is 24V not 24V Feedback
ready" interruptible interruptible "Control ready"
EMERGENCY
STOP buttons k1
+ -
k1
Control 24 V
voltage PLC
on K1
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 PLC positioning module 10-5

1.4 Reference signal evaluation
After reference signal evaluation of the NC axes, reference signal evaluation of the PLC axes of the
positioning module must be initiated either automatically (e.g. by NC Start) or manually by special
keys. PLC positioning is not possible until the reference signal is evaluated.
1.5 Installing the positioning module

The positioning module is connected to the hardware across the RS-422/V.11 interface by means of
a special cable (Id.-Nr. 265 479).
Software installation is done with the PLC program of the master controller (TNC 407 or TNC 415).
Modules 9100 and 9107 are used for this: they activate the RS-422/V.11 data interface and make it
possible to transmit and receive binary data respectively.
These modules are described in the chapter "PLC Programming".
The PLC program for the positioning module can be written either on the LE 234.003 itself, in which
case it must be connected up to screen BE 212 and control panel TE 355 A/B, or on a PC using the
HEIDENHAIN PLC programming software.
Please contact HEIDENHAIN should you have any queries about the PLC programming software.

11
TNC 425 - Contents
1 Digital speed control 11-2
2 Mounting and electrical installation 11-3

2.1 Hardware 11-3
2.2 Summary of connections 11-4
2.2.1 Pin assignment 11-5
2.3.1 Connection of linear encoders 11-6
2.3.2 Connection of rotary encoders for speed control 11-6
2.3.3 Connection of rotary encoder for spindle orientation 11-7
2.4 Analogue output 11-7
3 Machine interfacing 11-8

3.1 Machine parameters for digital speed control 11-8
3.2 Optimizing the speed controller 11-12
3.3 Optimizing the position controller 11-15
3.4 Oscilloscope 11-16
3.4.1 Soft-key rows 11-17
3.4.2 Triggers 11-18
3.4.3 Recording 11-18
4 Cable overview 11-21
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 11-1

1 Digital speed control
A digital speed controller has been integrated into the TNC 425.
The benefits of this concept are:
High dynamic response

High Kv factor
Trailing errors are virtually "nil"
No drift
High geometrical accuracy with high traverse speeds
Traverse speeds up to 60 m/min
Cycle times: Contour interpolation 3 ms

Fine interpolation 0.6 ms
Block circuit diagram of TNC 425 with integral speed controller
TNC 425 Servo Amplifier Machine
Feed forward control

Acceleration
precontrol
Feed motor with
rotary encoder Machine slide
Digital speed Current for rotor speed with linear
Position controller control controller Power stage and position encoder
Nominal + Nominal + Nominal +

position speed current
(digital)
Actual current
Actual speed
Actual position
11-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Digital speed control 01.98

2 Mounting and electrical installation
The connection conditions are the same as for the TNC 415 B the differences between TNC 425
and TNC 415 B are explained in the following sections.
2.1 Hardware
The TNC 425 consists of the following hardware components:
LE 425 (logic unit)

TE 400 (TNC control panel)
BC 110 B (VDU)
PL 410 (max. 2 PLC I/O units as option)
The following Identification Numbers have been allocated for the LE 425 so far:
ID Number Logic Unit Modification
267 214 19 LE 425

267 214 24 LE 425 with "Digitise TS 120" module
267 214 28 LE 425 E
267 214 38 LE 425 E Export
267 214 39 LE 425 Standard
267 214 47 LE 425 with "Digitise TM 110" module
267 214 48 LE 425 E Export
267 214 49 LE 425 Standard
267 214 57 LE 425 with "Digitise TM 110" module
267 214 58 LE 425 E Export
267 214 59 LE 425 Standard
Identification number for software module "Digitizing with TS 120": 246 051 01
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 11-3
2.2 Summary of connections
Control loop board

X1 = Encoder 1 (~)
X14 X15 X1 X44
X2 = Encoder 2 (~)
X3 = Encoder 3 (~)
X41 X45 X4 = Encoder 4 (~)
24V X5 = Encoder 5 (~)
X16 X2
X6 = Encoder S ( )
X8 = Nominal value output 1,2,3,4,5,S
X12 = Triggering touch probe system
X31 X17 X3 X14 = Measuring touch probe system
X21
X15 = Encoder/speed
X16 = Encoder/speed
X8 X42 X46 X17 = Encoder/speed
X18
X4 X18 = Encoder/speed
X19 = Encoder/speed
X22 X20 = Spare
X12 X19 B = Operational ground
X5
X47 PLC and Graphics Board

X20 X6
X43
X23 X41 = PLC outputs
B X42 = PLC inputs
X43 = Visual display unit (BC 110)
X44 = 24 V supply for PLC
X45 = TNC keyboard (TE)
X46 = Machine control panel
X47 = PLC I/O unit (PL)
Processor Board
X21 = RS-232-C/V.24 data interface

X22 = RS-422/V.11 data interface
X23 = Handwheel
X31 = 24 V DC supply for NC
11-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 01.98
2.2.1 Pin assignment
Logic unit LE 425
Pin No. Assignment Colour

X1, X2, X3, X4, X5 1 I1 Yellow
Encoder 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 2 0V White
(sine wave signal input) 3 I2 Red
4 Inner screen White/Brown
Sub-D connector 5 I0 Pink
(9-pin female insert) 6 I1 + Green
7 +5V Brown
8 I2 + Blue
9 I0 + Gray
Chassis Outer screen

X6 measuring system S 1 Ua1 Brown
(square-wave signal input) 2 0 V (UN) White/Green
3 Ua2 Gray
Sub-D connector 4 +
___5 V (Up) Brown/Green
(15-pin female insert) 7 U a0
___ Black
9 Ua1 Green
10 0 V (UN)
___ White
11 Ua2 Pink
12 + 5 V (Up)
___ Blue
13 UaS Violet
14 Ua0 Red
5,6,7,8,15 not assigned
Chassis Outer screen =
device chassis

X15, X16, X17, X18, X19 1 A+ Brown
Measuring system/Speed 2 0 V (UN) White/Green
(sinus signal input 1 Vpp) 3 B+ Gray
4 + 5 V (UP) Brown/Green
Sub-D connector 7 R Black
(15-pin female insert) 9 A Green
10 0 V (UN) White
11 B Pink
12 + 5 V (UP) Blue
13 not assigned Violet
14 R+ Red
5,6,8,13,15 not assigned
Chassis Outer screen =
device chassis
2.3.1 Connection of linear encoders
The LE 425 can process up to five encoders with sinusoidal output signals (7 to 16 App).
Max. input frequency: 50 kHz
Cable adapter, complete (Max. 60 m)

Coupling (female) 9-pin / D-sub connector (male) 9-pin Id.-Nr. 267 269 ..
or
Connecting cable, with one connector (Max. 60 m)

D-sub connector (male) 9-pin Id.-Nr. 268 371 ..
2.3.2 Connection of rotary encoders for speed control

To measure ballscrew speed, the TNC requires HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders with 1 Vpp output
signals and a 5 V power supply. The signal is interpolated by a factor of 256 in the control. When
selecting the line count, remember that the input frequency must no exceed the limit of 200 kHz at
the LE. The line count should be selected so that the number of grating periods for speed control is
at least 5 times that for position control.
Talk with your drive supplier and HEIDENHAIN about possible mounting configurations.
For various types of motors HEIDENHAIN offers the ERN 281 modular rotary encoder with a special
assembly kit that enables the machine tool builder to install the rotary encoder on the motor. The
mounting procedure is quite simple: the motor housing is extended by the length of the spacer in
the assembly kit, and the lid is then re-fitted.
A straightforward solution with a standard encoder from the ROD series can be applied to modify
the first machine when using a drive type for which no assembly kit is yet available.

Connector (female) 12-pin / D-sub connector (pin) 15-pin Id.-Nr. 267 268 ..
or

Coupling (female) 12-pin / D-sub connector (male) 15-pin Id.-Nr. 267 267 ..
or
Connecting cable with one connector (Max. 60 m)

D-sub connector (pin) 15-pin Id.-Nr. 268 372 ..
11-6 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Mounting and electrical installation 01.98
2.3.3 Connection of rotary encoder for spindle orientation
The encoder for oriented spindle stop is connected at the input X6 (square-wave signals).
HEIDENHAIN recommends using the ROD 426.xxx8 (1024 lines).

Connector (female) 12-pin / D-sub connector (pin) 15-pin Id.-Nr. 267 268 ..
or
Connecting cable with one connector (Max. 20 m)

D-sub connector (pin) 15-pin Id.-Nr. 268 372 ..
2.4 Analogue output

The TNC 425 from HEIDENHAIN permits installation of commercially standard amplifiers and motors
with AC technology. The output with the analogue nominal value voltage of the TNC's rpm controller
is connected with the torque input of the servo amplifier.
This drive concept eliminates the need for tachogenerators. The rpm actual value is measured by a
HEIDENHAIN incremental rotary encoder.
3 Machine interfacing
3.1 Machine parameters for digital speed control

The type of speed control - analogue or digital - can be selected for each individual axis.
The position and speed controllers receive their feedback signals from separate encoders. A linear
encoder (or angle encoder for rotary axes) is the standard device for measuring distances. Speed is
controlled by HEIDENHAIN rotary encoders that are fitted to the motor.
The new machine parameters for speed control make it possible to specify and optimise the control
loop. Irrespective of this the controller can still be operated as before in trailing mode or with feed
pre-control. The TNC 425 also positions in the manual modes in trailing mode.
The term "counting step" is one which is used in connection with the new machine parameters.
Counting steps are the counting pulses from the measuring system multiplied internally by a factor
of 256.
The following additional machine parameters are available for digital speed control:
MP1900 Select axes with digital speed controller

MP1910.x Monitor speed controller
MP1920.x Integral component for speed controller
MP1940.x Proportional component for speed controller
MP1950 Polarity for torque signal
MP1951 Select measuring system for position control
MP1955.x Ratio of grating period LS to ROD
MP1960 Compensation for reversal spikes on circular interpolation at the
quadrant transitions for digitally controlled axes
MP1970 Motion monitor for position and speed
MP1980 Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP
The following machine parameters are inactive for axes with digital speed control.
MP1050 Analogue voltage for rapid traverse

MP1080 Integral factor
MP1140 Movement monitoring
MP1220 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment
MP1900 Select axes with digital speed controller

Entry: %XXXXX
Bit 0 X axis 0 = Without digital speed controller

Bit 1 Y axis 1 = With digital speed controller
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
11-8 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 01.98

MP1910 Monitor speed controller (drive monitoring)
Entry: 1 to 16 777 215 [counting steps]
MP1910.0 X axis
MP1910.1 Y axis
MP1910.2 Z axis
MP1910.3 4th axis
MP1910.4 5th axis
The entry is axis-specific and made in counting steps. MP1910.x monitors the theoretically
calculated output voltage of the speed controller. If this voltage exceeds the limit specified in
MP1910.x the error message "Gross positioning error 3F" appears. This voltage is always limited
to 10 V at the output.
The input value for MP1910.x can therefore be calculated as follows:
Ulimit
MP 1910.x =
MP1920.x * 9.7 V
The speed controller integrated in the control system is a PI controller. The P and I components of
the speed controller can be set in machine parameters MP1920.x and MP1940.x.
MP1920 Integral component for speed controller (I component)

Entry: 0 to 65 535
Recommended input range: 50 to 100
MP1920.0 X axis
MP1920.1 Y axis
MP1920.2 Z axis
MP1920.3 4th axis
MP1920.4 5th axis
MP1925 Limiting the integral component for speed controller

Entry: 0.000 to 65.535 [s]
Recommended input range: 0.1 to 2 s
MP1925.0 X axis
MP1925.1 Y axis
MP1925.2 Z axis
MP1925.3 4th axis
MP1925.4 5th axis
MP1940 Proportional component for speed controller (P component)

Entry: 0 to 65 535
Recommended input range: 50 to 200
MP1940.0 X axis
MP1940.1 Y axis
MP1940.2 Z axis
MP1940.3 4th axis
MP1940.4 5th axis
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Machine interfacing 11-9

MP1945 Factor for acceleration pre-control of the rotational speed controller
Entry: 0.000 to 9.999 [V/(m/s2)]
MP1945.0 X axis
MP1945.1 Y axis
MP1945.2 Z axis
MP1945.3 4th axis
MP1945.4 5th axis
MP1950 Polarity for torque signal

Entry: %XXXXX
Bit 2 Z axis
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
The polarity of the nominal voltage can be modified with this MP.
MP1040 is still active but for internal voltage between position and speed controller.
MP210 is only active for position encoders. The counting direction for the rotary encoder
is compensated with MP1950.
MP1951 Select measuring system for position control

Entry: %XXXXX
Bit 0 X axis 0 =linear encoder for position control
Bit 1 Y axis 1 =motor rotary encoder for position control (for trimming
Bit 2 Z axis speed controller only)
Bit 3 4th axis
Bit 4 5th axis
MP1955 Ratio of grating period LS to ROD

Entry: 0.1 to 100
MP1955.0 X axis
MP1955.1 Y axis
MP1955.2 Z axis
MP1955.3 4th axis
MP1955.4 5th axis
The ratio of grating periods of the linear encoder to the motor rotary encoder should be greater than
5 (see MP1970).
Example: 2000 lines per revolution for the rotary encoder 4 mm screw pitch
2 m grating period with ROD 20 m grating period with LS
4000 [m]
Grating period of rotary encoder: = 2 [m]
2000 [lines]
20 [m]
Entry value for MP1955: = 10
2 [m]

MP1960 Compensation for reversal spikes on circular interpolation at the quadrant
transitions for digitally controlled axes
Entry: 1.0000 to +1.0000[mm]
MP1960.0 X axis
MP1960.1 Y axis
MP1960.2 Z axis
MP1960.3 4th axis
MP1960.4 5th axis
For digitally controlled axes reversal spikes of the order of the entry range of MP1960.x are
compensated during circular interpolation at the quadrant transitions.
MP1970 Motion monitor for position and speed

Entry: 0 to 300.0000 [mm]
0 => No monitoring
MP1970.0 X axis
MP1970.1 Y axis
MP1970.2 Z axis
MP1970.3 4th axis
MP1970.4 5th axis
MP1970 is used to set encoder monitoring. The position is computed from the pulses received from
the position encoder (LS) and from the pulse received from the rotary encoder (ROD). The input
value from MP1955 is used for this. The difference between the two results must not exceed
MP1970. Movement monitoring by MP1140 is not active.
The movement monitor must be active at all times for safety reasons. It can only be
deactivated by entering 0 while approach behaviour is being trimmed if the "Gross
positioning error C" message appears despite the maximum value of 1 [mm] being
entered.
MP1980 Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP

Entry: 0 to 1.9999 seconds
In the event of a fault, braking resistors in the servo amplifier are required to stop the axes as quickly
as possible to prevent danger from axes running down uncontrolled. This braking time can be
reduced by delaying the shutdown of the TNC speed controller in MP1980.
At the same time, the controller outputs a braking torque which immediately brings the machine to a
stop.

3.2 Optimizing the speed controller
The rotary and position encoders are trimmed in sequence. The new integrated oscilloscope makes
it possible to program a step function as the output signal. The speed controller can be trimmed with
this function and with the oscilloscope without the need for any additional equipment.
The position controller is automatically inactive when starting with the step function. The axes can
only be traversed manually.
The controller can be trimmed in the sequence described. Provisional input values and input values
for monitoring are empirical values that can vary depending on the type and size of the machine as
well as on the drives, and it is therefore difficult to recommend suitable values. The characteristic
curves will also vary from one type of machine to another.
Basic trimming procedure
Assign the smallest possible value to the integral component of the speed controller (MP1920.x
0).
Increase monitoring of the speed controller (MP1910.x).
Trim the proportional component of the speed controller (MP1940.x) as described below.
Trim the integral component of the speed controller.
The speed can be trimmed with or without first evaluating the reference marks.
For traversing reference marks, the highest possible values must be entered in machine parameters
MP1920.x, MP1940.x and MP1910.x to prevent the speed controller monitor responding.
MP1920.x = 200
MP1940.x = 200
MP1910.x = 300 000
Pre-setting machine parameters for the digitally controlled axes
Before trimming commences, provisional values must be entered for the corresponding machine
parameters of the speed controller.
The integral component (MP1920.x) should be as low as possible so the P component can be
trimmed without being unduly affected by the I component.
Since the input value for monitoring the speed controller is calculated as follows (error message:
"Gross positioning error 3F"):
Vlimit
MP1910.x =
MP1920.x * 9.7 V
a greater value for the monitor must be set when entering a low integral component (MP1920.x).
Given an ideal setting of 5 for the I component (MP1920.x) and a limit voltage of 15 V, the input
value for MP1920.x is approximately 310 000.

Function MP Provisional input value
Axis sequence when approaching 1340.x 0

reference marks
Select axes with digital speed controller 1900
Bit 0 ... 4
Monitor speed controller 1910.x 310 000
Integral component for speed controller 1920.x 5
Proportional component for speed 1940.x 10
controller
Polarity for torque signal 1950 0
Bit 0 ... 4
Select encoder for position control 1951 1
Bit 0 ... 4
Motion monitor for position and speed 1970 0 ...
0 => inactive
Delayed shutdown of position controller 1980 0
Checking polarity of nominal voltage
Cancel override and start axes with direction keys for a short period. Watch drive response, modify
polarity while turning.
The monitor via MP1910 is in effect (error message: "GROSS POSITIONING ERROR 3F "
if polarity is wrong).
Optimizing
The following curves should be displayed in the oscilloscope for each axis:
mm
Nominal speed ( ) : NNOMINAL
min
mm
Actual speed ( ) : NACTUAL
min
Output analogue voltage (mV): VANALOGUE
A step function is output for optimizing (see "Oscilloscope", later in this chapter). The feed rate must
be selected such that the analogue voltage is < 8 V. It is now only necessary to press the
appropriate axis direction keys to output a step function to the servo amplifier.
Proportional component MP1940.x
MP1940.x is increased until the step response (actual speed) shows large control fluctuations. This
value is then halved to reduce overshoot to virtually nil.
Integral component MP1920.x
MP1920.x is then increased until large control fluctuations again occur for the actual speed. Half
this value is then entered in MP1920.x. The resulting overshoot should not exceed 40%.

If the motor and drive spindle are linked by a toothed belt then an initial overshoot will occur in the
step response this must be disregarded for trimming purposes.
Monitoring the speed controller
Once the proportional and integral components of the speed controller have been trimmed, a
suitable value must be calculated for MP1910.x.
Example: MP1920.x = 180 MP1940.x = 60
For MP1910.x with a Vlimit = 15 V, the following value is obtained:
Vlimit
MP1910.x = = 9000
MP1920.x * 9.7 V

3.3 Optimizing the position controller
The position controller is trimmed in the same way as with the TNC 415. This rule applies for
operation in the trailing error mode and with feed precontrol. Please note the description in Chapter
4, "Machine Integration", and the following information.
Evaluation of reference marks
After trimming the speed controller, the desired evaluation of the reference marks must be entered
in MP1350.
Checking the direction of traverse and counting direction
The directions of traverse and counting must be checked again after the linear encoder for the
position controller is activated with MP1951. The position controller is matched to the machine
coordinate system with the following machine parameters:
- MP1040 Polarity of nominal speed value in positive direction of traverse

- If the counting direction of the axis is correct but motion is wrong, then MP210 (counting direction)
must be modified.
Start axes with direction keys for a short period and correct the input values for polarity or counting
direction if necessary.
Optimizing Kv factors for the position controller
With digital drive control the limits and/or ideal values are more dependent on the drives and the
machine's mechanical systems than with previous control systems. In terms of the control principle,
it is possible to work with high Kv factors and very small trailing errors. It is important to remember
that the mechanical load on the machine will be greater.
Additional selectable Kv factors have been introduced for this reason, and they are stored in
machine parameters MP1515.x and MP1815.x. Reduced Kv factors can be used for general milling
work without great demands on accuracy at higher feed rates.
Delayed shutdown of speed controller in EMERGENCY STOP
Because the speed controller is integrated in the control system, the controlled axis runs down
when the torque signal is turned off. For this reason the control system continues to be active for a
certain time (MP1980) in an EMERGENCY STOP condition and outputs a torque. The time entered
for this must be matched to the relevant drives and machine.
The axes must be stopped immediately by external holding brakes if the control fails and no braking
torque can be output.

3.4 Oscilloscope
An oscilloscope has been integrated in the TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 for trimming and
optimizing the speed and position controllers.
The characteristic curves which the oscilloscope records can be stored in 4 channels and for all axis.
The following curves can be displayed:
Feed rate V ACTUAL Actual value [mm/min]

V NOMINAL Nominal value [mm/min]
Position and trailing error S ACTUAL [mm]
S NOMINAL [mm]
D DIFF Trailing error for position control [mm]
Speed N ACTUAL Actual speed [mm/min]
(digital speed control only) N NOMINAL Nominal speed [mm/min]
N INT Nominal/actual difference for speed controller
Nominal value U ANALOGUE Analogue voltage [mV]
Note on speed curves
Rotational speeds are recorded as feed rates in mm/min. The speed in rpm. can be calculated with
the help of the distance covered per revolution, i.e.
Feed rate [mm / min]

Rotational speed (rpm) =
Traverse per rev. [ mm]
The data recorded for the display are stored until an NC graphic is called. Likewise a computed
graphic simulation is deleted by the oscilloscope display.
A total of 5 colours can be selected in machine parameters for the oscilloscope display. They are
selected in exactly the same way as the 3-plane view in NC graphic simulation.
MP7361.0 Background
MP7261.1 Grid
MP7361.2 Non-selected channels
MP7361.3 Cursor line, data, screen window
MP7361.4 Selected channel
The "Oscilloscope" mode is entered by keying in code number 688 379.
If you leave the Oscilloscope mode you can re-enter it using the MOD key and the OSZI soft key.
The code number must only be re-keyed when the supply voltage has been switched off.
The following main display appears when the mode is called:

Use the cursor keys to move the highlight (cursor) to the desired item and to select the trigger
conditions and the axes and parameters you wish to record.
3.4.1 Soft-key rows
Meaning of soft keys:
Start recording
Vertical zoom Optimal vertical

resolution,
Horizontal zoom centred in screen
Activate cursor

3.4.2 Triggers
The following entries are possible:
FREE RUN Recording is terminated manually

SINGLE SHOT Records a memory content - initiated by trigger condition.
CHANNEL ... Starts recording when the trigger threshold of the selected channel is
exceeded.
Trigger threshold
The trigger threshold for the selected channel is entered as a numerical value in the following units:
Linear speed [mm/min]

Position [mm]
Rotational speed [mm/min]
Trailing error [m]
Analogue voltage [mV]
Edge
Triggering with rising (positive) and falling (negative) edge.
Pre-Trigger
Defines the start of the recording as a % of the total recording time; possible entries are 0%, 25%,
50%, 75% and 100%. Press the ENT key to select.
3.4.3 Recording
The recording parameters to be edited are selected with the arrow keys. The values for FEED RATE
and TRIGGER THRESHOLD are entered with the numerical keys. The values for all other recording
parameters are selected by pressing the ENT key.
Output
In the Manual mode you can choose between the set ramp and a step function for outputting a
nominal value.
The step function is only possible with digitally controlled axes and is necessary for trimming the
speed controller. The step function and the oscilloscope recording facility can also be used to
determine the maximum acceleration of the machine when the provisional input value is not known.
In the MDI or Automatic modes acceleration is always by the set ramp.

Feed rate
With a step function as the output signal, the feed rate is entered in [mm/min]. The programmed
feed rate dictates the acceleration after the ramp.
Time resolution
The recording time ranges from 2.4576 sec. to 24.576 sec. (set time x4096). The time set between
0.6 and 6 ms is the cycle time for recording curves. The recording time is overlaid beneath the grid.
The beginning and end of the image are also displayed relative to the trigger point (cursor line T1).
Channels 1 to 4
A total of 4 channels can be selected for recording. The axes can be randomly assigned to the
channels - this is done using the ENT key after selecting the entry position.
For each channel a characteristic curve is selected from the following variables:
Feed rate V ACTUAL Actual value [mm/min]

V NOMINAL Nominal value [mm/min]
Speed S ACTUAL Actual value [mm]
S NOMINAL Nominal value [mm]
Speed controller N INT Nominal/actual difference for speed controller
[mm/min]
Position N ACTUAL Actual value [mm/min]
N NOMINAL Nominal value [mm/min]
Trailing error D DIFF Trailing error for speed control [mm]
Analogue voltage U ANALOGUE output analogue voltage [mV]
Channel OFF Channel is displayed
SAVED Channel is saved
Recording is activated with START (soft key). This calls a soft-key row in which the sole option is
STOP. Recording can be interrupted at will. Saved channels cannot be displayed at the same time as
recording is in progress because synchronization between the saved channels and the channels
currently recording is not possible.
Evaluating the recorded curves with the cursor
Whereas the complete memory contents are displayed at the start, the time window selected
before the start is displayed after the image is restored. The time to trigger point is shown as T1 at
the left of the display. Beneath it is the absolute value in [mm/min], [mm] or [mV].
If the CURSOR 1/2 key is used to overlay a second cursor for time T2, then this cursor can also be
moved using the arrow keys on the TNC control panel. The time that is displayed as T2 is the
difference from T1. The numerical value overlaid underneath is also the difference from the value
associated with T1. The display for T2 and the second cursor are deleted using the END or "Cursor
1/2" soft key.

Vertical zoom
The vertical grid display of each previously selected channel can be modified in fixed steps using
soft keys. The value of the grid in the vertical axis is overlaid at the left hand margin beneath the
channel number and the name of the recording.
Centring
Select vertical resolution to achieve an optimum display.
Now return to original vertical deflection: use the NO ENT key to restore the original display of the
stored data in the vertical axis.
Horizontal zoom
The recording gathers 4096 evaluated data. Time resolution, i.e., the cycle time between the
recorded data, can be set from 0.6 to 6 ms. The range of display stretching and condensing is
limited as follows.
Evaluated data Data : Pixels

smallest display 4096 8:1
max. stretched display 64 1:8
The length of the displayed window and its beginning as an absolute position within the recording
length of the data is displayed as a bar (scroll bar) in the status field.

BC 110 B
260 520 01 TE 400 4 Cable overview
250 517 02
TNC 425 PL 410 B
263 371 x2
PL 410 B
263 371 x2
PA 110
262 651 01
MB 410 20m
293 757 01
VL: Extension cable
40m for separation points with connecting cable
for extending existing connecting cable
VB: Connecting cable between two components
that do not have their own cable.
KA: Cable adapter
30.03.95
VB VB VB VB
Connecting cable 263 954 .. 263 954 ..
250 477 .. 289 111 ..
included with BC 110B
Encoders for
position control VB Accessories
KA
60m 244 005 ..
274 556 .. VB 50m
VL VL 272 291 .. HR 332
263 955 .. 263 955 .. VB 266 064 ..
VL
289 111 ..
254 640 ..
HR 130
11 A PP Cable assembly VB 254 040 ..
289 111 ..
HR 330
251 534 ..
KA KA
267 269 .. 50m 249 889 ..
VL
11 A PP 281 429.. VB max. 20 m HR 150
270 909 ..
VB HR 150
268 371 .. HRA 110
261 097 01
HR 150
257 061 ..
11 A PP 5 inputs
max. 20 m
Step switch
VB 249 819 01
TTL 270 908 ..
1 input
LE 425 289 208 ..
VB
20m
1 VPP 5 inputs 239 760 ..
VB Included with FE
268 372 .. 274 545 01
FE 401 B
251 029 01
20m
TTL RS-232-C Adapter block
KA 239 758 01 VB
Connection box 285 289 .. 284 574 ..
KA 12pin / 15pin 251 249 01
267 268 ..
50m
12m
Rotary encoder TT 110
for spindle orientation 288 949 ..
KA
VB VB 274 543 ..
50m
290 109 .. 244 005 ..
1 VPP TS 120
VB VB VB 265 348 ..
268 372 .. 290 110 .. 263 954 ..
VB APE 510 227 590 01 SE 510
60m 274 539 .. APE 511 275 759 01 230 473 01
20m 40m max. 30 m
max. 7m 3m
KA 15-pin male connector 37-pin male connector
Rotary encoder 267 268 .. 243 971 ZY 243 937 ZY VL TS 511
for speed control 274 540 .. 265 349 ..
Nominal value PLC I / 0 40m
output

2
Appendix - Contents
1 7 Bit ASCII code 12-2
2 Powers of 2 12-5
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 12-1

1 7-Bit ASCII code
Character DEC OCT HEX

NUL 000 000 00
SOH 001 001 01
STX 002 002 02
ETX 003 003 03
EOT 004 004 04
ENQ 005 005 05
ACK 006 006 06
BEL 007 007 07
BS 008 010 08
HT 009 011 09
LF 010 012 0A
VT 011 013 0B
FF 012 014 0C
CR 013 015 0D
SO 014 016 0E
SI 015 017 0F
DLE 016 020 10
DC1 (X-ON) 017 021 11
DC2 018 022 12
DC3 (X-OFF) 019 023 13
DC4 020 024 14
NAK 021 025 15
SYN 022 026 16
ETB 023 027 17
CAN 024 030 18
EM 025 031 19
SUB 026 032 1A
ESC 027 033 1B
FS 028 034 1C
GS 029 035 1D
RS 030 036 1E
US 031 037 1F
SP 032 040 20
! 033 041 21
" 034 042 22
# 035 043 23
$ 036 044 24
% 037 045 25
& 038 046 26
039 047 27
( 040 050 28
) 041 051 29
* 042 052 2A
+ 043 053 2B
, 044 054 2C
- 045 055 2D
. 046 056 2E
/ 047 057 2F
12-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 7-Bit ASCII code 01

0 048 060 30
1 049 061 31
2 050 062 32
3 051 063 33
4 052 064 34
5 053 065 35
6 054 066 36
7 055 067 37
8 056 070 38
9 057 071 39
: 058 072 3A
; 059 073 3B
< 060 074 3C
= 061 075 3D
> 062 076 3E
? 063 077 3F
@ 064 100 40
A 065 101 41
B 066 102 42
C 067 103 43
D 068 104 44
E 069 105 45
F 070 106 46
G 071 107 47
H 072 110 48
I 073 111 49
J 074 112 4A
K 075 113 4B
L 076 114 4C
M 077 115 4D
N 078 116 4E
O 079 117 4F
P 080 120 50
Q 081 121 51
R 082 122 52
S 083 123 53
T 084 124 54
U 085 125 55
V 086 126 56
W 087 127 57
X 088 130 58
Y 089 131 59
Z 090 132 5A
[ 091 133 5B
\ 092 134 5C
] 093 135 5D
^ 094 136 5E
095 137 5F
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 7-Bit ASCII code 12-3

` 096 140 60
a 097 141 61
b 098 142 62
c 099 143 63
d 100 144 64
e 101 145 65
f 102 146 66
g 103 147 67
h 104 150 68
i 105 151 69
j 106 152 6A
k 107 153 6B
l 108 154 6C
m 109 155 6D
n 110 156 6E
o 111 157 6F
p 112 160 70
q 113 161 71
r 114 162 72
s 115 163 73
t 116 164 74
u 117 165 75
v 118 166 76
w 119 167 77
x 120 170 78
y 121 171 79
z 122 172 7A
{ 123 173 7B
124 174 7C
} 125 175 7D
~ 126 176 7E
DEL 127 177 7F
12-4 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 7-Bit ASCII code 01

2 Powers of 2
n 2n
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 8
4 16
5 32
6 64
7 128
8 256
9 512
10 1 024
11 2 048
12 4 096
13 8 192
14 16 384
15 32 768
16 65 536
17 131 072
18 262 144
19 524 288
20 1 048 576
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2 Powers of 2 12-5

Subject Index >
> (GREATER THAN)..................... 7-75; 7-120
> [ ] (GREATER THAN [ ])........................ 7-89
(MINUS) ............................................... 7-67 >= (GREATER EQUAL)......................... 7-120
[ ] (MINUS [ ]) ....................................... 7-85 >= (GREATER EQUAL)............................ 7-77
>= [ ] (GREATER EQUAL [ ])................... 7-90
% >> (SHIFT RIGHT)................................... 7-94
%-factor - spindle override ....................... 4-99
1
* 105 296................................................... 4-152
123................................................... 4-152; 5-4
*.............................................................. 4-140
. 3
.A ................................................... 4-150; 8-18
.CMA ............................................. 4-28; 7-161 3D ROT ..................................................... 4-41
.COM .................................... 4-28; 7-161; 8-18
.D ................................................... 4-150; 8-18 5
.DI1 ........................................................... 8-18 531 210............................... 4-152; 4-258; 7-19
.DIE........................................................... 8-18
.ER1 .......................................................... 8-18 6
.ERE.......................................................... 8-18 688 379................................................... 4-152
.H ................................................... 4-150; 8-18 75 368................................. 4-77; 4-152; 4-258
.I..................................................... 4-150; 8-18
.MP ........................................................... 8-18
.P ................................................... 4-150; 8-18 8
.PLC .......................................................... 8-18 807 667........................................ 4-152; 4-258
.T.................................................... 4-150; 8-18 86 357..................................................... 4-152
/ 9
/ (DIVIDE) ................................................ 7-69 95 148................................... 4-152; 4-258; 5-4
/ [ ] (DIVIDE [ ]) ........................................ 7-85
+
+ ............................................................. 7-115
+ (PLUS) ................................................. 7-66
+ [ ] (PLUS [ ]) ......................................... 7-85
<
< (LESS THAN) ............................ 7-74; 7-119
< [ ] (LESS THAN [ ]) ............................... 7-89
<< (SHIFT LEFT)..................................... 7-93
<= (LESS EQUAL) ....................... 7-76; 7-120
<= [ ] (LESS EQUAL [ ]) .......................... 7-89
<> (NOT EQUAL) ........................ 7-78; 7-121
<> [ ] (NOT EQUAL [ ]) ........................... 7-90
=
= ............................................................. 7-116
= (ASSIGN) ............................................. 7-43
= = (EQUAL)........................................... 7-73
== (equal) ............................................. 7-119
== [ ] (EQUAL [ ]).................................... 7-89
01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415 Subject Index 13-1

A Auxiliary axes ............................................ 4-38
A ............................................................... 8-18 Axes in motion.......................................... 4-91
A (AND)................................................... 7-53 Axes in position ........................................ 4-90
A[ ] (AND [ ])............................................ 7-80 Axis clamped ............................................ 4-92
Acceleration.......................... 4-68; 4-74; 4-260 Axis designation............................... 4-12; 4-13
Acceleration pre-control.......................... 11-10 Axis displayed on VDU ............................. 4-14
Accessories ................................................ 2-5 Axis error compensation........................... 2-16
Acknowledgement, of M-function.......... 4-159 Axis-enable ............................................... 4-89
Activation of a gear range....................... 4-101 Axis-error compensation........................... 4-23
Active axes ................................................. 4-6 Axis-limit ................................................... 4-16
Actual - nominal value transfer ................. 4-92 Axis-stop on TOOL CALL ....................... 4-102
Actual spindle speed ................................ 4-95
ADD (+)................................................. 7-115 B
ADD [ ] (+[ ])............................................ 7-85 B= (ASSIGN BYTE) ................................. 7-45
ADDITION (+) ......................................... 7-66 Backlash compensation............................ 4-23
Address allocation .................................... 7-18 BACKUP........................................... 2-13; 2-18
Address range .......................................... 7-18 Bar Chart................................................. 7-155
Alphabetic keyboard ............................... 4-164 Basic language - English ......................... 4-153
Amplitude of the measuring Battery voltage low................................. 4-178
system signals.......................................... 4-10 BAUD RATE NOT POSSIBLE ................... 8-48
AN (AND NOT)........................................ 7-55 Baud rates................................................... 8-8
AN[ ] (AND NOT [ ])................................. 7-80 BC (BIT CLEAR) ...................................... 7-97
Analogue inputs.................... 3-53; 3-60; 4-206 BC 110 B................................... 3-4; 3-70; 3-77
Analogue inputs........................................ 3-18 BCC.................................................. 8-18; 8-36
Analogue output ............................ 4-95; 4-275 BIT RESET (BC)...................................... 7-97
Analogue outputs ................................... 4-207 Bit Commands .......................................... 7-96
Analogue voltage ...................................... 4-70 BIT SET (BS) ........................................... 7-96
AND (A)................................................... 7-53 BIT TEST (BT).......................................... 7-98
AND [ ] (A[ ])............................................ 7-80 Block Check Character .................... 8-10; 8-36
AND NOT (AN)........................................ 7-55 Block numbers - step size ...................... 4-151
AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ].................................. 7-80 Block processing time ................................ 2-3
Angle encoders......................................... 3-27 Block scan...................................... 2-16; 4-149
Angular measurement ................................ 4-7 Block transfer............................................ 8-19
Angular measuring systems..................... 3-24 Bolt hole circle ............................................ 9-9
APE......................................................... 4-176 BS (BIT SET) ........................................... 7-96
APE........................................................... 3-36 BT (BIT TEST).......................................... 7-98
APE 510.................................................... 3-38 Buffer battery............................................ 3-18
Arc end-point tolerance ................. 2-15; 4-155 Byte ................................................. 7-16; 7-18
Arithmetic Commands.............................. 7-66
ASCII code.................................................12-2
Assembly hints ........................................... 3-9
ASSIGN (=) ............................................. 7-43
ASSIGN BYTE (B=) ................................. 7-45
Assign command...................................... 7-36
ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) ............... 7-45
ASSIGN NOT (=N) .................................... 7-46
ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -) ...... 7-46
ASSIGN WORD (W=) ............................. 7-45
Assignment .............................................. 4-13
Assignment of the analogue outputs ....... 4-14
Assignment of the measuring
system inputs ........................................... 4-13
Assignment table.....................................7-161
Asynchronous data format ......................... 8-5
13-2 TNC 407/TNC 415 Subject Index 01.98

C Contour train ............................................. 2-18
C ............................................................... 7-26 Control and signal lines............................. 8-11
Cable adapters.......................................... 3-81 CONTROL OPERATIONAL
Cable overview ......................................... 3-72 - PLC I/O ports ........................................ 4-120
Calibrating............................................... 4-178 Controlled ................................................. 4-89
Call Module (CM).................................. 7-107 Cooling........................................................ 3-9
CALL-active ................................................ 9-3 Coordinate system.................................. 4-221
CAN (CANCEL) ..................................... 7-124 Coordinates, read.................................... 7-145
Cancel status-display.............................. 4-140 Copy in Marker ....................................... 7-136
Cancellable error message ..................... 4-120 Correction table ........................................ 4-28
Cascade control ........................................ 4-65 Correction value...................................... 4-221
CASE (CASE OF) .................................. 7-129 Count direction for handwheel ............... 4-197
CASE Branch .......................................... 7-129 Count direction for spindle........................ 4-96
Centre offset .......................................... 4-178 Counter ............................................ 7-18; 7-26
Change direction of spindle rotation......... 4-96 Counting direction............................ 4-8; 4-189
Character frame.......................................... 8-6 Counting step ............................................. 4-7
CM (CALL MODULE) ........................... 7-107 Current tool axis........................................ 4-14
CMF (CALL MODULE IF FALSE) ......... 7-108 Cutting machines.................................... 4-275
CMT (CALL MODULE IF TRUE) ............ 7-107 Cycle 14 ...................................................... 9-2
CN 123........................................................ 5-4 Cycle 17 .................................................. 4-117
Code for M-function ............................... 4-159 Cycle 18 .................................................. 4-118
Code length ................................................ 7-7 Cycle inhibit ............................................ 4-144
Code number............ 2-15; 4-31; 4-77; 5-4; 7-6 Cycles ..................................................... 4-144
Code numbers ........................................ 4-258 Cylinder interpolation ................................ 4-41
Coded output, BCD ................................ 4-104 Cylinder surface ............................. 2-20; 4-147
Code-numbers ........................................ 4-152
Colour adjustment .................................. 4-130
Command ................................................. 7-16
Commands ............................................... 7-36
Comment.................................................... 5-3
Comments.................................................. 7-6
Commissioning....................................... 4-258
Comparisons............................................. 7-73
Compensation Assignment ...................... 8-18
Compensation of reversal spikes ............. 2-14
Compensation table.................................. 8-18
Compensation value table ............... 2-20; 4-27
COMPILE.................................................. 7-12
Complement............................................. 7-38
Complement marker............................... 4-209
Connection box......................................... 3-32
Connections, summary of ........................ 3-14
Connector assignment X10 ...................... 3-35
Connector assignment X12 ...................... 3-36
Connector assignment X8 ........................ 3-32
Connector assignments
X1, X2, X3, X4, X5..................................... 3-25
Connector assignments X6, X7 ................ 3-26
Constant ................................................... 7-18
Constant feed rate.................................... 4-80
Constants Field (KF)................................ 7-127
Contour behaviour .................................... 4-80
Contour interpolation ................................ 11-2
Contour lines cycle ...................... 4-180; 4-182

D Doubleword ..................................... 7-16; 7-18
D ............................................................... 8-18 Dwell-time .............................................. 4-114
D= (ASSIGN DOUBLE) ........................... 7-45
Damping factor ......................................... 4-76 E
DATA CARRIER @\: IS FULL .................... 8-50 Earthing plan ............................................. 3-20
DATA CARRIER EMPTY ........................... 8-49 Edge evaluation ........................................ 7-27
DATA CARRIER MISSING........................ 8-49 Edge separation of the measuring
DATA CARRIER system signals .......................................... 4-10
WRITE-PROTECTED........................ 8-48; 8-49 Editor program ............................................ 7-7
Data interface ......................... 3-40; 7-162; 8-3 Electrical interference ................................. 3-9
Data lines.................................................. 8-11 Electrical noise immunity............................ 3-9
DATA MEDIUM EMPTY ........................... 8-48 EMERGENCY STOP routine ................... 4-262
DATA MEDIUM MISSING........................ 8-48 EMERGENCY STOP-routine ................... 4-120
Data transfer............................................... 8-4 End of Module ........................................ 7-110
Data transfer NC/PLC ............................... 7-19 End of program ....................................... 4-154
Data transfer rate ....................................... 8-8 ENDC (ENDCASE) ................................. 7-130
Datum................................. 4-17; 4-126; 4-221 Entry error................................................... 5-4
Datum....................................................... 2-15 Entry format................................................ 5-3
Datum point.............................................. 4-53 EPROM..................................................... 2-11
Datum setting........................................... 4-52 EPROM creation ....................................... 7-10
Datum shift............................................. 4-132 EPROM sockets ....................................... 2-11
Datum table ........................ 4-151; 7-157; 8-18 EPROM-creation ....................................... 7-28
Datum-table ............................................ 4-150 EQUAL TO (==) ........................... 7-73; 7-119
DC1............................................................. 8-9 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ]) ............................... 7-89
DC3............................................................. 8-9 ERR........................................................... 8-49
Decimal sign ........................................... 4-154 Error compensation .................................... 2-5
DEF-active .................................................. 9-3 Error in PLC program 1R.................. 2-17; 2-19
Deflection depth ..................................... 4-190 Error in PLC-program .............................. 4-174
Dialog file.................................................... 9-7 ERROR IN PLC-PROGRAM .................... 4-209
Dialog language .......................................... 2-7 Error in PLC-program 1Q .......................... 4-95
Dialog language ........................................ 2-15 Error message ................ 4-9; 4-18; 4-77; 4-84;
Dialog numbers .......................................... 9-3 ............... 4-85; 4-86; 4-87; 4-102; 4-120; 4-174
Dialogue language .................................. 4-153 Error messages......................................... 8-48
Dialogues for user-parameters ............... 4-152 ERROR NUMBER ..................................... 8-29
Digital speed control................................. 11-2 ERROR= ..................................................... 9-5
Digitising..................................................... 2-8 Error-message .......................................... 7-30
Digitising................................................... 2-14 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO)............................... 7-61
Digitising with the TM 110 ..................... 4-189 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ])........................ 7-81
Digitizing ..................................................... 2-6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON) ................... 7-63
Digitizing with TS 120............................. 4-180 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ]) ............ 7-81
Direction of traverse ................................. 4-9 EXE ............................................................. 4-7
Direction of spindle rotation ..................... 4-95 Executable program.................................... 7-7
Direction of traverse ............... 4-8; 4-62; 4-263
Direction of traverse ................................... 4-8 Export version...................................... 2-7; 3-4
Display .................................................... 4-126 Export versions ........................................... 2-6
Display step ............................................ 4-134 EXT. OUTPUT/INPUT NOT READY .......... 8-48
Distance-coded reference marks .... 3-24; 4-52 EXT1/EXT2/EXT3....................................... 8-19
DIVISION (/) ............................................ 7-69 EXTERN Instruction ................................ 7-133
DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) ..................................... 7-85 External EMERGENCY STOP ................. 4-120
DLG-CALL................................................... 9-3
DLG-DEF..................................................... 9-3
DNC .......................................................... 8-46
DNC operation .......................................... 8-19
Double swivel head .................................. 4-43

F H
Fast PLC input ................................. 2-15; 4-83 H ............................................................... 8-18
FE1 ........................................................... 8-28 Handshaking ............................................... 8-9
FE2 ........................................................... 8-28 Handwheel..................................... 2-16; 4-196
Feed rate .................................................. 4-62 Handwheel adapter HRA 110 3-49; 3-91; 4-202
Feed rate display .................................... 4-138 Handwheel HR 332................................... 3-45
Feed rate enable....................................... 4-89 Handwheel input....................................... 3-43
Feed rate in the normal direction............ 4-181 Handwheel overlapping ............................ 2-20
Feed rate reduction ................................ 4-191 Handwheel symbol ................................... 2-15
Feedforward control ...................... 4-74; 4-268 Handwheel, integral................................ 4-198
Feed-override.......................................... 4-136 Handwheel, portable............................... 4-198
Feed-override when tapping................... 4-114 Handwheel.............................................. 4-196
Feed-release ........................................... 4-174 Handwheels.............................................. 3-84
FILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME ....... 8-50 Hardware components ............................... 3-4
File output................................................. 7-10 Hardware concept ...................................... 2-2
File type, disable..................................... 4-150 Hardware handshaking ............................... 8-9
File type, protect..................................... 4-150 Heat generation .......................................... 3-9
File types .................................................. 2-15 Help files............................... 2-20; 4-156; 8-18
File-management........................................ 7-8
Files ........................................................ 4-150 Hirth coupling.......................................... 4-212
Filter capacitor .......................................... 3-16 HLP ......................................................... 4-150
HR 130.................................. 3-44; 3-84; 4-196
Fine interpolation ...................................... 11-2 HR 150....................... 3-49; 3-87; 4-196; 4-202
Fixed cycles ................................................ 2-3 HR 330.................................. 3-43; 3-88; 4-196
Flat cable .................................................. 3-68 HR 332................................ 3-89; 4-196; 4-198
FN 15PRINT.............................................. 2-14 HR 410...................................3-46; 3-90; 4-201
FN19 .............................................. 4-221; 7-19 HRA 110 ...................................... 4-196; 4-202
Free contour programming FK.................... 2-3 Humidity ................................................... 3-10
Free rotation ........................................... 4-136
G
Gantry axes .............................................. 4-49
G-code .................................................... 4-101
Gear change ........................................... 4-100
Gear range ....................................... 2-15; 4-96
Gear-code change signal ........................ 4-101
GLOBAL Instruction ............................... 7-132
Global Q parameters .................................. 9-4
Graduation period ..................................... 3-24
Graduation period...................................... 4-6
Graphics display ..................................... 4-133
Graphics window.................................... 4-132
GREATER THAN (>) .................... 7-75; 7-120
GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ]) ........................ 7-89
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=).. 7-120
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)..... 7-77
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ])7-90
Gross positioning error ............................. 4-84
Gross positioning error A.......................... 4-85
Gross positioning error B.......................... 4-86
Gross positioning error C.......................... 4-86
Gross positioning error D.......................... 4-87
Gross positioning error E .......................... 4-77

I L
I0 to I31 .................................................... 7-27 L....................................................... 7-40; 8-18
I128 to I152 .............................................. 7-27 L (LOAD) ...................................... 7-36; 7-115
I64 to I126 ................................................ 7-27 Lag .......................................................... 4-264
Identifier ................................................. 7-123 Language of the country............................. 2-7
ID-number................................................... 3-6 Laser ....................................................... 4-275
IF ... ELSE ... ENDI Structure.................. 7-128 LB (LOAD BYTE)..................................... 7-41
Immediate STRING................................. 7-119 LBL (LABEL) ......................................... 7-110
Increment positioning............................. 4-209 LD (LOAD DOUBLE WORD) .................. 7-41
INDEX-Register....................................... 7-112 LE 407....................................................... 3-74
Infrared transmission..................... 3-36; 4-176 LE 415................................................ 3-4; 3-75
Inhibited key ........................................... 4-165 LE 415 E ..................................................... 3-4
Input ......................................................... 7-18 Lead-screw pitch error.............................. 4-27
Input frequency ........................................ 3-25 LESS THAN (<) ..................................... 7-119
INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED............... 8-50 LESS THAN (<) ......................................... 7-74
Integral component .................................. 4-75 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ]) ................................ 7-89
Integral factor ................................ 4-78; 4-272 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=)............ 7-76
Interface ..................................................... 8-3 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=).......... 7-120
INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED .......... 8-48 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ])..... 7-89
Interface electronics ...................... 3-36; 4-176 LIMIT SWITCH.......................................... 4-18
Interference sources .................................. 3-9 Linear axis-error compensation ................ 4-26
INTERNAL STOP .................................... 4-148 Linear measurement................................... 4-6
Interpolation................................................ 2-3 Linear measuring systems ....................... 3-24
Interpolation and List of instructions ...................................... 7-6
digitising electronics (EXE) ....................... 3-26 LN (LOAD NOT) ...................................... 7-38
Interpolation factor ..................................... 4-7 LOAD (L) ...................................... 7-36; 7-115
Interpolation factor for handwheel ......... 4-196 LOAD BYTE (LB)..................................... 7-41
IP54 .......................................................... 3-13 Load command ......................................... 7-36
ISO 841..................................................... 4-12 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD) ..................... 7-41
LOAD NOT (LN) ...................................... 7-38
J LOAD TWO'S-COMPLEMENT (L) ........ 7-40
Jog voltage ............................................. 4-101 LOAD WORD (LW) ................................. 7-41
JPF (JUMP IF FALSE)........................... 7-105 Local Q parameters .................................... 9-4
JPT (JUMP IF TRUE) ............................ 7-105 LOGIC DIAGRAM ..................................... 7-12
Jump (JP).............................................. 7-105 Logic Gates............................................... 7-53
Jump Commands ................................... 7-105 Logic unit .................................................... 3-4
Jump Label (LBL).................................. 7-110 Logical Comparisons............................... 7-119
Logic-diagram ........................................... 7-11
Look ahead ............................... 2-3; 2-20; 4-82
K LSB ............................................................. 8-6
Key-code................................................. 4-164 LSV/2 ...................................................... 7-169
Key-simulation ........................................ 4-164 LSV/2 Protocol .......................................... 8-46
Kink point.................................................. 4-72 LSV/2 TOOL BOX ..................................... 8-46
Knob ................................................ 3-44; 3-86 LSV2 protocol ........................................... 2-20
Kv factor .......................................... 4-70; 4-76 Lubrication pulse....................................... 4-19
Kv factor ................................................... 4-68 LW (LOAD WORD) ................................. 7-41
kv-factor.................................................. 4-108

M Memory for part programs ......................... 2-3
M .............................................................. 8-18 Memory function for axis-direction keys 4-174
M functions ............................................ 4-139 Memory test ........................................... 4-154
M03 ...................................... 4-96; 4-97; 4-139 M-functions............................................. 4-158
M04 ...................................... 4-96; 4-97; 4-139 Mid-program startup ................................. 2-16
M05 ...................................... 4-96; 4-97; 4-139 Miscellaneous functions ......................... 4-158
M06 ........................................................ 4-161 MOD (MODULO).................................... 7-70
M08 ........................................................ 4-139 MOD [ ] (MODULO [ ])............................ 7-86
M09 ........................................................ 4-139 Modal cycle call ...................................... 4-162
M103 ...................................................... 4-161 Module 7031............................................. 2-15
M105 ...................................................... 4-162 Module 9000/9001.................................. 7-136
M106 ...................................................... 4-162 Module 9020/9021/9022......................... 7-138
M109 ........................................................ 4-81 Module 9031.................................... 5-5; 7-139
M110 ........................................................ 4-81 Module 9032.................................. 2-15; 7-140
M111 ........................................................ 4-81 Module 9033.................................. 2-19; 7-140
M112 ........................................................ 4-82 Module 9035......................... 2-16; 2-18; 7-141
M114 ........................................................ 4-48 Module 9041............................................. 2-15
M124 ........................................................ 4-82 Module 9050........................................... 7-147
M19 ........................................................ 4-106 Module 9051........................................... 7-148
M89 ........................................................ 4-161 Module 9052........................................... 7-149
M90 ............................................... 4-81; 4-181 Module 9053........................................... 7-150
M91 .......................................................... 4-53 Module 9054........................................... 7-150
M92 .......................................................... 4-53 Module 9070................................ 4-141; 7-151
Machine axes ............................................. 4-6 Module 9071................................ 4-141; 7-152
Machine datum. 2-15; 4-16; 4-63; 4-126; 4-127 Module 9080..................... 4-141; 7-114; 7-152
Machine parameter, overwrite ............... 7-139 Module 9081................................ 4-141; 7-153
Machine parameter, read ....................... 7-140 Module 9082..................... 4-141; 7-114; 7-153
Machine parameters ....... 2-18; 2-19; 5-2; 8-18 Module 9083....................... 2-15; 4-141; 7-155
Machine reference point ........................ 4-127 Module 9090........................................... 7-157
Machine-control panel ............................ 4-174 Module 9092/9093/9094......................... 7-158
Magnetic fields ......................................... 3-13 Module 9093............................................. 2-15
Main menu ................................................. 7-7 Module 9094............................................. 2-15
Manual feed.............................................. 4-70 Module 9095........................................... 7-161
MANUAL OPERATION................ 4-148; 4-149 Module 9100........................................... 7-163
Marker ...................................................... 7-18 Module 9101........................................... 7-163
Markers ...................................................... 6-1 Module 9102........................................... 7-164
Max. current consumption ....................... 3-16 Module 9103........................................... 7-165
Maximum measuring range ................... 4-177 Module 9104........................................... 7-165
Maximum spindle speed .......................... 4-97 Module 9105........................................... 7-167
Maximum traverse ..................................... 2-5 Module 9106........................................... 7-167
Maximum traversing speed........................ 2-5 Module 9107........................................... 7-168
ME ............................................................ 8-28 Module 9111........................................... 7-170
ME\: END OF TAPE .................................. 8-49 Module 9120........................................... 7-171
ME: TAPE END......................................... 8-48 Module 9121........................................... 7-172
Meander cycle ............................. 4-180; 4-182 Module 9122........................................... 7-172
Measuring error, permissible.................. 4-194 Module 9123........................................... 7-173
Measuring step......................................... 3-24 Module 9130........................................... 4-275
Measuring system <axis> defect .............. 4-9 Module technique..................................... 7-17
Measuring system connections ............... 3-28 Monitoring functions............. 2-15; 4-83; 4-273
Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal Monitoring the analogue voltage .............. 4-86
signals 7 to 16 APP ................................ 3-25 Mounting dimensions ............................... 3-74
Measuring system monitoring ................... 4-9 Mounting position..................................... 3-10
Measuring systems ........................... 3-24; 4-6 Movement-monitoring .............................. 4-86
MEGA-PROMMER ................................... 7-28 MSB............................................................ 8-6

MULTIPLICATION (x) ............................. 7-68 O
MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ]) ...................... 7-85 O (OR...................................................... 7-57
Multiplication factor .................................. 4-72 O[ ] (OR [ ]).............................................. 7-80
OEM-cycles .............................. 4-144; 9-1; 9-2
N Offset adjustment...... 2-19; 4-77; 4-104; 4-273
N ............................................................... 8-18 Offset correction....................................... 4-75
NC software ............................................... 2-7 ON (OR NOT).......................................... 7-59
NC-start .................................................. 4-174 ON[ ] (OR NOT [ ])................................... 7-80
Negative backlash .................................... 4-23 Open control loop ..................................... 4-92
Nesting depth ............................................. 9-2 Operand .................................................... 7-16
Nominal value output................................ 3-32 Operand directory ..................................... 7-18
Nominal-spindle speed ............................. 4-95 Operand portion........................................ 7-16
Non-linear axis error compensation 4-27; 7-161 Operating mode...................................... 4-164
Non-linear override curve........................ 4-138 Operation ................................................ 4-126
Normal direction ..................................... 4-181 OR (O)..................................................... 7-57
NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ])....................... 7-90 OR NOT (ON).......................................... 7-59
Number Conversion................................ 7-147 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ])................................... 7-80
Oscillation amplitude .............................. 4-181
Oscillations in normal direction............... 4-188
Oscilloscope ........................................... 11-16
Oscilloscope function ............................... 2-18
Output....................................................... 7-18
OUTPUT BINARY CODE 0001 ................. 7-10
Output format, digitized data .................. 4-181
Overflow ................................................. 7-123
Overlap factor ......................................... 4-145
Override ................................ 2-15; 2-16; 4-138
Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR) ........ 7-116
OVWR (OVERWRITE) ........................... 7-116

P Polarity of the S-analogue voltage ............ 4-95
P ............................................................... 8-18 Position approach speed.................. 4-74; 4-76
PA 110 ............................. 3-5; 3-18; 3-80; 4-32 Position control loop ................................. 4-65
Pallet file ................................................. 7-157 Position display ....................................... 4-134
Pallet table ................................................ 8-18 Position display with rotary axes ............ 4-135
Pallet-table .............................................. 4-150 Position monitoring................................... 4-84
Parallel ........................................................ 8-4 Position values.......................................... 2-16
Parallel operation ........................................ 2-4 Positional deviation ................................... 4-71
Parentheses with arithmetic commands.. 7-85 Positioning error............................... 4-84; 4-85
Parentheses with comparison commands7-89 Positioning module .......................... 8-20; 10-2
Parentheses with logical gating................ 7-80 Positioning window .................................. 4-87
Parity bit...................................................... 8-6 Positioning window for spindle............... 4-108
Parity-check ................................................ 8-7 Positioning window for tool axis............. 4-118
PASS OVER REFERENCE ........................ 4-53 Positive backlash ...................................... 4-23
Path dependent lubrication....................... 4-19 Power consumption.................................. 3-16
Picture distortion ...................................... 3-13 POWER INTERRUPTED ......................... 4-155
Picture disturbance................................... 3-13 Power supply ............................................ 3-16
PL (PULL).............................................. 7-101 Powers of 2 .............................................. 12-5
PL 400 ............................. 3-4; 3-17; 3-57; 3-78 PP.INT..................................................... 4-180
PL 410 ............................................. 3-59; 3-79 PP.INT..................................................... 4-183
Pre-cut out time ...................................... 4-116
PLC axes...................... 2-18; 2-20; 4-38; 7-171 Probe system............................................ 2-19
PLC data interface, configuration ............. 8-47 Probing direction..................................... 4-192
PLC dialogues......................................... 4-152 Probing feed rate ........................ 4-176; 4-177;
PLC EDIT ...................................... 5-5; 7-6; 7-7 .......................................... 4-180; 4-191; 4-192
PLC error message................................. 4-142 Processing time .......................................... 7-7
PLC error messages ................................. 2-15 Program creation ...................................... 7-16
PLC inputs ................................................ 3-54 PROGRAM INCOMPLETE........................ 8-48
PLC inputs - technical data ....................... 3-52 PROGRAM INCOMPLETE............... 8-49; 8-50
PLC inputs/outputs ................................... 3-51 PROGRAM NOT PRESENT ...................... 8-50
PLC output................................................ 3-55 Program structure..................................... 7-16
PLC outputs - technical data..................... 3-52 Program Structures................................. 7-127
PLC positioning....................... 2-15; 4-35; 4-53 Programmed spindle speed...................... 4-95
PLC program............................................. 8-18 Programming station .............................. 4-153
PLC RUN .................................................... 5-5 PROTECTED FILE..................................... 8-50
PLC software............................................ 2-11 Protection, IP degree of............................ 3-13
PLC window ..................... 4-141; 7-114; 7-152 PS (PUSH)............................................. 7-100
PLC, Data transfer by ............................... 8-47 PSL (PUSH LOGICACCU) ..................... 7-101
PLC-cycle time............................................ 7-6 PSW (PUSH WORDACCU)................... 7-102
PLC-DIALOG........................................... 7-115 Pt 100 .............................................. 3-53; 4-32
PLC-Dialogue .......................................... 7-119 Pt 100 ....................................................... 3-18
PLC-EPROM ............................................. 2-14
PLC-ERROR............................................ 7-115
PLC-functions ............................................. 7-6
PLC-inputs ................................................ 7-27
PLC-operation ............................................. 7-6
PLC-positioning module............................ 10-2
PLC-run....................................................... 7-6
PLL (PULL LOGICACCU) ...................... 7-102
PLW (PULL WORDACCU).................... 7-102
Pocket milling ......................................... 4-145
Pocket table.............................................. 8-18
Pockets with free-programmed contours 4-146
Polarity of the nominal value potential ....... 4-8

Q R
Q parameters.............................................. 9-4 R (RESET) ............................................... 7-49
Q-Parameters .............. 2-4; 4-140; 4-154; 7-21 Radial acceleration .................................... 4-80
Ramp slope............................................. 4-114
Ramp slope for spindle ............................. 4-97
Range (Module 9010/9011/9012 ............ 7-137
Range cycle ............................................ 4-182
Rapid traverse...................... 2-15; 4-70; 4-174;
.......................................... 4-177; 4-178; 4-191
Read in Word .......................................... 7-137
Re-approaching the contour........... 2-14; 4-148
Reduced feed-rate of tool axis................ 4-161
Reference end-position............................. 4-53
Reference mark ............................... 4-36; 4-62
Reference marks ............................... 4-7; 4-52
Reference marks, traversing .................... 2-15
Reference point ........................................ 4-16
Reference pulse inhibit ............................. 3-35
Releases ................................................... 2-14
REMAINDER (MOD)............................... 7-70
REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ])........................ 7-86
REPEAT ... UNTIL Structure ................... 7-128
REPLY..................................................... 7-123
RESET (R) ............................................... 7-49
RESET NOT (RN) .................................... 7-51
Resolution of input and display........ 2-3; 4-134
Resolution, input and display step ............ 2-14
RESTORE......................................... 2-13; 2-18
RESTORE AT N....................................... 4-148
RESTORE POSITION ................... 4-148; 4-149
Reversal errors.......................................... 4-24
Reversal spikes, compensation for......... 11-11
Right-hand rule.......................................... 4-12
Rigid tapping ......................... 2-14; 2-17; 4-117
RM = Reference mark ............................ 4-127
RN (RESET NOT) .................................... 7-51
ROT........................................................... 2-15
Rotary axis ................................................ 4-12
Rotary encoder and ballscrew .................... 4-6
Rotation, non-controlled............................ 2-15
Rounding-arc insertion .............................. 4-82
RPLY (REPLY) ....................................... 7-124
RS-232-C/V.24.................................. 3-40; 8-10
RS-422/V.11 ............................ 3-40; 3-41; 8-15

S Spindle speed for gear ranges .................. 4-97
S ............................................................... 8-18 Spindle speed range ............................... 4-104
S (SET) .................................................... 7-48 Spindle-orientation .................................. 4-106
S-analogue voltage for gear range............ 4-97 Spindle-speed output................................ 4-94
Scale datum............................................ 4-126 Stack Operations .................................... 7-100
Scaling factor .......................................... 4-147 Stack, Load (PSL).................................... 7-101
Scaling factor axis-specific ....................... 2-18 Stack, Load (PSW) .................................. 7-102
Scanning cycles ...................................... 4-182 Stack, Load Data (PS) ............................. 7-100
S-code..................................................... 4-104 Stack, Pull (PLL) ...................................... 7-102
S-code - minimum spindle speed ........... 4-104 Stack, Pull (PLW) .................................... 7-102
S-code acknowledgement, ..................... 4-104 Stack, Pull Data (PL) ............................... 7-101
S-code change signal.............................. 4-104 Standard data transmission protocol ........ 8-10
S-code table............................................ 4-105 Standard transmission protocol ................ 8-28
SE 510 ...................................................... 3-38 Standstill monitoring ................................. 4-87
SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED ....... 8-50 Start bit ....................................................... 8-6
Secondary linear axis ................................ 4-13 Status Interrogation (RPLY) .................... 7-124
Serial........................................................... 8-4 Status, read............................................. 7-141
Servo lag.......................................... 4-68; 4-75 Status, write ........................................... 7-144
Servo lag, control with.............................. 4-66 Status-window........................................ 4-134
Servo positioning ...................................... 4-65 Step switch............................................... 3-49
Servo resolution........................................ 4-71 Stiction...................................................... 4-33
SET (S) .................................................... 7-48 Stiction compensation ..................... 2-18; 4-33
SET NOT (SN) ......................................... 7-50 Stop bits...................................................... 8-6
Shift Commands....................................... 7-93 Storing a STRING (=) ............................ 7-116
SHIFT LEFT (<<)..................................... 7-93 STRING accumulator .............................. 7-114
SHIFT RIGHT (>>) .................................. 7-94 STRING Execution .................................. 7-114
Shifting the datum .................................. 4-221 STRING memory..................................... 7-114
Shifting the reference points .................... 4-63 String Processing.................................... 7-151
Signal designations................................... 8-12 Strobe ....................................................... 7-23
Signal period ............................................... 4-6 Strobe signal for M-function...................... 4-159
SN (SET NOT) ......................................... 7-50 Stylus ...................................................... 4-195
Sockets..................................................... 2-11 Stylus deflected ...................................... 4-178
Soft key .................................................. 4-164 Stylus deflection ..................................... 4-191
Soft keys................................................... 3-68 Stylus deflection ..................................... 4-181
Software ..................................................... 2-7 SUBM (SUBMIT)................................... 7-123
Software handshaking ................................ 8-9 Submit Programs .................................... 7-123
Software limit switch................................ 4-53 Submit Queue......................................... 7-123
Software limit switches............................ 4-16 Subprograms .......................................... 7-123
Software limit-switch.............................. 4-264 SUBTRACT [ ] ([ ]).................................. 7-85
Software option .......................................... 2-8 SUBTRACTION () .................................. 7-67
Software protection module. 2-8; 4-180; 4-189 Surface cutting speed............................. 4-195
Software replacement .............................. 2-13 Swivel axes............................................... 4-41
Software types ........................................... 2-7 Synchronized axes .................................... 4-49
S-override ................................................. 4-99
Special functions .................................... 4-275
Special tool ............................................... 2-15
Speed controller, optimizing ................... 11-12
Spindel in position .................................. 4-109
Spindle...................................................... 4-94
Spindle orientation........................... 3-27; 4-94
Spindle rotation left ................................ 4-101
Spindle rotation right .............................. 4-101
Spindle run-in characteristic ................... 4-118
Spindle run-on time ................................ 4-114

T TS 511............................................ 3-36; 4-176
T....................................................... 7-24; 8-18 TT 110................................... 3-36; 3-92; 4-192
TABLE....................................................... 7-12 TT 110 ..................................................... 4-176
Table size................................................ 4-151 Two's complement................................... 7-40
Tapping ................................................... 4-112
Tapping with floating tap holder .. 4-113; 4-116 U
Tapping without floating tap holder .......... 2-17 UNEQUAL (<>)............................ 7-78; 7-121
TE 400 .................................... 3-4; 3-76; 4-164 User parameters ......................................... 5-2
Technical data............................................. 2-3 User-parameters ..................................... 4-152
Temperature ............................................... 2-6 USES Instruction..................................... 7-131
Test functions........................................... 7-11
Test graphics ............................................ 4-36 V
Text editor ................................................ 7-10
V.11........................................................... 8-15
Text file..................................................... 8-18
V.24........................................................... 8-10
Text-file................................................... 4-150
Vibration.................................................... 3-10
Thermal expansion ................................... 4-32
Visual display unit ..................... 3-4; 3-13; 3-70
Thermal expansion compensation............ 2-15
Voltage step.............................................. 4-71
Thermistors ................. 3-53; 3-60; 3-63; 4-206
Threshold sensitivity............................... 4-196
Timer ............................................... 7-18; 7-24 W
TM 110 ............................................ 3-36; 3-39 W= (ASSIGN WORD) ............................. 7-45
TM 110.................................................... 4-176 Water jet ................................................. 4-275
TNC 415 B .................................................. 3-4 Weights ...................................................... 2-6
TNC 425.................................................... 11-2 WHILE ... ENDW Structure .................... 7-129
TNC keyboard .................................... 3-4; 3-68 Word ................................................ 7-16; 7-18
TNC REMOTE........................................... 8-46 Words ....................................................... 6-11
TNC-keyboard ......................................... 4-164 Working plane................ 2-18; 2-20; 2-21; 4-41
Tool axis.................................................... 4-14 Workpiece datum ........................ 4-126; 4-127
Tool calibration........................................ 4-192 Write in Word ......................................... 7-138
Tool compensation ..................................... 2-4 WRONG OPERATING MODE ......... 8-48; 8-49
Tool compensations ................................. 4-36 WRONG PROGRAM DATA ............. 8-48; 8-49
Tool length..................................... 2-15; 4-134 Wrong rpm.............................................. 4-102
Tool table ....................................... 7-158; 8-18
Tool-Table ............................................... 4-150
Touch probe............................................ 4-176
Touch probe axes ................................... 4-191
Touch probe connection ........................... 3-37
Touch probe not ready............................ 4-178
Touch probe system input........................ 3-36
TRACE ...................................................... 7-11
TRACE IN-CODE....................................... 7-12
Transfer unit ............................................. 3-61
TRANSFERRED DATA
INCORRECT ........................... 8-48; 8-49; 8-50
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X ..... 8-48
Transient response ........................ 4-74; 4-270
Transient response of spindle ................ 4-118
Transmit/receive unit ................................ 3-38
TRAVEL .................................................. 4-183
Traverse ranges ........................................ 4-16
Trigger-condition....................................... 7-11
TS 120 ............................................. 3-36; 3-37
TS 120 .................................................... 4-176
TS 511 ...................................................... 3-38

Rechner s10 268 553 01 Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rechner s10 268 553 01 Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rechner s10 268 553 01 Heidenhain Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual

Valid for the NC software types

DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425

TNC 407 280 58x 06

01/98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 Update Information No. 20 1-1

1 Hardware concept 2-2

2 Technical data TNC 407/TNC 415 B/TNC 425 2-3

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 2-1

Noml. value outputs

Visual display unit

2-2 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 1 Hardware concept 01.98

TNC 407 TNC 415B/TNC 425

Program input In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language and to DIN/ISO

Memory for 6000 blocks approx. 12 000 blocks approx.

Positions Nominal positions in Cartesian or polar coordinates,

Input and display to 1 m to 0.1 m

Block processing time2) 25 ms 4 ms

Look Ahead Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions (e.g. 3D surfaces)

Free contour In HEIDENHAIN Plain Language with graphic support

Tilting the Yes1)

Subprogram Program section repeats, subprograms, program calls

1) These functions must be implemented by the OEM.

Program test By graphic simulation of the part program

Tool compensation Tool length, tool radius in machining plane

Data interfaces V.24/RS 232 C and V.11/RS 422

Keyboard TE 400 with integral QWERTY keyboard

Screen BC 110 14" colour monitor 640 x 490 pixels

Logic unit LE 407 LE 415 B / LE 425

Axis control Feed pre-control or operation with servo lag

Position control 0.1 m

1) These functions must be implemented by the OEM.

PLC inputs 56 + 1 "Control is ready" input; (Option: + 64*) per PL)

Option: analog inputs

PLC program memory Approx. 8 000 logic commands

Error compensation linear axis error compensation

Reference mark Following a power interruption, automatic reference value input if

Max. traverse 100 000 mm

Max. traversing 300 m/min

Feed-rate and 0 to 150% with two potentiometers at the control panel

Export versions TNC 415 F / TNC 425 E:

3.1.1 NC-Software number

3.1.2 Software types

Linear interpolation Entry/Display

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 2-7

TNC 415B / TNC 425: 280 54

These software types are therefore supplied as standard.

3.1.3 Software option

Digitizing with TS 120:

Id.-Nr. of the installation kit Id.-Nr. of software module NC software

Digitizing with TM 110:

Id.-Nr. of the installation kit Id.-Nr. of software module NC software

2-8 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 01.98

TNC 415A / TNC 415E:

TNC 415B / TNC 415F: TNC 425 / TNC 425E:

Id.-Nr.: 267 223 xy Id.-Nr.: 267 214 xy

x= Identifier for hardware change

01.98 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 2-9

2-10 TNC 407/TNC 415/TNC 425 3 Software 01.98